r- TTT T IN Frederick Slate Professor of Physics I o *>* OTTO'S F E E N C H CONVERSATION GRAMMAR. REVISED Bi , . , , -, . . . FERDINAND BOO HER, INSTRUCTOR IN FRENCH AT HARVARD COLLEGE. THIRTY-EIGHTH EDITION. NEW YORK HQLT & WILLIAMS P. W. CILIIISTERH BOSTON: S. R. URBINO ; : . : Y; V; ! Ong to 4ct of Congress, in the year 1864, by S. R. URBIXO, la the Clerk's Office of the District Court of the District of Massachusetts. \ -v\ PREFACE The first edition of Dr. EMILE OTTO'S " FRENCH CONVERSATION GRAMMAR" appeared at Heidelberg in 1859. A second edition was issued in 1863, upon which this first American edition is based. The pres- ent editor has not hesitated in making such changes as he deemed proper in the body of the work, abandon- ing, among other thingfe, the names of the Latin cases, genitive, dative, etc., which, although they may be of help .to tha Germain student, can only confuse the Amer- ican learner. The names of the tenses have also been changed, and, it is hoped, simplified. A few lessons have been added to Part L, and the chapter upon the Past Participle has been re-written. -The preliminary lesson upon Pronunciation is also entirely new, and an English and French Vocabulary of the words that occur in the Themes has been added. BOSTON, August, 1864. CONTENTS. PRONUNCIATION. PAGE. The Alphabet * . . . 13 Division of Syllables 14 Syllabic Accent, or Stress 14 Accents Orthographic Marks 15 Simple Vowels 15 Compound Vowels 18 Diphthongs 18 Nasal Vowls 19 Consonants. General Rules 21 Consonants. Special Rules 22 Linking of Final Consonants 20 Observations on E mute 20 i PA.RT I. LBSSOIC. . PAGE. I. The Article iiS II. Formation of the Plural 30 III. Case A DE 33 IV. Prepositions 36 V. The Partitive Article 39 VI. Further use of de 42 VII. Proper Nouns 44 VIII. Conjugation of avoir ', to have affirmatively 48 IX. Idiomatic use of avoir 51 X. Conjugation of e.tre, to be affirmatively 54 XI. Negations. The Negative and Interrogative forms of the Aux- iliaries * 57 IX X CONTENTS. LIB sow. PA as. XII. Demonstrative and Interrogative Adjectives 62 XIII. Possessive Adjectives 64 XIV. Cardinal Numbers 67 XV. Ordinal Numbers . 71 XVI. Indefinite Adjectives 75 XVII. Adjectives. Formation of the feminine and of the plural .... 78 XVIII. The place of Adjectives 82 XIX. Degrees of Comparison 8t> XX. Regular Verbs. First Conjugation. Donner 88 Reading Lesson: Le chameau et le chat 95 XXI. Remarks on the Orthography of some Verbs of the First Conjuga- tion 96 XXII. Second Conjugation : Finir 100 Reading Lesson : Le Moineau et ses Petits 104 XXIII. Third Conjugation : Vendre 105 Reading Lesson: Le roi de Perse 110 XXIV. Disjunctive Personal Pronouns 110 Reading Lesson: Le Rosier 113 XXV. Conjunctive Personal Pronouns 114 Reading Lesson: Suite du Rosier 118 XXVI. Demonstrative Pronouns ....,. 119 XXVII. Interrogative Pronouns 122 XXVIII. Possessive and Relative Pronouns 125 XXIX. Indefinite Pronouns 129 Reading Lesson: Puissance de la Concorde 132 XXX. Passive and Neuter Verbs 133 XXXI. Reflective Verbs 138 Reading Lesson: Le Sansonnet 141 XXXII. Impersonal Verbs 145 Reading Lesson : Productions de divers climats 150 XXXIII. Formation of Adverbs 151 XXXIV. Adverbs of Place and of Time 155 XXXV. Adverbs of Number, of Quality, of Negation, etc 158 XXXVI. Conjunctions Ifi2 Reading Lesson : Lafitte 106 XXXVII. Conjunctive Phrases 107 XXXVIII. Irregular Verbs. First Class 170 XXXIX. Irregular Verbs. First Class continued 174 XL. Irregular Verbs. First Class continued , . . 177 XLI. Irregular Verbs. First Class continued , . 180 CONTENTS. XI LKfaoir. PAGI, XLII. Irregular Verbs. Second Class 183 XLIII. Irregular Verbs. Third Class 188 XLIV. Irregular Verbs. Third Class continued 189 XLV. Irregular Verbs. Third Class continued 194 XLVI. Defective Verbs 197 Alphabetical List of Irregular and Defective Verbs 199 XL VII. How to render do, did, shall, will, etc 201 Supplementary Tenses * 2QJ II. Elision .............................. 205 I. On the Gender of Substantives .................. 206 II. Tlural of Nouns ......................... 214 Heading Lesson : Le Castor ................... 216 III. Use of the Article ........................ 218 Reading Lesson : Demosthene .................. 226 IV. Special use of de and a ...................... 228 V. Peculiarities in the use of names of Countries, Towns, etc. . . . 235 Reading Lesson : Charles XII ................... 233 ^Yl. Possessive Adjectives ...................... 239 ' Reading Lesson : Eudamidas . . ................. 242 VII. Numerals .................... . ........ 244 VIII. Adjectives ............................ 246 Reading Lesson: L'elephant ................... 253 IX. 1. Personal Pronouns ....................... 255 2. Particular use of en and y ................... 258 3. The supplying Pronouns le,la,les ............... 260 Reading Lesson : L'elcphant (continuation) ............ 262 X. Interrogative Pronouns ..................... 203 Reading Lesson : Servilius se defend devant le pcuple ...... 266 XI. Relative Pronouns ........................ 267 Reading Lesson : Suite de " Servilius," .............. 272 XII. Indefinite Pronouns .......... . ............ 27* XIII. Indefinite Pronouns, continued .................. 278 XIV. Adverbs ......................... ..... 284 Reading Lesson: Le Constable de Bourbon et Bayard ..... 288 XII CONTENTS. XV. Syntax of Negations ...................... 289 Reading Lesson: Le Conne"table de Bouibon et Bayard. (Suite) . 295 XVI. Remarks on some Prepositions .................. 296 XVII. Different uses of the Conjunction gue .............. 307 Reading Lesson: Le Connetable de Bourbon et Bayard. (Fin) . 311 XVIII. Use of the Tenses of the Indicative ............... 313 Reading Lesson: Alexandre Selkirk ............... 324 XIX. The Subjunctive Mood ...................... 325 Reading Lesson : Alexandre Selkirk. (Suite) ....... .... 330 XX. The Infinitive ........................... 338 " preceded by de ................... 342 " " preceded by a ................... 347 ' " preceded by other Prepositions .......... 354 Reading Lesson : Alexandre Selkirk. (Suite) ........... 355 XXI. The Present Participle ...................... 357 Reading Lesson : Gesler conduit Tell a Kusnach .......... 360 XXII. The Past Participle ........................ 303 XXIII. The Participle Absolute ..................... 367 Reading Lesson : Gesler conduit Tell a Kusnach ...... ... 369 XXIV. Government of Verbs ...................... 371 XXV. Idiomatical Expressions ..................... 380 Efiglish Vocabulary of the Words that occur in the Themes ......... SS3 FRENCH GRAMMAR. PRONUNCIATION, THE ALPHABET. 1 . The written French alphabet is the same as the English. W and K are found only in words borrowed from other languages. The names of the letters are given below in the French spelling as they are of little or no value to the beginner. In the new names the e in be, ke, d*, gue, etc., is only sounded enough to allow the utterance of the consonant that precedes it, as in globe, cake, made, fatigue : j is sounded as s in pleasure. The vowels have their normal French sounds. W when spoken of ii vailed double V. '"V" OLD NAMES. NEW NAMES. OLD NAMES. NEW NAMES. A a a a N n enne ne B b be be C c ce- ke (se) P P P 6 pe D d de* de Q q ku ke E e e R r erre re F f effe fe S 8 esse se (ze) g ge gue(je) T t te te n h ache he U U u u I i i i V V v4 ve J J ji J e X X ics kse K k ka ke Y y i grec i L AT 1 elle le Z z zede z 13 PRONUNCIATION. DIVISION OF SYLLABLES. 2. "Words are generally divided as in English; but whenever it is possible a syllable must begin with a consonant. Henc^, verbal and other terminations beginning with a vowel must be join 3d to the consonant that precedes; thus ai-mer, but ai-me-rai ; chan-ter. chan-te-rai, clian-ie-rons. As to x equal to g$, cs, its compound nature prevents its separation from the vowel thac precedes : hence the following division ex-em-ple. In writing, silsnt n apparently begins a syllable, as in in-h-rent; but in the spoken syllables, silent h has no value whatever ; and a consonant be- tween a vowel and a silent h is separated from that vowel in the spoken though not in the written language; hence the following divisions. Written. Pronounced. in-hu-main i-nhu-main in-ha-bi-le i-nha-bile in-he'-rcnt i-nhe-rent bon-heur bo-nheur If these words were pronounced according to the written divisions, they would begin with a nasal sound ; but they do not. (See Nasal vowels, 37.) SYLLABIC ACCENT, OR STRESS. As compared with English, French is generally said to have no syllabic accent. Such a stress of voice as is heard in the words accent and accent? does not occur in French ; but the following rule explains the uniformity of the English accent on the last syllable in words newly introduced from tha French, such as barouche, surtout t machine, fatigue, etc. 3. In French each syllable of a word must be pronounced smoothly, the voice resting upon the last, unless it ends in e mute, in which case the syllable before the last is slightly accented. Ex. constitution , indubitable. ACCENTS SIMPLE VOWELS. 15 ACCENTS, OKTHOGBAPHIC MASKS. 4. Three orthographic marks, the acute ('), the grave ( x ), and the circumflex ( A ), have received the name of accents. These marks never affect a syllable ; they can only modify the sound of a vowel over which they are placed. Sometimes they have a mere ortho- graphic value. They must never be neglected in writing. 5. The ACUTE (') is used only over the vowel e (e), which then has the sound of a in date. Ex. etc, donne. 6. The GRAVE ( x ) or open accent is used principally over e (e), which then has the sound of e in ebb or of e in there. Ex. five, pere. Over a and u it is only used to distinguish words otherwise similarly spelled, and does not affect the pronunciation. Ex. la, the ; la, there ; a, has ; a, to ; ou, or; ou, where. 7. The CIRCUMFLEX ( A ) is used over all the vowels, which are then long. Ex. age, cote, sur. The circumflex denotes that a contraction has taken place ; thus age and sur were formerly spelled aage and seur. Often an s has been dropped in modern French which still remains in the English word taken from the old French. Ex. ile, isle; hate, haste; fowt, forest ; tempete, tempest. 8. The CEDILLA is placed under the c (9) when it has the sound of s before a, o, u. Ex. facade, gar$on, recu. 9. The DIJERESIS ( Trema) is used over e, i, and u; in which case these letters do not coalesce with the preceding vowel, but be- gin a new syllable. Ex. hair, Noel, aigue, are pronounced harir, No-el, ai-gu-e, (the last e is silent.) SIMPLE VOWELS. A. 10. A long has the sound of a in far. Ex. ame, soul ; p&te, paste; cas, case. 11. Short a differs from long a principally in quantity. It has 1G PRONUNCIATION. the sound of a in the Interjection ha ! pronounced quick. Ex. la, the ; patte, paw. A is silent in Saone, taon, aout, aoristc, Cura9ao. E. 12. E unaccented, when it ends a syllable in the middle of a word, and in the monosyllables ce, de,je, le, me, ne t que, se and te, has the indistinct sound of e in Battery. Ex. lever, to raise; re- gard, look. 13. E unaccented final is mute. Ex. table, table. 14. E with an acute accent (e) has the sound of a in date. Ex. ete, summer ; donnd, given. E unaccented takes the sound of (a in date) before final d, r, z 9 mute, also at the beginning of a word before a double consonant. Ex. pied., foot ; donncr, to give ; assez, enough ; effct, effect ; et, and, is always pronounced L f . 15. E with the grave (e) or with the circumflex accent (e) is more or less open, varying between e in ebb, and e in where. Ex. reve, dream; ipQTG, father ; fort,jfbres; apres, after. E unaccented takes the sound of e (e in ebb) when preceding c,f, I, r f s, t, or x in the same syllable and in the middle of a word before any double consonant. Before r, the sound is more open than before the other letters. Ex. for, iron; dessert, dessert; tcrre, earth ; tendresse, tenderness ; sonnette, bell ; chef, chief; mes, my ; est, is ; esprit, spirit. In the last words the e ia pronounced by many persons very nearly like especially in rapid conver- sation. Even e often loses its broad, long sound. 16. E takes the sound of French a infGmme, solcnnel, indemniser, *nd in all adverbial terminations in emment. 17. E is silent between g and a or o. Ex. pigeon, pigeon ; mangeons, (we) eat] mangeant, eating. In these words the e merely serves to prevent g from having the hard sound of g in go, For further observations on e mute, see page 26. I. 18. I has only one sound, that of i in machine ; long in vie, life ; rire, to laugh; short in fini, finished ; ici, here. SIMPLE VOWELS. 17 o. 19. 0, when long, has the sound of o in rose. Ex. cote*, side ; dose, itose. 20. short has a sound between the o in rob and the u in rub. Ex. Rome, robe, mode. 21. before final re or r and a final consonant has the sound of o in lord. Ex. aurore, dawn ; alors, ffon ; bord, border. O is silent in Laon, paon, and faon. U. 22. French u has no equivalent in English. To acquire the sound, place the lips as if about to whistle, leaving the aperture very small; keeping the lips in this position try to utter e as in me. Ex. inurmure, murmur. U may be long as in mur, ripe ; or short as in vertu, virtue. 23. U is silent after q and between g and e or i. Ex. guide, guide; question, question; quatre, /owr / fatigue, fatigue. EXCEPTIONS. U is sounded when the rowel after it is marked with the diaeresis, as aigue, acute ; also in arguer, to argue ; aiguille, needle ; aiguiser, to shcftgen; etc. Qu is sounded as in English in a few words directly de- rived from the Latin. These words are alike or nearly alike in French and English. Ex. equateur, equation, quadrupede, etc. In equitation, nbiquite, and a few other words, u retains the proper French sound. Y. 24. Y, initial, or between two consonants, has the sound of French i. Ex. style, style; y, there. 25. Y between two vowels is equivalent to ii, the first i forming a diphthong with the preceding, the second with the following vow- el. ThujS, essayer, to try ; royal, royal; appuyer, to lean; are pronounced as if written essai-ier, roi-ial, appui-ier. (See ai and of.) In pays, country ; paysage, landscape / paysan, peasant ; ay is equivalent to ai'i. 2 18 PRONUNCIATION. COMPOUND VOWELS. AI and El (ay). 26. Ai and ei are equivalent sometimes to e, sometimes to & Ai final is always like e ; in other cases it takes the sound of e, < whenever e unaccented would have that sound. (See under E.) Ex. reine, queen; j'aimai, I loved ; j'avais, I had ; kit, milk. Ay, followed by a vowel, is equivalent to ai-i. Ex. rayer. Ai in the present participle of the verb faire and in the corresponding syllables of all the forms derived from it, has the indistinct sound of e in battery. Ex. faisant, je faisais, tu faisais, il faisait, je defaisais, bienfaisant, etc. These forms were all written formerly as they are pronounced : fesant, je defesais, etc.; compare the future of the same verb, which isjeferai and not fa irai. AU. 27. Au and eau sound like o in note. Ex. haut, high ; beau, handsome. EU CEU, (02.) 28. Eu (oeu) has no exact equivalent in English ; it is some- what like the u in fur. It is longer in jeune, fast, peur, fear, coeur, heart, than in jeune, young, feu, fire, and oeuf, egg. CE has the sound of eu before liquid I, as in ceil, eye. Eu, whenever it occurs in the conjugation of the verb avoir, to have, has the sound of simple French u, so that J'eus, tu eus, il cut, etc., must be pro- nounced as if written /MS, tu us, il ut, etc. ou. 29. Ou has the sound of oo in poor. It is long in roue, wheel ; boule, ball; short in mou, soft' cou, neck. DIPHTHONGS. 80. The vowels i, u, ou, o, preceding a vowel sound, may co- alesce with it and produce a diphthong. Those vowel sounds (Y, , ou, o,) are the only ones that can be initial in NASAL VOWELS. 19 a true diphthong ; *- . one in which two vowels are heard but coalesce into one syllable. 31. In French diphthongs the first vowel (i, u, o\i, 0) is uttered quick and short and the voice rests upon the second vowel element. The dipthongal combinations are : i-a, i-e (i-ai), i-o (i-aii), i-eu, i-ou, o-a, o-e, o4 (wa), ou-a, ou-ai, ou-e, ou-i, u-a, u-e, u>i. The e in these combinations is not the e mute. By paying attention to the above remark the diphthongs present no dif- ficulty, as each vowel retains its proper sound, the first being very short ; oi ia the only exception. 01. (oy.) 82. Oi is nearly like wa in water; more accurately oi is equiva- lent to French a preceded by a w sound. The a (ah) is more pro- longed in voir, to see ; poire, pear ; than in roi, king ; moi, me. OY, followed by a vowel, is equivalent to oi-i. Ex. royal. NASAL VOWELS. 33. M and N, following a vowel in the same syllable, lose their .^ower. as consonants, and form with that vowel a nasal sound whichlsin every respect a vowel. 34. The nasals form four groups, viz.: A. E, AI. O. EU. an, am. am, aim. on, om. eun. en, em. in, im. (ym.) un, um. To acquire these sounds the organs of speech should be kept in tlie same position as they are in uttering the simple vowel that is to be nasalized ; tho back part of the tongue being raised enough to close the passage between the mouth and the nose. The same is done in English in such words as anger, ink, want ; but in English the nasal sound is not detached from the next consonant, while in French it is. No m or n consonant sound must be heard. To avoid this, the tip of the tongue must be kept motionless and the lips disposed to articulate a vowel. French a, thus uttered, will give an; e (ai), (not i in macJiine) gives in (ain) ; ogives on; eu (not French u) gives un (eun). 20 PRONUNCIATION. The nasal sounds may coalesce with a previous i, u, ou, or o, and form a nasal diphthong, to which all that has been said of the other diphthongs is applicable. 35, The following list presents the nasal combinations. K. B. The English equivalents of the French nasal vowels are all neces- sarily imperfect, as no consonant m or n must be heard in the French sound they are meant to explain. an "1 f dans, lance, manger, vanter. ani 1 an in J camp, ambre, ample, lampe. en I wa?it J en, enfant, mentir, dent. em J ^ temps, empire, membre, trembler. ian ") is equivalent to ( viande. ien j i-an \ patient. (See special rule for ien.) in im ym ain aim em an m anger pin, crm, vm, rmcer. impie, importe, im poser, imbu. thym, nymphe, symphonic. sain, bain, saint, craintc. faim, essaim, daim. < sein, peindre, feindre, ccinture. ien is equivalent to i-in, rien. (See special rule for ien.) oin " " " w-in, foin, coin, point, moins. on 7 on in ( non, conte, chanson, ronde. om ") song \ nom, comte, plomb, compris. ion is equivalent to i-on, action, passion, question. un J no equivalent Tun, brun, tribun, chacun. um >in English, French < parfum, humble. eun ) eu nasal. (^ a jeun. The nasal diphthongs ian, ion, are the simple sounds an, on, preceded by a short French i ; oin is in preceded by a w sound. All other combinations may be decomposed in the same manner, aa own, ou-en, etc. 36. IEN final, and in verbs in enir, is equivalent to i-in or yin, (i/an in yankee). Ex. chien, lien, viendrai, tiendront ; in other cases, when followed by a consonant (not n), it is equivalent to i-an (yaw) nasal. Ex. science, audience, patient, and all words in ient CONSONANTS. 21 REMARK. In compound words, as bientot, cliiendent, ien retains tlic sound of the primitive Tvords bien, chien. 37. M and N aro not nasal when double or when between two vowels or a vowel and a silent h. Ex. annee, innocent, homme, une, inoui, inutile, inhumain. EXCEPTIONS. The nasal sound is heard in ennui and its derivatives ; m exiinener and all words beginning in emm ; in enivrer and enoryueillir. 38. Ent in the third person plural of verbs is silent. Ex. ils aimont, they love ; ils unirent, etc. In other cases ent final is equivalent to nasal an. Ex. content, contented ; president, presi- dent ; while in the verbs, ils content, they relate, ils president, they preside, ent is silent. 39. En and em in a few foreign names have the sound of in, nasal. Ex. Benjamin, Memphis. Em final, and sometimes am and im in foreign proper names, are not nasal. Ex. Jerusalem, Abraham, Selim. Um in words that still preserve their Latin forra is not nasal, u having the sound of o. Ex. album, triumvir. In many other foreign words m and n final are not nasal. JZx..lSden t Hymen, amen, etc. -"" 1 CONSONANTS / GENERAL RULES. 40. Final consonants are silent except c, f, I, r. Ex. etait apres, croix, pronounced as if written etai, apre, croi. REMARK. When several consonants occur at the end of a word with no vowel after them, they are all silent, except c, f, l t r. Ex. est, fails, ils, dards, pronounced as if written e,fai, il, dar. EXCEPTIONS. In foreign proper names the final consonant is generally sounded. Ex. Brutus, Job. 41. A double consonant is pronounced as one letter. Ex. abbe, frapper, pronounced as if written a-be, fra-per. 42. B, c, d, f, 1, m, n, p, (ph,) q, v, and z are pronounced aa in English. 22 PRONUNCIATION. Exceptions to th3 above general rules will be given under the various let- ters. 43. In English, consonants in tho middle or at the beginning of words are often silent, as p and I in psalm ; g in phlegm ; I in calm. In French, consonants in a like position retain their proper sound. Thus in psaume, flegme, calme, tho p, the g, and the / are fully sounded. SPECIAL RULES. B final is pronounced in radoub, rumb. C has the sound of g in second and its derivatives. 44. C is pronounced as c in facade. Ex. gar con, le$on. 45. Ch has the sound of ch in machine. Ex. chaise, cherchcr. Ch in many words derived from the Greek and in several proper names has the sound of Jc. Ex. chaos, chceur, Michel- Ange. But ch has the sound of sh in Acliille, patriarche, archeveque. It is silent in almanack. Cc before e, i, and y is equivalent to Jc-s. Ex. acces, accident.. C final is silent after n. Ex. bane. It is silent in accroc, broc, derc, estomac, lacs, tabac. D final is heard in sud. Dd. Two d's are heard when ad precedes a syllable beginning with a d. Ex. addition. F final is silent in clef, chef-d'oeuvre, bceufs, ceufs ; though sounded in chef, bceuf,(xuf. F is silent in neuf, nine, only when the next word begins with a consonant, before a vowel it has the sound of v. Ex. neufhommes. G before a, o, u, sounds like g in game. Ex. gargon. 46. G before e, i, and y, sounds like s in pleasure. Ex. genre, gibct, general. 47. GN has a liquid sound something like ni in union. Ex. agneau, magnifique. This sound is produced with the body, not with the tip of the tongue against the roof of the mouth. G is hard before n at the beginning of a word. Ex. gnomon ; also in stag* ttant, inexpugnable, and in ssveral words in eg and ig that seldom occur. Gg. Two g*s are heard in suggerer : the first hard, the^ last Jike * in pleasure. G final is sounded in^'ou^. CONSONANTS. . 23 48. H is said to be mute or aspirate. When mute it is entirely disregarded in pronunciation, and the vowel that comes after it is pronounced with the preceding consonant, or causes the preceding vowel to be elided as if no letter intervened. Ex. Phomme, deux habits. 49. When h is aspirated no real aspiration is heard as in Eng- lish ; but the vowel that comes after it is pronounced strongly. II aspirate presents linking and elision. Ex. le heros, deux heros. 50. There are about 300 words beginning with h aspirate. These comprise many marine terms, foreign words, and the words in the following list, and their derivatives. REMARK. The derivatives ofhe'ros heroine, htroique, heroism, are not as- pirated. But hdbleur,haine, hausser, etc., follow the anology of their prim- itives halter, hair, haut, which alone are given in the list. hablcr hameau hargneux hennir hache hanche haricot Henri hagard hangar haridelle heraut hais hanneton harnais herisson hailloBs hantcr harpe herisser ha'ir harangue harpie he'ron haire haras hasard heros hale. , haras ser hate herse hallo harceler haut heurter , hallebarde hardes have hibou hallier hardi havre hideux halte hareng havresac hierarchie homard houblon houx humer honte houille huche huppe horde houlette hue'e hure hors houppe huguenot hurler hotte housse huit hussard 51. J is pronounced like s in pleasure ; it is never silent nor double. Ex. dejd, joujou. L when not liquid sounds as in English. Ex. livre. 52. Ill not initial, and il final, have a liquid sound somewhat like U in William, brilliant. This sound, still prevalent in the southern 24 PRONUNCIATION. and central parts of France, has been softened down to nearly a $ in the north and especially in Paris, so that there, ill in tailleur is scarcely more audible than i in paien. Ex. file, famille, gentille. 53. The vowel that precedes liquid ill or il, retains its proper sound and does not coalesce with the i ; ue and a are then equivalent tu f-u. Ex. muraille, patrouitte, orgueil, ail. 54. Ill is not liquid, that is, I retains its proper sound, in words that begin with il. Ex. illustre, illisille ; also in mille, ville, tran- quittc, pupille, Achille, osciller, vaciller, etc. ' 77 is not liquid in mil, fil, civil, prqfil. L final is silent in laril, clienil, coutil,fournil, fusil, grit, gent it, soured, per- sil, outil. It is also silent in soul, pouh, fils, and in the terminations auld. ault, ould, oult. M and N, when not nasal, are pronounced as in English. Ex. manier. M is silent in damner, automne, and their derivatives. P is silent in bopteme, sept, compte, dompter, exempter, sculpter. Q is always followed by u except in cog and cinq, when it sounds like k. (Tor qu see u, 23.) In cinq before a consonant it is silent. 55. R is rolled, but with less force at the end than at the begin ning of a syllable. Ex. grand, sceur ; rr and rh are generally pro- nounced with more force than r alone. Ex. arriver, rliume. In the future and conditional of the verbs acquerir, to acquire, courir, to run, inourir, to die, the two r*s must be distinctly heard to distinguish them from other forms that have but one r. Thus nous courrons, vous acquerrez, Us mourraient, must not be pronounced like nous courons, vous acque'rez, ills mouraient. R final is generally pronounced, but final er is equivalent to Ex. parler, aimer. In monosyllables in er the r is sounded. Ex.^/er, cher, mer. It is also sounded in amer, enfer,hier, hiver, and in a few words of foreign origin, as magister, etc. E is silent in monsieur. 56. S is generally sounded as ?n English; but in words er Jing isme, asme, etc., it has not the sound of z. Ex. prisme, miasme. 57. S between two vowels has the sound of z. Ex. rose, base, vase. S has also the sound of z in words compounded with the Latin preposi- CONSONANTS. 25 tion trans, followed by a vowel. Ex. transitif, transition. It has the same sound before b, d, v, and after /. Ex. presbytere, svelte, balsamique. As s initial has the hissing sound as in English, when a word beginning with an s takes a prefix, the s, though between two vowels, retains its hiss- ing sound. Ex. vraisemblable (compounded of vrai and semblable), mono syllale. Sch is generally pronounced like sh. Ex. schisme. It has the sound o { s7j in a few words. S final is sounded in words that have been taken from Greek and Latin without any change of orthography. Ex. atlas, blocus, gratis, etc. S is also sounded in cens, en-sus, mais, mosurs, vis, Rheims, fils, sens (in some of its meanings), Us (not in fleur-de-lis) , tous (when used without a noun). T is generally sounded as in English. 58. In words corresponding in form to those in which t has in English an sh- sound, it has in French the sound of ss. This occurs in tied, tiel,tter, tion, not initial or preceded by x or s. Ex. partial, essentiel, initier, nation. But bestial, bastion, mixtion, have the pure t sound. 59. T has also the sound of s in words in tie, that have in Eng- lish cy, or tia, in which t sounds like sh. Ex. prophetie, democra- tic, minutie, initier, also in balbutier. In other words in tie and tier, t retains the proper sound. Ex. moitie, metier. Th is never pronounced as in English, but always like t alone, as tique. T final is heard in brut, chut, correct, dot, direct, deficit, fat, exact, net, sus- pect, strict. In sept and liuit, t is silent only when they precede a noun com- mencing with a consonant. Ex. huit gargons. In Christ, s and t are both pronounced; but in Jesus- Christ they are both silent. In vingt, t is pro- nounced only in the series between 20 and 30. Ex. vingt-cinq. X has the sound of gs in words beginning with x or ex before a vowel or an h mute. Ex. Xavier, exil, exhumer. In a few proper names x has the sound of ss. Ex. Bruxelles, Auxerre; it has also this sound in soixante, and in six and dix when standing alone. In dix-huit and dix-neuf, x sounds like z. X in other cases has the sound of ks. Ex. luxe, Aix-la-Chapelle. Z is pronounced in gaz. When final in proper names it has the sound of s. Ex. Metz, Suez, etc. 26 PRONUNCIATION. LINKING OF FINAL CONSONANTS. 60. The final consonant of a word, closely comiected in sense with the next word beginning with a vowel or silent h must general- ly be can-led over. In that case 5 and x are sounded like z ; d like t t and y (seldom linked) like k. Ex. un grand homme, vous avez, Us ont, aux armes. No general rule can be given embracing all the cases in which a final con- sonant must be thus linked. In poetry and in impressive reading, the link- ing must be made in many cases where it would sound unnatural and af- fected in daily conversation. It may be stated in general terms that the more closely connected the words are in sense, the more imperative it is to link them together in pronunciation. Certain words, such as et, riz, clef, plomb, loup, etc., can never be linked. Words ending in a nasal sound are seldom linked, except short words that recur frequently, such as on, en, un t mon, ton, son, lien, Ion, etc. "When a nasal n is linked, either the nasal sound is heard and an additional n pronounced before the next vowel, or the nasal is dropped altogether, thus un homme, on a, as if written un nhomme, on na ; or u-nhomme, o-na. In rapid speech the nasal sound ahn&st always disappears ; many omit it altogether. In some combinations, such as bon homme, bien heureux, it is never heard. OBSERVATIONS ON E MUTE. We have seen that e unaccented when final is mute, and that in the words ce, de, je, le, me, ne, que, se and te, and when it terminates a syllable not final, it has the indistinct sound of e in batteiy. In rapid utterance, however, even this feeble sound is not heard whenever the articulation connected with it can be distinctly uttered without it. Hence the following rule : 61. E unaccented ending a syllable is silent whenever the con- sonant before it can be pronounced either with a vowel that precedes or one that comes after it in the next syllable or word. Practice and oral teaching only can make this law of euphony perfectly clear. In the following examples the e's printed in italics are not pro- nounced. v 27 Voilk le diemin de fer. There is the railway. Je le sais. I know it. Je ne to le donne pas. I do not give it to thee. Beaucoup de monde. Many persons. Je ne me le propose pas. I do not propose it to myself. Etre attentif. To bo attentive. Noble ardeur. Noble ardor. In the last two examples the r and / that precede the e are virtually car- ried over to the next word as if no e intervened, and tr and U were final. NOTE. Care must be taken not to pronounce tre, dre, lie, pie, ere, etc., as they are in English, that is as ter, dcr, bel, pel, etc., in order, temple, noble. ID French the I and r must not be separated by any intervening sound from the consonant that precedes. Ex. ordre, aimable, quatre, nacre, peuple. I. PREMIERE LEgON, THE ARTICLE. 1. IN the French language there are only two genders, viz., the masculine and the feminine. This distinction applies also to inanimate objects, which are either masculine or feminine. 2. The definite article has a peculiar form for each gender : le before a masculine, la before a feminine substantive ; les is the plu- ral of both genders. Ex. : Masc. Le roi, the king, Fern. La reine, the queen. le pere, the father. la mere, the mother. 3. Le and la in the singular lose then 1 vowels and take the apos- trophe (T) before a'noun beginning either with a vowel or h mute. Ex.: Masc. L'ami, the friend. Eem. L'amie, the (female) friend. I'homme, the man. I'histoire, (the) history. 4. The indefinite article, answering to the English a or an, is un for the masculine ; line for the feminine. Ex. : Masc. Un roi, a king. Fern. Une reine, a queen. un pere, a father. une mere, a mother, tm ami, a friend. une amie, a (female) friend, VOCABULARY. Le livre, the book. un chapeau, a hat, bonnet. le pain, the bread. la rose, the rose. le cheval, the horse. lafleur, the flower. le chien, the dog. la plume, the pen, feather. I'oncle, the uncle. la tante, the aunt. I* enfant, the child. une poire, a pear. I'or, m. the gold. wnc pomme, an apple. unjardin, a garden. e, and. 23 THE ARTICLE. 29 8. .Fait I have. Ai-je, have I ? tu as, thou hast. as-tu, hast thou ? t/ a, he has. a--z7, has he ? a, she has. a-t-elle, has she t PI. wows avons, we have. avons-nous, have we T rows avez, you have. avez-wws, have you? Us ont, they have. ont-ils, have they ? eiVes only they (fern) have. ont-elles, have they ? REMARK 1 . J*ai is for j"e al. The e of j"e, I, is elided when the verb begins with a vowel or silent h. 2. Observe the hyphen by which the verb and pronoun are always joined in interrogations. 3. The t in a-t-il, a-t-elle, is merely euphonic. It is inserted to prevent the hiatus between two vowel sounds, when the third person singular of a verb ends in a vowel, and is followed by il, die, on. 4. The use of the 2d person singular is much more frequent in French than in English. It generally denotes familiarity and intimacy. In ad- dressing inferiors, it denotes authority; in poetry, its use is the same as in English. 5. When, in a question not beginning with an interrogative pronoun or an adverb, the subject is expressed by a substantive, it must begin the sen- tence, and the pronoun still be put after the verb. Ex. : L' enfant a-t-il ? has the child ? La imre a-t-elle ? lias the mother ? ^Sgc*-" READING EXERCISE 1. J'ai lo livre. Tu as un livre. J'ai la rose. As-tu la rose ? II a le cheval. Ello a le pain. Lo pere a un clieval. La mere a un jardin. L'enfant a une poire. Nous avons un chien. Avez- vous un chapeau ? Us ont un oncle et une tante. Elles ont une tante. L' enfant a-t-il une plume ? La mere a-t-elle la fleur ? Lo roi a-t-il un clieval? II a le clieval. Les amis (plu.} ont leslivres, Les cnfants ont les plumes. THEME 1. 1. I have the Lorse. 2. I have a friend. 3. Thou hast the book. 4. He has a dog. 5. She has the bonnet. 6. The father has a garden. 7. The mother has the rose. 8. The king has the gold. 30 II. DEUXIEME LEf ON. 9. The uncle has a friend. 10. We have the bread. 11. You have a pear. 12. They (masc.*) have an apple. 13. They (fern.) have a flower. 14. Has the friend a horse ? 15. The friend has a horse and a dog. CONVERSATION. Ai-je la rose ? Yous avez la rose. As-tu le pain ? J'ai le pain. A-t-elle la fleur ? Elle a la fleur. L ' enfant a-t-il le livre? II a le livre. Avez-vous nn cheval ? Nous avons un cheval et un chien. L'enfant a-t-il une poire ? L 'enfant a une poire et une pomme. II. DEUXIEME LE90N. FORMATION OF THE PLURAL. 1. GENERAL RULE. The plural is formed in French as in Eng- lish, by the addition of an 5 to the singular. Ex. : Le roi, Plur. les rois. la pomme, Plur. les pommes. le livre, les livres. I' enfant, les enfants* Vhomme, les hommes. I' ami, les amis. EXCEPTIONS. 2. Nouns ending in s, x, z, in the singular, remain unchanged. Lefils, the son. Plur. les fits, the sons. la noix, the walnut, les noix, the walnuts. le nez, the nose. les nez, the noses. 3. Words ending in au, eu, form their plural by adding x instead of *, as : Le chapeau, the hat or bonnet. Plur. les chapeaux. le feu, the fire. les feux. le lieu, the place. les lieux. FORMATION OP THE PLURAL". 31 REMARK. Seven nouns in ou take x in the plural, viz. : Le chou, the cabbage. le pou, the louse. le bijou, the jewel. le genou, the knee. le caillou, the pebble, k joujou, the plaything. le hibou, the owl. Plural : les choux, les bijoux, les cailloux, etc. The others ending in ou follow the general rule and take s in the plural, as . le clou, the nail; plur. les clous; le trou, the hole; plur. les. trous, etc. 4. Nouns ending in al, ail, change these terminations into aux, to form the plural, as : Le cheval, the horse. Plur. Les chevaux. I'animal, the animal. les animaux. le travail, the work. les travaux. KEMABK. This rule, however, has a few exceptions, which follow the general rule, simply taking s in the plural, as : le bal, the ball ; le carnaval, the carnival ; le portail, the doorway* le gouvernail, the helm ; Ve'ventail, the fan, etc. Plur. les Ids, les carnavals, etc. 5. The following words form their plural irregularly. (The first force have also a regular plural. See Part n, L. n.) Le del, heaven. Plur. Les deux, heavens. Z?cez7, the eye. les yeux, the eyes. 1'cueul, the great-grandfather. les aieux, the ancestors. le b&ail, the cattle. les bestiaux, the cattle. VOCABULARY. Le canif, the penknife. le jeu, the play, game. lefrere, the brother. la souris, the mouse. la soeur, the sister. le nom, the name. la porte, the door, gate. le chameau, the camel. la maison, the house. le couteau, the knife. le chateau, the castle. mon, an. ma, f. mes, pi. my. le palais, the palace. vu, seen, ou, or. un tableau, a picture. deux, two. trois, three. le chat, the cat. quatre, four, cinq, five. le ggnfral, the general. le bras, the arm. la noix, the walnut. aussi, also. 32 H DEUXIEME Voici, here is, this is, here are, these are. Voila, there is, that is, there are, those are. Voici is compounded of the imperative of voir, to see, and ici, here. It means therefore literally, see here. Voila means see there. They both gov- ern the objective case. Ex. me void, here am I ; literally, Behold me here. S, J'avais, I had. Avais-je, had I ? tu avals, tliou hadst. avais-tu, hadst thou ? i7 avaifc, he had. avait-il, had he ? e2Ze awzzY, she had. avait-elk, had she ? PL nous avions, we had. avions-nous, had we ? vous aviez, you had. aviez-vous, had you ? tfe avaient, they had. avaient-ils, had they ? cZ/es avaient, they had. avaient-ettes, had they ? READING EXERCISE 2 Nous avons un canif. Vous aviez deux canifs. Mon frere a les couteaux. La maison a deux portes. Avais-je les noix ? Aviez- vous les joujoux ? Oui, nous avions les joujoux. Le roi avait trois chateaux. La reine a les bijoux. Voici quatre souris. Les enfants avaient trois pommes. Mon oncle avait deux chevaux. Ma tante a cinq tableaux. Les chameaux ont une bosse (hump). Ma mere a deux soeurs et trois freres. THEME 2. 1. I have three brothers. 2. (The) 1 * man has two arms. 3. I had four horses. 4. Hadst thou the flowers ? 5. I had the roses. 6. There are the apples, the pears, and the walnuts. 7. There are also the games and the pictures. 8. Have you seen the houses, the castles, and the gardens ? 9. My uncle has four pictures. 1$..X have seen five horses and two camels. 11. The children have three mice. 12. Have you seen the games of the (des) children? * In the thomes, words placed in parentheses ( ) must be expressed in French, though redundant in English. English words printed in italics must be omitted in French. CASE. 33 13. Has my aunt three dogs or three cats ? 14. She has three dogs and two cats. 15. The eye is blue (est lieu). 16. I have two eyes. 17. My brother has two knives, and I have two penknives. CONVERSATION. Avez-vous un canif ? Avais-je les couteaux ? As-tu vu les chameaux ? Avez-vous aussi vu les cha- teaux ? Avez-vous les bijoux ? Les enfants ont ils les habits (coats) ou les chapeaux? Avaient-ils vu les feux ? Avez-vous les tableaux ? Mon pere a-t-il un chat ? Combien de (how many) freres avez-vous ? Combien de soeurs avez-vous ? Avez-vous vu les amis ? J'ai deux canifs. Vous aviez ]es couteaux. J'ai vu les chameaux et les cho vaux. J'ai vu les chateaux et les \ Ca- lais. Ma tante a les bijoux. Les enfants ont les habits et lus chapeaux. Bs avaient vu les feux. Je n'ai pas (not) les tableaux. II a un chat et un chien. J'ai trois freres. J'ai deux soeurs. Nous n'avons pas vu les amis. III. TROISIEME LEgON. ADE. 1 French nouns have no variation of termination to indicate case ; the nominative and objective are, as in English, alike in form, and the possessive is expressed by the preposition de (of) and its object. 2. The possessor must, in French, follow the object possessed, 3 34 m. TROISIEME and be preceded by the article, e. g. The king's throne, must bs transposed as if it were, the throne of the king ; Le trone du rot. 3. The preposition de (of, from,) appears either unchanged or contracted with the article. A contraction takes place whenever de occurs before the article le or les ; in the first case, it takes the form du (singular), in the second des (plural). Ex. S. du roi (instead of de le roi,) of the king, or the king's. dupere (instead of de le pere,) of the father, or the father's. PI. des rois (instead of de les rois,) of the kings, or the kings'. des meres (instead of de les meres,) of the mothers. 4. Before la and l\ de remains unaltered, as : de la mere, of the mother, or the mother's. de I'ami, of the friend, the friend's. de I'homme, of (the) man, the man's. 5. Before the indefinite article un, une, an apostrophe is put in- stead of the e of de, as : . d'un roiy of a king. d'une rcine, of a queen. d'un ami, of a friend. d'une amie y of a female friend. 6. Before le, the preposition h (to) is contracted with this article to au; and before les into aux; as: + au (& le) roi, to the king. aux (a los) rois, to the kings. au " frere, to the brother. aux " freres, to the brothers. 7. The definite article must be used in French before all nouna used in a general sense or denoting a whole species of objects, though in English the article is not employed ; as : Man, I'homme. nature, la nature life, la vie. summer, V el. fortune, la fortune. dinner, le diner. Hence, of man, of life, of fortune, etc., are to be translated in French de rhomme, de la vie, de la fortune, etc. ; to man, to life, to nature, etc., a I'homme, a la vie, a la nature. 8. In French the article is to be repeated before each substantive of a sentence, as : CASE. 35 The salt, pepper and vinegar, le set, lepoivrcet le vinaigre. The men, women and children, les hommes, lesfemmes et les enfants. VOCABULARY. Dieu, God, lafenetre, the window. le cre'ateur, the creator. le cousin, the cousin. le monde y the world. la cousine, the cousin, f. Vemiemi, the enemy. lafille, the daughter. le sommeil, sleep. la ville, the town. I'image, f. the imago. je donne, I give. la mort, death. le voisin, the neighbor. lafeuille, the leaf. est, is. (belongs) sont, are. a qui, to whom, whose 1 oui, yes. non, no. I'oiseau, the bird. Monsieur, Sir. votre, your. Madame, Madam. I'arbre, m. the tree. Mademoiselle, Miss. READING EXERCISE 3. Le pere cle F enfant. La mere des enfants. La porte de la mai- S)n. Les portes des maisons. Les fenetres du palais. Le chat est un animal. Les chats sont les ennemis des souris. Le sommeil est 1'image de la mort. Le chateau est au roi et a la reine. Je donne la plume k 1'enfant. Je donne le jeu aux enfants. Le jar- din est aux freres et aux S03urs. Les images des rois. Les feuilles des arbres. Les fenetres de la maison. THEME 3. 1. The father of the son. 2. The mother of the daughter. 3. The mother of the children. 4. The door of the house. 5. The gates of the town. 6. The- houses of the towns. 7. The windows of the houses. 8. God is the creator of the world. 9. The dog is the enemy of the cat. 10. I give the book to the brother. 11. I give the coats to the brothers and sisters. 12. The dog is the friend of man. 13. The feathers of the birds. 14. My cousin's bonnet. 15. My cousins 7 bonnets (the bonnets of my cousins). 16. Sleep is the brother of death. 17. Of the trees of the garden. 18. The IV. QUATRIEME LEgON. eyes of the horses are large (grands). 19. The friend's name. 20. The windows of the castle. 21. The neighbor's house and garden. 22. I give the roses to the sister of the general. 23. Give (donnez) the pen to the father. CONVERSATION. Ai-je le livre du cousin ? Tu as le livre du cousin. As-tu Fimage de la tante ? A-t-il vu le jardin du roi ? Les enfants ont-ils les jeux ? Qui (who) a les ciseaux (scis- sors) de ma so3ur ? A qui sont les noix ? A qui sont les poires ? A qui est ce (^iz's) jardin ? Avez-vous vu le chien de Ton- ale? A qui sont ces (these) roses ? Oui M * j'ai Fimage de la tante. Non M il a vu le chateau du roi. Oui M les enfants ont les jeux. Yoici les ciseaux de votre soeur. Elles sont & 1'enfant. Elles sont aux enfants du voisin II est au roi et a la reine. Voila le chien de Foncle. Elles sont a ma cousine. IV. QUATRIEMB PREPOSITIONS. 1. The following list includes the French prepositions of most frequent occurrence. d, to, at, in. dans, in, into. par, through, Ly apres, after. de, of, from. parmi, among. * This M , which will always be inserted after Oui and Non should be read Monsieur, Madame, or Mademoiselle, as the case may require. PREPOSITIONS. 31 avcsnt, before, (time), devant, before, (place). pendant, during. avec, with. derriere, behind. pour, for. chez, at, with, at the en, in. sans, without. house of. entre, between. sous, under. contre, against. envers, vers, towards, sur, on, upon. As to the contraction of a and le into au, of a and les into aux, of de with le into diij of de with les into des, see page 34. 2. After prepositions no article is used whenever the noun is taken in a wide and indeterminate sense, and forms with the preposition a sort of ad- verbial phrase, as : avec plaisir, with pleasure ; sans crainte, without fear. 3. Chez means at the house of. It governs the noun or pro- noun as any other preposition. Ex. chez moi, at my house, (at the house of me) ; chez vous, at your house ; chez mon oncle, at my uncle's, (at the house of my uncle). For remarks on the employment of some prepositions, see P. n., L. 16. VOCABULARY*- La cour, the court, yard. la chambre, the room. Vecole, f. the school. l^glise, f. the church. le maitre, the master, teacher. la unit, the night. Vt&& 3 fMihe water. ' le jour, the day. la main, the hand. la cuisine, the kitchen. la pluie, the rain. la poche, the pocket. le toit, the roof. demeure, lives, noire, our. oii, where, ton, thy, ce, this qui, who, whom '? S. Je suis, I am. Suis-je, am I? tu es, thou art. es-tu, art thou ? il est, he is. est-il, is he ? elle est, she is. est-elle, is she ? PI. nous sommes, we are. sommes-nous, are we ? rows etes, you are. etes-vous, are you ? t'/ssoTrt, they are. sont-ils, are they ? c//es sont, they are. sont-ellcs, are they ? 38 IV. QUATRIEME READING EXERCISE 4. Je sriis clans la cour. L'oiseau est sur le toit. Es-tu au jardin (dans le jardin) ? Louis est cbez mon pere. Lcs chevaux sont de- vant la porte. Apres la pluie. Pendant la nuit. Avant le jour. L'enfant est sous 1'arbre. Panni les enfants. Noi^ sommes der- I'erc les arbrcs. Us sont entre la porte et la fenetre. Ce livre esfc pour mon frere. Ma tante est a 1'eglise. Sans argent (money.) Avcc les chevaux de rnon oncle. Centre 1'ennemi. Notre ami demeure a Paris dans la maison de sa tante. THEME 4. 1. In the yard. 2. During the night. 3. I am before the house. 4. Louis is in the garden. 5. Are you in the yard ? 6. Before night. 7. I speak (je parle) of the house, of the coat, of the flowers, of my father, of my mother. 8. The two knives are in my pocket. 9. Where are the cats? 10. They are in the kitchen. 11. The birds are on the roof. 12. The three children of my cousin (m.^) are in (the) town. 13. Against the rain. 14. With my father. 15. Without a master. 16. Louis is in his (so) room. 17. The book is for my sister. 18. Between the two wki- dows. 19. Under the roof of the house. 20. Are they before the door of the church ? 21. No; they are behind the church. 22. The children are at (the) school. CONVERSATION. Oa est Louis? II est dans la cour, Ou est mon fils ? II est au jardin. Ou sont les enfants? Ilsjouent (play) devant la mai son. Votre cousine est-cllc a Tecolc? Non M , elle est a 1'eglise. ^tes-vous dans le jardin ? Non M , nous sommes dans la cour. Ton pere est-il aujardin? Non M , il est dans sa chain- bro. Sont-ils a la fenetre ? Oui M , ils sont a la fenetre. Avez-vous vu les canards Nous avons vu les canards ct les (ducks\ dans la cour ? oies (geese) . THE PARTITIVE ARTICLE. 39 V. CINQUIEME LE9ON. THE PARTITIVE ARTICLE. 1. The partitive article answers to the English some or any, ex- pressed in French by du before a noun masculine beginning with a consonant, by de la before a noun feminine beginning with a conso- nant, and by de P before a noun of either gender beginning with a vowel or an h mute. Ex. : Du pain, some or any bread. de la biere, some beer. du vin, (some or any) wine. de la viande, some meat. de V argent, some money (Silver). de Vhuile, some oil. In the plural the partitive article is des for both genders. Ex. Des livres, (some) books. desfleurs, flowers. des enfants, children. des roses, roses. , Some is not always used in English, whereas du,, de la, de V, des, must always be expressed in French. 2. In questions the English use any instead of some ; in French it must be rendered by the same article, as : Have-P u s^y bread ? avez-vous du pain f Is there any water ? y a-t-il de Veau ? 3. The partitive article must be used whenever in English some or any is expressed or understood before a substantive ; it must be repeated before every substantive in a sentence. Ex. : Have you bread and cheese 1 Avez-vous du pain et dufromage ? Bring me some mustard, oil and vinegar. Apportez-moi de la moutarde, de I'huile et du vinaigre. 4. However, when the substantive is preceded by an adjective, the simple preposition de or d' takes the place of the partitive arti cle, in the singular as well as in the plural, as : S. de bon vin, some or any good wine. de bonne viande, some or any good meat. de mauvais cafe', some or any bad coffee. o I look sick ? 15, Yes, sir ; you look sick. 16. Have you a headache ? 17. No, sir ; I have a sore throat. 18. Has that young lady the tooth- ache? 19. She has the toothache. 20. Take care of my watch. *21. We shall take care of your watch, your cloak, and your um- brella. X. DIXIEME LEgON. X. DIXIEME LEgON. CONJUGATION OF ETRE, TO BE AFFIRM ATI VELY. INDICATIVE MOOD. PRESENT. COMPOUND OF THE PRESENT. Je suis, / am J'ai e'te, / have been Tu es, ihou art Tu as ete, tliou hast been 11 est (elle est, on est), he is 11 a etc, he has been Nous sommes, we are Nous avons e'te', we hcwe been Vous etes, ye or you are Vous avez etc', you have been Ils sont, they are Ils ont ete, they have been IMPERFECT. COMPOUND OF THE IMPERFECT. J'etais, / was or used to be J'avais ete, I had been Tu etais, them wast Tu avais ete, thou hadst been 11 etait, he was 11 avait ete, he had been Nous (Stions, we were Nous avions et^, v'e had been Vous etiez, you were Vous aviez ete, you liad b>n Ils e'taient, they were Ils avaient ete, they had b^n PRETERITE. COMPOUND OF THE PRETERITE. Je fus, I was J'eus etc, I had been Tu fus, ihou wast Tu eus ete, thou hadst been 11 fut, he was 11 cut e'te, he had been Nous fumes, we were Nous eumes e'te, we had been Vous futes, you were Ils furent, they were Vous eutes ete, Ils eurent etc, . you had been they had been FUTURE. COMPOUND OF THE FUTURE. Je serai, / shall be, will be J'aurai e'te', I shall ] Tu seras, ihou wilt be Tu auras etc, thou wilt * 11 sera, he ivill be 11 aura ete, he will ; Nous serons, we shall be Nous aurons et^, we shall \ f Vous serez, you will be Vous aurez ete, you will Us seront, they will be Ils auront e'te, they will CONDITIONAL MOOD. PRESENT. COMPOUND OF THE PRESENT. Jc serais, I should be J'aurais (fte*, I should Tu serais, thou wouldst be Tu aurais ete, thou wouldst g* [1 scrait, he would be 11 aurait e'te, he would Xbus serions, we should be Nous aurions ete', we should & Vous seriez, you would be Vous auriez ete, you would ? Ils seraient, they would be Ils auraient e'te, they would CONJUGATION OP ETEE, TO BE. 55 IMPERATIVE MOOD. Sois, Soyons, Soyez, be (thou). let us be. be (ye or you). SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. PRESENT. COMPOUND OF THE PRESENT. Que je sois, that I may be Que j'aie etc, that I may ' Que tu sois, that thou mayest be Que tu aies etc, that thou mayest g- Qu'il soit, that he may be Qu'il' ait ete, that he may r | Que nous soyons, that we may be Que nous ayons ete, that we may Quo vous soyez, that you may be Qu'ils soient, that they may be Que vous ayez e'te', that you may Qu'ils aient ete, that they may IMPERFECT. COMPOUND OF THE IMPERFECT. Que jc fusse, that I might be Que j'eusse ete, that I might ' Que tu fusses, that thou migldest be Que tu eusses etc, that thou mightest Qu'il fut that he might be Qu'il cut (5t, that he might SM Que nous fussions, that we might be Que nous eussions ete, that we K ^ might Que vous fussiez, that you might be Que vous eussiez e'te, that you 1 might Qu'ils fussent, that they might be Qu'ils eussent e'te, that they might fetre, INFINITIVE MOOD. COMPOUND OF THE PRESENT. to be Avoir <5tc, to have been CV Etant, PRESENT* PARTICIPLE. [COMPOUND. Ayant e'te', having leoi PAST OR PASSIVE. ( invariable J been VOCABULARY. Ricfie, rich. appliquif, diligent* malheureux, unhappy* content, pleased, contented* faible, weak, /res, very. le gouvernail, helm. paresseux, lazy, idle. heureux, happy. jeune, young. sage, good, comment y how, encore, still, again. Jules, Julius. 56 X. DIXIEME THEME 10. I am ill, Thou art young. Charles is my friend. We are hap* py. You are also happy. The child will be good. Louisa was ill William and Julius have also been ill. This boy has been idle. This girl was very good. He will be contented. You would also be contented. She has been at Paris. Her (son) brother has been in London. We have been in France. Your mother may (pent) have been (Comp. Inf.) ill. Yes, indeed (en effet) she has been ill long.* Who was (has been) with (chez) your father ? A merchant has been with my father. He had been before (auparavant) with my uncle. ADDITIONAL THEME ON EIRE CONJUGATED AFFIRMATIVELY. 1. Having been sick, he is still weak. 2. The spoons were on the table. 3. We were still sick. 4. The young boy was at the helm. 5. I am among my (jnes) friends. 6. I shall be with my friends to-morrow. 7. I was at your (votre) father's house yester- day (L. IV. 8). 8. She is in the room. 9. My neighbor's name is William. 10. I should be happy if you were pleased. 11. If you are unhappy, how can you (pouvez-vous)\>Q (inf.) contented? 12. I shall be pleased to see you (de vous voir) to-morrow. 13. The merchant has been here (ici) to-day. 14. He had been at his friend's yesterday. 15. Be at my house (cliez-moi) to-morrow. 16. Let us be happy. 17. Though he is (Pres. Subj.) rich, he is more (plus) unhappy than you. * Translate, she is ill since a longtime (depuis lonytemps). NEGATIONS. XI. ONZIEME LEgON. NEGATIONS. THE NEGATIVE AND INTEKROGA TIYE FORMS OF THE AUXILIARIES. 1 . The negation not is rendered by the two words ne . . . pas. Ae is placed before the verb and becomes n* before a vowel or silent k ; pas is placed immediately after the verb. In compound tenses ] -1.3 is placed between the auxiliary and the participle. In the infiniu .a ne and pas generally both precede the verb. Ex. Je ne suis pas. I am not. Je w'ai pas eu. I have not had. Ne pas etre, less frequently, n'etre pas. Not to be. 2. The words jamais, ever, personne, person, and rien, any- thing, used with a verb preceded by ne mean respectively never, nobody, nothing. When the verb is understood, as in answers, the ne is omitted, and they have none the less a negative meaning. When used with a verb not preceded by ne they are always affirma- tive. Ex. Avez-vBitSL jamais rien vu de pareil ? Have you ever seen anything similar ? Je n'ai rien. I have nothing. II n'a jamais tort. He is never wrong. Personne n'a sommeil. Nobody is sleepy. C'est une personne qui a sommeil. It is a person that is sleepy. Qui a sommeil ? Personne. Who is sleepy ? Nobody. Qu' avez-vous 1 Rien. What is the matter with you ? Noth- ing. 3. The words aucun, nul, no ; nullement, nowise, not at all ; ni . . . ni t neither . . . nor ; guere, but little, but few ; and que in the sense of but or only ; also require the verb to be preceded by ne. Ne (the verb) plus means, no more, not any more left. Ex. Je n'ai plus de pain. I have no more bread. II n'a ni pain ni yin. lie has neither bread nor wine. Elle n'a guere de patience* She has but little patience* Nul n'est parfaifc* . No one is perfect. 58 XI. ONZIEME LE^ON. REMARK. After ni . . . ni nouns used in a partitive sense take neither preposition nor article ; as, nipain ni vin. For further rules on the negative see P. I. L. 33, and P. II. L. 15. 4. In interrogations the pronoun which is the subject of the verb is placed after it, and both are joined by a hyphen, as : aurez-vous ? avez-vous ea? When the verb ends with a vowel, -t- is placed between the verb and i7, elk, or on, as : aura4-il? a-t-on ? See also L. L Rein. 5. 5 AVOIR AND ETRE CONJUGATED NEGATIVELY. INDICATIVE MOOD. PRESENT TENSE. Je n'ai pas, Tu n'as pas, 11 n'a pas, Nous n'avons pas, Vous n'avez pas, Us n'ont pas, I have not thou hast not he has not we have not you have not they have not Je ne suis pas, Tu n'es pas, 11 n'est pas, Nous ne sommes pas, Vous n'etes pas, Us ne sont pas, I am not thou art not he is not we are not you are not they are, not COMPOUND OF THE PRESENT. Je n'ai pas eu, I have not had, etc. | Je n'ai pas e'te, 7 have not been, etc. IMPERFECT. Je n'avais pas, I had not or did not I Je n'etais pas, have, etc. Twos not, etc. COMPOUND OF THE IMPERFECT. Je n'avais pas eu, 7 had not had, etc. | Je n'avais pas etc, I had not been, etc And thus with all compound tenses. Jc n'eus pas, Je n'aurai pas, etc. Je n'auraispas, etc. PRETERITE. 7 had not, etc. | Je ne fus pas, FUTURE. I Je ne serai pas, etc. CONDITIONAL MOOD. | Je ne serais pas, etc. 7 was not, ei NEGATIONS. Que je n'aie pas, etc. Que je n'eusse pas, etc. N'aie pas, etc. Ne pas avoir. (N'avoir pas.) N'ayant pas. N'ayant pas eu. SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. PRESENT. | Que je ne sois pas, etc. IMPERFECT. | Que je ne fusse pas, etc. IMPERATIVE MOOD. | Ne sois pas, etc. INFINITIVE MOOD. INe pas etre. (N'etre pas.) PARTICIPLES. N'e'tant pas. N'ayant pas ete'. INTERROGATIVE CONJUGATION. INDICATIVE MOOD. PRESENT TENSE. Ai-je, As-tu, **&* A-t-n, Ai-je eu, Arais-je, etc. Eus-je, etc. Aurai-je, etc. Aurais-je, etc. % have I? 'hast thou? has he ? etc. Suis-je, Es-tu, Est-il, COMPOUND OP THE PRESENT, have I had? etc. | Ai-je et, IMPERFECT. | Etais-je, etc. PRETERITE. | Pus-je, etc. FUTURE. Serai-je, etc. CONDITIONAL MOOD. | Serais-je, etc. ami? art thou 1 is he? etc. have I been ? etc. 60 XI. ONZIEME LEgON. NEGATIVE AND INTERROGATIVE CONJUGATION. PRESENT. N'ai-je pas, N'as-tu pas, IS'a-t-il pas, have I not 9 hast tkou not ? has he not ? etc. Ne suis-je pas, N'es-tu pas, N'est-il pas, am I not 1 art thou not 1 is he not ? etc. N'arais-je pas, etc, N'ens-je pas, etc. N'aurai-je pas, etc. N'aurais-je pas, etc. IMPERFECT. | N'etais-je pas, etc. PRETERITE. | Ne fus-je pas, etc. FUTURE. | Ne serai-je pas, etc. CONDITIONAL. I Ne serais-je pas, etc. La nouvellc, the news. la lettre, the letter. le chagrin, the grief. les parents, the parents. le tailleur, the tailor. le bottier, the boot-maker. la cerise, the cherry. VOCABULARY. tres, very, du tout, at all. pauvre, poor. me'content, discontented. mange', eaten. autrefois, formerly. longtemps, long, a long time. vos, plural of votre, your. THEME 11. 1. I have a friend. 2. Hast thou also a friend ? 8. We have friends. 4. Have you also friends? 5. I am happy. 6. lam not happy. 7. Are you happy? 8. Are you not happy? 9. No, we are not happy ; we are poor. 1 10. Formerly we were very happy. 11. You are not rich. 1 12. Thou hast been poor. 13. She has been rich. 14. Have you had any cherries? 15. You have been idle. 16. Hast thou been ill ? No, I have not been ill at all. 17. They have not received the letter. 18. Were you (have you been) at (chez) the tailor's ? 19. I have not been at the tailor's. 20. I have been at tho boot-maker's; but (mats) i TLiCBe adjectives take s in the plural (pauvres riches}. LEGATIONS. 61 he was not at home (a la maison). 21. How many horses had you ? 22. I had two horses. 23. Charles would not have been ill, if he had not eaten too much (trop). 24. Be contented. 25. Take care of your books. COiSTERSATIOST. Quand (when) avez-vous dtd Nous avons e*te hier au spectacle. au spectacle (theatre) ? Charles, seras-tu content ? Oui, M , je serai content. Avez-vous un ami ? Nous avons beaucoup d'amis. Avez-vous regu une lettre ? J'ai regu une lettre de Paris. Ou <5tait ton ami Louis ? n tait a Berlin. Yos parents sont-ils riches ? Non, M , ils sont pauvres. Ou avez-vous 6i6 hier? Nous avons ete a 1'eglise. Ou serez-vous demain? Nous serons a 1'ecole. Ta soeur a-t-elle ete malade ? Oui, elle a ^te longtemps malade. Avez-voua des affaires (business)'! Oui, M , nous avons beaucoup d'affaires. N'etes-Ygus pas contents ? Non, M , nous sommes me'con- tents. Pourquoi (why) etes-vous me- Nous avons eu une triste (sad) contents ? nouvelle. Pourquoi avez-vous du chagrin ? Notre mere est tres -malade. Serais-tu content, si tu avais Oui, M , je serais bien content. beaucoup de livres? 62 XII. DOUZIEME XII. DOUZIEME LEgON. DEMONSTRATIVE AND INTERROGATIVE ADJEC- TIVES. Adjectives in French agree in gender and number with the nouns they limit ; form the plural according to the rules given for nouns (L. n.) ; form the feminine by adding e mute to the masculine. If the masculine ends in e, the feminine is the same. Irregular formations will be given in the vocabularies until the full rules are given, L. xvu. 1. The Demonstrative Adjectives are : Ce, fern, cette, this, that ; plur. ces, these, those. Ce ci, fern, cette cet is used instead ce. Ex. : Get arbre, this tree (instead ofce arbre.) Cet liabit, this or that coat (instead of ce habit). 4. The Interrogative Adjective is, in the singular, quel, fern, quette; plur. quels, quelles, which or what? Ex.: Quel livre, which book ? plur. quels livres, which or what books ? QueUe Jieur, which or what flower ? It answers also to the exclamative what a / Ex. : Quel beau tableau I what a beautiful picture 1 DEMONSTRATIVE ADJECTIVES. 63 VOCABULARY. La plante, the plant. I'ceuf, m. the egg. h champ, the field. haut, f. haute, high. la couleur, the color. beau, f. belle, beautiful. lafilk, the girl. grand, f. grande, large, great. le bceuf, the ox. bon, f. 6orcwe, good, fa vache, the cow. frop, too. mais, but. Vheure, f. the hour. connaisscz-vous, do you know ? Ja ro&e, the dress. READING EXERCISE 12. Cevcrre. Cette pomme-ci. Cethomme. Cesbas. Cesbottes- 1k. Cette boite est haute. Ces enfants sont pauvres. Le frere de ce gar9on. Deux livres de ce cafe. Jo donne ces poires h cette fille-ci. La meme couleur. Nous avons achete les memes plumes. J'ai vu ces chiens-la. Quels chiens avez-vous vus ? Quel beau cheval ! Quelle belle maison ! Le fils de cet homme-la est trea grand. Quelle heure est-il? II est trois heures (o'clock). II est une heure. THEME 12. 1. This king js rich. 2. This queen is also rich. 3. This man is poor. 'These men are poor. 5. That child is not good (sage). 6. That woman is not contented. 7. This tree is very high. 8. Those trees are not very high. 9. Whose (a qui) is this pencil ? 10. Whose are these pens? 11. The color of that dress is beauti- ful (Idle). 12. The field of that man is large. 13. These oxea are larger (plus grands) than those cows. 14. I give the bread to this boy. 15. I give these flowers to those girls. 16. The parents of those children are very good. 17. Which boy? 13. Which apples? 19. What a beautiful picture ! 20. The pleasure of those girls was not very great. 21. What o'clock is it (transL whicL hour is it?) 22. It is four o'clock (trans! . four hours). 23 We have read (lu) the same books. XIH. .TKEIZEME CONVERSATION. A ^ui (whose) est co canif ? A qui sont cos gants ? Ou est la fille de cette femmo ? Connaissez-vous cette flour ? Connaissez-vous le pere de ce gar^on-la ? Quel papier voulez-vous ? Ces plumes-ci sont-elles bonnes ? Cette e'glise est-elle haute ? A qui donnez-vous ces fleurs ? A qui donnez-vous ces crayons ? Trouve-t-on de 1'or dans ce pays? Voulez-vous (do you wish, lit- erally, wish you) ces bas-ci ou ces gants-la ? Trouvez-vous ces couleurs belles ? Quelle heure est-il ? II est a ma scour. Ils sont a Mademoiselle Julie. Elle est au jardin. C'est une rose. Non M , mais je connais (/ know) sa mere. Donnez-moi ce papier-Ik. Oui, M , elles sont tres-bonnes. Oui, elle est tres-haute. Je les donne a cette fille-ci. Je les donne a ce gargon-la. Oui, M , ce pays-ci est riche en or. Donnez-moi ces gants-la. Oui, ces couleurs sont tres-belles. II est quatre heures. XIII. TREIZIEME LEgON. POSSESSIVE ADJECTIVES, I The Possessive Adjectives are : mon, fern. ma y plnr. mes, my. ton, " ta, " tes,thy. son, " sa, " ses, his. her, its. noire " noire, " nos, our. votre, " votre, " vos, your. leur, " Igur, " leurs, their. Ex. : Mon pere, ta mere, ses freres, notre ami, , leurs parents. POSSESSIVE ADJECTIVES. 65 2. The possessive adjectives are repeated in French before each substantive, and agree with it in gender and number : Monfrere et ma sceur, my brother and sister. 3. Mon, ton, son, are used instead of ma, ta, sa, before feminine words beginning with a vowel or h mute, in order to avoid the hiatus which would result from the meeting of the two vowels. Ex. : Mon amie, my (female) friend; sondme, his soul. 4. Son, sa, ses, each mean his, her, and its; they agree in gen- der with the following noun, as : Lepere aime son fits, the father loves his son. La mere aime sonjils et safille, the mother loves her son and her daughter. 5. In French, votre is, from politeness, often preceded by the words : Monsieur, Madame, Mademoiselle ; plur. Messieurs, Mes- dames, Mesdemoiselles, which are not expressed in English, as, Monsieur votre pere, your father. Mademoiselle votre sozur, your sister. Messieurs vosfreres, your brothers. 6. In expressions such as " a friend of yours/' the possessive ad- jective .mist, be used in French, preceded by de, as, un de vos amis, une de mes tantes, an aunt of mine. 7. A possessive adjective must always precede a noun denoting a degree of relationship when a relative or friend is addressed, though none is used m English. Ex. JBonjour ma sceur, good morning, sister; adieu, won cousin, good-by, cousin. The words papa, maman, and a few terms of endearment are excepted, as, lonjour papa, lonsoir maman. VOCABULARY. La demoiselle, tlie young lady. la grand 1 mere, the grandmother. la tante, the aunt. la poclie, the pocket. la canne, the cane. arrive', e, arrived. la casquette, the cap. parti, e, departed, gone. le grand-pere t the grandfather, perdu, lost. vieux, old. trouve', found, 5 66 XIII. TBEIZIEME LEON. BEADING EXERCISE 13. Mon pere est bon. Ma mere cst bonne. Ton frere est grand. -Ta socur n'est pas grande. Notre oncle a ete riche. Votre tanta est pauvre. Leui's parents seront contents. Mes cousins et mea cousines sont arrives. Les peres aiment (love) leurs enfants. No- tre grand'mere a perdu sa bourse. J'ai trouve la bourse de votre grand 'mere. Mon amie est arrivee. Madame votre mere est-ello ici (here) ? Non, elle n'cst pas ici ; elle est h Londres. Mesde* moiselles vos soeurs sont parties. THEME 13. 1. My dog is old. 2. Thy book is good. 3. My book and (my) pen. 4. My books and pens. 5. Your garden is beautiful. 6. Your flowers are beautiful (belles). 7. My sister has lost her watch. 8. Our sisters have found their letters. 9. These children have lost their father. 10. These parents have lost then* children. 11. Here is (void) thy stick. 12. Your cousins (f.) have been in our garden. 13. My soul is immortal (immortelle). 14. We have received this letter from our aunt. 15. Our uncle's horse (the horse of our uncle) is old. 16. Where is your father ? 17. Where is your sister? 18. I have found the purse of your mother. CONVERSATION. Oil est rnon frere? II est all< (gone) au jardin. Ou est ton livre ? Le voila sur la table. Qui a perdu sa casquette ? Charles a perdu sa casquette. Qui a trouve nos crayons ? Henri les (them) a trouve's. Que ^herchez-vous (are you Je cherche mes plumes. looking for) t A qui est cette canne? Elle est h Monsieur votre oncle, A qui sont ces gants ? Us sont h Mademoiselle votra soeur. Voulez-vous mes crayons ? Non, mcrci (thank you) . Connaissez-vous mon amie ? Oui, je la coonais (know her) . CAEDINAL NUMBERS. 67 Oil etait Monsieur votre pere ? II etait h Berlin. Ou as-tu trouve' ta bourse ? Elle etait dans ma poche. Qui est arrive aujourd'hui ? La fille de mon oncle. A vcz-vous etc dans votre champ ? Non, Monsieur, nous avons e*t^ dans notre jardin. De qui avez-vous recji cette "belle C'est un cadeau (present) de ma canne ? grand'mere. "7 XIV. QUATORZIEME CARDINAL NUMBERS. I* The Cardinal Numbers are : Un, une, one. deux, two.. trois, three. quatre, four. cinq, fi9^ - " six, six. sept, seven. huit, eight. neuf, nine. dix, ten. f onze, eleven. douze, twelve. treize, thirteen. quatorze, fourteen, quinze, fifteen. seize, sixteen. dix-sept, seventeen. dix-huit, eighteen. dix-neuf, nineteen. vingt, twenty. vinqt et un t twenty-one. vingt-deux, twenty-two. vingt-trois, twenty-three. vingt-quatre, twenty-four. vingt-cinq, twenty-five, etc. trente, thii'ty. quarante, forty. cinquante, fifty. soixante, sixty. soixante-dix, seventy. soixante-onze, seventy-one. soixante-douze, seventy-two. soixante-treize, seven ty- three- soixante-quatorze, seventy-four . soixante-quinze, seventy-five. soixante-seize, seven ty-six . soixante-dix-sept, seventy-seven, soixante-dix-huit, seventy-eight. soixante-dix-nevf, seventy-nine. quatre-vingts, eighty. quatre-vingt-un, eighty-one. quatre-vmgt-deux, eighty-two. 68 XIV. QUATOHZIEME LEQCN. quaire-vingt-dix, ninety. cent deux, a hundred and two, etc* quatre-vingt-onze, ninety-one. deux cents, two hundred. qncdrt-wngt-douse, ninety-two. trols cents, three hundred, etc. quatre-vingt-treize, ninety-three, etc. quinze cents, fifteen hundred. cent, a hundred. milk, mil, a thousand. cent un, a hundred and one. un million, a million. Ex.: Cinq enfants, five children. Trenie-six chevaux, thirty-six horses. Trois cent quatre-vingt-quinze aunes, 395 yards. L'an mil huit cent soixante-cinq, the year 1865. Et, and, must be expressed before un after vingt, trente, quarante, ciniftante\ toixante, as : vingt ct un, etc. Et is also often used in soixante et onze. 2. The cardinal numerals do not admit of change in their termi- nations except un, which takes an e in the feminine, and cenj and quatrwingts. Cent takes an s when several hundreds, not followed by another number, are mentioned, as : Trois cents francs, 300 francs. Sept cents personnes, 700 persons. But : Sept cent vingt personnes, 720 persons. 3. Quatre-vingts loses its s when followed by another numeral. Ex.: r Quatre-vingts e'coliers, 80 pupils. But: Quatre-vingt-deux aunes, 82 yards. 4. Cent and mille are not accompanied by the indefinite article as in English. Ex. : A hundred or a thousand pounds, cent ou mille livres. 5. When one thousand is used for dates it is rendered in French by mil, with one I only, thus : L'an or en mil huit cent cinquante.-liuit, in the year 1P5S. 6. The expression, "I am 20, 30, 40, etc., years old," cannot be rendered literally, but must be expressed thus : - the second. le trentieme, the 30th. le, la deuxieme, } le quarantieme, the 40th. le troisteme, the third. le cinquantieme y the 50tti- k quatrieme, the fourth. le soixantieme, the 60th. le cinquieme, the fifth. le soixante-dixieme, the 70th. le Kixi'eme, the sixth. le soixante-onzieme, the 71st. le septieme, the seventh. le soixante-douzieme, the 72d, etc. le huitieme, the eighth. le quatre-vingtieme, the 80th. le neuvieme, the ninth. le quatre-vingt-unieme t the 81st. le dixieme, the tenth. le quatre-vingt-dixieme, the 90th. le onzieme, the eleventh. le centieme, the 100th. le douzieme, the twelfth. le cent et unieme, the 101st. le treizieme, the thirteenth. le cent deuxieme, the 102d r etc. le quatorzieme, the fourteenth le cent vingtieme, the 120th. le quinzicme, the fifteenth. le deux centieme, the 200th. le seiziems, the 16th. le six cent soixante-quinzieme y the le dix-septieme, the 17th. 675th. le dix-huitieme, the 18th. le mittieme, the 1000th. le dix-neuvieme, the 19th. le dernier, the last. 72 XV. QUINZIEME LEfON. **t ' 2. Unieme is used only after vingt, trente, quar ante, etc., os: Charles est le vingt et unieme de sa classe. 3. Days of the month (except le premier and le dernier) are expressed by cardinal numbers, as : The first of April, le premier Avril But : The 2d, 3d, 4th, etc., of May, le deux, trois, quatre, tc., mai for de jnai). The eleventh of March, le onze (without apostrophe) mars. The twentieth of June, le vingt juin. The question, " What day of the month is it to-day? " is trans- lated : Quel quantieme avons-nous aujourd'hui ? or, Quel jour du mois avons-nous ? The English " on the sixth," etc., is rendered in Trench, without prepo- sition, le six Ex. : On the sixth of May, le six mai. 4. Proper names of princes, etc., take in French the cardinal numbers without the article, except the first and sometimes the sec- ond, as : Henri premier, Henry the first. Henri second or deux, Henry the second. Henri quatre, Henri the fourth. Louis quatorze, Louis the fourteenth. Note. The German Emperor, Charles V., bears in French the name of Charles* Quint, and the Pope Sixtus V. that of Sixte- Quint. 5. Numeral adverbs are formed from ordinal numbers by adding ment or -ement to the final : Premierement, firstly. Deuxiemement, secondly. Troisiemement, thirdly, etc. 6. Fractional numbers are expressed by ordinal numbers, as in English, but only from five upwards, as : Un cinquieme, a fifth. Un sixieme, a sixth. Un huitieme, an eighth. Un dixieme, a tenth- Tho others are as follows : Half (adj.), demi. f. demie. The half, la moitie' (noun). A third, itn tiers. A quarter or fourth, un quart. One pound and a half, une livre et demie. ORDINAL NUMBERS. 73 7. The hours of the day or night are expressed thus : Two o'clock, deux heures. A quarter past two, deux heures et (un) quart. Half past two, deux heures et demie. A quarter to three, trois heures moins un quart. At twelve o'clock (at noon), a midi. At twelve o'clock (midnight), a minuit. 8. Proportional numbers which express a quantity multiplied, are : Simple, simple. quadruple, fourfold. double, double, twofold. centuple, centuple, a hundred-fold. triple, triple, threefold. VOCABULARY. Janvier, January. Dimanche, Sunday. Fevrier, February. Lundi, Monday'. Mars, March. Mardi, Tuesday (and on Tuesday). Avril, April. . Mercredi, Wednesday. Mai, May. Jeudi, Thursday. Jain, June. Vendredi, Friday. Juillet, July. Samedi, Saturday. Aout, August. le siede, the century. Sq&ewbre; September. Vincendie, m. a fire, conflagration. Octobre, October. lapartie, the part, portion. Novembre, November. la place, the place. Decembre, December. la classe, the class. en Janvier, in January. a present, at present. nous vivons, we live. numero, number (denoting order, as nombre, number. number of a house, of a rule, of a page). 9. RULE FOR il AND ce AS EXPLETIVE SUBJECTS OF etre. Use il if the verb is followed: 1. by an adjective limiting something which comes after it in the sentence ; 2. by temps or by the hour of (he day. In all other cases use ce. Ex. Faites cela, c'est facile, do that, it is easy. But, II est facile de faire cela, it is easy to do that. II est temps de le faire, ifc is time to do it. II est six heures, it is six o'clock. C'est vous, ce n 'est pas mpi, it is you, it is not T. 74 XV. QUINZIEME READING EXERCISE 15. Je suis dans ma soixante-douzieme annee. Charles cst le pre- mier de sa classe. Louis est le neuvieme, Henri le dix-huitieme et Jules le dernier. Le pape ( pope) Gregoire VII etait Fenneini de Henri IV. Nous vivons dans le dix-neuvieine siecle. Romulus fut le premier, Numa Pompilius le second roi de Rome. Pierre premier fut surnomme (was surnamed) le grand. Avril est le quatrieme, Juin le sixieme et Decembre le dernier mois de F annee. La semaine est la cinquante-deuxieme partic de 1'annee. Ma sosur Elisabeth est nee le vingt-huit juillet, mil huit cent trente-cinq. J'ai re9u trois livres et demie dc cafe ct cinq livrcs et un quart de sucre. Charles XH ctait roi de Suede. Le 27 (dc) septembre 1829, un incendie detruisit (destroyed) a Constantinople 11,000 inaisons; 700 personnes perirent (perished) dans les flammes. THEME 15. 1. A month is the twelfth part of a year. 2. What day of the month is it to-day? 3. It is the 24th [of] June. 4. I am the third, my cousin John the seventh. 5. January is the first, Febru- ary the second, March the third month of the year. 6. Napoleon died at St. Helena (Sainte-Helene) the 5th of May, 1821. 7. My grandmother is at present in her 78th year. 8. What o'clock (quelle heure) is it now ? It is four o'clock, or half past four. 9. Louis the Sixteenth, king of (de) France, was beheaded (fut de" capite) at Paris the 21st of January, 1793. 10. Frederick the Second was king of Prussia. 11. Peter the Great of Russia died at St. Petersburgh (St. Peterslodrg) the 8th of February, 1725, in the 53d year of his age.^ 12. We have received 6J pounds cf cof- fee, li pounds of sugar, and 2J pounds of tea. CONVERSATION. Quand etes-vous arrive ? Je suis arrive le premier jum. Quand avez-vous vu votre mere ? Hier a cinq heures. Mademoiselle Sophie cst-ello la Je crois (/ think) qu'elle est la premiere ou la deuxieme ? deuxieme. v Translate, in his 53d year. INDEFINITE ADJECTIVES. 75 Quel age a-t-elle ? Dans quelle annee est-elle nee ? Dans quel mois ? Quel jour ? De quel roi parlez-vous ? Quand mourut-il ? Quelle heure estril ? A quelle heure etes-vous parti ? Quel quantieme avons-nous au- i jourd'hui ? \ Corabien d'aunes voulez-vous ? Quand mourut Charlemagne ? Quel age a votre grand-pere ? Elle a quinze ans. Elle est nee en 1851. Au mois d'Octobre. Le onze. Nous parlons do Louis XVI. En 1793. II est sept heures et (un) quart cu sept heures et demie. Je suis parti a huit heures moins un quart. Nous avons le vingt-cinq. C'est le vingt-einq. Donnez-moi seize aunes et demio II mourut en 814, le 28 Janvier. II est a present dans sa quatre vintiemo anne'e. XVI. SEIZIEME LEyON. INDEFINITE ADJECTIVES. 1. The Indefinite adjectives precede the noun to which they be- long, and agree with it in number and gender. They are sometimes used pronominally without a nouir . They are as follows : Chaque> m. and f. tout,f.toute, every, all. nul, mule, ) maint, e, man}* a. quelque, some, any. quelques, pi. some. certain, e, a certain. plusieurs, pi. m. and f. several. divers, f. -es, ) , fc - 7 . different 76 XVI. SEIZIEME LEgON. Ex . Chaque maison, every house. quelques pommes, some apples. toute ville, every town. plusieurs tfcoliers, several pupils. aucun pays, no country. certains mots, certain, words. nulle regie, no rule. diffe'rentes enlreprises, different en maint homme, many a man. terprises. quelque argent, some money. 2. Tout has the double meaning of every and all or whole ; in tbe latter case it is accompanied by an article or a possessive adjec- tive. Toute ville (witbout article) signifies every town; toute la ville means all the town or the whole town. Tbe plural of tout is masc. tous, fern, toutes. Ex. : Tons les hommes, all men ; toutes les lettres, all tbe letters ; Tous ses enfants, all bis cbildren. 3. Aucun and nul can only be used of individual tbings, and an- swer to tbe Englisb not one. They require tbe particle ne to be prefixed to tbe verb. (In most cases tbe Englisb no is translated point de or pas de.) Ex. : Je n'ai aucunefaute, I have not one mistake. Je n'ai pas de (OT point de)faute, I have no mistake. 4. Quelconque, whatever, takes its place after tbe noun. Ex. Un livre quelconque, a (any) book "whatever. VOCABULARY. L'fyine, f. the thorn. mortel, -le, mortal. la chose, the thing. lafemme, the woman. le temps, time, weather. le motif, the motive. la nouvelle, the news. I'enncmi, m. the enemy. le nom, the name. . rare, rare. le paysan, the peasant. froid, e, cold., pretez, lend. le meme, the same. lafaute, the fault, mistake. dcpuis, since. Vcrreur, f. the error. a ime, loves. la version, the translation. quelque chose, something. BEADING EXERCISE 16. Nulle rose n'est sans epines. Notre maitre de musique donne chaque jour six lemons. Plusieurs personnes sont arrivees // ^'A READING EXERCISE 19. L'Europe est plus petite quo TAsie. L'Allemagne est plus fer- tile que la Hollande. L'abeille est 1'insecte le plus utile. L'or est le metal le plus pesant. Ta robe est moins belle quo la robe de ta socur. Monsieur S est un bomme tres-fort. Son frere ain6 (elder) est encore plus fort ; c'est 1'homme le plus fort quo (that) je con- naisse. L' elephant est le plus grand de tous les animaux terrestres. Les livres d'Emilie sent plus amusants que les notres (ours). Les chats sont moins fideles que les cbiens. Ces pommes-ci sont meil- leures que vos poires. Les notres sont les meilleures. Votre tante est plus laborieuse que sa fille. Londres et Paris sont les villes les plus grandes et les plus peuplees de FEurope. THEME 19. 1. The coffee was warm; the tea was still warmer. 2. This church is higher than the other. 3. Mary is the happiest girl in the world. 4. She is prettier than Louisa ; she is the prettiest of the sisters. 5. This house is not so (si) old as (que) the other. 6. This mountain is very high, higher than all the other mountains of this country. 7. The 22d [of] June is the longest, and the 22d of December the shortest day of the year. 8. The rose is the finest of all (the) flowers. 9. This wine is worse than water. 10. Have you any (de) better wine? 11. Yes, the red wine is better. 12. My wine is the best. 13. John is my best friend. 88 XX. VINGTIEMU LEgON. CONVERSATION. Mademoiselle Ma.ie, etes-vous Oh ! oui, je suis tres-hemeuse, heureuse ? plus heurcuse quo ma soeur. Votrc voisin est-il malheureux ? II est moins malheureux quo son frere qui est en Amerique. Quol cstle metal le plus utile? C'est le fer. Quelfl mctaux sont les plus pe- L'or, le platine et le plomb sont sants ? les plus pesants. Quelleestla plus attentive do C'est Madeleine, la fille de Mon- toutes vos ecoliercs ? sieur 13. Quel est le plus fort des ani- C'est Telepliant; c'est le plug maux terrestres. grand et le plus fort de tous les animaux terrestres. Quel est le mois le plus froid de C 'est le mois de Janvier. 1'annee ? Votre robe cst-elle aussi belle Non, elle est moins belle. que la robe de Julie ? Le tire cst-il cruel? * Oil trouve-t-on le meilleur fer? Oui, c'est le plus cruel de tousles animaux. Le meilleur fer se trouye (is found) en Suede. XX. VINGTIEME REGULAR VERBS. FIRST CONJUGATION. DONNER. 1. There are in French three regular conjugations, viz. : in er, tV, and re. Verbs in -oir belong to the irregular ones, as their root undergoes manifold changes.* The Infinitive mood is to be considered as the radical part oi * Only six other verbs are conjugated like recevoir, which is often given as the model of oiie conjugation. They will all be found L. XLIV. p. 189. REGULAR VERBS. 89 ground-form on which the conjugation depends. What precedes the ter- mination er, ir, or re, is the root, which, with regular verbs, always remains unaltered. To this are added the different terminations, by which persons, tenses, and moods are distinguished, and which are common to all the verbs of that same conjugation. FORMATION OF THE TENSES OF REGULAR VERBS. 2. There are primitive tenses and derived tenses. The primitive tenses are : the infinitive, the participle present, the past participle, the present indica* tive, the preterite. ?. From the present infinitive are formed : the future, by adding ai, and the conditioned, by adding air,, as : Inf. donner: Fut. je donnerai, and Cond. je donnerais; finir : Fut. je finirai, Cond. je finirais. In the third conju- gation the final e is dropped : vendre : Fut. je vendrai, Cond. je vendrais. 4. From the participle present are formed : the present of the subjunctive, by changing ant into e, as : donnant: queje donne; finissant: que je finisse; rendant: que je vende ; and the Imperfect Indicative by changing ant into ais, as : finissanl: jefinissais, etc. 5. With the participle past are formed all the compound tenses, by means of the auxiliaries avoir or etre, as: Part, past: donne", fini, vendu : j'ai donne*, j'avais fini, j'aurai vendu, etc. 6. From the present of the Indicative, viz. : from its 1st person singular and the 1st and 2d persons plural, the Imperative is formed, by suppress- ing the pronouns ,/e, nous, vous, as: donne (give), donnons, donnez; finis (&n- ish),fini'&&ris,jihissez f etc. 7. From the preterite is formed the Subjunctive imperfect, by changing the final ai into asse for the verbs of the first conjugation, and is into isse for the second and third conjugations. Ex.: je donnai: que je donnasse ; jt Jims: que je finisse ; je vendis : queje vendisse. CONJUGATION OF DONNER, TO GIVE. INDICATIVE. PRESENT TENSE. Je donno, I give, nous donnons, we give. tu donnes, tliou givest. vous donncz, you give. il donne, he gives, ils donnent, ) ,, v they give. latd, tu plazas, il plaf a, nous plaf umes, etc. 5. Verbs ending in -ayer, -oyer, -uyer change the y into i, whenever the letter y would be immediately followed by an e mute. Such are : Payer, to pay. employer, to employ. effrayer, to frighten. essuyer, to wipe. Pres. Je paz'e, tu paz'es, il paz'c, pi. nous payons, vous payez, ils paz'ent, Part. pr. Payant. J'emploie, tu emploics, il cmploie, pi. nous employons, vous em- ployez, ils emploient. P. pr. Employant. J'essuie, tu essuies, etc.; pi. ils c&uient. Impf. Je payais, etc.; pi. nous payions, vous payiez, etc. J'employais, etc.; pi. nous employions, etc. J'essuyais, etc.; pi. nous essuyions, etc. Fut. Je paierai, etc.; j'emploierai, etc.; j'essuierai, etc. Imper. Paie payez. Emploie employez. Essuie essuyez. 6. Verbs which in the Infinitive end in -ier, as : prier, to pray ; crier t to cry, are in some cases spelled with a double ii. This takes place in the 1st 7 98 XXI. VINGT ET UNIEMB and 2d persons plural of the Imperfect of the Indicative, and of the Present of the Subjunctive : Infinitive: Oublier, to forget. 2nd. Imperf. pi. nous onblzYons, vous oubhVez, ils oubliaient. Subj. Pres. pi. que nous prizons, que vous pnYez, etc. VOCABULARY. La vertu, virtue. la farce, strength. la beaut^ beauty. le bruit, the noise. prtferer, to prefer. la servante, the servant. I'amitig, f. friendship. la chambre, the room. le vent, the wind. le chemin, the way, road. la pluie, the rain. nettoyer, to clean. la terre, the earth. la pierre, the stone dever, to bring up, to educate. la cuisiniere, the cook. sicker, to dry. possder, to possess. bien, well. le jardinier, the gardener. READING EXERCISE 21. Le sage prefere la vertu a la beaute. L'amitid se paie (is paid) par Famitie. Les parents elevent leurs enfants. II gelera cette nuit, II a gele. Elle achete un L'vre. Les vents sechent la terre trempee (wet) par la pluie. Nous achetons des fruits. Yous acheteriez cette maison, si elle n'etait pas si chere. Appelez Jean. Nous partageons avec nos amis tout ce que (all that) nous avons. Ce jeune homme emploie bien son temps. Nous emploierons toutes nos forces. Cela m'effraie. Ce bruit m'a effraye'. La ser- vante nettoie les chambres. Les maitres aiment les ecoliers qui emploient bien leur temps. THEME 21. 1. The boy throws a stobe. 2. You always throw (throw al- ways) stones. 3. Call thy brother. 4. Call the servant. 5. 1 shall call John. 6. The cook buys eggs. 7. I buy a horse. 8. My father will also buy a horse. 9. Where dost thou take 1 this horse? 10. I hope to see you (vous voir) to-morrow. 11. What 1 Mener is applied to what moves of itself, porter, to what is carried by lifting from the ground, ORTHOGRAPHY OF SOME VERBS. 99 do you hope? 12. We hope nothing. 13. What are you eating there (la) ? 14. The child ate an apple. 15. You ate walnuts. 10. I placed the books on the table. 17. I pay everything (tout) 18. Thou payest nothing. 19. Let us well employ tour time. 20. My sons pay [for] what (ce que) they buy. 21. My uncle pos- sesses a large garden. 22. The gardener cleans the ways, 23. Wipe your tears (larmes). 24. The dog frightens the children. 25. We wiped the table. 26. I prefer coffee to tea (the). CONVERSATION. Qui a appele* ? Avez-vous nettoye les chemins ? Qui me protegera (protect) f Nettoies-tu la chambre ? Trouvez-vous cela cher ? Que mangeais-tu? Ou mene-t-on.ce chcval? Crois-tu (do you think) qu'il gele cette nuit? Aeheterez^vous du the ou du caf? Ou achetez-vous cotte farine ? Qui a jete cette pierre ? Que fit (did do) un jour un pere? Ton pere a appele. Pas encore; jo les nettoierai ce soir. Dieu te protegera. Je nettoie toute la maison. J'appelle cela tres-cher. Je niangcais des noix. On le mene chez le marechal-fer- rant (farrier). II a deja gele. Je n'aime pas le th6, j'acheterai du cafe. Chez le meunier (miller). Je crois que c'est Richard. II partagea ses biens entro ses trois file. 100 XXTT. VINGT-DEUXIEME XXII. VINGT-DEUXIEME LE^ON. SECOND CONJUGATION: FINIR. INDICATIVE. PRESENT TENSE. Je finis, I finish. nous finissons, we finish. tu finis, thou finishest. vous finissez, you finish. il finit, he finishes. ils finissent, ) .-, /? * n . 7 ^ 7 n is f they finish. elle finit, she finishes. elles finissent, ) IMPERFECT. Je finissais, I finished (was fin- nous finissions, wefini&ed. tu finissais, efc. \ishing} . vous finissiez, efc. il finissait, etc. ils finissaient, efc. PRETERITE. Je finis, I finished (did finish), nous finimes, we finished. tu finis, etc. vous finites, cfc. il finit, etc* ils finirent, e^c. FUTURE. Je finirai, I shall finish. nous finirons, we shall finish. tu finiras, etc. vous finirez, 6^c. il finira, etc. ils finiront, ei?c. CONDITIONAL. Jo finirais, I should finish. nous finirions, we should finish. tu finirais, efc. vous finiiiez, e^c. il finirait, etc. ils finiraient, e^c. INFINITIVE. Fiuir, to finish. de or a finir, to finish^ I SECOND CONJUGATION. 101 IMPERATIVE. Finis, finish. finissons, lee- us finish. ' \ - ' ' fmissez, finish. SUBJUNCTIVE. PRESENT. Que jo finisse, that I (may) fin- que nous {missions, thai we finish. quo tu finisses, etc. [ish. quo vous finissiez, etc. xi'd'il finisse, etc. qu'ils finissent, etc. IMPERFECT. Quo jo finisse, that I (might) que, n. finissions, that we (might) quo tu finisses, etc. [finish, que vous finissiez, etc. [finish. qu'il finit, etc. qu'ils finissent, etc. PARTICIPLES. PRESENT. PAST. Finissant, finishing. Fini, f. finie, finished. en finissant, by finishing. COMPOUND TENSES, H INFINITIVE. Avoir fini, to have finished. INDICATIVE. COMPOUND OF THE PRESENT. J'ai fini, I have finished. tu as fini, thou hart finished. il a fini, he has finished. nous avons fini, we have finished, etc. COMPOUND OF THE IMPERFECT. J'avais fini, / had finished, etc. COMPOUND OF THE PRETERITE. J'ous fini, I had finished, etc. COMPOUND OF THE FUTURE. J'aurai fini, I shatt have finished, etc. 102 XXII. V1NGT-DEUXIEME LEQON.. CONDITIONAL. J,'* CTais frji, I ! sllou ld have finished, etc. J'eusse fim, ) SUBJUNCTIVE. COMPOUND OF THE PRESENT. Que j'aie fini, that I (may) have finished, etc. COMPOUND OP THE IMPERFECT. Que j'eusse fini, that I (might) have finished, etc* PARTICIPLE. Ayant fini, having finished, etc. Conjugate in the same manner : bat ir, to build ; choisir, to choose ; rempfir, to fill, etc. EEM. 1. The verb hair, to hate, loses in the Present and Imperative sin- gular its diaeresis. Otherwise it is quite regular and retains the two dots. Pres. Je hais, tu hais, il hait, nous ha'issons, vous haissez, etc. Imper. Hais; pi. haissons, haissez. Pret. Je hais, I hated. HEM. 2. The verbjtfewnr, to flourish, has a second form for the Imperfect tense : Jefivrissais ; and also a second for the Part, present : fiorissant, e, both of which are only used in a figurative sense, as : une ville fiorissante, etc. VOCABULARY. Nourrir, to feed, nourish. saisir, to seize. che'ir, to obey. rendre, to render, return. remplir, to fill, fulfil. la tdche, the task. bdtir, to build. la pomme de terre, the potato. embettir, to embellish. I'occasion, f. the opportunity. punir, to punish. salir, to soil. le vice, vke. le palais, the palace. le devoir, the duty. choisir, to choose. lafiatterie, flattery. la couleur, the color. IP. menteur, the liar. READING EXERCISE 22. Le pain nourrit les hommss. Les bons enfants obeissent k leurs parents et & leurs maitres. E-emplis ce verre. Remplissez ces ver- res. Qui a rempli les boutcilles? Homulus et llemus batirent SECOND CONJUGATION. 105 la ville de Rome, Fan 753 avant Jesus-Christ. Lcs fleurs embel- lissent les jardins et les prairies. On punira les enfants qui n'obeis- sent pas a leur maitre. J'espere que vous aurez puni ce mdchant ga^on. Le maitre a puni le petit menteur. Notre voisin batit uno graude maison. Nos voisins batissent de grandes maisons. Jo batirais aussi, si j'avais plus d'argent. Je bais le vice, j'aimerai toujours la vertu. Hai'ssez le vice, il vous rend malbeureux. J'ai ton jours bai' le vice. Nous bai'ssions la flatterie. Ne salissez pas vos habits. Les sciences nourrissent la jeunesse et rejouissent la vieillesse. THEME 22. 1. I finish my exercise. 2. Tbe pupils finish their translations. 3. We seize the opportunity. 4. We seized the opportunity. 5. Why have you not seized the good opportunity ? 6. The chil- dren soil their clothes. 7. Bread and pofatoes nourish a great many men. 8. Do not punish Henry ; he has been ill. 9. Fill the glasses. 10. We should fill the bottles, if we had wine enough. " 11. The king builds a new palace. 12. Will you build a house? 13. I should build a large house, if I were rich. 14. Here are two colors : choose. 15. Which (laquelle) will you choose ? 16. I shall choose the blue. 17. If I had to (a) choose, I should choose the green color. 18. Obey your (a vos) parents and (your) mas- ters. 19. I hate nobody. 20. Hate nobody. 21. We hate vice. 22. We have always hated vice. CONVERSATION. Voici deux couteaux : un grand Je choisirai le petit qui cst le plus et un petit. Lequel (which) joli. choisirez-vous ? Get homme remplit-il ses de- Pas toujours. voirs? Avez-vous rempli toutes les bou- Non, Monsieur, je n'avais pas as< teilles ? sez de vin pour les remplir. Qui batit cette bello maison? (Test mon voisin qui la batit. 104 XXII. VINGT-DEUXIEME Ne batirez-vous pas aussi ? Oui, je batirai aussi Tannde pro chaine (next). Pourquoi ne batissez-vous pas a Je batirais encore cette amide, si present (now}** j'avais assez d'argent. Qui a sali ce livre ? C'est Martin. Comment as-tu fait (done) cela ? La plume est tombee dessus (up- on it). Avez-vous fini votre theme ? Nous finirons notre theme cc soir. Qui a bad la ville de Rome ? Romulus et Remus. Qui a puni mon fils ? Le maitre de musique. Ne trouvez-vous pas quo j'ai em- Certainement, ce jet d'eau (fowl- belli mon jardin ? tain) embellit beaucoup votra jardin. Ilai'ssez-vous le vice ? Oui, je hais tous les vices. Pourquoi hai'ssez-vous-votre yoi- Je ne le (him) hais pas ; je^hais sin ? seulement ses flatteries. BEADING LESSON. LE MOINEAU ET SES PETITS. Un moineau avait place* son nid dans le trou d'un mur. E elevait tranquillement sa famille. II aurait ete bien hcureux, si ses petits eussent voulu 1'ecouter : mais a chaque instant ils yenaient sur le bord du nid. Le pauvre oiseau tremblait dans la crainte do los voir tomber. II leur disait de rester dans le fond du nid, mais ils ne le voulaient point (would not do so.) Un jour qu'il etait sorti, ils proSterent de son absence et s'avan- eerent tant qu'ils tomberent k terre. Ils n'avaient pas encore de plumes aux ailes ; ainsi ils ne purent (could not) se sauver. Un gros chat, qui passait par-la, les vit (saw them)] il n'avait pas dine, il les saisit, et les mangea sur-le-champ. C'est ainsi qu'ils furont punis dc (for) leur desob&ssance. THIRD CONJUGATION. 105 Le moinwu, the sparrow. Tester, to remain. les petits, the young ones. lefond, the bottom. le nid, the nest. tant, so much. le iron, the hole. I'aile, f. the wing. le mur, the wall. sauver, to save ; se , to fly away, tranquittement, quietly. passer, to pass by. couter t to listen, obey. par-la, there. I'instant, m. the moment. diner, to dine. ils venaient, they came. sur-le-champ, at once, immediate 1 7. la ci'ainte, the fear. la d&obtfissance, disobedience. XXIII. VINGT-TROISIEME LEgON, THIRD CONJUGATION: VENDEE. INDICATIVE. \ PRESENT TENSE. Je vends, I sell. nous vendons, we sett. tu vends, thou sellest. vous vendez, you sett. il vend, he sells. ils vendent, ) elle (on) vend, she (one) sells, elles vendent, j e ^ IMPERFECT. Je vcndais, Isold (ivas selling), nous vendions, we sold. tu vendais, thou soldst, vous vendiez, you sold. il vendait, he sold. ils vendaient, they sold. PRETERITE. Je vendis, I sold (did sell). nous vendimes, we sold. tu vendis, etc. vous vendites, etc. il veiidit, etc. ils vendirent, etc. 106 XXIII. V1NGT-TROISIEME FUTURE. Je vendrai, I shall sell. nous vendrons, we shall sell. tu vendras, etc. vous vendrez, etc. il vendra, etc. ils vendront, etc. CONDITIONAL. .Je vcndrais, I should sell. nous vendrions, we should sell. tu vendrais, etc. vous vendriez, etc. il vendrait, etc. ils vcndraicnt, etc. IMPERATIVE. Vends, sell. vendons, let us sell. vendez, sell. SUBJUNCTIVE. PRESENT. Que je vende, that I (may) sell, que n. vendions, that we(rnay)seU> que tu vendes, etc. que vous vendiez, etc. qu'il vende, etc. qu'ils vendent, etc. IMPERFECT. Que je vendisse, that Imight sell, que nous vcndissions. que tu vendisses, etc. que vous vendissiez. qu'il vendit, etc. qu'ils vendissent. PARTICIPLES. PRESENT. PAST. Vendant, selling. Yendu, f. vcndue, sold. en vendant, by selling. COMPOUND TENSES. INFINITIVE. i Avoir vendu, to have sold. INDICATIVE. COMPOUND OF THE PRESENT. J'ai vendu, / have sold. tu as vendu, thou hast sold. il a vendu, he has sold. nous avons vendu, we have sold, etc. THIRD CONJUGATION. 107 COMPOUND OF THF I3IPERFECT. J'avais vendu, / had sold, etc. % COMPOUND OF THE PRETERITE. J'eus vendu, I had sold, etc. COMPOUND OF THE FUTURE. J'aurai vendu, / shall have sold, etc. CONDITIONAL. J'aurais vendu, ^T'eusse vendu, PARTICIPLE. ^ Ayant vendu, having sold. SUBJUNCTIVE. COMPOUND OF THE PRESENT. Que j'aie vendu, that I (may) have sold, dc. COMPOUND OF THE IMPERFECT. Q ue j'eusse vendu, that I (might) have sold, etc. Conjugate after this model : perdre, to lose ; attendre, to wait, to expect ; rtfpondre, to answer, etc. HEM. 1. The verb battre, to beat, is regularly conjugated, except that in the singular of the Present Indicative and in the Imperative it loses one t. Pres. Je bats, tu bats, il bat, nous battons, vous battez, etc. Imp. bats, Part, battu. REM. 2. The verb rompre^ to break, is conjugated in the Pres. Indicative as follows : Je romps, tu romps, il rompt, nous rompons, etc. (All the rest is regular.) REM. 3. The verb rire, to laugh, is of the 3d conjugation : Pres. Je m, til ris t il rit, nous rions, etc. But the Part, past is ri, and the Pret. Je ris, tu ris, il rit, nous rimes f vous rites, Us rirent. Fut. Je rirai, etc. REM. 4. Conclure, to conclude, is regular, as : Pres. Je conclus, tu con' dus, il conclut, nous concluons, etc. Fut. Je conclurai. Except that in the JPrcterite, it has Je conclus (notje concluis). 103 XXIIL V1NGT-TEOI3IEME YOCABULARY. La lague, the ring. droit, e, right. rfyandre, to spread, to shed. les armes, the arms. le bruit, the report, the noise. la sagesse, "wisdom. la mort, death. la Grece, Greece. defendre, to forbid, to defend. I'honneur, m. the honor. entendre, to hear. perdre, to lose. fumcr, to smoke. attendre, to wait for, expect. repondre, to answer. vnpeu, a little. le sang, the hlood. le tonnerre, the thunder. I'ceil, the eye. le travail, the work. gauche, left, prendre, to take. de'sirer, to wish. HEADING EXERCISE 23. J'ai vcndu mon cheval. Nous avons vendu nos clievaux. Je pcrdis hier ma bourse. Yous perdites votre bague. La vieille femme ycndait des cerises. Nous vendions du fromage et du beurre. On a repandu le bruit de la mort du roi. II est defendu de fumer ici. Qui defend cela ? Entendez-vous le bruit ? Qui a battu mon cliien? II bat son cheval. Repondez-moi (me), mon fils. Ke- ponds h, ton maitre. Je repondis quo j'etais malade. Ce tyran cruel a repandu beaucoup de sang innocent. Jules a deja perdu son ceil gauche, il pcrdra aussi son ceil droit. Tu perds ton argent. Nous perdons tout notre temps. Le bataillon prit les armes et de- fendit la ville. Socrate repandit beaucoup de sagesse a Athenes et dans toute la Grece. Pourquoi riez-vous? Je ne ris pas. Je n'ai pas ri. THEME 23. 1. I sell my dogs. 2. My friend sells Ms horses. 3. We sell our houses. 4. I defend my honor. 5. Do you defend your friends ? 6. Thou losest thy time. 7. You lose your time. 8. I lost my money. 9. My brother has lost his cane. 10. He will lose everything. 11. The pupils will lose their places. 12. We expect a letter from our grandfather. 13. Do you also expect a letter? 14. No, sir, I expect nothing. 15. James (Jacques) and William expect (a) good news. -16. We have waited an hour. THIRD CONJUGATION. 109 17. Wait a little. 18. Why don't you wait? 19. Do you heat the music? 20. I hear nothing. 21. I did not hear the thunder, 22. Have you answered (to) her letter? 23. I have not yet an- swered. 24. I shall answer to-morrow. 25. Answer me (moi). 26. When (quand) I heard the thunder, I came down fromf tho mountain. 27. The poor children have lost their father. 28. They will lose also their mother ; she is very ill. 29. Do not break my stick. CONVERSATION. Qui a perdu cctte bourse ? A-t-il aussi perdu de F argent ? Pourquoi perdez-vous votre temps a jouer ? A quoi (at what) jouez-vous ? Qui defend les brebis (sheep) ? As-tu fini ton travail ? Ton frere a-t-il fini sa version ? Avez-vous cntcndu le bruit du vent (wind) ? Qui a defendu de manger de ces pommcs? Comment etcs-vous descend u ? Je crois (/ think) que Jules a perdu une bourse. Jc crois qu'il a perdu deux francs. Nous n'avons rien a faire (to do), nous avons fini notre tache. Nous battons le cerceau (hoop). Le chien du berger (shepherd). Oui, M 1 , mon travail est fini. Jo ne cro's pas; il la (it) finira demain. Lo vent est terrible. Notre mere 1'a defendu ce matin. Je suis descendu par- Tescaher (stairs) . Pourquoi salissez-vous vos Nous nettoyons la cage de nos mains ? oiseaux. Pourquoi ne punit-on pas ce II sera puni apres la leon. mechant enfant. Qui (whom) attendez-vous ? J'attcnds Monsieur le profcsseur. Attcndicz-vousquclvp.'un(s0??2e J'attendais mon cousin de Paris. one) ? | Jo suis descendu do. 110 XXIV. 7INGT-QUATRIEME READING LESSON. LE ROI DE PERSE. [Jn roi de Perse certain jour Chassait avec toute sa cour ; II cut soif, mais dans cette plaine On ne trouvait point de fontaine, Pres de Ih seulement etait un grand jardin Rempli de beaux cedrats, d'orangcs, de raisins : "A Dieu ne plaise que j'en mange I" Dit le roi ; " ce jardin courrait trop de danger : Si je me permettais d'y cueillir une orange, Mes visirs aussitot mangeraient le verger." Certain jour, one day. le ctfdrat, the lemon. chasser, to go a hunting. a Dieu ne plaise, God forbid. la soif, thirst. courrait, would run. seulement, only. permettre, to permit. la plaine, the plain. cueillir, to gather, y, there. la fontaine, fountain, spring. aussitot, immediately. pres de la, in the neighborhood. le verger, the orchard. XXIV. VINGT-QUATRIEME LEgON. DISJUNCTIVE PERSONAL PRONOUNS.* With personal pronouns it must be observed whether they are intimately connected with or governed by a verb, as : I speak, we go, I give you, etc.; if this be the case, they are conjunctive (pronoms conjoints) ; or if they are em- ployed by themselves or with a preposition; in this case they are termed dis* junciive (pronoms disjoints). We begin with the latter. 1. The disjunctive personal pronouns are: moi (I or me), toi (thou or thee), ncus (we or us), vous, (you), lid (he or him), elk (she or lier), ev& (they or them, masculine), ellcs (tliey or them, * See P. n, L. ix, DISJUNCTIVE PERSONAL PRONOUNS. Ill feminine), md soi (self, one's self). These pronouns, it will be perceived, do not change their form to indicate case, the nominative and objective being the same. Ex. : Qui a dlt cela ? Moi, lui, elle, nous, etc. Who has said this ? I, he, she, we, etc. C'esl pour moi, pour toi, pour elle, etc. That is for me, for thce, for her, etc. Je parle de toi, de vous, d'elles, d'eux, etc. I speak of thee, of you, of them, of them, etc. Nous pensons a lui, a vous, a eux, etc. We think of him, of you, of them, etc. 2. All these disjunctive pronouns may take the word -meme, pi. -rnemen, whenever in English the word self is joined to a pronoun. Ex. : S. moi-meme, (I) myself. PI. nous-memes, ourselves. toi-meme, thyself. vous-memes, yourselves. lui-mcme, himself. eux-memes, [ themsclveg . elle-nieme, herself. elles-memes, ) soi-meme, one's self. 3. When a stress is laid upon personal pronouns, they are often preced- ed by c'est, c'e'tait, etc., as in English : S. c'est moi, it is I. PL c'est nous, it is we. c'est toi, it is thou. c'est vous, it is you. c'est lui, it is he. ce sont eux, ) it . g ^ c'est elle, it is she. ce sont elles, 3 The verb ctre following ce is put in the plural only when the pronoun or noun which follows that verb is in the third person plural : c'e'taient mes amis ce sont eux, but, c'est nous. 4. Soi is only used of mankind in a general sense, and of inanimate ob- jects in the singular. Ex. : Doit-on toujours penser a soi, ought one always to think of one's self 7 VOCABULARY. Inconstant, inconstant. la pelote, tho ball. ressembler, to resemble. venez, come. envoyer, to send. casser, to break. demeurer, to live. sorti, gone out. la corbeille, the basket. age", old. I'aimant, m. the loadstone. ni ni, neither, nor. attirer, to attract. 112 XXI Y. VINGT-QUATRIEME LEgON. READING EXERCISE 24. Qui dit (says) cela ? Moi, lui, clle, cux-memes, elles- memes. Pcnscs-tu a inoi ? Jc pense a toi. Jo pense a vous, a clles, a eux. Jc n'ai pas pense a toi, nion pauvre enfant. L'hommo inconstant ne resscmble jamais a lui-meme. Nous nous souvenons (ive remember') de vous, de lui, d'elles, d'eux. Envoyez- moi de 1'argent. Sans moi, elle serait tombee. Je suis plus grand quo toi, quo lui, qu'clle. Qui a ete ici, lui ou elle ? Venez avec moi, avec nous. Joue avec lui. Joucz avee elles. On parle de nous. Tu paries de lui et d'ello. Nous parlons souvent (often) de vous. Je defends mon honneur moi-nieme. L'aimant attire le fer a soi. Nous nous moquons (we mock at) d'eux. Ah ! vous vous moquez de nous ! THEME 24. 1. My brother and I (we) have heard the noise. 2. Who will have the ball, thouorhe? 3. Who has broken the stick? 4. Not I ! 5. You and he, (you) were not attentive. 6. She and Emily have f gone out. 7. Who hast gone out with them ? 8. Come with me. 9. Come to our house (cliez nous) . 10. Who speaks of me ? 11. I speak of you. 12. You speak of her and of her sister. 13. For whom is the medicine? 14. Ii-(elle) is for yourself. 15. Does she live with you? 16. She lives with us. 17. He is older than I. 18. I think of (a) you. 19. You do not think of me. 20. You always* think of yourself. 21. One must not (il ne faut pas) always think -of one's self. 22. Have you brought the book yourself? 23. Yes, I myself. 24. Does she play with us ? 25. She plays with them (in.) 2G. Is it himself? 27. Yes, it is him- self. 28. It is I ; it is not he. CONVERSATION. Q ui a dit cela ? Moi. Lui. Elle. Qui vient la ? C'cst nous, Pensez-vous a vos amis ? Je pense souvent a eux. * In French, the adverb usually follows the verb, f sont J cst. DISJUNCTIVE PERSONAL PRONOUNS. 113 Est-elle tombee ? Pour qui sont ces bottes ? A qui pensez-vous ? DQ qui parle-t-on ? Qui a apporte ccttc corbeille ? Qui a fait cela ? Est-elle arrivee seule ? Qui a ecrit (written) cetto lettre ? Que fait 1'aimant ? Qui a battu cet enfant ? Qui est venu avec toi ? Ou demeure-t-il ? Est-ce vous qui avez perdu cet argent ? Hcureusement non ! rnaig sans moi elle serait tombee. Elles son pour moi. Je pense a vous et a votre mere. On parle d'eux, d'clles. Ma soeur elle-meme. Ni lui, ni elle, ni nous, ni eux. Non, elle est aTrivee avec moi. Mon pere lui-meme. II attire le fer a soi. Ce n'est pas moi, c'est Leopold. Mon ami Jules. II demeure chez son oncle. Jtfon, ce n'est pas moi, c'est ma cousine Emilie. READING LESSON". LE ROSIER. C Tfte rose-bush.) 11 Qui veut (will) me donner un petit arbre pour mon jardin ?" disait Frederic a ses freres et a sa soeur. Legar "pere leur (them) avait donne a chacun un petit coin do terra a planter. <{ Ce n'est pas moi ! " dit Auguste. " Ni moi ! " s'ecria Louis. "Go sera moi ! " dit la bonne Charlotte ; " do quelle e.specc lo (it) veux-tu?" "Je voudrais (I should like) avoir un rosier," rcpondit Fi > deric ; *' le mien est tout jauni." " C'est bon," rdpliqua Charlotte. Puis elle prit (then she took) une pelle et alia (went) le retirer de terre. " Que vois-je (what do I see) ?" dit Frederic, " tu ra'en as toi- m&me^que (only) deux, et encore (besides) il y en a un si petit I Du moins no me donne pas le plus grand." 114 XXV. TINGT-CINQUIEME "Non, non ! " s'ecria sa soeur, " il pourraib encore (could again) se secher ; je puis jouir du plaisir de le voir fleurir dans ton jardin.' 1 (To be continued,) Chacun, e, each. puis, then. un petit coin de terre, a corner of Land, la pelle, the spade. nf moi, nor I either. retirer, to take out. sVcner, to call out, to cry. du moins, at least. Vespece, f. the sort, kind. se'cher, to dry. le mien, mine, tout, quite. se se'cher, to get dry, to wither. jauni, e, yellow, withered. jepuis, I can (from pouvoir). rtpliquer, to reply. jouir, to enjoy, voir, to see. XXV. VINGT-CINQUIEME LEgON CONJUNCTIVE PERSONAL PRONOUNS. These are ^'0 (I), nous (we), tu (thou), vous (you), il (he), plu. ils (they, m.), elk (she), plu. elles (they, f.).* Unlike the disjunctive personal pronouns, these, except vous and nous, vary to express different cases. Je has me when used either as the direct or indirect object of the verb : tu has te in the same cases - Of him, of her, of them, of it (m. or f.), are each represented by the pronoun en, generally referring to things : to him, to her, each by lid: to them (m. or f.), by leur. The objective case (direct object) of il, is le (him) , and of eUe t ifl la, (her): les (them) is the obj. plu. of both genders. POSITION OF CONJUNCTIVE PRONOUNS. GENERA.L RULE. Conjunctive pronouns precede the verb except in the Imperative affirmative. In the interrogative form the subject comes after the verb. * For on, of which se is used as the object and sot as the disjunctive, see Part IL L. xii. O9NJUNCTIVE PERSONAL PRONOUNS. 115 SPECIAL RULES. A. WITH ONE PRONOUN. 1. The nominative cases je, tu, il, elle, nous, vous, Us, or elles, usually precede the verb of which they are the subject : in an inter- rogative sentence, however, they are placed immediately after the verb. Ex. : Je pense, I think. nous parlons, we speak. tu esper&i f thou hopest. vous jouez, you play. Interrogative: Finis-tUy dost thou finish ? Vient-elle, does she come ? 2. The dtfect and indirect objects are placed immediately before the verb in ft simple tense, and before the auxiliary in a compound one. Ex. : Tu me dis, you tell me. Je vous donne, I give you. Elle m'a repondu, she has answered me. Charles nous a dit, Charles has told us. 3. If the sentence is negative, ne is put directly after the subject, before the governed pronoun, as : Je ne vous donne pas t I do not give you. Vous ne les avez pas vus, you have not seen them. ne m'a pas repondu, she has not answered me. Charles ne nous avail pas dit, Charles had not told us. 4. In the interrogative form, the object begins the sentence, then follows the verb with its subject. If the question is a negative one, ne begins the sentence : Me connaissez-vous, do you know me ? % Me Udme-t-il, does he blame me ? Les vois-tu, do you see them ? Vous a-t-il repondu, has he answered you ? Ne vous a-t-il pas repondu, has he not answered you? 6. When the verb is in the Imperative affirmative, the governed pronouns are put after it, in French as in English. In this case me 116 XXV. YINGT-CINQUIEME LEgON. and te are changed into moi and toi for the direct and indirect objects. Ex. : Donncz-moi, give me. Apportez-lui, bring (to) him. Manyez-les, eat them. Parlez-leur, speak to them. G. But when the Imperative is negative, the governed pronoun precedes the verb. Ex. : Ne me donnezpas, do not give me. Ne lui apportez pas, do not bring him. Ne les mangez pas, do not eat them. Ne leur parlez pas, do not speak to them. B. WITH TWO PRONOUNS. 1. When a verb, which is not in the Imperative affirmative, governs two pronouns, they are both placed immediately before the verb, so that the indirect object comes first, and the direct follows. Ex.: Je te le donne, I give it to thee (you). Vous I'apporte-t-ette, does she bring it , to , yon ? Ne nous l'apportera-t-il pas, will he not bring it to us ? On vous le dira, they will tell (it) yon. On ne vous le dira pas, they will not tell (it to) you. 2. An exception to the foregoing rule are the two indirect objects, lui (to him, to her), and leur (to them), which always follow the other governed pronoun. Ex. : Je le lui donne, I give it to him or her. Je ne le lui donne pas, I do not give it him. La lui donne-t-elle, does she give it him ? La leur donnera-t-il, will he give it to them 1 ? Je ne la leur ai pas donne', I have not given it to them. Ne le lui donnezpas, do not give it him. Pourquoi ne la leur pretez-vous pas, why do you not lend it to them ? 3. Of tw:> personal pronouns governed by the Imperative affimia- live the indirect object always stands last : Donnez-le-moi, give it me. Apportez-les-lui (leur) t bring them to him (to them). 4. If the Imperative is negative, both of them precede the verb CONJUNCTIVE PERSONAL PRONOUNS. 117 according to 6, and lid and leur follow the direct object, according toB, 2. Ex.: Ne me le donnez pas, do not give it me. Ne la lui apportez pas, do not bring it to him. Ne les leur envoyez pas, do not send them to them. VOCABULARY. Pardonner (a),* to pardon. tattler, to cut, mend. prefer (a), to lend. loner, to praise; to let. r&ompcnser, to reward. accompagner, to accompany. corriger, to correct. je promets, I promise. e'couter, to listen to. l'histoire,f. history. la vfrite', the truth. volontiers, willingly. READING EXERCISE 25. Jo vous cntends. II me pardonnera. Elle m'a pardonne. Al- fred m'a prete un livre aniusant. Pretez-moi votre livre. Je vous le pretcrai. II mo le donne. Tu me Fas donne. Elle me les don- nerait, si elle les avait encore. Vous a-t-il pardonne ? Lui as-tu dit (told) ccla ? Jo le lui ai dit. Leur a-t-on repondu ? Appelez ces ecoliers. Je les recompcnserai ; je leur donnerai de belles images. Tu les leur donneras demain. Ne te loue pas toi-meme. On ne se loue pas soi-meme. Elle nc vous ecoute pas. Elle ne m'ajDas ecoute. Tous ecoutera-t-il ? Yous ne me dites pas la veritev" 1 Je vous la dis. Cette plume cst trop molle ; voulez-vous avoir la bonte (kindness) de me la tailler ? Je vous la taillerai vo- lontiers. THEilE 25. 1. I praise thee. 2. Thou praisest me. 3. Do you play? 4. Do you hear? 5. Do you hear me ? 6. I hear you. 7. I do not Sell my house. 8. I do not sell it. 9. Do you sell your horses ? 10. I do not sell them. 11. We hear thee. 12. I call him. 13. Will you accompany me? 14. My father will accompany you. * This mark (a) denotes that the verb after which it is placed takes an indirect personal otiject. 118 XXV. VINGT-CINQUIEME LEQON. 15. Have you mended my pen? 16. I have mended it. 17. Lend me a pencil. 18. Lend him a pen. 19. Do not give him my book. 20. Do not give it him. 21. I promise you. 22. I promise it [to] you. 23. Tell (dites-} him (to him). 24. Tell them. 25. Tell it him. 26. Do not tell it [to] them. 27. I should give you some money, if you were more industrious. 28. Has she given him the gloves ? 29. She has given them to him. 80. She has not given them to him; she has given them to his brother. 31. Your translation is badly done (malfaite) ; correct it (/em.). 32. Pardon (me) my mistakes. 33. Have you cor- rected them? '34. Yes, I have (corrected them). CONVERSATION. M' entendez-vous ? Oui, je vous entends. Ne m' entendez-vous pas ? / Je ne vous ai pas entendu. Me pardonnerez-vous ? Je ne vous pardonnerai pas. De cjui avez-vous re^u cc livre C'cst Alfred qui me 1'a prete'. amusant ? Voulez-vous preter ce livre h Je le lui preterai volontiers. ma soeur ? Qui veut cettc plume ? Donncz-la-moi, s'il vous plait (if you please). Les aimez-vous ? Oui, je les aimo beaucoup. Dites-vous la verite ? Je la dis toujours. Qui vous accompagnera ? Mon cousin m'accompagnera jus- qu'a (as far as) Bruxelles. Vous a-tK>n raconte (told) une Oui, notre gvand'mere nous a ra- histoire ? conte une trcs-belle histoire. READING LESSON. SUITE DU RO SIEIl. transporte de joie, ernporta le rosier; et Charlotte le suivit plug joyeuse encore que lui. Le jardinier avait vu le trait d'amitie de la petite fille. H alia cnercLer (he went for*) un fceau Bureau DEMONSTRATIVE PRONOUNS. 119 " Voulez-vous quo je mettc (put) ccci & la place do votre rosier? " demanda-t-il h Charlotte. " Si vous n'en avez pas besom." . " Non," rdpondit-il, " je n'en ai pas besom." H le planta. Lc mois de Mai suivant, le rosier de Frederic porta les plus belles mscs, et tons les matins, Charlotte recevait un bouton h moitie ou- vcrt, pour le mettre dans ses cheveux. Lc sureau prit (took) racine aussi et devint (became) bientot si grand ct si e'pais que Charlotte y trouva de Tombrage dans la grande chalcur du jour. Transport^, enraptured. demander, to ask. emporter, to carry off. un bouton, a bud. le suivit, followed him. la moitie', half. joyeux, joyful. ouvert, open, opened. le trait, the trait. la racine, the root. ramitie, friendship. bientot, soon. un sureau d'Espagne, a lilac-tree. I'ombrage, the shade, ceci, this. la chakur, the heat. XXVI. VINGT-SIXIEME DEMONSTRATIVE PRONOUNS. 1. These are : masculine. feminine. Celui, tette, that, pi. ceux t celles, those. celui-ci, celle-ci, this, the latter, pi. ceux-ci, celles-ci, these^ celui-la, celle-la, that (one), tne former, pi. ceux-la f celles-la, those. 2* The pronouns /*, sJie i they, preceding a relative", must be translated by celui, celle, ceiuS, celles. Ex. : celui qui, t telle qui, she who ; ccux qui, celles qui, they who* 120 XXVI. YINGT-SIXIEME LEgON. 3. Celui, celle, ceux, celles, are used with the preposition de,m* stead of the English possessive case, when the governing noun is not expressed. Ex. : mon chapedu et celui de monfrere, my hat and my brother's ; ma plume et celle de ma sceur, my pen and my sixer's. REMARK. Cdui, celle, $-c., are used only before a relative or the prepo- sition de; in all other cases cdui-ci, cdle-ci, cdui-la, celle-la, $c., must be ased. Ex. : J*ai cdui-ci, je n'ai pas cdui-la, I have this one, I have not that one. 4. Ce } which we have seen as an adjective, is also a pronoun. It is then invariable, meaning this, that, it. It is used before the relative, as : ce qui (subj.), ce que (obj.), that which (what) ; ce dont, that of which. For the use of ce or il before the verb to be, sec Rule after the vocabulary of Lesson xv. See also Lesson xxiv. 3. 5. The compounds of ce, ceci, this, and cela, that, are used abso- lutely, without reference to any particular noun. Ex. : Je ne veux pas ceci, je veux cda. I do not want this, 1 want that. Ce queje dis, what I say. Que dites-vous de cela, what do you say of that ? Est-ce la votre plume, is this your pen ? C'est ma plume, that is my pen. Sont-ce la vos gants, are these your gloves ? Ce sont mes gants, these are my gloves. 6 In place of de and a with ce, ceci, cela, ceux-ci, and ceux-la, two other conjunctive pronouns are used, viz. : en and y. En is rendered in English by some, of it, of them, about it, about them etc. T corresponds to the English to it, to them, in it, in them, there, therein, etc. Ex. : Void du jamboji : en voulez-vous ? Here is ham, will you have some ? tPen prendrai un petit morceau. I shall take a little piece of it. Votre pere est-il aujardtn? Om, il y esi. Is your father in the garden ? Yes, lie is there. DEMONSTRATIVE PRONOUNS. 121 J'y vats aussi, I am going there also. Donnez-m'en donnez-lui-cn. Give me some give him some. Ypenses-tu, do you think of that ? Je lui en ai domuf, I have given him some of them (it). VOCABULARY. Le porte-feuille, the pocket-book. la recompense, the reward. lapeur, fear. bfnir, to bless. I'dme, the soul. pers&uter, to persecute. la noblesse, nobility. souliaiter, to wish. le corps, the body. enrichir, to enrich. commode, comfortable. Vagricultwre, f. agriculture. le conqugrant, the conqueror. fyalement, equal!/. jaune, yellow. tout de suite, directly. joli, e, nice, pretty. promet, promises. le commerce, the commerce. READING EXERCISE 26. Voici mon porte-feuille et celui de mon perc. Voici mes gants et ceux de ma soeur. Voulez-vous ceux-ci ou ceux-la ? Celui qui remplit ses devoirs est un honnete homme. Voulez-vous ceci ou cela ? Ceux qui sont contents, sont toujours heureux. Heu- reux celui qui trpuve un vrai ami ! Je prefere la noblesse de FuiS&lrcelie de la' naissance (birth). On croit (believes) ce qu'on espere. Ce que vous dites me fait peur. Qui vient la ? C'est moi. Ce sont eux. Ce qui est beau n'est pas toujours utile. Ne parlez pas de ce qui ne vous regarde (concern) pas. Alex- andre-le- Grand et Jules Cesar furent de grands conquerants ; ce- lui-la mourut dans sa jeunesse, celui-ci fut assassine (murdered}. THEME 26. 1. Here is your hat and your brother's. 2. I shall sell my house and my uncle's. 3. We speak of these, you speak of those. 4. Give me that one. 5. This is my pen. 6. These (ce) are your pencils. 7. Is this the garden of your aunt? 8. Are these the shoes 122 XXVIL VINGT-SEPTIEME of your sister? 9. No, these are the shoes of my cousin Eliza. 10. This ink (cette encre-ci) is blacker than that. 11. These gloves are white, those are yellow. 12. I prefer the "beauty of the soul to that (/.) of the body. 13. Agriculture and commerce are equally use- ful to man; the former nourishes us, the latter enriche^us. 14. My mother prefers this house io that ; this is smaller, but that is more comfortable. 15. Havo you (any) butter ? 16. Yes, I have some. 17. Give me some. 18. Here is black cloth. 19. I shall take ten yards of it (fen prendrai . . .). 20. Were you at the theatre yesterday ? 21. Yes, I was there. 22. Is your master iu that room? 23. Yes, he is there. XXVII. VINGT-SEPTIEME INTEKBOGATIVE PEONOUNS. They are : 1. lequel f. laquelle, which (of) ? 2. qui, who? que and quoiy what ? 1. Lequel, when not used alone, is separated by de from the noun with which it agrees in gender. When the pronoun which is used interrogatively, it is always expressed by lequel, laquelle, etc., as : Void deux appartements, lequel choisirez-vous ? Here are two apartments, which will you choose ? Une de ses sccurs est marine. Laquelle est-ce ? One of his sisters is married. Which is it ? Laquelle de vos ecolieres est malade ? Which of your pupils is ill ? The same contractions take place in the article le compounded with quel, as when used by itself: thus, by contraction with the prepositions a and de t arc formed auqucl, auxquels, av,xqudles t duquel. desquels, and desquelles. INTERROGATIVE PRONOUNS. 123 2. The interrogative pronoun qui? is only used of poisons. Ex.: Qui est la, who is there ? A qui pretez-vous cela, to whom do you lend this ? Qui cherchez-vous, whom are you looking for ? Pour qui est ce crayon, for whom is this pencil ? 8. WJiose, v?hcn used interrogatively, must be rendered in French by a qui. Ex. : Whose book is this ? a qui est ce litre ? 4. Que and quoi are neuter. 1 * Quoi, what, is disjunctive, and used either by itself or after a preposition, as : De quoi parlez-vous, of what are you speaking ? Sur quoi, upon what ? uduec uns- f. quelques-unes, some. Personne, (with ne), nobody. ! L'un, e I'autre, the one the other, pi. les uns (unes) les autres, the ones the others. L : un (I'une) et I'autre, both. L'un (I'une) ou I'autre, either. Ni I'un (I'une) ni I'autre, neither. L'un (I'une) I'autre, pi. les uns (les unes) les autres, each other, one another. Un autre, f. une autre, another. D'autres, pi. others, other people. Autrui, others, another. Tel, f. idle, many a man. ' Plusieurs, several. La plupart, most, followed by de with the def. art., as f La plupart des nomm.es, most men. Quiconque, whoever. Tout, f. toute, all, everything, pi. tons, toutes t all. Quelque chose, f. something, anything : when followed by de and an adj. it is masc. ^ Rien (with ne), nothing. Le, la meme, the same. 2. Uon is used for euphony instead of on after et, ou, ou, si, unloss the next word begins with Z; also after que if the next word begins with a c or q. Ex. : si Von volt, if one sees ; et Von dit, and they guy. But : si on le voit, not si Von le volt. L'on is also sometimes used after mais, ni, qui, and other vowel sounds, 9 130 XXIX. VINGT-NEUVIEME LEgON. 3. Several of the indefinite adjectives have been enumerated here again among the indefinite pronouns, because they may be used as such, viz. : aucun, plusieurs, tout, and le meme. Ex. : Cambien de plumes avez-vous, how many pens have you ? Je n'en ai aucune, I have none. J>en ai plusieurs, I have several. Avez-vous appeltf tons les enfants, have you called all the children ? Ouifje les ai appel& tons, yes, I have called them all. 4. When personne and rien are used by themselves, they do not take ne, but they retain their negative meaning, as : Qui avez-vous rencontre*? Personne. Whom have you met 1 ? Nobody. VOCABULARY. Le defaut, the fault. chanter, to sing. le verbe, the verb. bldnier, to blame. le camarade, the comrade. rire, to laugh. la confiance, the confidence. arricer, to arrive. venu, come (part. p.). gatcr, to spoil. m&liant, e, naughty. secourir, to assist. jaloux, -se, jealous. nuire, to hurt, injure. rgulicr t -ere, regular. je veux, I will. rencontrer, to meet. pourri, e, rotten. READING EXERCISE 29. On chante, on joue et Ton danse. Tout le monde veut (wishes) etre heureux. Chacun vcut avoir raison. L'un etait richc, Tautre dtaitpauvre; Tun et Fautie etaient malhcurcux. Les unes dan- saient, les autres jouaient. Ne blamez pas les travaux d'autrui. Avez-vous vu quelqu'un? Je n'ai \n pcrsonne. Nous avons quelque chose de meillcur. Tel rit aujourd'hui qui ne rira plus de- main. Chacun a ses defauts. Tout le monde (everybody) a son faible (weakness) . La plupart dc ces pommes sont pourries. Ne savez-vous (do you know) rion de nouveau? Nous ne savons (know) rien. Nous n'avons rencontre personne. Quiconque salira ges cahiers, sera puni. Donnez-moi quelquos-uncs de vos belles poires. Quclques-uns do mes camarades sont malades. ' INDEFINITE PRONOUNS. 131 TIIEME 29. 1. One is happy when one is contented. 2. They speak of peace (delapaix). 8. They say so (7e). 4. Everybody likes him. 5. Every one thinks of himself (asoi). 6. Everybody has bis [own] faults. ,1 . Somebody has told (dit) it to me. 8. Those apples are fine, I will take some. 9. Whoever knows (con- naif) this man, has little (peu de) confidence in him. * 10. No- body knows that woman. 11. Henry thinks of (a) nobody. 12. (The) one arrives, the other sets out (part ). 13. These two girls love one another. 14. I do not know them all, but I know several of them (en). 15. Most verbs are regular. t7 16. The princes were jealous of one another. 17. Will you have anything ? 18. I thank you, I will have (je ne veux) nothing. 19. These people (gens) speak ill (nial) of one another (i. e. the one of the other). CONVERSATION. Que fait-onla? Qui a dit cela ? Qui veut ce papier ? Yos deux neveux sont-ils riches ? As-tii vu qucleju'im dans ce jardin ? Qu *y a-t-il de nouveau ? Ou &ont vos deux fils ? Youlez-vous quelquo chose ? Avez-vous retrouve les lettrcs perdues ? Avcc qui etes-vous vcnu ? Qui est la ? Avcz-vous toutcs les boites ? On joue et Ton danse. Tout le monde lo dit. Chacun le veut. L'un est richo, Tautre est pauvre. Non, je n'y ai vu personno. Jc ne sais (knoiv) rien du tout (at all). Us sont partis tous les deux. (Ils sont partis Fun et Fautre.) Non, merci ; je ne veux ricn. J'en ai retrouve quelqucs-unes ; la plupart sont perdues. Jc ne suis vcnu avec personne. Pcrsonne. Je n'cn ai aucuno. 132 XXIX. VIXGT-NEUVIEME LE/*TOwrpfd ra i n J H pleut, it rains. greler, to hail ; il grele, it hails. tonner, to thunder ; il tonne, it thunders. faire des Eclairs, to lighten ; il fait des e'clairs, it lightens. geler, to freeze ; il gele, it freezes. deyeler, to thaw ; il dfyele, it thaws. importer, to matter ; il importe, it matters. Third singular negative is n'importe, no matter. 2. Other verbs may become impersonal. Ex. : // siiffit, it suffices. il convient, it is convenient. il semble, it seems. il arrive, it happens (takes ctrc). il vaut mieux, it is better. il s'agit, it is the question, etc. il metarde, I long. il reste, there remains. 10 146 XXXII. TBENTE-DEUZIEME MODELS OF CONJUGATION. 1. Neiger, to snow. SUBJUNCTIVE INDICATIVE. Present. 77 neige. Imperfect. H neigeait. Preterite. H neigea. Future^ H neigera. Comp. of Pres. H a neige". " " Imp. H avait neigc". " " Pret. II mi neige'. " " Put. H aura neige". Interrogatively : Neige-t-il ~? ncigeait-il 1 a-t-il neige'? etc. Qa'il neige. qu'il neigeut. qu'il ait neige". qu'il eut neigf. Pres. H neigeralt. Pres. Neigeant. CONDITIONAL. Comp. H aurait neige". PARTICIPLE. Comp. Ay ant neige'. 2. II y a, there is, there are. INFINITIVE MOOD. Y avoir, there to be. INDIC. Present. Imperfect lIV Pretente. Future. II y a, there is, there are. H y avait, \ ,, r there was, there were. ,, // y eut, ) H y aura, there will be. Comp. of Pres. 77 y a eu, there has or have been. " Imp. Ey avait eu, } , , ,. t< -n * TJ c there had been. Prct. 77 y eut eu, ) COND. Present. II y aurait, there would be. Comp. H y aurait eu, there would have been. Interrogatively : Y a-t-il, is there ? are there ? Negatively : U n'y a pas, there is or are not. Negat. interrogat. : N'y a-t-il pas, is or are there not ? STTBJ. Present. Qu'il y ait, that there (may) be. Imperfect. Qu'il y eut, that there (might) be. Comp. of Pres. Qu'il y ait eu, that there (may) have been. " Imp. Qu'il y eut eu, that there (might) have been, IMPERSONAL VERBS. 147 NOTE 1. This verb in English is used in tlw plural, when followed by a plural substantive; in French, it remains always in the singular; as, There are birds which, etc. ; il y a des oiseaux qui, etc. NOTE 2. It often happens that the verb il y a is rendered ago, these, or for these. Ex. : I saw him two months ago. Je I'ai vu il y a deux mois. II y a huit jours que je suis malade. I have been ill these eight days. 77 est is also used impersonally, particularly in poetry, in the sense of il y a. 3. 11 fait froid. Present, // fait froid, it is cold. Imperfect. // faisait froid. \ . _ A . * *. '\ it was cold. Preterite. 11 jit froid, ) Future. // fera froid, it will be cold, etc. Comp. of Pres. // a fait froid, it has been cold, etc. Thus other expressions denoting the state of the weather: E fait beau, it is fine weather ; il fait chaud, it is warm ; il fait jour, it is daylight , etc. The English " it is said " is rendered in French, on dit. 4. Ilfaut. INFINITIVE : Falloir, to be needful, necessary. INDIC. Present. 77 faut, it is necessary. Imperfect. II fallait, j ifc wflfi nece Preterite, II fallut, ) ,- ^Future. Il'fandra, it will be necessary. Comp. of Present. // a fallu, it has been necessary. " Imperfect, *Il avait fidlu, \ h had bccn noce . " " Preterite. // eut fallu, ) " " Future. // aura fallu, it will have been necessary. COND. Present. // faudrait, it would be neccssaiy, ( . . . ought to). Comp. II aurait fallu, it would have been necessary. INTERROGATIVELY. Faut-il? fallait-il? fallut-il? a-t-il fallu ? (is it necessary? was it necessa- ry T has it been necessary ?) SCBJ. Present. Qii'il faille, that it (may) be necessary. Imperfect. Qii'il fallal, that it (might) be necessary. Comp. of Present. Qii'il aitfalln, that it (may) have been necessary. " " Imperfect. Qu'il eut fall a, tliat it (might) have been necessary. 148 XXXII. TRENTE-DEUXIEME LEQCN. PARTICIPLE. Present, wanting. Compound. Ayantfallu. REM. 1. The verb falloir is absolutely impeisonal throughout all its tenses. When its subject is a personal pronoun, as : / must, you must, etc., we may add, for the first person me, for the second tc, for the third lui, in the plural nous, vous, leur. More frequently, however, que with the Sub- junctive mood is preferred. Ex. : I must read : il mefaut lire, or il faut queje Use. thou must read : il te faut lire, or il faut que tu Uses. he must read : > ( il faut qu'il Use. she must read : J il lui f ant lire > or \ il faut qu'dle lite. we must read : il nous faut lire, or il faut que nous lisions. you must read : il vous faut lire, or ilfaut que vous lisiez. they must read : il leur faut lire, or il faut qu'ils lisent. I have been obliged to read : il m'a falla lire, etc. 2. "When the subject is a noun, que with the Subjunctive mood must be used. It must further be observed that, when the verb falloir is used in the Present or Future tense, the following verb must be put in the Present of the Subjunctive ; but when it is in the Imperfect, Preterite or Conditional, the verb following it must be rendered by the Imperfect of the Subjunctive. Ex.: The boy must work, il faut que le gargon travaille. The boy will be obliged to work. // faudra que le gargon travaille. The soldiers were obliged to retire. II fallait or il fallut que les soldats se retirassent. 3. When the verb il faut is followed immediately by a noun substantive, it signifies to want ; here also one of the pronouns me, te, lui t nous, vous, leur t according to the person, must be inserted. Ex. : I want (must have) a hat, il me faut un chapcau. lie wants some money, il lui faut de V argent. We want some bread, il nous faut du pain. Did you want some books, vous fallait-il des livres ? VOCABULARY. Lecompte, the account, bill. la chaise, the chair. la redingote, the coat. cesser, to leave off, to cease. le depart, the departure. quitter, to leave. IMPERSONAL VERBS. 149 la rue y the street. dessiner, to draw. le sort, (the) fate. partir, to set out, depart. la clianibre, the room. honnete, honest. manquer, to be wanting. m&ontent, e, discontented. gouverner, to govern. sagement, adv. wisely. READING EXERCISE 32. 11 plcut. Jo crois qu'il pleuvra domain. J'entends tonner. H vaut mieux (it is better) qu'il pleuve. II a neige toute la nuit. II y a des hommes qui sont toujours mecontents. II fait chaud ; 11 faisait trop chaud dans votre chambre. II n'y avait ni hommes, ni fcmmes, ni enfants. II faut partir. II vous faut partir. II fallai t venir plus tot (earlier). Ne faudra-t-il pas lui pardonner? II faut quo Charles reste a la maison. II fallut que Charles restat a la maison. II mo fallut lui pardonner. II y aura cette annee beaucoup do cerises. II faut quo les enfants obeissent, & 1'instant (instantly) . II y a eu de (at) tout temps des flatteurs. II a fallu qu'elle payat son comptc. II y a un Dieu qui gouverno tout sagement. Qu'cst-ce qu'il vous faut ? II me faut une autre cham- bre. THEME 32. 1. Does it snow? 2. No, it does not snow, it rains. 3. It is cold to-day. 4. I shall not leave the room. 5. Yesterday it was (ha9%aerr)~rery cold, and it (has) snowed a great deal (beaucoup). 6. It thunders and lightens. 7. There are too many chairs in this room. 8. There was much wine on the table. 9. Is there money in the purse? 10. There are six francs (francs) in it. 11. There will be a great many nuts this year. 12. There are streets in London, which are very long. 13. It is necessary to begin. 14. It was necessary to set out. 15. You must begin. 16. He, must read. 17. We were obliged to set out. 18. Ho has been obliged to speak. 19. The boy must work. 20. The girls must draw. 21. My father has been obliged to go to Paris. 22. Your uncle will be obliged to leave London. 23. The soldiers were obliged to leave the town. 24. I want a good pen. 25. Do you want, an- 150 XXXII. TRENTE-DEUXIEME other room? 26. Yes, I want a larger room. 27. What do you want? 28. I want or I must have (fa Z') money. CONVERSATION. Quel temps fait-il aujourd'hui ? Pleut-il? Plcuvra-t-il ? La pluie a-t-elle cesse ? Que vous faut-il ? Y a-t-il assez de vin ? Y avait-il de 1'argent dans cette bourse ? As-tu paye le compte ? Faut-il que je me leve maintc- nant? Yous a-t-il fallu partir de si bonne heure (so early) ? Qui a paye le diner ? Faut-il lui rendre (return) Tar- gent? II fait beau (mauvais) temps. Oui, il pleut tres-fort. Je ne crois pas .qu'il pleuve. Pas encore ; il pleut sans cesse. II me faut une rcdingote neuve. Oui, Monsieur, il y en a assez. II y avait deux francs. Oui, il rn'a fallu le payer. Oui, il faut vous lever tout do suite. Le depart etait fixe* a quaire heures et demie. Mon pere 1'a paye. Oui, rendez-le-lui. READING LESSON. PRODUCTIONS DE DIVERS CLIMATS. La providence a si sagement arrange* toutes choses, quo chaque climat fournit aux habitants ce qui leur est le plus indispensable. Dans les contrees polaires il fait si froid, qu'il ne peut y croitrc ni fruits, ni cere*ales, ni legumes. La nature y a supplee par la grande quantite de poissons quo Ton peche dans la mer et dans les lacs, et par 1'abondance des quadrupedes qui, a la verite (indeed), sont la plupart (mostly) sauvages et feroces, mais qui fournissent aux habitants, aguerris (accustomed) a les poursuivre a la chasse, de tres-belles fourrures, de la chair rnangeable, des os et des nerfs qu'ils emploient pour leurs arcs (bows) et pour divers ustensiles. FORMATION OP ADVERBS. 151 Les peuples des climats chauds ont le ver h soie (silkworm), qui so nourrit des feuilles du murier et qui leur file (spins) un le- gcr tissu dont on fait des etoffes convenables h la temperature du pays. Le cotonnier porte des gousses renfermant le coton dont le tissu fournit egalement (likewise) les plus beaux vetcments. Et pour preserver les habitants do la zone torride de I'mflammation d'un sang trop echauffe, leurs campagnes et leurs jardins leur fournisscnt les oranges, les citrons et les olives qui les rafraichissent. Fournir, to supply, furnish. la chair, the flesh, meat. le bcsoin, the need, want. I'os, the bone. la contre'e, the region. I'ustensile, the tool. croitre, to grow. le murier, the mulberry-tree. les ce'reales, corn. filer, to spin, le'ger, light. les legumes, vegetables. le tissu, the texture. pecher, to fish, la mer, the sea. convenable, convenient, fit. sauvage, wild. le cotonnier, the cotton-plant. fe'roce, ferocious. la gousse, the pod, husk. aguerris, hardened. le vetement, clothing. poursuivre, to pursue. echauffe", heated, hot. lafourrure, fur, pelt. rafraichir, to cool, refresh. XX^tlY. TRENTE-TROISIEME FORMATION OF ADVERBS. Most, cf ilio French adjectives become adverbs by adding the syl- lable -ment, according to the following rules : 1. Adjectives ending in a vowel, simply add the final syllable -went, as : Facile, easy ; &&v.facilement, easily. poll, polite ; adv. poliment, politely. vrai } true ; adv. vraiment, truly* 152 XXXIII. TRENTE-TROISIEME 2. Adjectives which do not end in a vowel, add the syllable -merit to their feminine termination, as : llaut, f. haute, high ; adv. liautement, aloud. doux, f. douce, soft, mild ; adv. doucement, softly. franc, f.franche, frank; &&v.franchement, frankly, freely. heureux, f. heureuse, happy ; adv. hcureusement, happily. So also the adjectives, nouveau, new ; fou, foolish, and mou, soft ; adv. nouvellement, follcment, mollement. 3. Adjectives which end in -ant or -ent, become adverbs by changing the final -ant into -amment, and -ent into -emment, as : Constant, constant ; adv. constamment. prudent, prudent ; adv. prudemment. patient, patient ; adv. patiemment. Exceptions to this rule are: lent, slow, adv. lentement; and present, pres- ent, adv. prseniement, actually, at present. 4. The following adjectives take an e accented before the final -ment. Profond, deep, profondement ; commode, comfortable, commodemcnt ; commun, common, communement ; precis, precise, precisement ; enorme, enormous, enormement ; expres, express, expressement ; impuni, unpunished, impunement. 5. All these derived adverbs, as well as some others, are com- pared, as : COMP. SUP. Facilement, plus facilemcnt, le plus f aril ement. commode'ment, moms commod&nent, le moins commode'ment, souvent, often ; plus souvent, le plus souvent. longtemps, long ; plus longtemps, le plus longtemps. loin, far ; plus loin, le plus loin. 6. The following adverbs are irregular in the formation of their comparatives and superlatives : COMP. SUP. Z?ien,well; mieux, better; le mieux, (the) best mal, badly ; pis, worse ; le pis, the worst. pen, little ; mains, less ; le moins, the leo^st. beaucoup, much ; plus, more; leplus, most. tout mieux is rendered : so much the better. tant pis, so much the worse. FORMATION OF ADVERBS. 153 7. When cither le plus or le moms qualifies a verb, adverb, or participle not used adjcctively, le retains the masculine form. Ex. : Une lettre tcrtic lev! us soiyneusement. 8, The following adjectives are used adverbially without taking an addi- tional termination, as : Vite, quick, fast, fort, very. expres, purposely. haul, loudly. soudain, suddenly. bos, in a low voice. droit, straightways. VOCABULARY. L'tfat, m. the state. ponctudlement, punctually. fdchf* sorry, angry. avouer, to confess. tgal, equal. entretenu (part.), entertained, g&i&reusement, generously. propre, clean. [amused. eloquemment, eloquently. rarement, seldom. tternd, eternal, agir, to act. malheureusement, unfortunately. marcher, to walk. modestement, modestly. nfyliyer, to neglect. probablement, likely. occuptf, occupied. extremement, extremely. dessiner, to draw. la fortune, property. oubtier, to forget. READING EXERCISE 33. Yous lo trouvercp facilemcnt. Lcs gens parcsscux negligent ordiria&eincnt leurs affaires. Agissez genereusement cnyers vos cnnemis. Dicu a sagement distribue ses dons. Parlcz modestement do vos merites. Get homme a parle tres-eloquemment. Henri IV, etait constamment occupe de la prosperite do ses etats. Le voleur marcha doucement ; il avait probablement pour d'etre entendu. Je Buis extremement facbe d'apprendre cette nouvelle. Nettoyez raioux vos habits. Vous n'etes pas proprcmcnt habille. JSTe mar- chez pas si lentement. Les enfants qui aiment passionnemont le jcu, negligent souvent leurs taclies (tasks). * When meaning, sorry, it takes de before its obj. : meaning, angry, centre. 154 XXXIII. TRENTE-TEOISIEME LEON. THEME 33. 1. This pupil learns (apprend) easily, but he forgets as (aussi) easily that which ho learns. 2. The king has generously pardoned (to) his enemies. 3. Nobody is constantly happy in this world. 4. The name of Shakspeare will live (vivrd) eternally. 5. Speak frankly. G. My brother is constantly occupied. 7, Confess freely your faults. 8. Unfortunately I have not found him at home. 9. Speak softly. 10. The artist plays admirably (well). 11. I have seldom received letters from my brother-in-law (Jbeau-frere). 12. Everybody must punctually observe the laws. 13. If you fulfil faithfully your duties, you will be esteemed by (de) everybody. 14. You have stayed longer than your brother. 15. The little girl draws very well ; she draws better than her sister. CONVERSATION. Comment parle cet homme ? Avaz-vous des nouvellcs dc votre frere a Paris ? A-t-il perdu quelque chose ? Monsieur M. est-il fache ? Pourquoi est-il faclie* ? Comment faut-il agir ? (How must people act ? ) Charles, tu es maladc ; qu'as-tu ? Vous etes probablement le frcrc de Monsieur Richard ? H parle trcs-eloquemment et tres-franchement. II m'ecrit (writes) rarement. Heureuserncnt je sais (know) par un de ses amis qu'il so porte bien. II a probablement perdu une partie de sa fortune. Oui, il est extrernement fache'. H est fache contre son fils qui a etc me chant. II faut toujours agir prudem- ment et honnetement. J'ai mal a la tete (head-ache) ; mais heureusement ce n'est pas grand'chosc (conse- quence). Non, Madame, mais jc suis son cousin. ADVERBS OF PLACE AND OF TIME. 155 Comment co general a-t-il agi en- II a agi lixs-genereusement. vers scs ennemis : Pourqpoi marchez-voTis si lente- J'ai mal au pied. ment? Oette loi est-elle obscrvee ? Elle est ponctuellcment obser- vee de tout le mondc. XXXIY. TBENTE-QUATBJEMB ADVERBS OF PLACE AND OF TIME. 1. The principal adverbs of place are : Ou, where ? whither ? d'ou, whence 7 par ou, which way ? dedans, 1 . .. , ' f within, inside. ici, here, a ici, hence. en dedans, ) la, there, de la, thence. la-bas, there below, yonder. y, there, therein. dedans, , , en dedans, deliors, without, out of doors. derriere, behind. devant, before. par id, this way. par la, that way. deca, en dega, on this side. dda, au dela, on that side. prcs, aupres, near. proche, close by. alentour, round, about. pariout, everywhere. nulle part, nowhere. jusqu'a, as far as. jusqu'ou, how far ? loin, far, far off. 2. The principal adverbs of time are : Quand, when ? , un jour, one day. aujourd'hui, to-day. autrefois, jadis, formerly. hier, yesterday. auparavant, previously, before. avant-hier, the day before yesterday, alars, puis, then. demain. to-morrow. apres, after, afterwards. par-ci, par-la, here and there. $aet la, to and fro.' ailleurs, elsewhere. dessous, underneath. dessus, above. en haut, up, up stairs. en bas, down stairs, below. quelque part, somewhere. 156 XXXIV. TRENTE-QUATRIEME LEgON. apres-demain , the day after to-mor- jusqu'a, until, row. ensuite, aftenvards. enfm, at last, at length. a present. \ i ; -. ( now, at present. tot, soon, plus tot, sooner. maintenant, ) bientot, soon, trap tot, too soon. quelquefois, sometimes. tantot, by and by. souvent, often. aussitot, directly. longtemps, long, fare/, late. toujours, always. d'abord, at first. dernierement, \ . 7 - . , f lately, of late. dsarmais t l ' naguere, ) J , A ' f henceforth. T% ^ aortfnavant, ) dfya, already. des-lors, from then. encore, still, yet. depuis, since. jamais, ever, ne jamais, never IFAerc and m irAcA arc rendered by ow, after a noun signifying f t'me or place. PLACE OP ADVERBS. REM. 1. In the simple tenses, the adverb is generally placed immediately after the verb which it modifies : She always cries, die pleure toujours. I often take a walk with my friend. Je me promene souvent avec mon ami. REM. 2. When the verb is in a compound tense, the adverb generally comes between the auxiliary and the participle ; as, Je Vai toujours respect^, I have always esteemed him. Je me suis souvent promentf avec mon maitre. I have often taken a walk with my master. N. B. Hier, avant-hier, aujourd'hui, demain, apres-demain, tantot, tot, and tard t always follow the participle, unless placed before the auxiliary. VOCABULARY. Le temps, the weather. le brouillard, the fog, mist. le village, the village. I'ouvrage, m. the work. la grammaire, the grammar. diner, to dine. content, satisfied. venir, to come. le chemin de fer, the railroad. laisser, to leave. READING EXERCISE 34. Le temps estbiendoux aujourd'lmi. Mon cousin cst enfin arrivd. L'autre jour je me suis <5gar6 dans la foret. Travaillcz d'abord et - \ ADVERBS OP PLACE AND OF TIME. 157 ensuitc jouez. Avez-vous jamais vu un enfant comme eelui-la? En effet, il est extremement gros. Le brouillard aura bientot disparu. D'ou venez-vous maintenant, et ou avez-vous cte hier? Voyez-vous co villago la-bas? Eh bien (well), j'y ai etc hier et aujourd'huL J'y vais quelquefois. M'avez-vous apporte la grammaire dont je vous ai parie ? Voulez-vous venir diner avec nous domain ? Do- main je ne serai pas ici, mais apres-demain ou plus tard. . Enfin inon ouvrage est fini. THEME 34. 1. Where is my brother? 2. He is not hero ; he is elsewhere; he is perhaps yonder. 3. I will go (firai) that way. 4. Carry all that up stairs. 5. How far did you go yesterday ? 6.1 went as far as London. 7. I shall go nowhere to-day. 8. That village is not far ; do you see (voyez-vous) it yonder ? 9. Where is my grammar? 10. I have left it somewhere. 11. Is Edward here? 12. No; he is below. 13. My friend will not stay here long. 14. I saw (have seen) your sister yesterday at the play (au spectacle) . 15. He will always be satisfied. 16. Come back (revenez) soon. 17. Did you know [have you known (connu)~\ him formerly? 18. Yes, I have known him long. 19. Whence does the letter come ? 20. It comes from America. 21. Your dog is out of doors. 22. How is (se porte) ^your aunt to-day ? 23. She is better to-day than [slie was J yesterday, 24. I hope you will dine with us to-morrow. 25. I shall go soon into the country (a la campagne). 26. We expected him the day before yesterday. 27. Formerly there were no railroads. 28. Henceforth I shall be very diligent. 158 XXXV. TRENTE-CIXQUIEME LEOX. XXXV. TRENTE-CIXQUIEME ADVERBS OF NUMBER, OF QUANTITY, OF NEGATION, ETC. The adverbs of number are : Premierement, firstly. sixiemement , sixthly, etc. deuxi&nejn&it, } combien de foi's, how often ? . ( secondly. . J secondement, une fois, once. troisiemement, thirdly. deitx fois, twice. qiiatricmement, fourthly. trois fois, three times, etc. cinqw'emement, fifthly. The principal adverbs of quantity and comparison arc : Comment, how 1 presque, almost. combien, how much ? how many 1 environ, \ . , ( about. beaucoitp, much, many. a pen pres, ) lien (with du, de V, des following) a si, so. aijisi, thus. great deal or many. aussi, as. trop t too much, too many. (fgalemcnt, likewise. tant, so much, so many. autant, as much, as many. assez* enough, pretty. d'autant plus, so much the more. pen, little, tm peu, a little. pluiot, rather. ne guere, hardly. surtout, above all. bien, } au plus, { , ' / , ( at most. ires, > very. tout au plus, ) fort, ) du mains f au- mains, at least. plus, more. settlement, ) davantoge, still more. ne que, ) ^* mains, less. meme, eyen. tout, 1 pas meme, ) taut a fait, \ 1 mtC ' wholl - T ' entird ^ pas s^nent, \ DOt "^ The adverbs of affirmation and negation are : Oui, yes. si, yeS. ne pas, not. certcs, certainly. ne plus, no more. peitt-ctre, perhaps. 72071 plus, nor cither. * Assez precedes in FreDch the noun or adjectiye it limits. Ex. : Assez de via, bon. See p. 32. ADVERBS OP NUMBER, OF QUANTITY, ETC. 159 nt, I ne point, not (at all). ( certainly, to be sure. , . > > * pas du tout, I... csrtainement, assure'ment. i *^wo we* tvi*t-, ,. ^ . 7 ' \ notataU. non, no. . point du tout, ) presque jamais, scarcely ever. ne rien, nothing. There are many adverbial locutions ; those most in use are : A peine, scarcely. tout a coup, suddenly. en effet, really. tout d'un coup, all at once. sur le champ, directly. a droite, to the right. peu a peu, by degrees. a gauche, to the left. dans peu or sous peu, soon. ensemble, together. a dessein, on purpose. pcle-mele, pell-mell. en meme temps, at the same time. d'avance, beforehand, in advance. a la fois, at once, at a time. sans doute, no doubt. de bonne heure, early. tout a I'heure, ") directly, immcdiate- de meilleure heure, earlier. tout de suite, ) ly. a Ion marche", cheap. par hasard, by chance. a fond, thoroughly. en attendant, meanwhile. par an, yearly, par jour, daily. de temps en temps, } from time to par mois, monthly. de temps a autre, j" time. OF NEGATION. 1. Not is translated into French by ne, which is placed before the verb, and pas or point after it, in simple tenses. Ex. : Je ne veux pas, I will not, I do not wish. Je ne sais pas, I do not know. 2. In compound tenses, ne comes before the auxiliary, and pas after it. Ex. :^c- Je n'ai pas vu, I have not seen. Elle n'a pas parle', she did not speak. Point is merely a stronger negative than pas, as : Je n y ai point parle", I did not speak (at all). 3. Ne is employed without pas, if there is in the sentence a pronoun or adverb expressing negation, such as pcrsonne, nul, rien, jamais, ni, ne phis, point, guere. Ex. : Je ne connais pcrsonne, I know nobody. Je ne veux rien, I wish for nothing. Je ne sais plus, I know no more. Elle n'a jamais dit ccla, she never said so. 4. If one of the negations is followed by a noun in the partitive sense, this noun is simply preceded by de : 160 XXXV. TRENTE-CINQUIEME Affirmative : J'ai du pain, I have some bread. Negative : Je n'ai pas de pain, I have no bread. Affirmative : Avez-vous de Vargent, have you any money ? Negative : Je n'ai point d'argent, I have no money. 5. With the infinitive, ne pas, ne point, ne ricn, etc., are generally not, separated, as : Ne pas se vcnyer, not to revenge one's self. Ne plus crire, to write no more. Ne ricn manger, to eat nothing. G, Without a verb, the negatives stand without ne, as : Pas a la fois, not at once. Pas moi, not I. Pas beaucoup, pas trop, pas tant, pas aujourd'hui, 7. Non plus, nor either, requires the full negation ne pas before it, as. Je ne le veux pas non plus, nor will I have it either. 8. If nor either is connected only with a noun or pronoun, without a verb, the noun or the pronoun is preceded, in French, by ni, as : Nor Charles either, ni Charles non plus. 9. Observe the expression ne que for only, as : Je n'ai que deux socurs, I have only two sisters. 12 n'a qu'un morceau de pain, he has only a piece of bread. Elle n y a apporte" qu'une assiette, she brought but one plate. L' enfant n'a que dix ans, the child is only ten years old. H n'est que six heures, it is only six o'clock. VOCABULARY. La fois* f. the time. inoui, e, unheard of. le crime, the crime. amicalement, friendly. travailler, to work. toiler, to shun. laconique, laconic. la socie'te', the society. refuser, to refuse. merci, thank you. READING EXERCISE 35. Ce crime cst tout-a-fait inoui. Comment vous portcz-vous ? Je ni3 porte tres-bicn. Combien d'aunes de ce drap TOUS faut-il ? II m'en faut beaucoup; il m'en faut au moins trento aunes. Ycus etes-vous promene longtemps ? Je me suis promene environ deux * When the noun times denotes repetition, as the number of times, it is trans- lated by fois. ADVERBS OF NUMBER, OF QUANTITY, ETC. 161 hcurcs ; peut-etre un pen moins. Yotre tante va-t-ello souvent au spectacle ? Elle n'y va (goes') prcsque jamais, et mon oncle n'y va pas du tout. Monsieur, vous avez peu de fautes dans votre traduc- tion. Combien en ai-je ? Yous en avez moins que votre frere ; vous n'en avez quo deux ou trois, tout au plus quatre. J'ai appiis (learned) ma lefon par coeur. Habillez-vous tout de suite. C'est en vain que vous chcrchez a le sauver. Marchez a droite ; moi, je marcherai a gauche. Sans doute, cela vaut mieux. J'ai achete ce tiibleau a bon marche. THE3IE 35. 1. How mucli sugar have you bought? 2. How many lessons a (par) week have you ? 3. You eat too much ; you must eat less. 4. That young man works too much. 5. Give him a little money. G. Give me more time. 7. There were many ladies, and we had a great deal of pleasure. 8. Have you not played enough? 9. I think (that) you will not have it. 10. Mr. A. is a very laconic man ; he always answers yes or no. 11. It is better not to refuse him. 12. I have only one brother, and my cousin has only one sis- ter. 13. She is only five years old. 14. I have never seen her. 15. She never comes to our house (cliez nous). 16. We certainly shall go out (sortirons) together. 17. My father has bought a horse very cheap. .,,18. Have you seen anybody ? 19. I have seen nob'3?t^.~~20. The thunder-storm came on suddenly. 21. I got up early; earlier than my brother. 22. You must always shun the society of these bad people. 23. Go (allez) to the right. 24. I shall go to the left ; we shall arrive at the same time. CONVERSATION. Comment trouvez-vous lo temps Je le trouve fort beau (or bien aujourd'hui ? beau) . Voici du jambon. En voulez- Donnez-m'en un peu, s'il vous vous? plait (please). En voulez-vous davantage ? Non, merci, j'en ai assez. 11 162 XXXYI. TRENTE-SIXIEME Serez-Yous chez vous (at home) deraain matin ? A quelle heure avcz-vous dine hier ? Dinercz-Yous aujourd'hui a la raeme hcure ? Que ferez-vous (will you do) pendant cc temps ? AYCZ-YOUS fait cela a dessein ? Avez-vous fini Yotre theme ? Que fait cctte petite fille la-Las ? Ccnnaisscz-Yous cet ouYrage (work) f AYCZ-YOUS lu (read) ce livre ? Quand Youlez-Yous Ycnir jouer aYee moi ? Comment YOUS portez-Yous ? Et Monsieur Yotre pere, com- ment se porte-t-il ? Assurement, je serai chez moi toutc la journee (day). Hier j'ai dine a cinq heures pre- cises. Non, aujourd'hui je ne dmerai qu'a six heures. Jc me promenerai en attendant. Non, je ne 1'ai pas fait expres. Je nc 1'aurai guere fini avant sept heures. Elle chcrche des fraises (straw- berries) . Get ouYrage m'cst tout-a-fait in- connu. Je Fai lu plus de deux fois. Je finirai d'abord ma tache et apres, nous joucrons. Je me porto a merYcille. II se porte assez bicn. II est sorti hier pour la premiere fois. XXXVI. TRENTE-SIXIEME CONJUNCTIONS. The principal simple conjunctions are : Et, and. et et, both and. OM, or. ou OM, either or. pourtant, yet, still. nfanmoins, nevertheless. si, if, whether. sinon, if not. CONJUNCTIONS. 163 ni m, neither nor. comme, as. que, that, than (after a comp.). or, now. car, for. done, consequently, then. mais, but. puisque, since, as. toutefois, ) quoique (with the Subj.), though. cependant, } however. 1. Among these simple conjunctions, only one governs the Sub- junctive mood, viz. : quoique, though or although. Ex. : quoique je sois malade, though I am ill. Eor the Subjunctive after que, see P. II. L. 19. 2. Si denotes a condition or supposition : s'il vient, if he comes ; si vous voulez, if you like. When si is followed by an Imperfect or Pluperfect, those tenses are always in the Indicative mood. (See P. n. L. 19.) If I had, s/ f avals ; If I were, si f&ais ; If I had seen him, si je V avals vu. NOTE. The i in si is cut off before il and Us, but nowhere else, as : s'il avait, but si elle avail, etc. 3. The conjunction ni ni requires ne before its verb, and the noun which follows it takes no article, if used in the partitive sense, as: Je n'ai ni perc ni mere, I have neither father nor mother. 4. The .conjunction que serves to connect two ideas so as to form of the' two one sentence, as : Je crois que vous avez raison, I believe you are right. In English the conjunction that is almost always understood, whereas que is not only always expressed in French, but repeated before each mem- ber of the proposition, as : Je crois que vous avez raison et que vous rfussirez. I think you are right and that you will succeed. 5. When a conjunction governs several verbs, it is placed before the first verb only, and que is used before the other verbs. Ex. : As he is diligent and takes pains, comme il est applique ct qu^il prend de la peine. 1G4 XXXVI. TRENTE-SIXIEME LE^ON. 6. Done is often used like the English auxiliary Jo, to urge or incite. Ex., Taisez-vous done, do be silent. It is also used interrogatively : C'est dona vcus qui avezfait cela ? VOCABULARY. Plier, to bend. le lien, the good. lever, to lift up . plus plus, the more the more. Veloile, f. the star. plus moins, the more the less. fyuist, e, exhausted. ' moins moins, the less the less. avare, avaricious. soil soil, be it or. savant, learned. tantot tantot, sometimes some- rompre, to break. times, now then. habiter, to inhabit. ni non plus, nor either. READING EXERCISE 3(3. L'ambition ct 1'avarice sont deux grandes sources du malheur hu- main. Les discours impies (impious) gatent h la fois 1'esprit et le creur. Cette eau est froide comme de la glace. Yotre tableau est precieux, mais il 'ne me plait (please) pas. II arriva comme je sortais. Elle n'est ni laide ni belle. Vous vous amusez, et cepen- clanfc le temps fuit (flies). Get homme est tres-fort, et pourtant il ne peut pas lever ce fardeau (weight). Ou vous me paierez, ou vous irez en prison. Donnez-moi de Feau, s'il vous plait. Martin est encore bien jeune, neanmoins il est fort sage. Bienheureux sont ceux qui aiment la paix, car ils seront appeles les cnfants de Dieu. Vous ne le savez pas ? Ni moi non plus. Tantot il veut une chose, tantot il en veut une autre. THEME 36. 1. Gold and silver are metals. 2. Silver is less useful than iron. 3. Mr. A. is very inconsistent (inconsequent) ; he is sometimes of one opinion (avis, m.) and sometimes of another. 4. I like you, as I know (sais) that you are always attentive. 5. This man is es- teemed by everybody, even by his enemies. 6. I am very glad to see that you do not love flattery. 7. Some one has done it, either you or your brother. 8. The more you will work, the more you will gain. 9 This horse may be very strong, nevertheless it does not CONJUNCTIONS. 1G5 please me. 10. The longer the days (are) (constr. the more the d. are long), the shorter (are) the nights. 11. Though he said (dit) (that) he had no appetite, yet he ate all the meat and bread. 12. Nobody knows whether the stars are inhabited orjiot. 13. The reed bends, but does not break. 14. Do not bend the bow too much, otherwise it will break. 15. The more I sang, the less em- barrassed I was. 16. If you do (faites) it, you will be punished, 17. He appeared (paraissait) very modest, although he was very learned. 18. In order to be learned, you must study much. 19. I punish him as he deserves (it). 20. You must stay at home, since you are not quite well. 21. When he had done speaking (fini de parler), he was quite exhausted. 22. If I had had faith- ful friends, I should not be so unhappy. 23. You will be happy, if you do your duty (devoir). 24. I was sleeping when your ser- vant entered (entra). CONVERSATION. r *> Etes-vous heureux, mon ami ? Je lo serais, si j'avais de bona livres. Si ce n'cst que cela, je peux Je vous en serais tres-oblige. vous en dormer. En voulez- . vous ? Quelles sont les deux grandcs L'ambition et Favarice. sources du malheur des , hommes ? Que fait-on souvent, quand on On fait souvent des sottises. est jeune ? Quo dit J^sus-Christ de ceux H dit qu'ils seront appeles "en qui aiment la paix ? fants de Dieu." Que veut cet enfant? II veut tantot ceci, tantot ccla. Comment trouvez-vous cette Elle n'est ni belle ni laide. demoiselle ? Ne pouvcz-vous pas lever cette Je ne peux pas la lever, quoiquo pierre ? je sois tres-fort. 1G6 XXXVI. TRENTE-SIXIEME LEgON. Comment Dicu traltc-t-il Ics II Ics traite comme un pere traite homines ? ses enfants. Quelle proprietd a le roscau ? II (se) pile et ne rompt pas. Quand faut-il forger le fer ? Quand il est chaud. READING LESSON. LAFITTE. Lorsquc Jacques Lafitte vint (came) a Paris, il so presenta chez M. Perregaux dans 1'esperance d'obtenir une place ; mais le banquier lui annon$a qu'il etait dans 1'impossibilite de satisfairc a sa demande, puisque les bureaux etaient au complet. Lafitte, decourage par ce refus, s'eloignait tristement, lorsqu'en traversant la cour de Y hotel, il apergut a terre une epingle ; il la ra- massa et la piqua sur sa manche. M. Perregaux ayant vu Faction clu jeune solliciteur, en fut frappe (struck), & pensa qu'il devait etre doue d'un esprit d'ordre et d' economic. II le fit rappeler et lui dit qu'il pouvait compter sur une place dans sa maison. En effet, peu de jours apres, le jeune Bayonnais cntra chez le riche banquier, et chacun sait que, plus tard, il cst devenu un honnoc riche et cele bre. L'esp&rance, hope. ramasser, to pick up. le bureau, the office. la manche, the sleeve. r, to retire. doue*, endowed. j a pin. en effet, indeed. CONJUNCTIVE PHRASES. 167 XXXVII. TRENTE-SEPTIEME LEgON. CONJUNCTIVE PHRASES. Most of these are adverbs or prepositions united with que or dc. Some require the following verb in the Indicative mood, others in tic Infinitive, and others again in the Subjunctive. 1 . Conjunctive phrases with the Indicative : On bien, or, else. Aussi bien que, as well as. ni non plus, neither, nor either. aussitot que t ") au contraire, on the contrary. des que, > ^ so011 QS ' non seulement mats encore, not de meme que,} only but also. ainsi que, ) de plus, moreover. au reste, ) autant que, as much as. da reste, ) owever apres que, after, after that. de la, hence it follows. quand meme, although. a peine que, scarcely as. si toutefois, if however. c'est pourquoi, therefore. c'est-a-dire, namely. par consequent, consequently. c'est que, ") comme si, as if. parce que, ) ecausc< d e m cme, thus, in the same way. tandis que, whereas. sans cela, otherwise, else. pendant que, while, whilst. depuis que, since. tant (pastas long as . tout que, however as. 2. With the Infinitive mood: A/in de, in order to, to. de peur de, ") a mohis de, unless. de crainte de, > or ear avant de, before. loin de, far from. au lieu de, instead of. plutot que de, rather than. 3. With the Subjunctive mood: Afin que, ~) . non que, not that. pour que, \ that) m ordcr that nonobstant que, notwithstanding avant que, before. that. a moins que, t ) pour peu que, however little. que ne, > unlcss > tlU - pourvu que, provided (that). t Those marked with a t require ne before the following verb. 168 XXXVII. TRENTE-SEPTIEME LEgON. bien que, ") though, quelque que, however though. quoique, ) although. sans que, without that. jusqu'a ce que, till, until. si ce n'est que, unless, till. loin que, far from. soit que, whether or. 4. Besides the above-in cntioued conjunctions, there are other con- junctive expressions (locutions conjonctives), winch nave been liu; rowed from other classes of words, and to which the conjunction que is added. Such are : A condition que, on condition that depeurque*^ de crainte que,*^ de maniere que, ) ., . }- so as to, so that. . . , . de or en sorte que, ) au cos que, in case that.* .... suppose" que, supposing that.* .... malgre'que, for all that, notwithstanding.* toutes les fois que, as often as. peut-etre que, perhaps that attendu que, considering that a ce que, according as, as far as, etc. N. B. Those marked with an * govern the subjunctive. VOCABULARY. La suite, the consequence. pret, ready. la machine a vapeur, the engine. la princesse, the princess. la me'moire, the memory. la guerre, war. occuper, to occupy. ambitieux, ambitious. mettre, to put, place. I 'education, f. education. preserver, to preserve. regarder, to look at. READING EXERCISE 37. Aussitot que la machine a vapeur fut construite (built), elle fat rnise en mouvement (put in motion), pour 1'essayer. Quelque grande que soit cette faute, il faut cependant la pardonner, Des qu'il me vit (saw) il courut (ran) a moi. Pendant que nous etions occupes h faire notre tachc, on cria au feu (fire) ! La memoire de Henri IV. sera toujours chere aux Franc ais parce qu'il mettait ga gloke a les rendre heureux. Que le ciel vous preserve d'un parcil CONJUNCTIVE PHEASES. 169 (such) malheur J Le malado ne bolt (drinks) ni ne mange. Taut quo ma mere sera k la campagne, je resterai avec elle. Tandis que nous parlons, le temps fuifc. Depuis que j'ai perdu mon pere, tout me manque. THEME 37. 1. I am not sorry, on the contrary, I am very glad (lien aise) to (de) have done it. 2. I will play, as soon as I (shall) have finished my exercise. 3. There will always be wars among men, as long as they are ambitious. 4. After (that) you were gone (sorti), I began writing (a ecrire). 5. As soon as my education is finished, I shall go to Italy. 6. In order to learn well, we must (on doit) study with a great deal of attention. 7. In order to have friends, we must be honest. 8. It will be' impossible to learn French, unless you be (Inf.) diligent. 9. Let us pray, before we begin (Inf.). 10. Rather than study, he loses his time. 11. Far from blaming you, I praised you. 12. Come here, that I may speak to you. 13. Send me your book, (in order) that I may read it. 14. I will be ready before they come. 15. Unless you accom- pany me, I will not take a walk. 16. Cato killed himself, lest he should fall into (entre) the hands of Cajsar. 17. Tfwugh that young man is not very diligent, [yet] he improves. 18. Before you begin an action^ consider well its consequences. 19. You will never%e respected unless you fulfil your duties. 20. He will give it to you, on condition that you give it back to him. 21. They beat him so that they almost killed him. 170 XXXVIII. TRENTE-HUITIEME LEgON. XXXVIII. TRENTE-HUITIEME IRREGULAR VERBS. FIRST CLASS. Those verbs are commonly called irregular which deviate from the three regular conjugations. This deviation is of three kinds. 1. Such verbs as take the termination corresponding to the ending of their Infinitive mood, but change their root. Ex. : Of the verb coudre, to sew, the radical is coud-, this final d is, in some persons and tenses, changed into s, for instance in the plural : nous cous-ons, we sew. These are the least difficult, and are therefore put in the first class. 2. Verbs which preserve their radical syllable throughout unchanged, but take flexions that do not accord with the ending of their Infinitive' For instance, the verb cour-ir, to run, ending in -ir, ought to take the flex- ions of the second conjugation (finir). But this is not the case; it takes the flexions of the third conjugation (vendre) ; the Present is not je couris, tu couris, etc., but je cours, tu cours, etc. ; P. p. couru like vendu. Verbs of this kind we assign to the second class. 3. A certain number of verbs offer both these anomalies at the same time ; i. e. they undergo some changes in their root, and are conjugated with other flexions than those corresponding with the ending of their Infin- itive. For instance, the verb mourir, to die, ought, according to its Infini- tive termination, -zr, to take the flexions of finir. This is not the case ; it is, in most tenses, conjugated like vendre; and, besides, its root mour- is, in certain tenses and persons, changed into meur-, as : Pres.je meurs, tu meurs, etc. Such verbs, among which are included those ending in -oir, consti- tute the third class. To facilitate the study of the irregular verbs, it is essential to dis- tinguish the primitive tenses from the derived ones. The latter have generally a regular inflexion, whereas the former alone are subject to irregularity. As already mentioned, the primitive tenses are : 1. Tlie Infinitive mood. 2. TJie Participle present. 3. The Participle past. 4. TJie Present of the Indicative inood. 5. The Preterite. IRREGULAR VERBS. 171 From these the other tenses and moods are derived, as it is explained, L. XX. The derivative tenses are formed regularly, and therefore seldom mentioned in the following list. To aid the pupil's memory, the following hints will prove useful : 1. The Present of the Subjunctive may bo found by dropping the final nt of the third person plural Indicative, as : from Us e'crivent que j'&rive ; from Us prennent que je prenne ; from Us boivent que je boive. 2. The plural of the Present Indicative, the Participle Present and the Imperfect of the Indicative have the same radical, as : nous mourons, we die; P. pr. mourant; Imperf. je mourais; nous craignons ; P. pr. craignant; Imperf. je craignais ; * nous allons ; P. pr. allant ; Imperf. j'allais, etc. 3. The Future and Conditional are formed from the Infinitive ; the fol- lowing, however, have an irregular formation, je courrai (instead of courirafyf je mourrai, je verrai, j'enverrai, j'acquerrai, je pourrai, je saurai, je voudmi, il faudra, je viendrai, je tiendrai, je ferai, and j'irai. 4. When the Participle past ends with the sound of i (i, is, it,) the Pre- terite generally ends in is. Ex. : Part. p. sorti, gone out; Pret. je sortis ; Part. p. dit, said; Pret. je dis; Part. p. pris, taken ; Pret.je pris t etc. 5. But when the Participle past ends in u, the Preterite usually ends in us. Ex. : P. p. cru, believed; Pret.je cms; P. p. lit, read; Pret. je lus; P. p. connu, known ; Pret. je connus, etc. A LIST OF ALL THE IRREGULAR VERBS ACCORD- ING TO THE THREE CLASSES OF IRREGULARITY. FIRST CLASS. Containing the verbs in -re which take the terminations of the third conjugation, but whose radical is somewhat changed. a. (1 7. Insertion of an s.) 1. Luirc, to shine. Part. pres. luisant. Part. pa$t, Im. Pres. Je luis, tu luis, il luit, nous luisons, tons luisez, ils luisent. Sultj. Pres. Que je luise. Imperf. Je luisais. Pret. wanting. Fut. Je luirai. Conjugate in the same manner: Reluire, to glitter. 2. Suffire, to suffice. P. pr. suffisant. P. p. suffi. Pres. Je sufHs, tu suffis, il suffit, nous suffisons, etc. 172 XXXVIII. TRENTE-HUITIEME LECON. Subj. Pres. Que je suffise. Imperf. Je sufFisais. Pret. Je suffis, tu suffis, il suOis, nous suffimes, etc. Fut. Je suffirai. In tlie same manner : Conjire, to preserve, to pickle ; and circoneire, to circumcise, except in the Part. past. The Participle of the former is confii, of the latter circoncis. 3. Nuire, to liurt. P. pr. iraisant. P. p. nui. Pres. Je nuis, tu nuis, il nuit, nous nuisons, vous nuisez, ils nui- sent. Subf. Pres. Que je nuiso. Imperf. Je nuisais. Pret. Je miisis. Fut. Je nuirai. 4. Cuire, to boil, to bake (bread). P. pr. cui^ant. Pvjp. cui. Pres. Je cuis, tu cuis, il cuit, nous cuisons, etc. Pret. Je cuisis. Fut. Je cuirai. Thus also : Recuire, to boil once more. 5. Conduire, to conduct, to lead. Se conduire, to behave. P. pr. conduisant. P. p. conduit Pres. Je conduis, tu conduis, il conduit, nous ccnduisons, etc. Pret. Je conduisis. Fut. Je conduirai. Thus : Rcconduire, to reconduct, to see home; drfduire, to deduct; enduire, to plaster; induire, to lead into; introduce, to introduce; produ-ire, to pro- duce ; reproduire, to produce again ; reduire, to reduce ; seduire, to seduce ; traduire, to translate. 6. Instruire, to instruct. P. pr. instruisant. P. p. instrui*. Pres. J'instruis, tu instruis, il instruit, nous instruisons, vous in- Btnii^ez, ils instruisent. Pret. J'instruisis. Fut. J'instruirai. In the same manner : Constndre, to build ; de'truire, to destroy. 7. Dire, to say, to tell. P. pr. disant. P.p. dit. Pres. Je dis, tu dis, il dit, nous disons, vous dites, ils disent. Subj. Pres. Que je disQ. Pret. Je dis, tu dis, il dit, nous dimes, vous elites, ils dirent. Imperf. Subj. Que jc disse. Fut, Je dirai. Imper. Dis, disons, dites. n. 17 IRREGULAR VERBS./ T^ 173 Conjugate in the same manner: redire, to say again, to object. .As for the other compounds of dire, viz. : Contredire, to contradict; de- dire, to unsay; and se dedire, to retract ; interdtre, to forbid ; me'dire, to slan- der ; and prdire, to foretell, they do not form their second person plural of the Present Indicative with the termination -tes, but -sez, as : vous contre~ disez, vous me'disez, vous interdisez, etc. Maudire, to curse, takes ss in the fol- lowing forms : Pres. plur. nous maudissons, vous maudissez, ils maudissent. Part. pr. maudissant. Iniperf. je maudissais. VOCABULARY. Le soldi, the sun. moderne, modern. un rayon, a ray. la peche, the peach. I'espoir, m. hope. la verite", the truth. la dette, the debt. THEME 38. 1..- The sun shines. 2. Everything slimes j(glitters) in that nonse. 3. It is not sufficient (it does not suffice)^ to understand the ancient languages, it is also necessary to study the modern ones. 4. We preserve these peaches in sugar. 5. Have you pickled cucumbers (des concomfoes') ? 6. Does he not hurt you in this af- fair ? 7. AH his property will not suffice to (pour) pay his debts. 8. Where do you conduct this blind [man] ? 9. I conduct him to the physician (chez le medecin). 10. I instruct (the) youth. 11. We translate English into Drench. 12. The boys behaved very well. "TLS. You will hurt me more than any other |terson. 14. This bread is well baked. 15. What do you say ? 16. I say that you are (have) right. ITJWe say the truth. ,18. Tell him that I am here. 19. I shalHell (it) him directly. 20. Never contradict any one \pcrsonne) irr\eii) public. 21. We foretold those disasters (dcsastres). 22. Let us curse nobody. * See p. 343, 10. 174 XXXIX. TRENTE-NEUVIEME XXXIX. TRENTE-NEUVIEME LECON. IRREGULAR VERBS. FIRST CLASS CONTINUED. b. (8 17. Change of tho final consonant.) 8. Traire, to milk. P. pr. trayant. P. p. trait. Pres. Je trais, tu trais, il trait, nous trayons, vous tra^ez, ils liaicnt. Imperf. Jo trayais. Pret. wanting. Fut. Je trairaL Thus also : Distraire, to distract ; extraire, to extract ; soustraire, to sub- tract, to withdraw. 0. Suivre, to follow. P. pr. suivant. P. p. sum. Pres. Je suis, tu suis, il suit, nous suivons, vous suivez, ils sui- vent. Subj. Pres. Que je suive. Pret. Je suivis. Fut. Je suivrai. Imper. Suis, suivons, suivez. Thus : S'ensuivre, to ensue ; poursuivre, to pursue. 10. Vainer e, to conquer. P. pr. vainj'Mant. P. jp.,.vaincu. Pres. Je vaincs, tu vaincs, il vainc, nous vain^wons, vous vain- quez, ils vaingwent. Pret. Je vain^wis. Fut. Je vaincrai. Imper. Vaincs, vain^wons, vain^z^ez. la the same manner : Convaincre, to convince. 11. Coudre, to sew. P. pr. cousant. P. p. cousu. Pres. Je couds, tu couds, il coud, nous coupons, vous couscz, ils consent. Subj. Pres. Que je couse. Pret. Jc cousis. Fut. Je coudrai. Thus : D&oudre, to unsew ; recoudre, to sew over again. 12. Moudre, to grind. P. pr. mou/ant. P. p. mouZa. Pres. Je mouds, tu mouds, il moud, nous moufons, vous mou/ez, ils mouZent. Subj. Pres. Que je moufe. Pret. Je moulus. Fut. Je moudrai. IRREGULAR VERBS. 175 In the same manner: Emoudre, to grind (knives, etc.), to sharpen, and remoudre, to grind again. 13. Resoudre, to resolve, P. pr. f resonant. P. p. lesolu (or resous) . Pres. Je resous, tu resous, il resout, nous rvsoliwns, vous resolvez, Us resolvent. Subj. Quo je resolve. Pret. Je resous, tu resets, etc. Fut. Je resoudrai. Imper. Resous, resolvons, resolvez. Thus : Absoudre, to absolve, and dlssoudre, to dissolve. These two compounds have no Preterite, and make their Participles : a& sous, f. absoute, and dissous, f. dissoute. 14. Peindre, to paint. P. pr. pei^want. P. p. peinZ. Pres. Je peins, tu peins, il peint, nous pei^wons, vous pei^wez, ils peigrwent. Subj., Quo je peigwe. Imperf. Je pci^rwais. Pret. Je peigwis, tu pelvis, il pei^mt, nous pei^wimes, etc. Fut. Je peindrai. Imper. Peins, pei^rcons, peiywez. Thus : Cdndre, to gird. Feindre, to feign ; ddpeindre, to depict. Teindre, to dye; d&eindre, to discharge color ; atteindre, to attain, to reach; fteindre, to extinguish. Restreindre, to restrain. Enfreindre to infringe, to trans- gress. 15. Craindre, to fear. -P. jpr. crai^want. -P. />. erain^. 5. Je crams, tu crains, il craint, nous crai^wons, etc. crai^mi. Fut. Je craindrai, etc. Thus also: Plaindre, to pity; se plaindre, to complain; contraindre, to compel, to constrain. 16. Joindre, to join. P. pr. joi^nant. P. p. joint. Pres. Je joins, tu joins, il joint, nous joijwons, vous joi#?zez, ils joi^rncnt. Subj. Quo je joignc. Pret. Je joi^rnis. J^w^. Je joindrai. Thus : Ilcjoindre, to rejoin ; enjoindre, to enjoin ; disjoindre, to disjoin ; Poindre, to dawn, break ; Oindre, to anoint. 17. Ecrire, to write. P. jf?r. dcrivant. P. J9. ecri^. Pres. J'ecris, tu dcris, il dcrit, nous dcrirons, vous ecrlrcz, ils ^crircnt. Subj. Quo j'e'crire, eto. 176 XXXIX. TREXTE-NEUVIEME LEgON. Pret. J'ccriris, tu ecriws, il crivit, etc. Fut. J'ecrirai. Imper. ]cris, ecm;ons, ecrivez. Thus : D&rire, to describe ; circonscrirc, to circumscribe ; inscnre, to in- scribe; prescrire, to prescribe, to order; r&rire, to write again, to answer; v ~f-' n *ire 9 to subscribe ; transcrire y to transcribe. VOCABULARY. La vache, the cow. partir, to set out. le pr&epteur, the tutor. la marcJie, course, the course. la difficult^ the difficulty. la cendre, the ashes. la vie, the life. la fame'e, the smoke. attemand, German. la chanddle, the candle. le meunicr, the miller. la grandeur, the greatness. THEME 39. 1. We milk the cows. 2. Soldiers ! follow me. 3. I will lead you to (the) victory. 4. I shall follow you. 5. This dog follows me everywhere. 6. You did not follow the lessons of your tutor. 7. The enemies were conquered. 8. You conquer all the difficul- ties. 9. That did not convince me. 10. They pursued (Pret.) the slave, but in vain (en vain). 11. She was sewing her gown. 12. These handkerchiefs are badly sewed. 13. I sewed them myself. 14. Does the miller grind the corn? 15. He has not ground it this morning. 16. He will grind it this evening. 17. I fear the rain. 18. We do not fear death ; why should we fear it? 19. I resolved (de) to set out. 20. We pursued our course. 21. I have at last (enfiri) convinced him of the greatness of his fault. 22. The wood which is burnt ( qifon Irule) resolves itself (se) into (en) ashes and smoke. 23. We pity the unfortunate. 24. You paint. 25. Tho young girl feigned to be ill. 26. Put out the candle and go to bed (allez vous coucher). 27. The servant feared (de) to displease his master (a son maitrc). 28. Charles wrote his trans- lation last night (hier au soir). IRREGULAR VERBS. 177 XL. QUARANTIEME LECON. IRREGULAR VERBS. FIRST CLASS CONTINUED. c. (IS 26. The vowel of the root is changed into u, in the Part, past and in the Preterite.) 18. Lire, to read. P. pr. lisant. P.p.lu. Pres. Je lis, tu lis, il lit, nous lisons, vous lisez, Us lisent. Pret. Je lus, tu lus, il lut, nous lumes, vous lutes, etc. Imperf. Subj. Que je lusse. Fut. Je lirai, tu liras, il lira, etc. Thus also : dire, to elect; r&lire, to reelect ; retire, to read over again. 19. 13oire, to drink. P.pr.buvant. P.p.bu. Pres. Je bois, tu bois, il boit, nous bisons, vous bwvez, ils boirent. Subj. Que je boive, que tu boi^es, qu'il boivo, que nous bwwons, quo vous bwt'iez, qu'ils boivent. Imperf. Je buvais. Pret. Je bus, tu bus, il but, nous bumes, vous butes, ils burent. J5$. Je boirai, 6u boiras, etc. Imper. Bois, bwrons, bwvez. 20. Oroire^ to believe, to think. P. pr. croyant. P. p. cru. Pres. Je crois, tu crois, il croit, nous croyons, vous cro^ez, ils croient. Subj. Quo je croie, que tu croies, qu'il croie, que nous croyions, c[ue vous croyiez, qu'ils croient. PrcL Je crus, tu eras, il crut, nous crumes, vous crutes, iln crurent. Fut. Je croirai, etc. Fcure accroire qch. a qn. t to make one believe. N. B. accroire is only used in the Infinitive^ 12 178 XL. QUARANTIEME LEgON. 21. Oroitre, to grow. P. pr. croissant. P. p. cru. Pres. Je crois, tu crois, il croit, nous croissons, vous croissez, Us croissent. Pret. Je crus, tu crus, il crut, nous crumcs, etc. Fut. Je croitrai, etc. Thus : Accroitrc, to increase ; d&roitre, to decrease ; recroitre, to grow again. 22. Plaire, to please. P. pr. plaisant. P. p. plu. Pres. Je plais, tu plais, il plait, nous plaisons, vous plaisez, ils plaiscnt. Subj. Que je plaise, etc. Pret. Je plus, tu plus, il plut, nous plumes, vous plutes, ils plu- rent. Fut. Je plairai, tu plairas, etc. Thus : Se complaire, to Delight in . . . ; deplaire, to displease. (S'il vous plait if you please.) 23. Taire, to conceal. P. pr. taisant. P. p. tu. Pres. Je tais, tu tais, il tait, nous taisons, vous taiscz, ils talent. Subj. Que je taise, que tu tai^es, qu'il taise, etc. Pret. Je tus, tu tus, il tut, nous tumes, vous tutos, ils turcnt. Fut. Je tairai. Thus : Se taire, to be silent. Pres. Je me tciis, I am silent. Imper. Tais-toi, taisez-vous. Pret. Je me tus, I was silent. Comp. of tlie Pres. Je me suis tu, I have been silent. 24. Paraitre, to appear. P. pr. paraissant. P. p. paru. Pres. Je parais, tu parais, il parait, nous paraissons, vous parais- 5ez, il paraiwent. Subj. Que je paraisse. Pret. Je pants , tu parus, il parut, etc. Fut. Je paraitrai. Thus : Apparaitre, to appear ; comparaitre, to appear before the judge ; disparaitre, to disappear ; reparaitre, to reappear. 25. Paitre, to graze. P. pr. paissant. Like varaitre, but no Pret. Thus : Rcpaitre, to feed ; with the Pret. Je repus. Part. rcpu. 28. Oonnaitre,* to know. P. pr. connaissant. P. p. connu. * Con-naitre is used in connection with knowledge obtained through cue of the five senses, savoir in other cases. IRREGULAR VERBS. 170 Prcs. Je connais, tu coanais, il eonnait, nous connaissons, vous connaisscz, etc. PreL Je connus. Fut. Je connaitrai. Thus : M&onnaitre, to mistake, not to acknowledge ; reconnoitre, to recog- nize, to know again, to acknowledge. VOCABULARY La conduite, the conduct. lejour, the daylight. triste, sad. sombre, dark. le traitement, the treatment. impossible, impossible. THEME 40. 1. What are you reading there? 2. Why did you read my let- ter? 3. I have not read it, and I shall not read it. 4. Eead over again your lesson. 5. Post thou drink water ? 6. No, I drink wine and water. 7. When you are thirsty, what do you drink? 8. We drink fresh water. 9. Do you believe that? 10. No, I do not believe it. 11. I thought (that) you had written your exercise, but I see (je vois) that I am mistaken. 12. She grows every day. 13. These trees have grown rapidly (rapidemenf) . 14. He did not believe what I said. 15. I (have) thought that we would be here before^ six o'clock. 16. The young gentleman pleased by his conduct. 17. Be silent, Frederick. 18. Tell (to) your sister, if you please, to bring me her French grammar. 19. Do you know my brother? 20. No, I do not know him. 21. You appear sad, what is the matter with you (qu' ' avez-vou-s) ? 22. Such a treatment (has) appeared to me very cruel. 23. The daylight has disap- peared. 180 XLT. QUARANTE ET UNIEME LEQON. XLI. QUARANTE ET UNIEME LE(;ON, IRREGULAR VERBS. FIRST CLASS CONTINUED. 27. Faire, to do, to make. P. pr. faisant.* P. p. fait. Pres. Je fais, tu fais, il fait, nous faisons, vous faites, ils font. Pres. Subj. Que jo fasse, quo tu f asses, qu'il fasse, quo nous fassions, quo YOUS fassiez, qu'ils fassent. Imperf. Je faisais (fesais), tu faisais, il faisait, etc. Pret. Je fis, tu Jls, il fa, nous fimes, vous fitcs, ils firent. Imperf. Subj. Que je j^55e, quo tu fisses, qu'il fit, que nous fis- sions, que vous fissiez, qu'ils fissent. Fut. Je feral, tu feras, etc. Imper. Fais, fa/sons, faites. Conjugate in the same manner the compounds of faire, viz. : dtfaire, to undo, to loosen; contrefaire, to counterfeit; rcfaire, to do again; satmfaire, to satisfy ; surfaire, to exact, ask too much. 28. Mettre, to put. P. pr. mettant. P. p. mis. Pres. Je mcts, tu mets, il met, nous mettons, vous mcttez, ils mettent. Pres. Subj. Que je mette. Imperf. Je mettais. Pret. Je mis, tu mis, il mit, nous mimes, vous wiifes, ils mirent. Imperf. Subj. Que je misse, que tu misses, qu'il mit, etc. Fut. Je mettrai, tu mettras, etc. Thus : Admettre, to admit ; commettre, to commit ; dc f mettre, to turn out ; otnettre, to omit ; permettre, to permit, to allow ; promettre, to promise ; com- promcttre, to compromise, to expose ; remettre, to put again, to replace, to hand over ; soumettre, to submit ; transmettre, to transmit, to send. Se mettre a signifies to begin, as : L* enfant $e mit a pleurer, the child began crying. 20. Prcndre, to take. P. pr. preraant. P. p. pns. *Por the pronunciation of faisantnud its derivatives sec p. 13. IRREGULAR VERBS. 181 Pres. Je prends, tu prcnds, il prend, nous prewong, vous prewcz v ils present. Pres. Sulj. Que je premie, que tu premies, qu'il prerarae, que nous premons, que vous prewiez, qu'ils present. Imperf. Je prewais. Pret. Je pris, tu pris, il prit, nous primes, vous prites, ils pri- rent. Imperf. Subj. Que je prisse. Fut. Je prendrai. Imper. Prends, prewons, prewez. Conjugate in the same manner the compounds of prendre : Apprendre, to learn ; d&apprendre, to unlearn ; rapprendre, to learn over again ; compren- dre, to understand ; entreprendre, to undertake ; mtfprendre, to mistake ; re- prendre, to take again, to reply, to chide ; surprendre, to surprise. 30. Naitre* to be bora. P. pr. naissant. P. p. ne. Pres. Je nais, tu nais, il naifc, nous naissons, yous naissez, ils naissent. Imperf. Je namais. Pret. Je naquis (I was bora), tu naquis, il naquit, nous naqui- mes, vous naqultes, ils naquirent. Fut. Je naitrai, tu naitras, etc. Thus also : Renaitre, to be born again. REMARK. When the person used as subject of the verb is living, the present instead of the past of the auxiliary is used with the past participle. Ex. : Mon pere est n en Angleterre, My father (still living) was born in England. 31. ^Viw^ to live:* P. pr. vivant. P. p. vecu. Pres. Je vis, tu vis, il vit, nous vivons, vous vivez, ils vivent. Subj . Que je vive ; hence the expressions : Vive ! pi. vivent ! long live ! Imper. Vis, vivons, vivez. Imperf. Je vivais. Pret. Je vecus, tu vecus, il vecut, nous vecumes, etc. Fut. Je vivrai. Thus also: Survivre (a qn.) t to survive; revivre, to live again. * Verbg marked thus * take ctre for an auxiliary, instead of avoir. 182 XLI. QUARANTE ET UNIEME LEgON. VOCABULARY. L'apres-midi, f. the afternoon. une ligne, a line. le ruban, the ribbon, un compagnon de voyage, a fellow- une fois, once traveller. paien, pagan* la decision , the decision. d&ormais, henceforward. I'dbondance, f. abundance. obtissant, obedient. THEME 41. 1* What are you doing there? 2. I am writing my exercise. 3. Have you written it? 4. Yes, I have written it. 5. Charles will write it this afternoon. 6. These pupils make a great many mistakes in their exercises, 7. Put this book on the table. 8. Where have you put your penknife ? 9. I have put it in my drawer (tiroir, m.). 10. Did your father permit you to go to the theatre? 11. Yes, he has allowed it. 12. He allows me to go there (d?y aller) once a (par) week. 13. The servant promised hence- forward to be faithful and obedient. 14. All the children began to cry. 15. I take medicine. 16. He takes coffee. 17. We take tea. 18. The children take milk. 19. I took a pen and wrote a few lines to my father. 20. Who has taken my pencil? 21. I have not taken it. 22. Take mine. 23. Do not take this chair ; it is broken (cassee). 24. Do you understand what I say? 25. I understand every word. 26. I should undertake that journey,' if I had a fellow-traveller. 27. We submit ourselves to your decision. 28. Formerly we lived in the country, but for (depuis) several years we have lived (Pres. tense) in Geneva (Geneve). 29. Many rich people live in abundance. IRREGULAR VERBS. 183 XLII. QUARANTE-DEUXIEME LEgON. IRREGULAR VERBS. SECOND CLASS. (32 41. Verbs ending in ir, having the flexions of the Third Conjugation.) 32. Fuir, to shun, to flee. P. pr. fuyant. P. p. fiw. Pres. Je fuis, tu fuis, il fuit, nous fuyons, vous fujez, ils fuiem. Imperf. Je fuyais. Pret. Je fuis. Fut. Je fuirai. Conjugate in the same manner : S'enfuir, to run away. Pres. Je m'en- fuis. Comp. of the Pres. Je me suis enfui, I have run away. 33. Vetir, to clothe, P. pr. vetant. P. p. vetw. Pres. Je vets, tu vets, il vet, nous vetons, etc. Pret. Je vetis. Fut. Je vetirai. Thus also : D&etir, to divest ; revetir, to invest. 34. Servir (qn.), to serve, to help. P. pr. servant. P. p. servi. Pres. Je sers, tu sers, il serf, nous servons, vous servez, ils scr- vent. Sub}. Quo je serve. Pret. Je servis. Fut. Je servirai. ..* Thus also :" Desservir, to clear the table; se servir de, to make use of, to use. 35. Dormir, to sleep. P. pr> dormant. P. p. dorrni. Pres. Je dors, tu dors, il dort, nous dormons, vous dormcz, ils dorment. Subj. Que je dorme. Pret. Je dormis, etc., like servir. Thus : Endormir, to lull asleep ; s'endormir, to fall asleep ; se rendonfiir, to fall asleep again. 36. Partir, to set out, to leave. P. pr. partant. P. p. parti. Pres. Je pars, tu pars, il part, nous partons, etc., like servir. Thus: JRepartir, to set off again, to reply. Not to be confounded with rcpartir, to distribute, which is regular 184 XLII. QUARANTE-DEUXIEME 37. Mcntir, to lie. P. pr. mentant. P. p. inenti. Pres. Je mens, tu mens, il ment, nous inontons, etc., like servir. Thus also : D&nentir, to give the lie. 88. Sentir, to feel, to smell. P. pr. sentant. P. p. seati. Pres. Je sens, tu sens, il sew, nous scntons, etc., like servir. Thus : Consentir, to consent ; pressentir, to foresee ; ressentir, to feel. 39. /Se repcntir de qch., to repent. P. jpr. se repentant. P. p. repenti. Pr. 41. Courir, to run. P. jor. courant. P. p. courw. Prcs. Je cours, tu cours, il court, nous courons, YOUS coui'ez, ils courent. Subj. Que jo coure. Pret. Je courws, tu courus, il courut, nous courumes, vous cou- rutes, ils courarent. Fut. Je courrai, tu courras, il courra, nous coun'ons, vous cour- rez, ils courront. Imper. Cours, courons, courez. Thus: Accourir, to run to; concourir, to compete; discourir, to dis- course ; encourir, to incur ; parcourir, to run over ; recourir, to have re- course ; secourir, to relieve, to assist. 42. Cueillir, to gather. P. pr. cueillant. P. p. cueilli. Pres. Je cueille, tu cueilles, il cueille, nous cueillons, vous cueil- lez, ils cueillent. Subj . Que je cueille. Pret. Je cucillis. Imper. Cueille, cueillons, cucillez. Fut. Je cueillerai. Thus : Accueillir, to receive ; recueittir, to gather. 43. Offrir, to offer. P. pr. offraut. P. p.* effort. Pres. J'oSre, tu oUrcs, il offre, nous ofirons, etc. Pret. J'ofiris. Impcr. Ofire, offi-ons, ofircz. Fut. J'ofiriral. IRREGULAR VERBS. 185 44. Souffrir, to suffer. P. pr. souflrant. P. p. souffert. Prcs. Je souffre, tu souffres, etc., like ojfrir. 45. Ouvrir, to open. P. pr. ouvrant. P. p. ouvert. Pres. J'ouvre, etc., like offrir. Thus : Ifouvrir, to open again ; entr'ouvrir, to open a little. 46. Couvrir, to cover. P. pr. couvrant. P. p. convert. Thus : D&ouvrir, to discover ; recouvrir, to cover over. 47. Tressaittir, to start, to tremble. P. pr. tressaillant. P. p; tressailli. Pres. Je tressaille, tu tressailles, il tressaille, etc. Pret. Je tressaillis, etc. FuL Je tressaillerai and je tressailKrai. Thus : Assaillir, to assault. 48. Saillir, to put out, project. P. pr. saillant. P. p. sailli. Pres. third person, il saille, pi. ils saillent. Like tressaillir ; but it is used only in the third person singular and plural. Saillir (jaillir), to gush, is regular. VOCABULARY. Du mouton, mutton. fatigut, tired. la voiture, the coach. la violette, the violet. mdpriser, to despise. la livre, the pound. *"~~" THEME 42. 1. The enciny flee. 2. Let us shun these places. 3. We clothe the poor. 4. The young girl was clad in black. 5. I cannot meet him ; he shuns me. 6. Avoid bad company. 7. Your friend, Mr, A., does not servo me well. 8. I made use of your coach. 9. Tell me what he has done to you ; but, above all (surtouf), do not lie. 1.0- He who lies deserves to be despised. 11. I go out every day. 12. Do not go out, Robert; it is too cold. 13. If I were as ill as you, I would not go out of my room. 14. I feel the cold. 15. Do not make any (de) noise, for my mother is asleep (sleeps). 16. I hope she will sleep better to-night (cette nuit). 17. If I do 186 XLIII. QUARANTE-TBOIS1EME LEQON. not walk a little, I shall fall asleep. 18. Do you not repent of what (de ce que) you have done? 19. I always repent when I have done wrong (mal). 20. Do not run so fast (yite), you will be tired. 21. They always run when they go to see their aunt. 22. I ran faster than you. 23. If she is unhappy, I shall relieve her. 24. For whom are you gathering these violets ? 25.1 gather them for my mother. 26. The young lady has been received with the greatest kindness. 27. I always offer him my services. 28. lie offered me a hundred pounds for my garden. 20. What are you doing there ? 30. I cover the plants with (de) snow. XLIII. QUARANTE-TROISIEME IRREGULAR VERBS. THIRD CLASS. (49 53. Verbs in ir changing their radical vowel and taking the flexions of the third Conjugation.) 49. Mburir* to die. P. pr. mourant. P.p. mort. Pres. Je meurs, tu meurs, il meurt, nous mourons, vous mourez, ils meurent. Subj. Que je meure, que tu meures, qu'il meure, que nous mourions, que vous mouriez, qu'ils meurent. Tmper. Meurs, mourons, mourez. Pret. Je rnourus, tu mourus, il mourut, nous mourumes, vous mourutcs, ils moururent. Fut. Je mourrai, tu mourras, il rnourra, etc. Thus also : Se mourir, to be near dying, to be fainting. Pres. Je me mcurs, etc. 50. BouiUir, to Tboil, neut. v. P. pr. bouillant. P. p. bouilli. Pres. Je bous, tu bous, il bout, nous bouillons, vous bouillez, ils bouillent. Subf. Que je bouille. IRREGULAR VERBS. 187 Pret. Je bouillis. Fut. Je bouilKrai. To boil, as an active verb, is rendered falre louittir, as : To boil potatoes, faire bouillir des pommcs de terre. 51. Venir* to come. P. pr. vcnant. P. p. venw. Pres. Je viens, tu viens, il v^ent, nous venons, vous venez, ils V^ennent. Pres. Subj. Que je v^enne, que tu v^nnes, qu'il vienne, que nous venions, que vous veniez, qu'ils v^nnent. Imperf. Je venais. Pret. Je vins, tu vins, il vint, nous vmmes, vous v?ntes, ils v^n- rent. Imperf. Subj. Que je vinsse, que tu vinsses, qu'il vmt, que nous vinssions, etc. Fut. Je viendrai, tu vzendras, etc. Cond. Je vi'endrais. Imper. Viens, venons, venez. Conjugate in the same manner: Convenir, to agree, to suit ; devenir* to become ; intervenir* to intervene ; parvenir* to attain, to reach ; prtfvenir, to be beforehand with, to inform ; provenir* to arise, spring from, to pro- ceed ; se souvenir, to remember ; survenir* to happen ; subvenir, to relieve. ; revenir* to come back (again). 52. Tenir, to hold. P. pr. tenant. P. p. tern*. This verb is conjugated like venir, as : Pres. Je tiens, tu tafens, il tzVnt, nous tenons, vous tenez, ils tien- nent. tSuij. Que je t/enne. jPre^. Je tins, tu tins, il tz'nt, nous tmnies, vous tmtes, ils t/n- rent. jPw^. Je ti'endrai. Imper. Tiens, tenons, tenez. Thus also : Appartenir, to belong ; s'abstenir, to abstain ; contenir, to con- tain ; denir, to detain ; entretenir, to keep up ; maintenir, to maintain ; cb- tenir, to obtain ; retenir, to retain ; soutenir, to sustain, uphold, support. 53. Acquerir, to acquire. P. pr. acquerant. P. %) acqu?'s. Pres. J'acquiers, tu acqm'ers, il acquzert, nous acquerons, vous acquerez, ils acquzerent. Pres. Subj. Que j'acqwere, que tu ac- quires, qu'il acquiere, que nous acquerions, que vous acqueriez, qu'ils acquzerent. 188 XLIII. QUARANTE-TROISIEME LEQCN. Pret. J 'acquw, tu acqms, il acqmV, nous acqiumes, vous ils accpiirent. Impf. Subj. Que j'acquisse. Fut. J'acquerrai, tu acquerras, il acquerra, etc. Impcr. Acqm'ers, acquerons, acquerez. Conjugate in the same manner: Conqufrir, to conquer ; reconquer, to conquer again ; rcqu&rir, to request, and s'enque'rir, to inquire. Qitfrir, to seek, is used, in familiar conversation, after alter, venir, envoyer, as : a//es qurir, go and seek. VOCABULARY. Ze chagrin, grief. I' assiduity f. assiduity. maladie, f. disease, illness. efes connaissanccs, f. knowledge. douloureux, -se, painful. /a chaleur, the heat. continuer, to continue. /a partie, the part. Za parole, the word. THEME 43. 1. Your friend is dying. 2. Mrs. A. died of (de) grief. 3. The old general died at Paris of a very painful disease. 4. Take the water off the fire ; it boils. 5. Boil that meat again, it has not- boiled long enough. 6. Miss Emily is corning. 7. Dost thou come? 8. Yes, I come. 9. Why do you not come when I call you? 10. He came to see me every morning. 11. Come back soon. 12. I shall be (come) back in an hour. 13. Mrs. B. would have come to us if it had not rained (plu). 14. I hope you will keep your word and (will) come to-morrow. 15. I maintain, and will always maintain, that you will not be happy without virtue. 16. I agree that Miss L. is the prettiest of the family ; but she is so proud, that I know (sais) not what will become of her (ce qu'ette . . .). 17. My uncle will not come back to-day. 18. Mr. S. will not obtain that situation (place). 19. If you study much, you will acquire knowledge. 20. I do not think (that) this color suits (to) your sister. 21. That hat would suit you very well, if you -\pere a little taller. 22. Alexander the Great conquered the greatest part of Asia. 23. Your uncle has acquired a great name in America. 24. The young man did not survive (outlive) (to) that misfortune. 25. You will become a great man, if you continue to study with the same assiduity. IRREGULAR VERB3. 189 XLIY. QUARANTE-QUATRIEME LEgON. IRREGULAR VERBS. THIRD CLASS -CONTINUED. (54 66. Verbs in -oir. Contraction of the root and the terminations, Part, past and Pret. in w.) 54. Devoir, to owe, (ought to). JP. pr. devant. P.p. du. Pres. Je dois* tu dois, il doit, nous dcvons, vous devez, ils doivent. Pres. Subj. Que je doive. Pret. Je dus, tu dus, il dut, nous duines, YOUS diites, ils durent. Tmperf. Subj. Que je dusse. Fut. Je devrai, tu dcvras, etc. Oond. Je devrais.* Thus also : redevoir. 55. Recevoir, to receive. P. pr. recevant. P. p. repu. Pres. Je repois, tu re$ois, il regoit, nous recevons, vous rccevez, ils regozvent. Pret. Je lequs, tu IQ^US, il requt, nous TQqiunes, vous refutes, ils requrent. Fut. Je recevrai, tu recevras, etc. Thus also : Decevoir, to deceive ; apercevoir, to perceive ; concevoir, to con- ceive ; percevoir, to collect. 56,-s.D^oiV, to fall, to decay. (Np P. pr.) P.p. dec/m. Pres. Je dechois, tu dechois, il dechoit, nous dechoyons, vous declioi/ez, ils dechoient. Subj. Que je dechoie. Pret. Je dechus, tu declius, il dechut, nous dechumes, vous dc^ chutes, ils dechurent. Fut. Je decherTm', tu decherra^, ils decherra, nous dvoherrons, vous deeherre^, ils dudoh Thus Echoir, to fall to, to expire ; P. pr. (fchtfant; P. p. &hu. It is now only used in the third pers. sing.: il or -die tfchoit, il cliut y etc. Choir is only used in the Infinitive mood. * Jc dois, followed by a verb, corresponds to the English j lam to, Iinusl. Je dcvrais, I ought to, I should. 190 XLIY. QUARANTE-QUATRIEME LE^ON. 57. Falloir,iQ\)Q necessary, is an impersonal verb, the conjuga- tion of which has been given p. 147. Pres. II faut. Imperf. II fallait, etc. 58. Afpuvotr,to move. P. pr. mouvant. P. p. mu. Pres. Je meus, tu meus, il meut, nous mouvons, vous mouvez, ils meuvent. Subj. Que je mewve, c[ue tu mewves, qu'il mewve, que nous mouvions, que vous mouviez, qu'ils mewvent. Pret. Je mus, tu mus, il mut, nous mumes, vous mutes, ils murent. Fut. Je mouvrai. \ Thus also : iZmouvoir, to move, to excite, stir up ; s*mouvoir t to be moved, rJrected. 59. Pleuvoir, to rain (impers.*). P. pr. pleuvant. P. p. plu. Pres. II pleut. Subj. Qu'il plcuve. Imperf. II pleuvait. Pret. II plut. Subj. Imperf. Qu'il plut. Fut. II pleuvra. CO. PourvQirj* to provide. P. pr. pourvo^ant. P. p. pourvu. Pres. Je pourvois, tu pourvois, il pourvoit, nous pourvoyons, vous pourvo?/ez, ils pourvoient. Pret. Je pourvus. Fut. Je pourvoirai. Thus : Prvoir, to foresee, which makes in the Pret. je prfvis. 61. Pouvoir, to be able. P.pr. pouvant. P. p. pu. Pres. Je pcux (or je puts) , tu peux, il pent, nous pouvons, vous pouvez, ils peuvent. Pres. Subj. Que je 2 }U ^se^ quo tu puisses, qrf'Apuisse, que nous pmssions, quo vous puissiez, qu'ils puissent. Impf. Je pouvais. Pret. Je pus, tu pus, il put, nous pumes, vous putes, ils purent. Imperf. Subj. Que jvpusse.^ Fut. Je pourrai, tu pourras, il pourra, nous pourrons, vous pourrez, ils pouTTont. Cond. Jc pourrais. NOTE. May, expressing a wish, is rendered by the Present tense of the Subjunctive. Ex.: Puisse-t-il etre heureux, may he be happy 1 * Like 65 Voir, except the Pret . and Fut. IRREGULAR VERBS. 191 62. Savoir, to know. P. pr. savant. P. p. su. Pres. Je sais, tu sais, il sail, nous savons, vous savez, ils savenfc. Subf. Que je sache, que tu sac/2 es, qu'il sac^e, que nous sac/aons, que vous sac/iiez, qu'ils sacAent. Imperf. Je savais, tu savais, etc. Pret. Je sus, tu sus, il sut, nous sumes, vous sutes, ils surent. Fut. Je sawrai, tu sawras, etc. j Imper. Sache, sachons, sachez. When the word can means to know how, it is rendered in French by savoir, instead of pouvoir. Ex.: Savez-vous parler francais? Can you speak French ? KOTE. There is also an old form of the Pres. Ind. Je sache. The Cond. Je ne saurais (without pas) signifies, I cannot, as : Je ne saurazs vous dire, I cannot tell you. G3. Valoir, to be worth. P. pr. valant. P. p. Pres. Je vaux, tu vaux, il vaut, nous valons, vous valez, ils va- lent. Subj. Que je vaille, que tu vailles, qu'il vaille, que nous valions, que vous valiez, qu'ils vaillent. Imperf. Je valais. Pret. Je valus, tu valus, il valut, nous valumes, etc. Fut. Je vaudrai, tu vaudras, etc. Cond. Je vaudrais. Observe the expression : II vaut mieux, it is better, etc. Conjugate in the same manner: pre'valoir,$o prevail; but it makes the Subj. pres.: Que je prtfvale (not prevaille), que tu privates, qu'il private, que nous privations, que vous pre'valiez, qu'ils prevalent. 64. Vouloir, to be willing. P. pr. voulant. P. p. voulu. Pres. Je veux, tu veux, il veut, nous voulons, vous voulez, ils veulent. Subj. Que je veuille, quo tu veuilles, qu'il veuille, que aous voulions, que vous vouliez, qu'ils veuillent. Imper. ( Veuille), veuillez, be so kind as. Imperf. Je voulais. Pret. Je voulus, tu voulus, il voulut, nous voulumes, etc. Fut. Je voudrai, tu voudras, etc. Cond. Je voudrais, I should like to. 192 XLIY. QUAKANTE-QCJATRIEME LEgON. The first person, je veux, is mostly used to imply authority,, command. Je d&ire is substituted as a more polite expression for the affirmative. Je ne veux pas, is used, however, for the necj \itive. 65. Voir, to see. P. pr. volant. P. p. vu. Pres. Je vois, tu vois, il voit, nous voyons, vous voyez, ils voient. fmperf. Je voyais, tu voyais, etc. PreL Je vis, tu vis, il vit, nous vimes, vous vites, etc. Fut. Je vcrrai, tu verras, il verra, etc. Tmper. Yois, voyons, voyez. Thus : Revoir, to see again ; entrevoir, to have a glimpse of. For pour- voir and pr&oir see No. 60. Alter voir and venir voir qn. are rendered : to call upon a person. 66. S'asseoir, to sit ckmn. P. pr. s'asse?/ant. P. p. assis. Pres. Je m'assieds, tu t'assieds, il s'assied, nous nous asseyons, vous vous asseyez, ils tfasseient. Or, je m'assois, etc. Imperf. Je m'asseyais. Or, jc m'assoyais, etc. Pret. Je m'assis, tu t'assis, il s'assit, nous nous assimes, vous vous assites, ils s'assirent. Fut. Je m'assierat, tu i'assiera*, il & y assiera t etc. Or, je m'as- seierai, tu t'osseieras, il s'asse^ra, etc. Imper. Assieds-ioi, asse^ows-nous, asse?/e?-vous. VOCABULARY. C/7i panier, a basket. ^/)a/s, thick. ?e danger, the danger. rherbe, f. the grass. Ze ressort, the spring, humide, damp. /e6eat/^ere,the brother-in-lavr. Ze lruit > la nouvelle, the report. rtp&er, to repeat. arreter, to stop. coupable, criminal. Vadresse, f. the direction, tf, the looking-glass. THEME 44. 1. I am to copy my exercise. 2. We must set out. 3. You ought to come at two o'clock. 4. I receive a letter every clay. 5. We receive our money from the banker (du lanquier). 6. My friend received a basket filled with grapes (de raisins). 7. The IRREGULAR VERBS. 193 hunter perceived a bird on a tree. 8. They did not perceive the clanger. 9. The spring which moves the whole machine is very ingenious (ingenieux). 10. Does it rain? 11. No, it does not rain ; but it will rain this evening. 12. If men do not provide for it (#), God will provide for it. 18. Before he left (avant de par* ftr), he provided for (a) all. 14. Can you come? 15. I cannot come, but my brother can (come). 16, We could see nothing, for it was dark (il faisait nuit). 17. I could do it myself, if I had time. 18. May you be happy ! I could do no better. 19. I know that he is your friend, but I did not know that he was your brother- in-law. 20. Do you know why he has (is) not come? V21. No, I do not know (it). 22. When you know (Put.) your lesson, come and repeat it to me. 23. These pens are worth nothing. 24. It is (yauf) better to be unfortunate than guilty. 25. Can't you see that star? 26. I do not see it. 27. Sit down there a minute. 28. Why do not you sit down ? 29. Let us sit upon the grass. 30. I would sit down upon the grass, if it were not so damp. 31. Can you speak French ? 32. I can read, but I cannot speak [it]. 33. Is this report true? 34. I cannot (Cond.) tell (it) you. 35. He does not choose to (will not) cat. 36. If I chose (would), I should tell you where he lives. 37. What would you have me do (that I should do) (Imperf. Subj.) ? 38. We could have stopped him, if we had chosen. 39. I send you herewith (ci-joinf) the direction of Mr. L. 40. I have found the ring which my cousin has lost, and I shall send it to her. 13 194 XLV. QUARANTE-CINQUIEME LEgON. XLV. QUARANTE-CINQUIEME LEgON, UlEEGULAIl VERBS. THIRD CLASS CONTINUED. 67. Hire, to laugh. P. pr. riant. P. p. ri. Prcs, Je ris. Imperf. Je rials. Prct. Je ris, tu ris, il rit, etc. Fut. Je rirai. 68. Envoyer, to send. P. pr. envoyant. P. p. envoye*. Pres. J'envoie. Imperf. J'envoyais. Pret. J'cnvoyai. Fut. J'envemu, tu enverras, etc. Cond. J'enverrais. 69. Aller* to go. P. pr. allant. P. p. alle. Pres. Je vais, tu vas, il va, nous allons, vous allez, ils vont. Prcs. Sidy. Que faille, que tu ailles, qu'il ewYfo, que nous allions, ^ue vous alliez, qu'ils aillent. Imperf. J'allais, tu allais, il allait, etc. Pret. J'allai, tu alias, il alia, nous allames, vous allates, ils allerent. Imperf. Sulj. Que j'allasse, que tu allasses, etc. Imper. Ya, allons, allez. Perf. Je suis alle, I have gone. Fut. J'irai (IthaUgo), tu iras, il ira, nous ii-ons, vous irez, ils iront. Cond. J'ii-ais, tu irais, etc. Conjugation of S'en alter, to go away. "We give the reflective verb S'en aller, to go away, at full length, because its conjugation is rather difficult on account of its two pronouns. Observe that en is never separated from the objective m', t\ s', nous, etc. ; hsnce it follows, that the compound or Perfect must not be written : Je me suis en atif, but je m'en suis alle', tu t'en es edit, etc. INDICATIVE MOOD. PRESENT TENSE. Je m'en vais, I go away. nous nous en allons,we go away. tu t'en vas, etc. vous vous en allez, etc. il s'en va, etc. ils s'en vent, etc. IRREGULAR VERBS. 195 Neg. Je no m'en vais pas. tu ne t'en vas pas, etc. M'en vais-je, do I go awayt etc. Ne m'en vais-je pas ? etc. IMPERFECT. Jc m'en allais, tu t'cn allais. M'en allais-je, did I go away 1 Jo ne m'en allais pas. Ne m'en allais-je pas ? Je m'en allai. Je ne m'en allai pas. Je m'en irai. Je ne m'en irai pas. AFFIRMATIVE. Va-t'en. (qu'il s'en aille). allons-nous-en. allez-vous-en. (qu'ils s'enaillent). PRETERITE. M'en allai-je ? Ne m'en allai-je pas ? FUTURE. M'enirai-je? Ne m'en irai-je pas ? IMPERATIVE. NEGATIVE. Ne t'en va pas. (qu'il ne s'en aille pas), ne nous en allons pas. ne vous en allez pas. (qu'ils ne s'en aillent pas). .;.._.._ COMPOUND OP TIIE PRESENT. Je m'en suis alle, I have gone away, nous nous en sommes tu t'en es al!6. vous vous en etes all^(s). il s'en est alle. ils s'en sont alles. elle s'en est allde. elles s'en sont allees. NEGATIVELY. Je ne m'en suis pas all(5. tu ne t'en es pas alle. il ne s'en est pis alle. nous ne nous en sommes pas alles. vous ne vous en tes pas alie(s). ils ne s'en sont pas alle's. 196 XLV. QUARANTE-CINQUlfiME M'en suis-je alle ? t'en es-tu alle? e'en est-il alls' ? INTERROGATIVELY. nous en sommes-nous alles? vous en etes-vous alle(s) ? s'en sont ils alles ? NEGATIVE-INTERROGATIVE. Ne m'en suis-je pas alle ? ne nous en sommes-nous p. alleys ? ne t'en es-tu pas alle? ne vous en etes-vous pas alles? ne s'en est-il pas alle ? ne s'en sont-ils pas alles ? COMPOUND OP THE IMPERFECT. Je m'en ^tais alle. M'en e'tais-je alle ?, Je ne m'en e'tais pas alle. No m'en etais-je'pas alld ? Que je m'en aille. que tu t'en ailles. qu'il s'en aille;. IMPERFECT. Que je m'en allasse. que tu t'en aUasses* qu'il s'en allat, etc. S'en aller. S'en allant. SUBJUNCTIVE. PRESENT. que nous nous en allions. que vous vous en alliez. qu'ils s'en aillent. PERFECT* Que je m'en sois alld. PLUPERFECT. Que je m'en fusse all^. INFINITIVE. S'en etre alle. PARTICIPLES. S'en etant alle*. VOCABULARY. ^ f obliged. sonner, to strike. Jeudi dernier, last Thursday. la santf, health. la musique, music. importuner, to importune. le pavilion, the flag. hissf, hoisted. DEFECTIVE VERBS. 197 THEME 45. 1. I go to London. 2. Thou goest to Paris. 3. He goes to Berlin. 4. My brother has_ also gone to Berlin. 5. Where are you going? 6. I am going to the play (an spectacle). 7. I would go with you, if I had time. 8. Why are they going away so soon? 9. They are obliged to _go_away, 10. Will not your mother be angry (fdchee'), if you go away before her ? 11. I told her that I would go away before her, and she has permitted (it to) me. 12. My sister and I (we) went to the concert last Thursday. 13. If *you l^d gone (there, y) also, you would have heard fine music. 14. These men went yesterday from house to (en) house. 15. At what o'clock will you go (away) ? 16. I should have already gone, if it had not rained so fast (fort). 17. Is he really gone (away)? Yes, he went (has gone) away this morning. 18. Let us go (away), it is going to (il vd) strike three o'clock. 19. How is (va) your health? 20. Thank_you, Jt_ l^JiotjTery good. 21. I wish (should like that) the boy would go (away) (Imperf. Subj.). 22. I wish they would go away. 23. Begone (go away), you importune me. XLYI. QUARANTE-SIXIEME LE90N. DEFECTIVE VERBS. Verbs whereof some tenses or persons are wanting are defective verbs. They are as follows : 70. Braire, to bray. Pres. H brait, ils braient. Fut. II braira, Cond. n brairait.. 71. Bruire, to roar. P. pr. bruyant. Imperf. II bruyait, pi. ils bruyaient. 72. Choir, to fall. P.p. chu. 198 XL VI. - QUARANTE-SIXIEME LEQN. 73. Clore, to close. P. p. clos. Pres. Je clos, tu clos, il clot. Fut. Je clorai, tu cloras, etc. Cond. Je clorais. 74. Edore* to be hatched. P. p. eclos. Pres. II eclot, pi. ils eclosent. Subj. Qu'il eclose, pi. eclosent. Fut. II eclora, pi. ils ecloront. Its compound tenses are formed with etre. 75. Faittir, to fail. P. pr. (faiUant.) P. p. failli. Pres. II faut. Pretf. Je faillis, tu faillis, il faillit, nous faillimes, YOUS faillites, ils faillirent. Perf. J'ai failli, I had nearly. Thus : Dtfaillir, to faint. 76. Ferir is used only in the expression : Sans coup ftrir, without striking a blow. 77. Frire, to fry. P. pr. wanting. P. p. frit. Pres. Je fris, tu fris, il frit. Plur. wanting. Fut. Je frirai. Cond. Je frirais. Perf. J'ai frit, etc. 78. Gesir, to lie. P. pr. gz'sant. Pres. ci-git, here lies; pi. ci-gisent (used on tombstones*). Far ther : nous gisons, YOUS gisez, ils gisent. Imperf. ci-gisait; pi. ci-gisaicnt. 79. Issir, to be born, is used only in the P. p. issu. 80. Omr, to hear. P. p. ou'i. Pret. J'ouls, tu ou'is, etc. Imperf. Subj. Que j'ouisse, etc. Further the compound tenses, as : J'ai oui', etc. 81. Sourdre, to rush out of the ground, as water, has only tie Infinitive and the Present, elle sourd, elles sourdent: 82. Seoir, to fit. P. pr. scant. P. p. sis. Jhd. pres. II sied. Fut. II siera. Cond..TL sierait. 83. Surseoir, to put off. P. p. sursis. Pres. Je surseois. Pret. Je sursis. NOTE. Most of these verbs are not much in use. IRREGULAR AND DEFECTIVE VERBS. 199 AN ALPHABETICAL LIST OF ALL THE FRENCH IRREGULAR, AND DEFECTIVE VERBS * CONTAINING THEIR FIVE PRIMITIVE TENSES. Infinitive. Pres. Part. pr. P.P. Pret. No. AbsOudre j'absous absolvant absous, to wanting 13. Acque'rir j'acquiers acquerant acquis, e j 'acquis 53. Aller je vais allant alle, e j'allai 69. Assaillir j'assaille assaillant assailli, e j'assaillis 47. S'asseoir je m'assieds s'asseyant assis, e je m'assis 66. Atteindre j'atteins atteignant atteint, e j'atteignis 14. Battre, see L. xxm. ,Rem. 1. Boire je bois buvant bu, e je bus 19. Bouillir je bous bouillant bouilli, e je bouillis 50. Braire il brait wanting wanting 70. Bruire Imp. il bruyait bruyant 71. Ccindre je ceins ceignant ceint, e je ceignis 14. Choir, see dechoir 56. Circoncire je circoncis circoncis je circoncis 2. Clore je clos clos 73. Conclure je conclus concluant conclu, e je conclws L. 23. Concevoir je con9ois concevant con^u, e je congus 55. Conduire je conduis conduisant conduit, e je conduisis 5. Confire je confis confisant confit, e je confis 2. Connaitre je connais connaissant connu, e je connus 26. Coudrc- je couds cousant cousu, o je cousis 11. Courir je cours courant couru, e je courus 41. Couvrir je couvre couvrant convert, e je couvris 46. Craindre je crains craignant craint, e je craignis 15. Croire je crois croyant cm, e je crus 20. Croitre je crois croissant cru, e je crus 21. Cueillir je cueille cueillant cueilli, e je cuellis 42. Cnire je cuis cuisant cuit, e je cuisis 4. Dechoir je dechois de'chu, e je dechus 56. Devoir je dois devant da je dus 54. Dire je dis disant dit, o je dis 7. Dormir je dors dormant dormi je dormis ^5. * The derivatives which are not in this table will be found with the primitives, under their respective number. 200 XLVI. QUARANTE-SIXIEME LE^ON. IS choir il echoit echeant echu il e'chut 56 t Eclore il eclot eclos 74. Ecrire j'ecris ecrivant ecrit, e j'e'crivis 17. Envoyer j'envoie envoyant envoye j'envoyai 68, Paire je fais faisant fait, e jo fis 27. Faillir faillant failli je faillis 75. Ealloir il faut fallu il fallut 57, Eeindre je feins feignant feint, e je feignis 14. Ferir 76. Frirt je fris frit, e 77. Euir je fuis fuyant fui je fuis 32. Gesii il git gisant 78. Joindre je joins joignant joint, e je joignis 16. Issir issu, e 79. Instruire j'instruis instruisant instruit, e j'instruisis 6. Lire jelis lisant lu, e je lus 18. Xiiiire je luis luisant lui I. Mentir je mens mentant menti je mentis 37. Mettre je mets mettant mis, e je mis 28. Moudre je mouds moulant moulu, e je moulus 12. Mourir je meurs mourant mort, e je mourus 49. Mouvoir je meus mouvant mu, e je mus 58. Naitre je nais naissant ne, e je naquis 30. Nuire je nuis nuisant nui je nuisis 3. Offrir j'offre offrant offert, e j'onris 43. Oindre j'oins oint j'oignis 16. Ouir ou'i j'ou'is 80. Ouvrir j'ouvre ouvrant ouvcrt, e j'ouvris 45. Paitre je pais paissant pu 25. Paraitre je parais parais sant paru je parus 24. Partir je pars partant parti je partis 36. Peindre je perns peignant peint je peignis 14. Plaindre je plains plaignant plaint je plaignis 15. Plaire je plais plaisant plu je plus 22. Pleuvoir il pleut pleuvant plu il plut 59. Prendre je prends prenant pris je pris 29. Poindre je poins poignant (point) (je poignis) 16. Pourvoir je pourvois pourvoyant pourvu, e pourvus 60. 3J>uvoir jc pcux (puis ) pouvant pu je pus 61. Kepentir, se je me repens repentant repenti je me repcntis 39. Restreindrc jc rcstreins rcstrcint je restreignis 14. Hire je ris riant ri je ris 67 SUPPLEMENTARY TENSES. 201 Rorapre, see L. xxin., Eem. 2, Sailiir il saille saillant sailli il saillit 48, Savoir je sais sachant su, e je sus 62, Sentir je sens sentant send, e je sentis 38, Seoir il sied scant sis, e 82. Scrrir je sers servant servi, e je servis 34. Sortir je sors sortant sorti je sortis 40, Souffirir je souffre souffrant souffert, e je souffris 44. Sourdre elle sourd 81. Suivre je suis uivant suivi, e je suivis 9. Suffire je suffis isuffisant suffi je suffis 2. Surseoir je surseois sursoyant sursis je sursis M. Taire je tais taisant tu, e je tus 2n. Teindre je teins teignant teint, e je teignis ! l. Tcnir je tiens tenant tenu, e je tins b-2. Traire je trais trayant trait 8. Tressaillir je tressaille tressaillant tressailli je tressaillis 47. Valoir je vaux valant valu je valus 63. Vaincre je vaincs vainquant vaincu, e je vainquis 10. Venir je viens venant venu, e je vins 51. Vetir je vets vetant vetu je vetis 33. Vivre je vis vivant ve'cu je vcus 31. Voir je vois voyant vu, e je vis 65. Vouloir je veux voulant voulu, e je voulus 64. XLVII. QUARANTE-SEPTI&ME HOW TO RENDER DO, DID, SHALL, WILL, ETC. SUPPLEMENTARY TENSES. The auxiliaries do, will, shall, etc., in answers, are often used in English in an elliptical manner, when in French the principal verb must be repeated, and a noun or pronoun supplied. St,"yes" is generally used in answers instead of oui in replying to a question in which there is a negation, or in contradiction to a negative statement. 202 XLVII. QUARANTE-SEPTIEME LEgON. EXAMPLES I Avcz-voas du pain? Oui, fen ai. Have you any bread? Yes, I have. Avez-vous rcpondu ? Oui, j'ai r- Have you answered? Yes, I have. pondu ? Achcteront-ils cc beurre? Oui, ils Will tlieij buy \.\at butter? Yes } lhe$ Vacheteront. will. Voulez vous Ic lui demandcr ? Oui, Will you ask him for it ? Yes, I will. je veux bicn. Etes-vous Anglais? Non jc nc le Are you an Englishman? No, I am suis pas. not. Avez-vous etc a Rome? Non, je Have you been in Rome? No, I have n'y ai pas &. not. Est-ce vous qui etcs vcnu hicr soir ? Was it you who came last ni-jht ? No, Non, ce n'est pas moi. it was not I. Cc n'est pas ce peintre qui a fait That painter did not take your like' votre portrait ? Si, c'est lui. ness, did he, ? Yes, he did. Lui rendrez-vous son portrait ? CeJa Will you return her likeness to her? va sans dire. Of course I will. Partira-t-il ? Oui, il partira. Will he set out ? Yes, he will. Inez vous s'il y allait ? Mais oui, Should you go there if he did ? Why, je leferais. yes, I should. Est-cc la mode ? Oui, c'cst la Is it the fashion ? Yes, it is. mode. Pourquoi vous plaignez-vous ? Je "Why do you complain ? I do not ne me plains pas ; c'cst mon frere complain ; my brother does. qui se plaint. II so plaint! Oui, Does he? Indeed he does, and vraimcnt, et il y a longtemps he has complained for a long qu'il se plaint. time. J'ai faim. Vraiment? Oui, bien I am hungry. Are you? Yes, faim. very. Doit-elle vcnir ce soir ? Oui, elle Does she intend to come this even- doit venir. ing ? Yes, she docs. In exclamations the auxiliary must be translated by some words expressive of the meaning implied by the English ellipsis. Ex. : Son associe cst revenu des Indes. His partner has returned from India. Est-ce possible, vous me sur- Has he ? prenez, or simply, Ah ! vraiment ! J'ai sommeil. Ah ! vraiment ? or, lam sleepy. Are you ? Allons done, vous plaisantcz. SUPPLEMENTARY TENSES. 203 SUPPLEMENTARY TENSES. The verbs aller, devoir, and venir de are idiomatically used, forming, with an infinitive, what some grammarians have called " Supplementary Tenses." Alter and devoir hefore an infinitive form idiomatic futures, and corre- spond to tke English verbs to go and to be (to be about to), in a like position. Venir de forms idiomatic past tenses, and corresponds to the English tt kav6 just. CONJUGATION OF THE SUPPLEMENTARY TENSES. Je vais avoir, Tu vas chanter, 11 va danser, Nous allons finir, Vous allez rcndre, Us vont recevoir, J'allais avoir, etc. Je dois ' avoir, Tu dois chanter, 11 doit danser, Nous devons ' finir, Vous devez Us doivcnt * rendre, recevoir, Je devais avoir, etc. Je dcvrais avoir, etc. J'aurais du avoir, etc. Je vicns dc (d') ' avoir, Tu viens " chanter, 11 vient " danser, Nous vcnons " finir, Vous vcncz " rendre, Us vicnncnt " , recevoir, / am going Thou art going He is going We are going You are going They are going to have, to sing, to dance, to Jinish. to render, to receive. I ivas going to have, etc* I am Thou art He is We are You are They are to have, to sing, to dance, to finish, to render. v to receive. I was to have. I should or ought to have. I should or ought to have had. Je venais d' avoir, etc. / have just had. Thou hast just sung. lie has just danced. We have just finished. You have just rendered. They have just received. I had just had, etc. XLVII. QUARANTE-SEPTIEME LEgON, These last tenses may be expressed by faire preceded by ne and followed by the conjunctive que, with an infinitive preceded bycfe (ne faire quede). e. g. II ne fait que d'arriver. He has but just arrived. Je ne fais que dc. sortir. I have but just gone out. N. B. The particle de is here indispensable, because, without it the ex- pression would have quite another sense, and would denote a continuation or a frequent repetition of the aoCon. Ex. : Vous nefaites que sortir. You do nothing but go out. Elle ne fait que jotter. She does nothing but play. II. ELISION. The vowels a, e, i, when final, are sometimes elided before a word beginning with a vowel or h mute ; thus : Vdme, rhomme, s'il, in< stead of la ame, le homme, si il. ELISION OF a. A is elided only in the word la. Ex. : Tamitie. ELISION OF e. E is elided in the nine monosyllables je, me, te, le, de, ne, ce, se and que. Ex.: faime; c'est rhomme qu'il rfestime pas. EXCEPTIONS. 1. The vowels of the pronouns fa, la,je, and ceare never elided when they come after the verb. Ex. : Ai-je un livre ; est-ce die. The e in y^and ce^is not pronounced, however, though the e and a of le and la are in voyez-la aujourd'hui, voyez-le aujourd'hui. 2. Before oui and onze no elision takes place : je crois que oui; le onze. The E is elided in lorsque, when; puisque, since; quoique, though, only before il, elle, on and un. Ex.: lorsqu'il, puisqrfon, etc. In quelque the e is elided only before un, une, and autre. Ex. : quelqu'un ; quelqu* autre. In entre m^presque, e is elided only when they form part of a compound word. Ex.: entr'acte, presqu'ile. ELISION or i. I is elided only in the conjunction s before il *nd ils. Ex.: s'il, s'ils. 206 I. PHEMIEKE LEgON. I. PREMIERE LE90N. ON THE GENDER OF SUBSTANTIVES. I. RULES ON THE GENDER OF SIMPLE NOUNS. $1. MASCULINE BY TIIEIH SIGNIFICATION ARE : 1. The names of all masculine beings, as : Henri, Henry ; Tern- pcreur, th emperor ; le maitre, the master ; le Frangais, the Frenchman; le taureau, the bull, etc. 2. The names of metals, trees, shrubs, seasons, months, and days, as: le fer, iron; le dune, the oak; le printemps, spring; le joli Mai, (the) fine May ; (le) Inndi, Monday, etc. 3. All words that arc made substantive by prefixing the article, as: le vert, the green (color); le lien, the good; le boire et le mmiger, drinking and eating; le oui et le non, the yes and no. 4. Nouns expressing professions, titles, or qualities which belong generally to men : philosophe, orateur, etc. 5. The names generally used in natural history to designate the different species of animals : un quadmpede, un mam:nifere, un herbivore, etc. 0. The names employed in Chemistry to designate simple bodies and most of their compounds : I'or, le cuivre, I'hydroyene, Voxy- gene. 7. The names of the decimal nomenclature : le metre, le franc y le centime, etc. $2. MASCULINE BY TERMINATION: 1. Nouns ending in a consonant (except those in aison, ion, and eur). 2. Nouns ending in any vowel except e rnute and e preceded by t or ti. ' 3. Nouns ending in e mute preceded by o, g, I (not double), m, ON THE GENDER OP SUBSTANTIVES. 207 ^ r (except rr not preceded by u), s, t (not double), or u (except those in ique) . To any rules for terminations, there will be found many exceptions. These rules are general. Most of the exceptions in common lue, the pu- pil will learn as they occur in this grammar. $3. FEMININE BY SIGNIFICATION: 1. All names of female persons and animals, as : Marie, Mary ; la reine, the queen ; la Jille, the girl ; la jument, the marc, etc. 2. The names of fruits, flowers, and herbs, as : la poire, tho pear ; la pomme, the apple ; la rose, the rose ; l]herbc> the grass. Except: Le marron, the chestnut; le citron, the lemon; le raisin, the grape ; un abricot, an apricot ; un ceillet, a pink ; le Us, the lily, and a few more, on account of their masculine termination. 3. The names of countries, places, and rivers ending in e mute, as : la France, la Prusse, V ancienne Rome, la Loire, la Seine, etc. Except : Le Hanovre, le Mexique, le Danube, le Rhone. $ 4. FEMININE BY TERMINATION: 1. Nouns ending with e mute, not included in the masculine ter- minations, as : la vie, life ; Vcpec, the sword. 2. .^hoso- ending in aison, ion, and eur, as : la maison, the house ; la religion, la grandeur. 3. Those ending in 6 preceded by t or ti, as : la beaute, beauty. 4. These five words ending in i are feminine : la foi, fuith ; la loi, law ; la fourmi, the ant ; la merci,- mercy ; Vapres-midi. 5. Most nouns ending in oire (not oir) are feminine, as : la gloire, glory ; Vhistoire, history ; la victoire, victory ; la machoire, the jaw. 6. Gens. This word presents an anomaly in gender. It is masculine, but when an adjective precedes it, that adjective takes the feminine form, if its termination is not e mute. If a definitive, as tout or certain, precedes this adjective, the definitive also takes 208 I. PREMIERE the feminine form. In all other cases, gens takes a masculine adjective, as: Toutcs les vieittes gens sont soup$onneux, all old people are suspicious. But, Tons les jeuncs gens. II. GENDER OF COMPOUND SUBSTANTIVES. This depends upon the manner of their composition. 1. "When the first component is a noun, it determines the gender of the whole, as : Le chou-fleur, the cauliflower ; un arc-en-ciel, a rainbow ; la fete Dieu. 2. When they consist of a preposition or an adjective and a noun, the gender of the noun remains for the whole, as : Le contre-coup, the counter-buff; Vavant-bras, m. the fore-arm. 3. Those nouns compounded with a verb and noun are always of the masculine gender, as : Le porte-manleau, the portmanteau : h tire-bouchon, the corkscrew ; le portefeuitte, the portfolio (though feuille is feminine). THEME 1. Indicate the gender of the following nouns, by placing an article, either the definite or the indefinite, before them : The horse, cheval. The pear, poire. The metal, metal. A whiter, hirer. Italy, Italic. The cherry, cerise. The cherry-tree, cerisier. The house, maison. The vapor, vapeur. The walnut, noix. A leaf, feuille. The truth, verite. The van-guard, avant-garde. The cart, charette. The work, travail. The shell, coquille. The hat, cha- peau. The shoe, soulier. The honey, mid. The carpenter, charpentier. The nurse, nourrice. The sun, soleil. The earth, terre. A year, annee. The life, vie. The feast, fete. The beauty, bcaute. The master-key, passe-partout. The spit, tourne-broclie. Christianity, cJiristianisme. III. DOUBLE GENDER OF SOME NOUNS. 1. The following nouns have a double gender : L'aide, m. the assistant. L'aide, f. the help, support. Taigk, m. the eagle. I'aiglc, f. the standard. ON THE GENDER OF SUBSTANTIVES. 209 l y aune, m. the aider-tree. I'aune, f. the ell, yard. un couple, a couple, husband and wife, une couple, a brace, two of a sort. un cnscigne, an ensign. une enscigne, a sign. le garde, the keeper. la garde, the guard, watch. le guide, the guide. la guide, the rein in driving. le livre, the book. la litre, the pound. le manche, the handle. la manclie, the sleeve. le m&noire, the memorandum. la mmoire, the memory. le mousse, the cabin-boy. la mousse, the moss. V argue, m. sing, the organ. les orgues, pi. organ, or organs. le page, the page (of a prince). la page, the page (of a book). un paillasse, a merry andrew. une paillasse, a straw-bed. Pdques, pi. m. Easter. la pcique, the Passover. le poelc, the stove. -> la poelc, the frying-pan. le poste, the post, military post. la poste, the post-offce. un somme, a nap, slumber. la somme, the sum. le tour, the trick, turn. la tour, the tower. le trompette, the trumpeter. la trompette, the trumpet. un voile, a veil. une voile, a sail. 2. There are in French some nouns which have no particular form for the feminine, and remain always masculine, even when applied to a woman. Such are : Un auteur, ") -TT * r ni. and t. an author, a writer. Un ecnvam, ) Un orateur, m. and f. an orator. Un peintre, m. and f. a painter. Un sculptcuv, m. and f. a sculptor. : Un ttmoin, m. and f. a witness. NOTE. Sometimes the word fcmme may precede, as: Une femme auteur, les femmcs poctes. 3. On the contrary, there arc a few feminine nouns which apply also to male individuals : La caution, the bail. la basse, the base. la pratique, the customer. la sentinelle, the sentry. IV. FORMATION OF FEMININE APPELLATIONS. 1. Male appellations which are originally adjectives, form their feminine according to the rules on the adjectives (see Part L, L. XVIL), as : 14 210 I. PREMIERE LEgON. MASCULINE. FEMININE. Le Frangais, the Frenchman. La Fran$aise, the Frenchwoman, un Russe, a Russian. line Russe, a Russian lady. ?s, the hero. rhe'roine, the heroine. le gouverneur, the tutor. la gouvernante, the governess, /e serviteur, the man-servant. /a scrvante, the maid-servant. 7e pdcheur, the sinner. Zcz pe'cheressc, the sinner /*. Ze compagnon, the companion, /a compagne, the companion ^/l /e /owp, the he-wolf. /a /cwre, the she-wolf. le mulet, the mule. la mule, the mule /. le dindon, the turkey-cock. /a dinde, the turkey -hen. * Ckasseresse is a poetical form. ON THE GENDER OF SUBSTANTIVES. 211 THEME 2. Form and write tlio feminine of tlio following masculine nouns, according to the above rules : The neighbor, le voisin ; f. . The hunter, le chasseur ; f. . The dwaif, le nain ; f. . The talker, le lavard ; f . Tho prisoner, le prisonnicr .; f. . The dumb man, le miict ; f. . The teacher, linstituteur f. . The patient, le malade ; f. . The husband, Yepoux; f. . The master, le rnaltre ; f. . A musician, un music i en ; f. . The founder, le fonda- teur ; f. . The Englishman, V Anglais ; f. . The German. V Allemand ; f. . The actor, Tacteur; f. . The inventor, rinventeur ; f. . The liar, le mentcur (root ment-, termination -eur) ; f. . The traitor, le traltre ; f. . The singer, le clian- teur ; f. . The idler, le paresscux ; f. . The lion, le lion ; f. . The tiger, le tigre f. . READING LESSON. Un honnete pere do famille, charge 1 do biens et d'annees, vculut regler d'avance 2 sa succession entre scs trois fils, ct Icur partager ses biens, le fruit de ses travaux et do son Industrie. II en fit trois portions egales, et assigna a chacun son lot. Puis il lour dit : " II me rcste encore un diamant de grand prix ; je le destine a celui de vous qui saura le mieuxje meritcr par quelque action noble ct ge- nereuse, %-- je~~ vous donne trois ninis pour vous mcttro en ctat de 1'obtenir." Aussitot les trois fils se disperscnt, mala ils sc rasscmblcnt an temps present. 3 Ils se presentent devant leur juge^ et voici ce quo raconte 1'aine 4 : ** Mon pere, un etranger s'cst trouve dans dcs cir- constances qui Tont oblige de me confier 5 toute sa fortune : il n'avait de moi aucune surete, par ecrit, 6 ct n'aurait pu produire coritre moi aucune preuve clu depot ; mais je lui ai tout rein is fideleraent. Cette fidelite n'cst-elle pas quelque chose de louable 7 ? " " Tu as fait, mon fils," lui repondit le vieillard," ce quo tu devais faire. II serait honteux d'en agir autrement, car la probitu cst un devoir." 1. Laden. 2. Beforehand. 3. Prescribed, appointed. 4. The eldest. 5. To trust. C. In writing, 7. Laudable. 212 I. PREMIERE LEgON. CONVERSATION. Qui voulut reglcr sa succession ? Que fit-il a cct effet (for this pur- pose') ? Que lui restait-il? A qui le dcstina-t-il ? Combien de temps leur donna-t-il pour cela ? Que firent ensuite les fils ? Quelle avait e'te Faction de Taine ? Que lui dit le vieillard ? Un honnete pere de famille. II partagea ses biens entre ses trois fils. Un diamaut de gi'and prix. A celui d'cntre eux qui ferait une action noble et gene*- reuse. H leur donna trois mois pour obteuir ce prix. Us se disperserent, mais au bout du temps present, ils rovin- rent a la maison. II avait remis fidelement a un etranger la fortune que ce- lui-ci lui avait confiee sans re$u (receipt). Tu n'as fait, mon fils, que ce que tu devais faire. FIN. Le second fils plaida 1 sa cause a son tour, h peu pres en ces tonnes : " Je me suis trouve, pendant rnon voyage, sur le bord d'un lac ; un enfant venait 2 imprudemment de s'y laisscr 2 tomber ; il al- lait se noyer ; 3 je Ten ai tire, et je lui ai sauve la vie, aux yeux dcs habitants d'un village situd au bord de ce lac ; ils pourront attester la verite du fait." 4 "A la bonne heure," interrompit 5 le pere. " mais il n'y a point encore de noblesse dans cetto action; il n'y a que de Plramanitd." Enfin, le dernier des trois freres prit la pai'ole. " Mon pere," dit-il, " j'ai trouve mon ennemi mortel, qui, s'etant egare. la nuit, s'etait endormi, sans le savoir, sur le penchant 6 d'un abime / le moindre mouvement qu'il eut fait, au moment de son reveil, 8 no ON THE GENDER OF SUBSTANTIVES. 213 pouvait manquer 9 de le precipiter ; sa vie etait entre mes mains ; j'ai pris soin de 1'eveiller 10 avec Ics precautions eonvcnables, et 1'ai tire de cet endroit 11 fatal." " Ah ! mon fils," s'ecria le bon pere avec transport, et en 1'em- brassant tendrement, "c'est a toi, sans contredit, 12 que la bague 13 est due." 1. To plead. 2. Had just fallen. 3. To be drowned. 4. The fact. 5. To inter- rupt. 6. The slope. 7. Abyss. 8. Of his awakening. 9. Fail. 10. To wake. 11. Place, spot. 12. "Without doubt. 13. The ring. CONVERSATION. Qu'avait fait le second fils ? Qui avait vu ccla ? Enfin, quelle avait dte Faction du dernier des trois freres ? Laquelle de ccs trois actions dtait la plus noble ? Les actions des deux autres n'etaient-clles pas nobles et Et qu'est-ce que lui dit le pere ? II avait sauve un enfant qui allait se noyer. Les habitants d'un village situe au bord du lac. II avait retire' son ennemi endormi au bord d'un abime, ou le moindre mouvement Teut pre- cipite. Cello du plus jeune fils. Non, la premiere etait une action de justice, la secondo une action d'humanite. II s'ecria avec transport : " Mon fils, c'est h toi, sans contredit, que la bague est due." 214 II. DEUXIEME II. DEUXIEME LEgON. PLURAL OF NOUNS. (Sec Part I. Lesson 2, p. SO.) The general rules on tins subject have already been given in the second lesson of Part I. We have to add here the following particulars. 1. Nouns of two and more syllables, ending 'in -ant and -ent, arc spelled by some French writers in the plural -ens and -am, instead of -ents and -ants, as : momens for moments, enfans for enfants. This orthography, however, is not to be recommended. 2. The following nouns in al and ail do not form their plural in aicx, but take an s. Le bal, the ball. Vevenlail, m. the fan. le col, callus. Vtpouvantail, m. the scarecrow. le narval, the narwhal. un portail, a portal, front gate. le carnaval, the carnival. le poitrail, the poitrcl. le rgal, the regale, treat. le serail, the seraglio. le detail, the particulars. Vail, garlic (has in Plur. both les le gouvernail, the helm, rudder. ails and les aulx). Plural : Les bah, les cah, les details, les eveiitaih, etc. NOTE. Le be'tail, cattle, makes in the plural les lestiaux. 8. The usual plural of del is deux, the heavens ; there is, how- ever, a regular plural, les dels, meaning: 1, the testers; 2, the cli- mats; 3, the skies of pictures. 4. L'ceil, the eye, has in the plural les yeux. Des ceils de Iceuf arc oval or round*yindows. Aieul, has a'ieuls wlien it means grand- fathers,- and a'ieux in the sense of ancestors. 5. How compound words form their plural : 1 . When a word is composed of a substantive and an adjective, or of two substantives, both take the mark of the plural Ex.: PLUR.AL OF NOUNS. 215 Les bcauiL-freres, the brothers-in-law. Les belles-sceurs, the sisters-in-law. Les choun-fleurs, the cauliflowers. Les chefs-lieux, the chief- towns (of counties). 2. But when a word is composed of two substantives separated by a pre- position, the first alone takes the plural termination. Ex.: Les chefs-d'oeuvre, the masterpieces. Les arcs-en-ciel, the rainbows. 3. When a word consists of a substantive and a verb or preposition, the substantive alone can take the sign of the plural, if required by the sense. Ex.: Les tire-bottes, the boot-jacks. Les essuie-mains, the towels. Les garde-fous, the balusters. 4. When there is no substantive in the compound word, none of the components can take the mark of the plural. Ex.: Les passe-partout (not passe-partouts) , the master-keys. Les forte-piano, the pianos. 5. The words: la grand'mere, the grandmother; la grand'tante, grand- aunt; la grand' rue, the main street; la grand' route, the highway, have, in the plural, les grand' meres, les grand'tantes, etc. 6. The following nouns take in the plural another meaning than in the singular : SINGULAR. PLURAL. Le clseau, the chisel. n les ciseaux, the scissors. la lunette, the telescope*. les lunettes, the spectacles. le fer, iron. les fers, the fetters, chains. la grace, grace, pardon. les graces, grace, charms. le gage, the pawn, pledge. les gages, the wages. la mesure, the measure. les mesures, the measures. la viande, meat. les viandes, food. la troupe, the troop. les troupes, the troops. la lumiere, the light. les lumieres, knowledge. I'aboi, the barking. les abois, agony. la defense, the defence. les defenses, the tusks, fangs. 7. Substantives which have no singular in French: Les annales, f. annals. les gens, m. people* les ancetres, m. ancestors. les hardes, f. clothes. 216 II. DEUXIEME les alentours, m. ) m les legumes, m. vegetables. les environs, m. } tllc cnvirons - l es mathematiques, f. mathematics. les broussaillcs, f. brushwood. les mate'riaux, materials. les decombres, m. rabbish. les mccurs, f. the manners. les debris, m. the remains. les mouchcttes, f. the snuffers. les dcpens, m. cost. des mouchettes, a pair of snuffers. les entrailles, f. the entrails. les pleurs, f. the tears. les Jrais, in. expenses. les tenebres, f. darkness. les fungrailles, f. funeral rites. les vivres, m. victuals. THEME 3. 1. We bad many balls last winter. 1 2. Are these fans dear? 3. No, tbey are not dear. 4. The beavens declare 2 tbe glory of God. 5. Tbe great portals of those churches are beautiful. 6. We honor 3 the virtues of our ancestors. 7. The eyes of (de Z') man are the mirror 4 of his soul. 8. The eyes of a mother watch 5 over ber child's life. 9. I have two brothers-in-law and three sisters-in- law. 10. Those pictures are masterpieces. 11. I want 8 two or three towels. 12. These master-keys must be very old. 13. Both my (?nes deux) grandaunts are dead ; but my grandmothers are still ab've (en vie). 14. Lend me your scissors, if you please. 15. The fetters are made of iron. 16. Do you know the environs* of London? 17. Yes, I know them. 18. Bring me a pair of snuffers. 19. Do you like vegetables ? 20. I like them, when they ate dry. 21. I found this ring 7 under the rubbish in my garden. 22. The little humming-birds (oiseaux-mouches) are the jewels 8 of nature* (Dtf. art.). 23. I study 9 mathematics. 1. Use tbe article, see Lesson 3. 2. To declare Annonccr. 3. IToncror. 4. Mi~ roir.m. 5. Veiller. 6. II me faut (see Part I. p. 148, 3). 7. Bqgue^ f. 8. Bjjou,m. 9. Etudlcr. HEADING LESSON. LE CASTOR. The Beaver. Dans le nord de 1'Amerique, sur les bords dcs ileuves et des grands lacs du Canada, loin des grand'routes, habitc le castor. La *In these Themes, words, the last letter of which is printed in italics, are tho same in French and English. PLURAL OF NOUNS. 217 partic la plus singuliere de son corps est sa queue. 1 Ses pattes do devant (fore-feet) sont des especes de mains, dont il se sert fort adroiternent 2 . Les castors entreprennent des travaux tres-conside- rables pour se construire des habitations solides et commodes. , Ce sont des cabanes (huts) ou plutot des especes de maisonnettes bfi- ties dans 1'eau, avec deux issues, 1'une pour aller a terre, 1'autre pcur se jcter a 1'eau. La forme de cet edifice 3 est presque toujours ovale ou ronde ; il y en a depuis quatre ou cinq pieds jusqu'a huit ou dix de diametre et de deux ou trois Stages. 4 Les murailles 5 ont jusqu'a deux pieds d'epaisseur; 6 elles sont eleve'es a plomb 7 sur un pilotis, 8 qui sert en meme temps de fondement et de planchcr a la maison. Les castors ahnent h ronger 9 continuellement de 1'ecorce (Jbarlc), et ils en font ample provision pour se nourrir pendant 1'hiver. Chaque cabane a sonjnagasin, et ils no vont jamais piller 10 leurs voisins. Ces cabanes contiennent quelquefois jusqu'a trente castors, qui vivent toujours en paix ensemble. Si quelque castor aperQoit un ennemi, il donne un grand coup, de sa queue, sur Feau. A ce signal, tous les autres plongent dans 1'eau, ou se refugient dans les cabanes. 1. Tail. 2. Skilfully. 3. Building. 4. Floor, story. 5. Tlie walls. 6. Thick- ness. 7. Perpendicularly. 8. Pale, post. 9. To gnaw. 10. To plunder. CONVERSATION. Ou liabite le castor. II liabite dans le nord de 1'Ame- rique, sur les bords des fleuves et des lacs. Quelle est la partie la plus re- C'est sa queue. marquable de son corps ? Comment sont ses pattes de de- Ce sont des especes de mains dont vant ? il se sert fort adroitemcnt. Les castors quo font-ils de cu- Ils batissent des cabanes dans rieux ? 1'eau. 218 III. TROISIEME LEgON. De quelle nianiere Ics batissent- ils? Quelle est la forme de ces mai- sonnettes ? Y a-j>il plusieurs etages ? Les murailles sont-elles solidcs ? Y a-t-il plusieurs castors dans un tel edifice ? Que font-ils quand un enncmi approche ? Us font deux issues, Tune pour aller a terre, 1'autre pour se je- ter a 1'cau. La forme en est ordinairement rondo ou ovale. Oui, les cabanes sont do deux ou trois etages. Tres-solides ; elles ont jusqu'k deux pieds d'epaisseur. Ces cabanes conticnnent quelque- fois jusqu'a trcnte castors qui vivent ensemble en paix. Us se jettent tous dans Feau, ou se refmnent dans les cabanes. III. TROISIEME LEgON. USE OF THE ARTICLE. I. THE DEFINITE ARTICLE IS USED IX FRENCH AND NOT IN ENGLISH : L'amitif, f. friendship. la paresse, idleness. I'amour, in. love, /a vieillesse, old age. 1 . Before abstract nouns, when taken in their whole extent, as : la bont, goodness. V occupation f f. employment. la patience, patience. la jeunesse, youth. Examples : Le temps est pr&ieux, time is precious. Le vice est odicux, vice is odious. La modestie est une belle vertu, modesty is a fine virtue. Inoccupation est le meillcur remede contre V ennui. Occupation is the best remedy against wcarisomeness. USB OF THE ARTICLE. 219 2. Before collective names of corporations, bodies, governments, sciences, religious creeds, seasons, metals, etc., as: La noblesse, nobility. le christianisme, Christianity. le gouvernement, government. le judalsme, Judaism. la monarchic, monarchy. I'hiver, m. winter. riiistoire, f. history. l'or, m. gold. la geographic, geography. le fer, iron. 3. -Before words which represent a whole genus or species, as : L'homme est mortel, man is mortal. Les voix des animaux sont tres-differentes. The voices of animals are very different. 4. Before the following and other nouns taken in a general sense : L'homme, man. la loi, law. les liommcs, men. le sort, fate. le del, heaven. I' usage, la coutume, custom. la terre, earth. les mceurs, manners. la vie, life. la faim, hunger. la mort, death. la soif, thirst. le temps, time. le diner, dinner. le mal'ieur, misfortune. le dejeuner, breakfast. 5. When particular parts or qualities of an organic body are mentioned, as : Ce garqon a la tete tres-jpetite. This-^y has a very liltle head. * Cette femme a la louche petite et les ycux Ileus. This woman has a little mouth and blue eyes. Le loup a la tete longue, le nez effile' et les oreiUes tftroites. The wolf has a long head, a thin nose, and smallears. La Jille aux yeux Ueus, the blue-eyed girl. 6. When in English the possessive case is used, as: My father's house, la maison de mon pere. Tlie king's palace, le palais du rot. 7. Before adjectives used substantively, as : J'aime, le -cert, I am fond of green. Les riches ne donnent pas toujours. Rich men do not always give. 220 III. TROISIEME 8. Before proper names of countries, provinces, rivers, moun- tains, and winds, as : L'Angleterre est riche, England is rich. Le mont Vesuve, Mount Vesuvius. La France est plus grande que I' Italic. France is larger than Italy. NOTE. Further particulars on proper names will be found in the sixth lesson. 9. Before nouns of dignity, and titles, followed by proper names, as : Admiral Nelson, I'amtral Nelson. Professor A., \e professeur A. 10. The definite article replaces the English indefinite article, when the price of things is indicated, as : Three francs a pound, trois francs la livre. Five francs a yard, cinq francs le metre. 11. In the following phrases the definite article is used : A I'&ole a I'fglise, at or to school; at or to church. H s'est cusse* la jambe, he has broken his leg. L'tytfe a la main, a sword in his hand. Je vous souJiaite le bon jour, I wish you good morning Je n'ai pas le temps, I have not time. H n'a jws le sou, he has not a farthing. J'ai mat a la tete, I have a headache. Pa^mal aux dents, I have a toothache. Soyez le bienvenu, la bienvenue, etc., be welcome. La semaine passe (derniere), last week. 12. After dont between nouns, as : Un Jiomnie dont la reputation est perdue, est malheureux. A man whose good reputation is lost is unhappy. II. REPETITION OF THE ARTICLE. The article must be repeated in French before every substantive. Examples : The mind and heart, 1'espnt ct le cccur. The shoemaker, hatter, and tailor. Le bottier, le chapelier, et le tailleur. I have bought meat, cheese, and fruits. cTat achete' de la viande, da fromage et des ^fruits. USE OF THE ARTICLE. 221 THEME 4 1. Virtue is the highest 1 good (lien, m.). 2. Men are mortal. 3. Modesty adorns 2 youth. 4. Human life is short. 5. Man is liable 3 to a variety of (a lien des) changes. 4 6. Gold and silver cannot render 5 man happy. 7. Men of (d'un) real genius 6 are scarce. 8. Black and white are two opposite 7 colors. 9. Beauty and wit 8 are valuable 9 endowments (avantages) , when heightened (rekves) by modesty. 10. Iron and steel are more useful than gold and silver. 11. How much a pound ? 12. The love of glory (Dcf. art.), the fear of shame, 10 are of ten the cause of great deeds. 16 13. Summer is warm, but winter is cold. 14. The instructions of adversity are wholesome (salutaires) , though unpleasing ; u the les- sons of prosperity are pleasing, but often pernicious. 15. Geogra- phy is a very useful science. 16. Painting, 12 sculpture, and poe- try 13 belong to the imagination. 17. Good and bad seem to be blended (meles) together through all nature. 18. Hypocrisy is an honlage which vice pays (rend) to virtue. 19. Do you know Gen- eral Knox? 20. Yes, I know him. 21. White garments 14 are the symbol of innocence. 22. The knife and fork are broken. 23. Let us go to church. 24. The boys were at school this morning. 25. Fear 15 and ignorance arc the sources of superstition. 26. Good wine is sold (se vend) [for] four shillings a bottle. 1. Gi%fii(L- -2. Orner. i Sujet. 4. Changemerit, m. 5. ficndre. 6. Vrai genie. 7. Oppose. 8. Esprit. 9. Prccieux. 10. La Iwnte. 11. Desagredble. 12. La pemture. 13. La poesie. 14. Vetements. 15. Peur, f. 16. Action, f. III. THE DEFINITE ARTICLE IS OMITTED : 1 , Before the cardinal numbers which come after the names of sovereigns, as: J.Ienry the Fourth, Henri quatre. Louis the Eighteenth, Louis XVIII (dix-Jluit). George the Third, George trois. 2. Before the cardinal numbers used in quotations, as : Book the first, chapter the fifth. Livre premier, chapitre cinq. 222 III. TROISIEME LEgON. 3. Before plus, used in the sense of the more. Ex. : Plus je la vois, plus je Vaime, the more I see her, the more I love her. IV. THE INDEFINITE ARTICLE IS OMITTED IN FRENCH I 1. Before national and professional names, when the subject is a noun or personal pronoun, as : Je suls Anglais, I am an Englishman. Mon pere etait mededn, my father was a physician. NOTE. But it is expressed after c'est and void or voila, and also when the noun is qualified. C'cst un Anglais, he is an Englishman. Void un offider, here is an officer. M. Dubois lait un medecin distingue", Mr. Dubois was a distinguished phy- sician. 2. It is also omitted in appositions, that is, when a substantive is used to qualify another, as : L'avare, comedie par Moliere, the Miser, a comedy by Moliere. Auguste, fils de M. S., Augustus, a son of Mr. S. Munich, ville d'Allemagne, Munich, a city of Germany. 3. In the title of a book : A French grammar, Grammaire fran^aise. A history of England, Histoire d' Anglcterre. 4. After the word qnel, used to express surprise : "What a noise you make ! quel bruit voits faites! 5. Before the words, quantite, a quantity; nombre, a number; force, a great number, when they are used adverbially. Ex. : Je I'ai vu nombre de fois, I have seen him many times. // m'a donne* quantity de jolies clioses. He gave me a great many pretty things. 6. The indefinite article is left out in French and supplied by par, before substantives that denote time, or in mentioning what is paid for salary, wages, etc. : Five guineas a month, dnq guineas par mots. So much a lesson, tant par lecon. 7. Sometimes after jamais, never, as : Jamais general ne s'est plus distingue". Never has a general distinguished himself more. USE OP THE ARTICLE. 223 8. In the following and other expressions, in which the noun and verb are inseparably connnected : Trouver moyen, to find (a) means. Faire signe, to make a sign. Faire present, to make a present. Mettre fin, to put an end or stop. Livrer bataille, to fight a battle. Prendre exemple, to take an example. Rendre service, to render a service. Ne dire mot, to say not a word. THEME 5. 1. Book the tenth, chapter the third. 2. Charles the Secono? s king of (d') Spain, son of Philip the Fourth, left his kingdom (roy- aume) to Philip the Fifth-. 3. William the Third, king of Eng- land, married (epousa) the princess Marj, daughter of James (Jacques) the Second. 4. Apelles was a painter. 1 5. Socrates 2 was a philosopher, Cicero 3 an orator (-teur). 6. Is your father a physician? 7. No, sir; he is a lawyer (avocat). 8. Henry's uncle is a skilful 4 physician. 9. Who is that gentleman? 5 10. He is (c'esf) an officer. 11. How much do you charge (demandez- vous) for your lessons? 12. I charge ten francs a lesson. 13. A German Grammar. 14. A Roman history, from the foundation 6 of Rome Jo (Jusqda) the destruction of the Roman empire. 15. What tin unhappy situation ! 16. How much does the bookseller 7 pay you for your novels? 8 17. He pays me five crowns (ecus) a sheet. 9 18. We went to Caera, a large town of Normandy. 10 19. The Duke of York, a prince of the blood royal. 20. I am read- ing the " Misanthrope," a comedy by Moliere. 21. I shall find a moans to satisfy 11 him. 22. He said not a word. 23. Our neigh- bor made us a sign to leave 12 the room. 1. Peintre, 2. Socrate. 3. Ciceron. 4. Habile. 5. Monsieur. 6. Fondation. 7. &ibraire. 8. Roman, m. 9. Feuille. 10. De Normandie. 11. Satisfaire. 12. Quitter. 224 III. TROISIEME V. THE ARTICLE IS OMITTED IN BOTH LANGUAGES! - 1. In many proverbs, as : Contentement passe richesse, content surpasses wealth. Pauvrete n'est pas vice, poverty is no disgrace. Mauvaise herbc croit toujours. 2. In enumerating several substantives in the partitive sense, -when summed up by tons or rien, as : Homines, femmes, cnfants, tons voulaient le voir. Men, women, children, all wished to sec him. 3. After ni ni, soit soit, when the nouns are taken in the partitive sense, as : Ni or ni argent, neither gold nor silver. Ni prieres, ni menaces ne pouvaient V engager a, etc. Neither prayers nor threats could induce him to, etc. Soit crainte, soit ignorance, il ne voulait rien dire. Be it fear or ignorance, he would say nothing. 4. The partitive article is further omitted after prepositions wliea the noun following forms with them an adverbial phrase, as : Avec plaisir, with pleasure. par jour, daily, a day. avec patience, with patience. par an, yearly, a year. avec soin, with care. par mois, monthly, a month. avec elegance, elegantly. sur mer, } . > by water, hy sea. sans argent, without money. par mer, ) * sans facons, without ceremonies. sur terre, ) . . . , > by land. sans peine, without trouble. par terre, ) sans peril, without danger. sous peine de mort, on pain of death. 5. No article is used before a substantive which is repeated with a preposition, as : Promesses sur promesses, promises upon promises. De temps en temps, from time to time. De siecle en siecle, from age to age. 6. In the following expressions, where the noun forms but one idea with the verb antecedent, as : Avoir faim, to be hungry. prendre patience, to have patience. avoir soif, to be thirsty. prendre soin, to take care. OF TUB ARTICLE. 225 avoir sow, to take care. fa ire grace, to grant pardon. avoir peur, to be afraid. faire attention, to pay attention. avoir bonne mine, to look well. faire grand cas, to value. avoir pilie, to have pity. faire peur, to frighten. avoir honte, to be ashamed. faire mention, to mention. avoir raison, to be right. faire fortune, to make one's fortune. avoir tort, to be wronff. rendre comptf., r sujet, to have occasion for. rendre raison, $ accc avoir dessein, to intend. rendre visite, to visit. avoir envie, to have a desire, a mind. porter envie, to envy. avoir besoin, to want. courir risque, to run risk. avoir coutume, to be in the habit, to demander pardon, to beg one's par- use, don. prcndrepart, to join. demander grace, to beg for grace. prcndre garde, to take care. ajouler foi, to give credit. prendre conge', to take leave. 7. Further, after many verbs which are followed by de, a, or en, as: Combler de bicnfaits, to load with benefits. Vivre de pain, to live upon bread. Monter a cheval, to mount (get) on horseback. Monter en voiture, to enter a carriage. Tomber de cheval, to fall from horseback. Descendre de cheval, to alight. Se mettre a table, to go to dinner. Se lever de table, to rise from dinner. Per^re d&v.ue, to lose! sight of. Mourir de faim, to die of hunger. Mourir de froid, to die of cold, to freeze. Trembler de peur, to tremble with fear. Eire malade de chagrin, to be ill with grief. THEME 0. 1. Charity 1 begins at home (par soi-meme). 2. Necessity Las no law (loi). 3. Games, 2 conversation, theatre, nothing diverts (distrait) him. 4. Nobody was satisfied ; father, uncles, aunts and brothers, all thought themselves (se crurent) neglected. 3 5. This man has neither vices nor virtues ; neither talents nor defects. 4 6. 15 226 III. TROISIEME We expected our friend from day to day. 7. It does not suffice to heap (d* entasser) facts 5 upon facts, to load your memory; you must exercise 7 also your judgment. 8 8. I shall do it with pleasure. 9. One florin a day. 10. Ten pounds a year. 11. The poor woman was starving with hunger and (with) cold. 12. You are always right,; I have been wrong. 13. Have pity on (de) my weakness. 9 14. The least noise 10 frightens me. 15. Those who speak without reflection, are exposed to many (a lien des) errors. 16. I must take leave of you. 17. Many poor people live on (do) bread and potatoes only. 1. Charitd. 2. Jeu, m. 3. Negliges. 4. Dcfaut. 5. Le fait, 6. Charger. 7. Exercer, 8. Jugement. 9. Faiblesse. 10. Bruit, m. HEADING LESSON. DEMOSTIll^NE. Dcmosthene, jeune homme d'Athenes, avait grande envie de de- venir orateur habile ; mais la nature semblait lui en avoir refuse tous ' les moyens. D'abord il begayait 1 a 1'exces ; puis il no pouvait prononcer la lettre R ; ensuite il avait une voix desagreable ct glapissante, 2 et do faibles poumons. 3 D'autres ajoutent qu'il avait encore la mauvaise habitude de lever Fepaule 4 , quand il avait prononce trois ou quatre mots. Aussi, la premiero fois qu'il harangua le peuple, il s'en tira si mal, qu'il fut siffle 5 . Tout autre que lui aurait & jamais perdu courage. Mais Demos- thene prit patience et resolut, en depit 6 de la nature, de devenir bon orateur, et il le devint. Ecoutez comment il s'y prit. 7 Quelquefois il allait au bori de la mer, dans 1'cndroit ou les vagues 8 venaient se briser (break) avec fracas. 9 La, il debitait 10 un discours a haute voix, pour s'accoutumer a clominer le tumultc d'une assernblee populaire. D'autres fois, il mottait dans sa bouche de petits cailloux ( peb- bles') ; puis ilcourait en gravissant 11 une montagne et en declamant, USE OP THE ARTICLE. 227 aim clc se contraindro 12 a prononccr claircmont jusqu'a la moindrc Bjllabe. Enfin, on difc qu'il s'exerc,ait h parler clans une cliambre souter- raine, 13 et quo pour se mettrc dans la necessite de roster longtcmps en forme, il s'etait fait rascr 14 la moitie do la tete. II se plagait des heures entieres devant un miroir, pour se donner une bonne contenance et des gestes convenables. On dit qu'il so mettait aussi 1'epaule nue immediatement sous la pointe (Tune epee, 15 afin qu'elle le piquat, 16 toutes les fois quo, d'apres sa mau- vaise habitude, il ferait son mouvement d'epaule. C'est par des exercices soutenus 17 de ce genre, joints a une etude profonde des sciences, qu'il se rendit enfin le plus grand orateur qui ait existe ; et aujourd'hui encore, apres tant de siecles, 18 ses ha- rangues sont adimrees comrae des chefs-d'oeuvre d'eloquence. 1. To stammer. 2. Shrill. 3. Lungs. 4. Shoulder. 5. To hiss. 6. In spite of. 7. To manage. 8. The waves. 9. Noise. 10. To deliver. 11. To climb. 12. To force. 13. Subterranean. 14. To shave. 15. A sword. 1G. To sting. 17. Con- tinued. 18. Century. CONVERSATION. La nature avait-clle favorise Au contraire, elle scmblait lui Dcmosthene? avoir refuse tous les moyens de devcnir orateur. Quels'lfe&faTits avait-il 'done? II begayait ct ne poavait pronon- ccr la lettre r. Comment etaitsa voix? Ello etait desagreable ct glapis- santc. Comment s'cn tira-t-il, lorsqu'il II s'en tira si mal qu'il fut siffle prononQa son premier dis- (hissed). cours ? Futril de courage par cc resul- Non, il ne perdit pas courage ; au tat? contraire, il pefsista dans son dessein. Et comment s'y prit-il ? II s'exer^ait continuellemcnt et de difierentes manieres. 228 IV. QUATPJfiME LEgON. Dites-moi comment. H mettait de petits cailloux dans sa bouche pour so defaire (rid of ) de 1'habitude debegayer. Est-co qu'il rdussit dans scs ef- II reussit si parfaitement qu'il de- forts ? vint a la fin le plus grand ova- teur qui ait cxiste. Ses harangues existent-ellcs en- Oui, elles ont ete eonservees, et coro ? elles sont encore aujourd'hui ad* mirees comme des cliefs-d'ocuyrc d'eloquence. IV. QUATRIEME SPECIAL USE OF DE AND A. In general we may say de is used when made of, composed of y coming from, belonging to, can be understood ; whereas a is employed when for the purpose of is meant. I. DE IS USED I 1. After adverbs of quantity, as: leaucoup, peu, plus, moins, tant, etc. (See Part I. L. 6, p. 42.) 2. Before a limiting word which follows a noun used partitively and preceded by a word denoting quantity. Ex.: II y cut deux homines DE tus, there were two men killed. Void quelque chose DE plus, here is something more. Void un liomme DE trop, here is a man too many. J'ai deux chambres DE loupes, I have two rooms let. NOTE. Tho noun may be understood. Ex.: J'en ai unc de loute. Or rien orpersonne may supply the place of the noun and its preceding word. Ex.: II Ji'y a personne de malade chez nous, there is no one sick at our house. Rien de bon, nothing good. SPECIAL USE OF DE AND A. 229 3. As in English, after nouns expressing quantity, number, measure, weight, etc., as : Une quantity de noix, a quantity of walnuts. Unepaire de bas, a pair of stockings. Une livre de beurre, a pound of butter. Une piece de toile, a piece of linen. Un morceau de fromage, a piece of cheese. Une main de papier, a quire of paper. Une bouteille de vin, a bottle of wine. 4. After adjectives denoting dimension or age, as : A wall twenty feet high : un mur haul de vingt pieds or un mur qui a vingt pieds DE haut or DE hauteur. A boy ten years old, un (petit) garcon de dix ans. A table six feet long, une table longue de six pieds or de six pieds de longueur. NOTE. It may be observed here that with adjectives of dimension, the verb to be may be rendered in French by avoir, as : This tower is 120 feet high. Cette tour A cent vingt pieds DE hauteur. 5. When an English adjective is rendered in French by a noun, the order of the substantives is inverted in English. In French the latter is preceded by de. Ex. : A witty man, un Jiomme ftesprii. A gold watch, une montre d'or. Sill? stockings, des bas de sole. The Russian Ambassador, I'ambassadcur de Russie. Irish linen, la toile d'lrlande. Spanish wool, la laine d'Espagne. Burgundy wine, le vin de Bourgogne. 6. De is used, as in English, after a common noun followed by its proper name. Ex. : Le royaume d'Espagne, the kingdom of Spain. L'ile de Make, the island of Malta. La ville de Londres, the city of London. Le lac de Geneve, the lake of Geneva. Except the combinations vriih.mont, ruCj place, and e'glise, as: le fifoni "Blanc, le Mont Etna, rue Richelieu, place Vendome, Vfylise Saint- Sul pice, etc. 230 IV. QUATRIBME LEQCN. 7. After many adjectives it takes the place of the English with, from, of, by, in, etc. (See L. 8, compl. of adj. 1.) Ex.: Full of ardor, plein de feu. Greedy after money, avide d'argent, Dressed in black, vetu de noir. 1 am pleased with my situation. Je suis content de ma position. I am deprived of every tiling, je suis priv de tout. 8. De is used for than, instead of que, after plus, more, and moms, less, when these adverbs are followed by a numeral adjective or substantive : H a phis de six cms, he is more than six years old. 9. For in, after a superlative, before the name of a place : Une dcs meilleures institutions DE Boston, one of the best institutions in Boston. Le premier DE noire cole, the first in our school. FRENCH COMPOUND NOUNS WITH DE. 10. English nouns compounded with two substantives are gener- ally rendered in French by two separate substantives joined by de, when one expresses the nature, species, or quality of the other. (Compare p. 240, 2.) In French the order must be altered, the last coming first, and a preposition inserted. Westminster bridge, for instance, must be translated as if it were bridge of Westminster : le pout de Westminster. 1 . Deis used -when coming from, belonging to, made of can be understood, as : A toothache, un mat de dents. A headache, un mat de tete. The town-hall, V hotel de ville. A. sea-fish, un poisson de mer. A feather-bed, un lit de plumes. A holiday, un jour d& fete* A gold mine, une mine d'or. The moon-light, le clair de lune. A masterpiece, un chcf-tfcsuvre. SPECIAL USB OF DE AND A. 231 2. When in the English word the second component denotes a person oi an animal, in French de is always used, as : A schoolmaster, un maitre CL'ecok. A chambermaid, une femme de chambre. The dancing-master, le maitre de danse. The music-mistress, la maitresse de musique. A saddle-horse, un cheval de selle. A sea-fish, un poisson de mcr. THEME 7. 1. Give me much bread and little meat. 2. You must use more prudence. 3. I Lave bought a quantity of apples and pears. 4. You make too much noise. 5. How many children has your aunt? 6. She has four children. 7. You have eaten too many cherries. 8. We have not bread enough.* 9. Mr. Henry has a great many friends. 10. We had a great deal of pleasure. 11. I bought a pound of cheese. 12. We want a dozen pens, a bottle of ink, and two quires of paper. 13. A great number of friends remained attached 1 to me. 14. They have built a wall eighty feet long and ten feet high. 15. How many boys were these killed ? 16. There were six killed (see 2). 17. How many soldiers were there wounded? 18. There were six books lost. 19. How many were there found? 20. How many rooms are there let in that house? 21. H^e you anything good? 22. I have nothing bad. 23. When my sister was a girl of seven years, she lived with my mother in Italy. 24. 'Have you a gold or a silver watch? 25. My watch is of gold. 26. Irish linen is as 2 good as Dutch 3 linen. 27. I prefer Burgundy wine to Spanish wine. 28. The kingdom of Spain is larger than the kingdom of Portugal 29. The city of Paris is older than the city of Berlin. 30. Is that gentleman 4 your music- master? 31. No ; he is my writing-master. 1. Attaches. 2. Aussi. 3. D'HoUande. 4. Monsieur. 5. JEcrUure } f. *Assez, enough, is placed after the substantive in English, and always before in Trench. 232 IV. QUATPJEME LEgON. THEME 8. 1. To-morrow is (Jest) a holPday; it will bo a day of happi- ness. 2 2. Human life is full of disappointments. 3 3. Mr. E. is a young man endowed 4 with (cP) wit 5 and judgment. 4. We were very much pleased with his behavior. 6 5. I was in England, but I have not seen Westminster bridge. 6. Burgundy wine is very dear. 7. Spanish wool is better than German wool. 8. I have sold my gold watch. 9. Mr. B. always wears 7 silk stockings. 10. My sisters and I (we) have taken 8 a walk by (an) moonlight. 11. The battle-field was covered with the dead and dying. 12. This girl is the chambermaid of the Duchess of L. 13. Who are these gentlemen? 14. One is my music-master, and the other is my sister's dancing-master. 15. Let us go to gallons dans) the dining-room; dinner is served (servf). 16. I shall not dine to- day ; I have a bad 9 headache. 1. Fete. 2. Borihear. 3. Revers. 4. Dou&. 5. Esprit. G. Conduite, f. 7. Por- ter. 8. To take a walk = se promener. 9. Violent. II. SPECIAL USE OF a. 1. The preposition a alone (without article) is used after a verb in the following expressions : Condamncr a mart, to condemn to death. Fermer a clef, to lock. Tomber a terre, to fall to the floor or ground. Alter a pied, to go on foot, to walk. Alter a cheval, to ride, to go on horseback. Montcr a cheval., to get or mount on horseback. Tomber a qenoux. ~) . , , J- to kneel down, oe mettre a (jenoux> ) Se mettre a table, to sit down to dinner. 2. When two substantives make a compound word in English, their order is inverted in French, and the preposition a intervenes, when the one expresses the use of the other, or when for the pur- pose of, by means of, may be understood : The silk-worm, le ver a soie* SPECIAL USE OF BE AND A. 233 A milk-pot, un pot a lait.* A teacup, une tasse a the". A repeater, une montre a repetition. A windmill, un moulin a vent. A paper-mill, un moulin a papier. A powder-mill (a mill for powder), un moulin a poudre. Gunpowder, de la poudre a canon. A dining-room, une salle a manger. A bedroom, une chambre a couclier. A wineglass, un verre a vin.* A coffee-cup, une tasse a cafe'. A steam-engine, une machine a vapeur. A steamboat, un bateau a vapeur. Fire-arms, des armes a feu. 3. If the second word begins with a vowel or h mute, the article is commonly inserted, as : An ink-bottle, une bouteille a Yencre for a encre). A water-jug (pitcher), une cruche a Veau (or a eau). 4. When the compound word denotes a place where certain things are sold or kept in quantities, the article is also used with , as : The horse-market, le marclie" aux chevaux. The fish-market, le marchtf aux poissons. The corn-market, la lialle aux lies. 5. A together vvith the article is further used to call a dish or drink after its principal ingredient, as : A milk-soup, une soupe an lait. Coffee with milk, da caf au lait. A cream-tart, une tarte a la creme. A pancake with herbs, une omelette aux fines herbes. NOTE. But we say du syrop de groseille, not sijrop a groseille, currant- syrup, because this is made entirely of currants. G. To denote the different kinds of hunting, shooting, etc., as : A deer-hunt, la chasse aux chevreuils. Fox-hunting, la cliasse aux renards. 7. A is generally employed to translate expressions in which with * Un pot de lait, un vcrre de vin, signify a pot of milk, a glass of wine; pot au lait refers both to the vessel and to its contents. 234 IV. QUATRIEME LEgON. is expressed or could be employed, or when having could "be used- Ex. : Une maiscn a deux etagcs, a two-story Iiouse. Un chapeau a grands lords, a broad-brimmed liat. Une voiture a deux places, a double-seated carriage. THEME 9. 1.. I have bought six teacups ; take 1 them into the dining-rocm. 2. Where is the oiP-bottle ? 3. Who has broken this flower-pot ? 4. Bring me a wineglass and two teaspoons. 5. Why has he been condemned to death ? G. He has committed 3 a murder. 9 7. Your room is locked. 8. Is this an ink-bottle ? 9. No ; it is a vinegars-bottle. 10. Let us sit down (rnettons-nous) to dinner. 11. Did you observe 5 that man with 6 black hair? 12. You must buy another milk-pot. 13. Is this the corn-market? 14. I always keep (keep always) fire-arms in my bedroom for my safety 7 during the night; but I have no gunpowder at present, thus (ainsi) my fire-arms are useless. 8 1. Portez. 2. ffuile, f. 3. Commis, P. p. of commettre. 4. Vinaigre. 5. Remar- qiter. 6. Aux, pi. 7. Surety f. 8. Inutile. 9. Meurtre, f. THEME 10. 1. Whom have you called? 2. I have been to the fish-market; however I have bought no fish, because it was too dear. 1 3. I went fox-hunting yesterday, and to-morrow I shall see a deer-hunt. 4. What had you for dessert? 5. We had cherry-pie 21 and a cream* tart.* 6. Can you tell rne where the hay-store is? 7. It is near the horse-market. 8. Who invented gunpoivdert 9. Ber- thold Schwarz, a German monk 5 10. The poor girl has broken a milk-pot, two wineglasses, and several teacups. 11. The Great Eastern is the largest steamship in the (au) world. 12. Call the milk- woman ; 6 I must buy a pot of milk. 1. Cher. 2. Gateau. 3. Creme, f. 4. Tourte, f. 5. Home. 6. Laitiere. NAMES OF COUNTRIES, TOWNS, ETC. 235 V. CINQUIEME LE90N. PECULIARITIES IN THE USE OF NAMES OF COUNTRIES, TOWNS, ETC. (See Part I., L. VII.) 1. As mentioned in the First Part (7th lesson), the definite ar- ticle is put before the names of countries, provinces, rivers, and mountains. But the names of countries and islands, which have the same name as cities situated in them, such as Naples, Bade, Genes (Genoa), Matte, Candle, etc., are used without the article. Except, however : le Hanovre and le Luxembourg. 2. .Further, the definite article is always retained with names of countries which are only used in the plural, and in those which are compounded with an adjective. Ex.: The productions of India, les productions des Indes. The governor of the Netherlands. Le gouverneur des Pays-bas. The queen of Great Britain. La reb4ela Grande-Bretagne. 3. In the following cases de only, without the article, is used be- fore names of countries : 1. When sovereigns, courts, and titles are spoken of. Ex.: La reine d'Angleterre, the queen of England. Le Grand-due de Bade, the grand-duke of Baden. NOTE. With the names of some countries that are not European, t.h article is generally used, as : L'empereur de la Chine, da Bre'sil, etc. The emperor of China, of Brazil, etc. However, with Persia, la Perse, and Egypt, I'Egypte, only de is used : Le roi de Perse, the king of Persia. 236 V. CINQUIEilE LEgON. 2. "Where the names of countries have the meaning of an adjective (see alsoL. IV. 4), as: L' urgent dc France, French money. La Koifi d'ltalie, the silk of Italy. Da fromage de Suisse, Swiss cheese (de may be omitted). 3. After the verbs : venir, to come ; revenir, to come back, to return; ar- ru'cr, to arrive, and the noun le retour, if the name of the country is femi- nine, as : // est vcnu de, France, he has come from France. Lorsque je reiins d'Espagne, when I returned from Spain. A mon retour d'ltalie, on my return from Italy. But if the same is masculine, the definite article is used, as : JP arrive da Tyrol, da Mcxique, dn Portugal, etc. 4. After words, such as empire, royaume (kingdom), ducluf, viUc, He (isle), as in English (see L. IV. G) : L 'empire d'Autriche, the Empire of Austria. La ville de Paris, the city of Paris. 4. Both to and in used after a word signifying going, coming, sending, living, being, etc., before names of countries in the singu- lar, must be rendered in French by the preposition en, without any article. Ex. : AVe are going to America, nous allons en Ame'rique. He is to go back to Belgium, il doit rctourner en Bclgique. I send him to Switzerland, je I'envoie en Suisse. My brother is in America, mon frere est en Ame'rique. Rouen is in France, Rouen est situes en France. 5. If tho name of the country be accompanied by an adjective, dans with the definite article must be used : Dans la Suisse frangaise, in French Switzerland. Dans VAllemagne mgridionale, in southern Germany. 6. The article is omitted before names of towns, villages, etc., as: Anvers t Antwerp. Livaurne, Leghorn. Athcnes, Athens. Lisbonne, Lisbon. Bruxettes, Brussels. Londres, London. Douvres, Dover. Lyon, Lyons. Geneve, Geneva. Venise^ Venice. NAMES OF COUNTRIES, TOWNS, ETC. 237 NOTE. A few names of towns are preceded by the article : Le Havre, Havre. la RocMle, Eochelle. la Haie, the Hague. . le Caire, Cairo, etc. 7. The names of rivers and mountains are preceded by the* definite article, as in English : La Seine, the Seine. le Tibre, the Tiber. le Rhone, the Rhone. le Danube, the Danube. le Rhin, the Rhine. la Moselle, the Moselle. les Alpes, the Alps. le Right, the Righi. 8. Both to and at or in before names of places are rendered by a. Ex. : Are you going to Brussels, allez-vous a Bruxelles ? He was at Rome and Naples, il &ait a Rome et a Naples. 9. After partir, to set out, to leave, the preposition pour must be used before names of countries with the article, before names of cities without it : Nous partirons pour I'Espagne et le Portugal. We will set out (or leave) for Spain and Portugal. Elle est partie pour Paris et Lyon. She left for Paris and Lyons. THEME 11. 1. J prefer the wfiies of Germany to the wines of Spain. 2. We shall soon go to Switzerland and Italy. 8. Naples may (pent) be called a paradise, 1 from its (a cause de so) beauty and fertility. 2 4. This merchant has bought Italian silk, Spanish wool, and French wines. 5. My grandfather lives in the West Indies. 3 6. I set out for Egypt to-morrow. 7. This cheese comes from Switzerland. 8. Cologne is situated* on (sur) the Rhine. 9. The Alps are higher than the Pyrenees. 10. The- emperor of Russia, Peter 5 the Great, died at St. Petersburgh in the year (en) 1725. 11. Sicily is the granary 6 of ( 1) Italy, and Italy the garden of Europe. 1. Paradis, m. 2. Fertility. 3. Les Indes occidentales. 4. Situee. 5. Pierre. 6. Orenier,m. 238 V. CINQUIEMB READING LESSON. CHARLES XII. (Douze.) Charles XII, roi de Suede, naquit 1 a Stoekliolm le 27 Juin 1682. II perdit sa mere dans sa onzieme annee, ct avait a peine quinze ans lorsque son pere mourut. Selon 2 le testament du feu 3 roi, il ne de- vait etre majeur 4 qu'apres avoir passe sa dix-huitieme annee, mais sur la proposition du ministre Piper, les etats lui defercrent 5 le gouvernement deja en 1697. L'an 1700, Pierre I, empereur de Russie, Frederic IY, roi de Danemark, et Auguste, electeur de Saxe, lui declarerent la guerre. II les attaqua 1'un apres 1'autre et remporta d'abord 6 dcs victoircs eclatantes, 7 entre autres ceBe de Narva, ou il dent 8 avec moins de 9 8,000 Suedois, quatre-vingt mille Husscs, dont il resta plus de vingt mille sur le champ de bataille, tandis qu'il ne perdait que six cents hommes. Mais plus tard, lorsqu'il penetra en Eussie, il perdit la bataille decisive de Pultawa, ct fut contraint de se refugier sur le territoire turc avec une faible escorte de deux cent cinquante Suedois. 1. Was born. 2. According to. 3. Late. 4. Of age. 5. To transfer. 6. At first. 7. Splendid. 8. To defeat. 9. Than. CONVERSATION. Ou naquit Charles XII ? Ce roi naquit a Stockholm. Dans quelle annee ? En 1682, le 27 Juin. Perdit-il ses parents dc bonne Oui, il perdit sa mere, quand il heure ? avait 11 ans, et son pere, quand il avait 15 ans. Quand fut-il declare majeur ? En 1697, a 1'fige de quinze ans et demi. Qu'arriva-t-il trois ans apres ? Pierre I, empereur de Eussie, Frederic IY, roi de Danemark, et Auguste, electeur de Saxe, lui declarerent la guerre. Que fit Charles XII ? II les attaqua 1'un apres Tautre et les cleat. POSSESSIVE ADJECTIVES. 239 Quclle est sa plus eclatante victoire ? Avait-il beaucoup de soldats ? Y eufc-il beaucoup de tues ? A-t-il toujours et^ heureux dans scs batailles? A quoi fut-il contraint ? Celle de Narva, ou il battit 80,000 Kusses. II n'avait que 8,000 Suedois. Les Russes perdirent plus de vingt mille hommes, les Suedois h peine six cents. Non, il perdit la bataille de Pul- tawa. H fut contraint de se refugier sur le territoire turc, avec une faiblo escorte. VI. SIXIEME LEgON. POSSESSIVE ADJECTIVES, (See the First Part, L. XII.) 1. Possessive adjectives must be repeated : 1. Before every noun of the same sentence, as : My brothers and sisters have arrived. Mes freres et mes sceurs sont arrives* 2. Before two or three adjectives qualifying different things : I love your great and your little children. .Palme vos grands ct vos petits enfants. NOTE. But when the two substantives relate to the same person, and when the two or three adjectives are of the like signification* and qualify the same object, the possessive adjective is not repeated. Ex.: My teacher and friend, mon prfcepteur et ami. His good and useful advice, scs bons et utiles consefls. * If they have a contrary signification, the possessive adjective must be repeated, as : Scs bonnes et ses mauvaises pensees (thoughts). 240 VI. SIXIEME LEgON. 2. Custom requires the use of the possessive adjective "before the names of relations in addressing them or speaking of them. Ex.: Aunt, when do you leave ? Ma tante, quand partez-vous? Cousin, will you go with me ? Mon cousin (ma cousine), voulcz-vous alter avcc inoi ? ] Bather is not at home, mon pere n'est pas a la maison. 3. When in English the possessive pronouns mine, thine, Ms, hers, etc., preceded by the preposition of, are placed after a noun to which they relate, they are rendered in French by mes, tes, ses, etc., before the noun, which is put in the plural. Ex.: A book of mine, un de mes livres. A friend of yours, un de vosamis. 4. When the verb to be is found before a possessive adjective fol- lowed by a noun in the possessive case, and signifies to belong, in French a must be used. Ex.: This book is my father's, ce livre est a mon pere. That house is our uncle's, cette maison-la est a noire oncle. 5. When parts of the body, or physical and intellectual faculties are spoken of, the French generally use the definite article where in English the possessive adjective is used (see L. III. 5.) Ex.: I have a pain in my head, fai mal a la tete. He has lost his senses, il a perdu Vesprit. NOTE 1 . If, however, there were an ambiguity to be feared, the posses- sive adjective should be used in French as in English. NOTE 2. When a habitual complaint is spoken of, the possessive ad- jective is also properly used. Ex.: His headache has returned, sa migraine Va repris. 6. After the verbs changer and redoiibler the possessive adjec- tive is dropped and replaced by the preposition de, as : He has changed his religion, il a cJiang&de religion. We have changed our opinion. Nous avons change" &' opinion or d'avis. They redoubled their activity, Us redoullerent d'activite. POSSESSIVE ADJECTIVES. 241 THEME 12. 1. My father, mother and sisters aro In the country. 2. His uncle and aunt know it. 3. I thank you for (de) your good and useful services. 4. He is a friend of mine. 5. I found a pencil of yours. 6. Where are you, daughter? 7. Here I am, mother. 8. Come, friend, let us work. 9. He will never betray 1 me, for he is my friend and protector. 2 10. We changed our mind 3 when we heard that news. 11. He tells 4 a falsehood 4 as often as (toutes les fois qii?) he opens his mouth. 12. A cousin of ours came yes- terday to see us. 13. Give me my dictionary and grammar. 5 14. My mother has a pain in (a) her head. 15. I have a pain in my ear. 6 16. The man who fell from the roof 7 of our house, dislo- cated (se demit) his wrist. 8 17. In (a) the last battle 9 our gen- eral lost his right leg, and I was wounded 10 in my shoulder. 11 1. TraMr. 2. Protecteur. 3. Avis, m. 4. Dire un mensonge. 5. Grammaire, f. 6. Oreille. 7. Toit, m. 8. Polgnet, m. 9. Batallle^. 10. Blcsser, reg. v. 11. Epaule, f. 7. When in English the word own is found alone, i. e. without a noun, after a possessive adjective, the latter is rendered by a pos- sessive pronoun : le mien, le tien, le si en (propre), etc., or in the feminine by la mienne, la tienne, la sicnne (propre), etc. Ex.: The daughter of his friend and his own. La fiilede son ami et la sienne (propre). 8. The indefinite pronoun one's denoting a possession is trans- lated in French son, sa, ses. Ex. : One is glad to find one's money again. On est content de retrouverson argent. 9. When its and their refer to a thing which is not the subject of a proposition they are rendered by en unless preceded by a prep- osition, in which case son, sa, ses, leur, leurs must be used. Ex.: I like this country, its air (Nom.) is healthy, its soil fruitful, etc. Palme ce pays ; Vair en est sain, le sol en est fertile. What plant is this ? I do not know its name. Quelle est cette plantel Je n'en connais pas le nom, 16 242 VI. SIXIEME LEgON. Look at these trees ; what is their height? Voyez ces arbres; qudle en est la hauteur (not leur h.) ? But we must say : Paris a ses beautds. Paris has its beauties. J* admire la grandeur de ses rues. I admire the size of its streets. Ces arbres sont remarquables par leur hauteur. These trees are remarkable for their height. 10, Observe the following gallicisms : Let me soon hear of you. Donnez-moi bientot de vos nouvettes. I shall go to meet you, j'irai a votre rencontre. They are cousins of mine, ce sont de mes cousins. With regard to me, to you, to us. A mon e'gard, a votre e'gard, a notre e'gard. THEME 13. 1. He has worked much more for our good 1 than for his own. 2. Paris is a large city, its streets are too narrow. 2 3. I particularly 3 admire (I adm. p.) its rich stores. 4 4. Windsor is a fine town ; I admire its situatic/i, walks 5 and streets. 5. London has its beau- ties. 6. I like the size 6 of its streets. 7. This illness 7 is danger- ous ; I know its origin 8 and effects. 9 8. This is (void) a fine tree ; its fruit is delicious. 10 9. Every science has its principles. 10. An illustrious ( tre) birth 11 receives from virtue its most shining 12 lustre. 11. Mr Dubois has sold his father's house and his own. 1. Le Men. 2. Etroit, e. 3. Surtout. 4. Magasin. ra. 5. Promenade, f. 6. Grandeur, f. 7. Maladie, f. 8. Origine, f. 9. Effet, m. 10. Delidcux. 11. Naissance,f. 12. Beau. READING LESSON. EUDAMIDAS. Eudamidas de Corinthe fit, en mourant, un testament qui semble- rait ridicule h tout autre u'& un ami. II touchait a sa derniere POSSESSIVE ADJECTIVES. 243 heure, et laissait sa mere et sa fillo exposees a la plus cruelle indi- gence, n'ayant pour tout bien que deux fideles amis, Carixene et Are thus, Eudaraidas ne fut point alarme ; il jugea des cosurs de ses amis par le sien propre, et il fit ce testament qui ne doit jamais etro oublie. " Je legue 1 a Are thus le soin de nourrir ma mere, et de Pentretenir dans sa vieillesse ; a Carixene le soin de marier ma Ulle, et delui donner une dot 2 convenable." Carixene etant mort quelque temps apres, Arethus exe*cuta la commission de tous les deux ; et, pour rendre son action plus il- lustre, il maria la fille de son ami et la sienne en un meme jour, et leur donna a toutes deux une memo dot. Quant a (as to) la mere, il la nourrit jusqu'a la mort. Si la generosite d' Are thus est digne d'admiration, la noble hardiesse 3 et la confiance du testateur 4 Test encore davantage; car celui qui a la resolution de faire un semblable 5 testament, est capable non-seulement de 1'executer, mais de quelque chose encore de plus, et il n'est pas douteux qu'il n'eut nourri la mere de son ami, et marie sa fille, aussi bien que la sienne propre, meme sans en etre prie. 1. I bequeath. 2. Dowry, portion. 3. Boldness. 4. Testator. 5. Such, similar. CONVERSATION. Que fit Eudamidas de Corinthe H fit un testament remarquable. en mourant ? Etait-il riehe ? Au contraire, il etait tres-pauvre, mais il avait deux fideles amis. Que legua-t-il done a ses amis ? II legua a son ami Arethus le soin de nourrir sa vieille mere, et a Carixene le soin de marier sa fille. Devait-il la marier sans dot ? Non, avec une dot convenable. Les deux amis executerent-ils L'un d'eux, Carixene, monrufc cc que le testament leur im- quelque temps apres. posa? Et Tautro que fit-il ? Are*thus executa la commission de tous les deux. 244: VIL SEPTIEME LEgON. De quelle maniere Fexecu- H maria la fille de son ami et la ta-t-il? sienne en un memo jour, et leur donna h toutes deux une dot egale. Et comment agit-il envers la E la nourrit jusqu'a la mort. mere d'Eudamidas ? Comment trouvez-vous la gene- Elle est digne d'admiration. rosite d' Arethus ? VII. SEPTIEME LE90N. NUMERALS. (See the First Part, L. XIV.) 1. When the cardinal numbers are used substantively they take the masculine article, as : Un un, a one. Le trois, the three. Ce huit est mcd fait, this eight is badly made. 2. A and one before hundred and thousand are not translated. Ex.: A hundred and twenty horses, cent vingt chevaux. In the year one thousand one hundred and sixty. L'an (or simply en) mil cent soixante. 3. Observe the following expressions with numerals : Un a un, one by one. Deux a deux, two by two. Uun apres I'autre, one after the other. Vers six heures or vers les six heures, by, about six o'clock. Vers midi or vers le midi, towards (by) twelve o'clock. Une heure et demie, one hour and a half or half-past one. Deux heures moins un quart, a quarter to two. Trois heures (et) un quart, a quarter past three. NUMERALS. 245 Tows les deux jours, every other day. D'aujourd'hui en huit, to-day week. D'aujourd'hui en quinzc, to-day fortnight. Dans qulnze jours, in a fortnight. II y a huit jours, a week ago. II y a un an, a year or a twelvemonth ago. 4. More than, and less than, before numbers are rendered plus de aad moins de, instead of plus que and mains que. Ex. : I have spent more than a hundred francs. JFai de'pense" plus de cent francs. You have not less than ten mistakes in your exercise. Vbus n'avez pas moins de dix fautes dans votre theme. 5. Nearly, before a number, is translated pres de. Ex. : It is nearl^ five o'clock, il est pres de cinq heures. THEME H. 1. This six is well made, but this nine is badly made. 2. Henry the Fourth was one of the greatest kings of France. 3. Numa was one of the seven kings of Rome. 4. America was discovered 1 in the year one thousand four hundred and ninety-two. 5. The shepherd 2 has sold a hundred sheep. 6. When do you dine ? 7. I dine at twelve o'clock, sometimes at one o'clock. 8. I suj/' at half-past eight, and I go to bed 4 at midnight. 9. Is it four o'clock? 10. No, sir ; it is a quarter to four. 11. I must go out at a quar- ter past four. 12. We went in (entrdmes) one by one. 13. My brother will set out this day week, and will come back in a fortnight. 14. Has Mr. L. three children? 15. No; he has (en a) more than three : he has four or five. 16. This book costs less than ten francs. 17. How old is your son Charles ? 18. He is nearly tourtcen years old. 19. I have a French lesson 5 every other day. 1. Fut decouverte. 2. Le Merger. 3. Souper. 4. Se coucher. 5. Une leqon de fran^aia. 246 vm. HUITIEME VIII. HUITIEME LEgON. ADJECTIVES. See Part I., Lesson XVII. AGREEMENT OF TIIE ADJECTIVE WITH TUB NOUN. 1. In French, the adjective agrees in gender and number with the noun to which it relates : Une feuille verte, a green leaf. De bons amis, good friends. Les prunes sont mures, the plums are ripe. 1. If it belongs to two or more nouns in the singular, it must be in the plural: Le pauvre ct le riche sont gaux devant Dieu. The poor and the rich are alike before God. *Tai trouve" la porte et la femtre femn&s. I found the door and the window shut. La clemence ct la majeste* ttaient peintes sur son front. Clemency and majesty were imprinted on his brow. 2. If the substantives are of different genders, and joined by et, and, the adjectives must be in the masculine plural : Mon frere et ma sceur sont tres-hciireux. My brother and sister are very happy. 3. When the two nouns are joined by ou, or, or when the conjunction is left out, the adjective agrees only with the latter noun : Un chateau ou une maison ruincQ. A ruined castle or house. Le fer, laflamme tait toute pr&e. The sword, the flame was quite ready. 2. The adjectives demi, half; nu, bare ; except c, except; y conir pris, included; suppose, supposed; ci-joint, inclosed, annexed, are invariable when they precede the noun ; demi and nu are then joined with their noun by a hyphen. Ex. : Une demi-heure } half an hour. ADJECTIVES. 247 Marcher nu-pieds, to walk barefooted. Marcher nu-tete, to walk bareheaded. Except^ les deux premieres pages. Except the two first pages. Y compris la somme de cent francs. The sum of a hundred francs included. Suppose" ces fails, these facts supposed. But they must agree with their noun when they follow it, as : Une Jieure et demiQ, an hour and a half. Avoir les jambes nues, to have bare legs. Les deux premieres pages exceptcvs. The two first pages cxcepted. Copie de ma lettre est ci-jointQ. A copy of my letter is annexed. 3. Feu, late, is invariable, like the preceding ones, when it is before the article or possessive pronoun ; when it follows, it varies, as : Feu la reine or la feiie reine, the late queen. Feu mes tantes or mes feues tantes, my late aunts. 4. Some adjectives, as bon, vite, las, etc., may be used adverb- ially : then, of course, they are invariable. Ex. : Ces roses sentent tres-bon (not bonnes). These roses smell very sweet. Les cerfs courent tres-vite, the stags run very fast. 5. If the expression avoir I" air, to 'look, is followed by an adjec- tive, this latter remains unchanged when a moral or intellectual quality-is spoken of, as : Ces dames ont Vair bon. These ladies look good-natured. But if a bodily or organic quality is mentioned, or when the adjec- tive refers rather to the subject than to the word air, the adjective agrees with the subject of tho sentence. In this latter case> the verb tire is understood, as : Ces pierres ont Vair tres-durzs. These stones seem to be very hard. Madame F. a Vair mecontente (i. e. d'etre m&ontente). Mrs. F. appears to be discontented. 6. If a noun is accompanied by an adjective in the superlative, 248 VIII. HUITIEME LEgON. the latter always agrees with it in gender and number. When the superlative follows, the article must be repeated : La plus belk femme, the handsomest woman. Les gens les plus riches, the richest people. THEME 15. 1. I have a good friend. 2. The leaves are green. 3. Thcso pears are riper than those apples. 4. His brother and cousin have arrived. 5. Charles and Louisa are very industrious. 6. Men and women are mortal. 7. My son and daughter are happy. 8. His uncle and aunt are dead. 9. Louis XIV. had in France an absolute 1 power 2 and authority (autoritf). 10. She left her room and her trunk 3 open. 11. I found the windows and the shutters 4 shut. 12. Give these presents to the most industrious pupils. 13. Miss Emma is the daughter of the richest man in (de) this town. 14. I remained there (y) for half an hour. 15. The child slept two hours and a half. 1G. I have read the whole book, ex- cept the two last chapters. 5 17. The late queen was opposed 6 to that measure. 7 18. Why do you go barefooted ? 19. These pears appear to be ripe. 1. Absolu. 2. Pouvoir, m. 3. Cojfre, m. 4. Volet, m. 5. Ckapitrc, in. 6. tfopposait. 7. Mesure. B. PLACE OF THE ADJECTIVE. The principal rules have already been given in the eighteenth Lesson of Part I. We have to add here only the following. TThcn two adjectives refer to the same noun, we should examine what kind of adjectives they are. 1. If both of them are such as precede, when single, they may both remain before the noun if one of them forms with the noun, as it were, but one idea. Ex. : Une jolle petite file* a pretty little girl. Un beau jeune JiommeJ a handsome young man. * In Latin flliola. t Youth O'uvenis). ADJECTIVES. 249 2. If both preceding adjectives are taken in their full sense, they must be joined by et, and, as : Un grand et beau jardin, a large, beautiful garden. 3. An adjective usually placed before the noun, when connected by a conjunction with another adjective which is to be put after it, is itself placed after the noun. Ex. : Une action belle* et courageuse. A fine, courageous action. Une femme petite, mais bien faite. A short but well-made woman. 4. In English, two or more adjectives may qualify a substanth 1 ", without a conjunction ; but in French, et (or . sometimes mais^ is always placed before the last of the adjectives, if these follow their noun. Ex. : Une dame riche, jeune et aimable. A young, rich, amiable lady. Un homme instruit, modeste et estime' de tout le monde. A well-instructed, modest, and generally-esteemed man. THEME 10. 1. Charles is a handsome young man. 2. Henry is a pretty little boy. 3. This is a long (and) tedious 1 book. 4. My friend is an amiable and virtuous man. 5. He has a large and beautiful house. 6. This is a drowned 2 man or woman. 7. For this place I want an aged man or woman. 8. Is it^ the elder brother or Bister ? 9. The savage lived in a large, damp 3 cavern. 10. Spain is a fertile country, but badly cultivated. 4 11. A plain, 5 simple, and natural style is the only one to be recommended? 12. Brave and trusty 7 men are generally humane 8 and merciful. 9 13. Tliis is an interesting 10 and instructive study. 11 1. Ennuyeuz. 2. Noyd e. 3. ITumide. 4. Cultive e. 5. Uni. 6. Recommandablc, ?. Constant. 8. Ifumain. 9. MisAricordieiix. 10. Interessant. 11. Etude, f. * " A fine action " would be, Une belle action. 250 VIII. HUITIEME LEgON. C. COMPLEMENT OP ADJECTIVES. The complement of an adjective is either a substantive or a verb, preceded by one of the prepositions de, a, en, etc. 1. Adjectives and participles which denote plenty, desire, scar* city or want, and most of those followed in English by of, with and from, govern in French by means of the preposition de, as : La vie est j)leine de miseres, life is full of miseries. Le jsurx fomme fat comble Khonneurs, (loaded with honors). 2. The following adjectives govern also by means of de : Capable, capable. las, tired, wearied. content, contented, pleased. libre, free. digne, worthy. me'content, discontented. exempt, free. satisfait, satisfied. honteux, ashamed. sur, sure, etc. jaloux t jealous. Ex. : H est digne de recompense, he is worthy of reward. 3.* Adjectives denoting fitness, unfitness, disposition, inclination, readiness, or any habit, require a before the object. Ex. : H est propre k tout, he is fit for anything. Le cheval est utile a I'homme, the horse is useful to man. NOTE 1 . The following adjectives are followed by a in French and of ia English : Attentifa, heedful of; sensible a, sensible of; insensible a, insensible of or to. Ex. : Soyez attentifs au danger, be heedful of (the) danger. Je suis sensible & votre bonte", I am sensible of your kindness. NOTE 2. Some adjectives are followed in French by the preposition a, and in English by in ; such are : Habile a, skilful in. patient a, patient in, exact a, punctual in. impatient a, impatient in. Ex. : E est habile a tout, he is skilful in doing all. Elh z sxacte a son service, she is punctual in her service. 4. The following adjectives, which are followed in English by to or towards when they express behavior, require in French the prop- osition envers : *To this rule must h. ADJECTIVES. 251 Affable cnvers, affable to. poll cnvers, polite to. bon envers, (or pour) kind to. reconnaissant envers, thankful to. juste cnvers, just to. respectueux envers, respectful to. cruel envers, cruel to. gcnereux envers, generous to. honnete envers, civil to, liberal envers, liberal to. Ex. : // a et tres-bon envers moi (or pour 71101). He has been very kind to me. Soyez poli envers tout le monde. Be polite (civil) to everybody. 5. All others not mentioned in the foregoing sections, and which lake in English the preposition to, are followed in French by . Ex.: That is ea*sy to say, cela cst facile a dire. Religion is necessary to man, la religion est ne'cessaire a Vhomme. He was deaf to my prayers, il etait sourd a mes prieres. THEME 17. 1. We were loaded 1 with honors. 2. The basket 2 is full of fruit. 3, Do not be so greedy of (after) riches. 4. My cousin is worthy of your friendship. 5. Are you pleased with your horse ? 6. Human life 3 is never free from troubles. 4 7. Voltaire was always greedy of praise and insatiable of glory. 8. I am not satisfied with your exercise. 9. That old man is not fit for that place ; he is not punctual in his engagements. 10. My servant is always ready to do his duty. 5 11. Nature 3 is content with little. 12. Many people are dissatisfied with their condition. 13. Let us be kind to everybody. 14. These children are inclined 6 to idleness. 7 15. That is easy to say, but difficult to do. 16. Scipio Africanus 8 was respectful to his mother, liberal to his sisters, good to his servants, just and affable to everybody. 17. Children must 9 not be cruel to animals. 18. He is insensible to all the remonstrances 10 of his friends. 1. Coiribtt. 2. Le panier. 3. Put the article. 4. Peine, f. 5. Devoir, m. 6. Enclin. 7. Paresse, f. 8. Scipion VAfricain. 9. Doivent. 10. Remontrance, f. D. ADJECTIVES OF DIMENSION. 1. Adjectives relating to the dimenson or size of objects are expressed in French either by an adjective or a substantive. Thus 252 VIII. HUITIEME LEgON. long can bo rendered by the adjective long or longue (f.) de, or by the noun de longueur. Observe that in the first case de follows, in the second precedes, and that these adjectives are placed after the substantive and before the dimension. Ex. : A * ui r n 7 une ta ^ e tongue de dix pieds. A table ten feet long, > 77 . * . , % , ) une table de dix pieds de longueur. wne towr Aaute cfe cenf mob. , . , *, , wrte tour ae cent pieds de hauteur. . . ..-.} A tower a hundred feet high, >- } 2. The verb to be connected with such adjectives, must be ex- pressed by etre when, in French, the adjective of dimension is pre- ferred to the noun, as : This table is ten feet long. Cette table est longue de dix pieds. That tower is a hundred feet high. Cette tour-la est haute de cent pieds. 3. But the verb to be must be rendered by avoir when the dimension is expressed by a noun. Ex. : This table is ten feet long. Cette table a dix pieds de longueur. That tower is a hundred feet high. Cette tour-la a cent pieds de hauteur. 4. In a similar manner age is expressed either with age de and the verb etre, or with the verb avoir without the verb age. Ex.: A boy eight years old, un garcon ag(fde huit ans. T ) je suis an de vingt ans. I am twenty years old, > ., . . J . ) j at vingt ans. (The latter is much preferred.) 5. The word by, which is sometimes used in English after a com- parative, to denote how much a thing exceeds another, is rendered by de, not by par. Ex. : Charles is taller than I by three inches. Charles est plus grand que moi de trois ponces. ADJECTIVES. 253 THEME 18. 1. I have seen a tree ninety feet high. 2 We have a house eighty feet long and forty-five high. 8. This stick is three feet long. 4. This plank 1 is two inches 2 thick. 3 5. This tree is -fifty feet high. 6. London bridge 4 is nine hundred and twenty feet long, fifty-five high, and fifty-six wide. 5 7. The monument of Lon- don stands (est place) on a pedestal 6 twenty feet high. 8. This ditch is twelve feet deep. 7 9. The famous mine of Potosi in (dans le) Peru is more than (de) fifteen hundred feet deep. 7 10. My room is forty feet long and thirty wide. 11. The walls of Algiers 8 are fourteen feet thick and thirty feet high. 12. King Street 9 is about 10 a mile 11 and a half long and sixty-five feet wide. 13. My brother is elder than I by two years. 14. I am taller than Robert by seven inches. 15. Westminster bridge is forty-four feet broad f the free-way 12 under the arches of this bridge is eight hundred and seventy feet ; it consists 13 of fourteen piers, 14 thirteen large arches, and two small ones; the two middle 15 piers are each (chacuri) sev- enteen feet wide, and contain two hundred tons 16 of solid stones. 1. Planche, f. 2. Pouce, m, 3. Epais, epaisse. 4. Le pont de Londres. 5, Largem largeur. 6. Piedestal. 7. Profondeur. 8. Alger. 9. La rue royale. 10. Environ. 11. Mille, m. 12. The free- way = le passage. 13. II consiste. 14, Pile } f. 15. Du milieu. 16. Tonncau, m. READING LESSON. L'ELEPHANT. L'elephant est le plus gros des quadrupedes ; il habite les forets epaisses, 1 les bords des fleuves et les lieux humides. Ses jambes informes soutiennent un corps epais et lourd. 2 On aper^oit a peine sa petite queue, 3 tandis que de larges orcilles ombragent 4 les deux cotes de sa tete. Ses yeux sont petits en proportion de son corps norme. Son nez, qui se prolonge de plusieurs pieds et qui est tres- flexible, lui sert do main. A Faide de ce nez, qu'on appelle trompe, 5 il puise (draivs) de Feau, cueille les herbcs et les fleurs, denoue 6 les eordes, ouvre ct fennc les portes, debouche les bouteilles, ramasse 254 VIU. HUITIEME LEgON. par tciTO la plus pctito piece de monnaie ; en un mot, il fait presque tout ce que nous faisons avec nos doigts. Quand il a soif, il remplit d'eau cette trompe, et boit ensuite cornme s'il vidait 7 une bouteille. II se nourrit d'herbes, de feuilles, de fruits et de riz (rice). II mange environ cent cinquante livres d'herbes par jour. De chaque cute de sa trompe sortent deux enormcs dents qu'on appelle defenses. Ccs defenses sont des armes terriblcs, dont il tipouvante 8 les plus feroces animaux. Elles fournissent une matiere preeieuse, qu'on appelle ivoire, et pesent 9 jusqu'a cent livres chaeune. 1. Thick. 2. Heavy. 3. Tail. 4. To shade, over- shade. 5. Trunk or proboscis. 6. To untie. 7. To empty. 8. To terrify. 9. To weigh. CONVERSATION. Que savez-vous de Telepbant ? L'elephant est le plus gros des quadrupedes. Od babite-t-il? II habite les forets epaisses, les bords des fleuves et les lieux bumides. Qu'est-cc qu'il a de particulicr ? II a une trompe, a Taide de la- quelle il puise de Teau, cueille les berbes et les fleurs, denouo des cordes, etc. II se nourrit d'herbes, de feuilles, de fruits et de riz. II remplit d'cau sa trompe et belt ensuite. Environ 150 livres d'herbes. L 'ivoire se fait des defenses de Felephant qui pesent jusqu'h cent livres chacune. De quoi se nourritril ? Quand il a soif, que fait-il ? Combien mange-t-il par jour ? D'ou vient Fivoire ? ONAL PRONOUNS. 255 IX. NEUVIEME LEgON. I. PERSONAL PRONOUNS. (See Part L, L. XXIV.) 1. Conjunctive pronouns, in the first and second persons, should be repeated before every verb in a simple tense. Ex.: Je vous aime et je vous aimer ai tou jours. I love you and (I) shall always love you. Vous dites et vous direz toujours. You say and (you) will always say. Je le vois et je Ventends. I see and hear it. H nous ennuie et nous obscde sans cesse. He wearies (us) and besets us unceasingly. NOTE. With a compound tense, or when the pronouns are in the third person, they are rarely repeated, though more frequently than in English, as : Je Vai vu et entendu. I have seen and heard it. II c'coute et ne peut comprendre, etc. He listens and cannot conceive, etc. 2. When an emphasis is laid upon the personal pronoun, it must be repeated in French, but then ; the first is disjunctive. Very of- ten it is then preceded by c'est, or for the third person plural, by ce sont. Ex. : < moiy je le dis. I say so, | jegtnuritquiledis. f lul t il a pr&endu cela. He has pretended this, j (nous n'avons pas dit cela, nous. We have not said so, j mm> ^ n>amns ^ ^ It is not we who said so, ^ ^ ^ pas nmls qu{ avms du cefa 256 IX. NEUVIEME < eux, Us Vont fait. They have done it, j CQ ^ ^ qu . NOTE. Observe that in such cases the verb is put in the same numbet and person as the pronoun which is the antecedent of the relative qui, as : Is it I who told this news ? Est-ce moi qui ai dit cette nouvdle ? 3. When a verb relates to subjects of different persons, it is put in the plural with nous, if one of the several subjects is in the first person, or with vous, if the subjects are in the second and third persons. Ex.: My brother and I shall go into the country. Mon frere et moi, nous irons a la campagm, or, Nous irons a la campagne, mon frere et moi. I told you and him or both you and him. Je vous I'ai dit a toi et a lai. You and your friend will come with me. Vous et votre ami, vous viendrez avec moi. 4. When the verb governs two pronouns (both being persons) one in the Direct Objective, the other in the Indirect, the Indirect is a disjunctive (see p. 110). Ex.: Je vais vous presenter a lui. I am going to introduce you to him. 5. A personal pronoun, used as subject, may follow the verb after aussi, peut-etre, encore, toujours, en vain, du moins, or au mo ins. TUE3IE 19. 1. I believe and shall always believe that you were {avez cu) wrong. 2. He says so, but he does not believe it. 3. I honor and respect him, but I do not love him. 4. We come and go. 5. A passionate 1 temper 2 renders a man unfit 3 for business, 4 deprives 1 him of his reason, and makes him unfit (makes that he is not fit) (propre) for society. 4 6. I have always loved and esteemed her. 7. They (on) flatter 6 and praise us. 8. It is I who have written it. PERSONAL PBONOUNS. 257 & It is they who have seen it. 10. They and my brother have come. 1 1 You like the town and I the country. 3. Passionne'. 2. Caractere. 3. Inepte. 4. Tut the definite article. 5. Friver. 6, Flatter. 0. "\Vhen two personal pronouns limit a verb, both should be dis- junctive, and therefore after the verb. Ex.: I forgive both you and her. Je pardonne a vous et a elle.* I speak to him and not to you. Je parle a lid et non a vous. 7. The pronouns himself, herself, themselves, when with a re- flective verb, are expressed in French by se ; otherwise by lui-meme, elle-meme, eux-memes, elles-memes. Ex.: He (she) does not know himself (herself). II (die) ne se connait pas. They highly distinguished themselves. Us (dies) se distinguerent beaucoup. But : Has he done it himself? Yes, himself. L'a-t-il fait lui-meme ? Oui, lui-meme. 8. Soi, self, is of both genders, and is used of things as well as of persons. Ex.: II est sage de parler rarement de soi. It is : wise to talk seldom of one's self. 9. The pronoun itself, preceded by a preposition and relating to an inanimate object, is expressed by soi, when the 'antecedent noun is taken in an abstract sense. Ex.: L'aimant attire le fer a soi. The loadstone attracts iron to itself. La vertu est aimable en soi. Virtue is amiable in itself. * Tliis sentence may better be translated thus : Je vous pardonne ainsi qu'a die, and the following, c'est a vous que je parle, etc. 258 IX. NEUVIEME LEgON. 10. But it is rendered by ette, when the inanimate object is of an individual nature and of the feminine gender. Ex.: La riviere entraina tout avec elle. The river carried everything away with itself. Ces raisons sont solides en elles-memes. Those reasons are solid in themselves. 11. The English personal pronouns are always rendered by the disjunctive (moi, toi, lui, etc.), when they are used alone, or when after a preposition or after que, than. Ex. : Qui a fait cela ? Moi, lui, die, etc. Who has done that ? I, he, she, etc. Voulez-vous oiler avec moi, avec lui, avec eux f etc. Will you go with me, with him, with them ? etc. Je parle de toi, d'elle, d'elles, de vous, etc. I am speaking of thee, of her, of them, of you, etc. H est phis jeune que moi. He is younger than I. THEME 20. 1. I speak to you and to him. 2. I forgive [both] you and him, because I hope (that) you will behave 1 better for the future (a Vave- nir). 3. The governor is your enemy; if you apply 2 to him, you will never succeed. 3 4. I do not trust 4 (to) him, but I should trust (to) his brother. 5. That man works for himself. G. Each acts for himself. 7. If you do this for him and for her, you will greatly oblige me. 8. One ought not 5 [to] speak of one's self, unless (qu r ) with modesty. 9. That man is too proud ; he does not know him- self. 10. The moon brought 6 a change 7 of weather. 1. Seconduire. 2. S'addrsser a qn. 3. K&issir. 4. Sefieraqn. 5. Onnedmi pas* 6. Amena. 7. Changement, m. H. PARTICULAR USE OF EN AND Y. 1. The pronouns it and them, used with regard to inanimate objects, are rendered by en, when the French verb requires de before an object which follows, whatever preposition may be used in English. Ex. : PERSONAL PRONOUNS. 259 A-t-on parle* de mon ouvrage ? Om, on en a parle~. Did they speak of my work ? Yes, they spoke of it. Vous m'avez rendu service. Je vous en remercie. You have done me a service. I thank you for it. 2. En is further used to express the words some and any, "when tliey como after a verb, and supply the place of an antecedent sul> < stantive, as : Void du jambon ; en veux-tu ? Donncz-m'en, s'il vous plait. Here is ham, will you have some ? Give me some, if you please, J'ai des noix, en voulez-vous ? Donnez-m'en trois. I have some walnuts ; will you have any ? Give me three of them. Donnez-lui-en, give him some. Offrez-leur-en, offer them some. NOTE. Observe 1, that when used with another personal pronoun, en fol- lows that pronoun ; and 2, that, in the affirmative Imperative, moi and tci are changed into m' and t' before en, as : donnez-m'en. 3. T" stands for in it, into it, at it, to it, there, and, with the verb penser, for of it, about it, of them. Like the other conjunc- tive pronouns, it is placed immediately before the verb, except with the affirmative Imperative, where it follows it.* Ex.: Votre pere est-il an jardln ? Oui, il y est. Is your father in the garden ? Yes, he is in it (there). Allez-vous ait spectacle $ Non, Monsieur, je n'y vais pas. Are you going to the theatre ? No, sir, I am not. Y pensez-vous ? Je n'y pense plus. Do you think of it ? I do no more think of it. Allez-y, go there. N'y allez pas, do not go there. NOTE. Y must always refer to an antecedent. * Except moi and toi which follow the word ?/, with the affirmative Imperative, as : Canduisez-y-moi, rends-y-toi (go there), whereas we say : Conduisez-nous-y. When both en and y happen to be governed by the same verb, y stands before en. Ex.: Jevous y enporterai, I will bring you some there. But conduisez-moi l&is preferable to conduisez-y-moi. 260 IX. NEUVIEMB LEgON. THEME 21. 1. We speak of it. 2. You speak of them. 3. I am sorry for it. 4. I have heard that your uncle has arrived, and I am very glad of it. 5. She spoke to him of it. 6. Talk 1 no more of it, for I will not. hear of it. 7. Have you [any] books? 8. Yes, I have. * 9. Have you bought some flowers? 10. Yes, I have bought some. 11. Give me three of them, if you please. 12. You have bread, give some to. the poor. 13. I thank you for it. 14. Do not thank me for it. 15. I study that language, 2 I know its rules well. 16. Since 3 you have no apples in your garden, I will send you some. 17. If I had money, I would give you some. 18. Send us some. 19. Send me none. 20. Mr. A. is a true* friend ; I shall never forget the services which I have received* from him. 21. Is your father in his garden? 22. Yes, he is (in it). 23. Do you agree 5 to it? 24. Yes, I agree to it. 25. Have you 6 just returned from the country? 26. No, I am going there. 27. We shall think of it. 28. We have forced 7 them to it. 29. There is a ditch, 8 take care 9 not to fall into it. 30. Our orchard 10 is very fruitful, we see all sorts 11 of fruits in it. 31. It is (c^est) a good book, one (on) reads excellent things in it. 1. Parlef. 2. Langue,f. 3. Puisque. 4. Requ. 5. Consentir. 6. Revenez-vous ? 7. Forces. 8. Un fosse. 9. Prenez garde, ID. Verger. 11. Tsutes sortes de. III. THE SUPPLYING PBONOUNS LE, LA, LES. 1. The pronouns le, la, les are used in- French to supply the place of an antecedent substantive or adjective, or of a phrase. In such case, their equivalent in English is so or it, either expressed or understood. 2. When le refers to a noun with the definite article or possessive adjective, it takes the gender and number of that noun. Ex. : Etes-vous la mere de ces enfants. Oui, je la suis. Are you the mother of these children ? Yes, I am. Mesdemoisdles, etes-vous les nieces de Madame B. ? Oui, Madame, nous les sofiimes PERSONAL PHONOUN3. 261 Ladies, are you Mrs. B.'s niecos ? Yes, madarae, we are. Sont-ce la vos domestiques ? Oui, ce les sont. Are those your servants ? Yes, they are. . Sont-ce la vos gants neufs ? Non, ce ne les sont pas. Are those your new gloves ? No, they are not. 3. But when le supplies the place of an adjective, of a noun used adjectively, or of a phrase, it remains unchanged. Ex. : Depuis quand etes-vous malade ? Je le suis depuis huit jours. How long have you been ill 1 I have been (so) these eight days. Ces dames sont-elles rnariees ? Out, dies le sont Are these ladies married 1 Yes, they are (it or so). Etes-vous chr^tiens ? Out, nous le sommes. Are you Christians ? Yes, we are. // le fern, s'il le peut, he will do it, if he can. NOTE. Le, la, les must be used ( 2) when the adjective is used substan- tively, as : Mademoiselle, etes-vous la malade ? Out, je la suis. Miss, are you the sick one ? Yes, I am (she). 4. Le should also be inserted in sentences containing a compara- tive, after que ne, as : Jl est maintenant plus actif qu'il ne V&ait auparavant. He is now more active than he was before. Elle est moins riche qu'on ne le pense. She is not so rich as one would think. THEME 22. 1. Is that your book ? 2. Yes, it is. 3. Are those your books? 4. Yes, they are. 5. Are you the mistress of the house ? 6. No, I am not. 7. Are these boys the pupils of Mr. M. ? 8. Yes, they are. 9. Are you my friend's sisters? 10. Yes, we are. 11. You want some men of good will? 1 12. We are all so. 13. Are these your horses? 14. Yes, they are. 15. Are the brothers rich? 16. No, they are not. 17. Are the house and garden large? 18. Yes, they are. 19. Is not this pretty girl your gardener ? s daughter ? 20. Yes, madam, she is. 21. We need 2 only think ourselves happy, and we shall be so. 22. Young ladies, are you English? 23. Yes, we are. 24. Are you physicians ? 25. Yes, 262 IX. NEUVIEME LEgON. sir, we are. 26. Are you the physicians? 27. Yes, sir, wo are. 28. Is he sad? 3 29. No, he is not. 30. Is she rich? 31. Yes, she is. 32. Are those gentlemen brothers? 33. Yes, they are, 34. Are you still ray friend? 35. Yes, I am. 36. Are you the sister of Mrs. A. ? 37. Yes, I am. 38. Are you the ladies whom my mother expects ? 39. Yes, we are. 40. Because she is pretty, she must not imagine 4 that she will always be so. 41. We were embarrassed, 5 and are so yet (encore). 42. Children ought to (doivent) apply 8 themselves to their studies as much as they can. 1. De bonne volonte. 2. Nous rtavons qu'a nous croire. 3. Triste. 4. II nefaut pas qu'elle sHmagine. 5. Embarrasses. C. S'appliquer. READING LESSON. L'ELEPIIANT. ( Continuation.) L'elephant vit (lives) au dela de cent cinquante ans, quand il est libre. Ces animaux marchent ordinairement de compagnie ; le plus age conduit la troupe ; le second d'age marche le dernier ; les jeunes et les femelles sont au milieu des autres ; les meres portent leurs petits et les tiennent embrasses de leurs trompes. L'elephant dompte 1 est le plus doux et le plus patient de tous les animaux. II s'attache a celui qui le soigne ; 2 il le caresse, efc semble deviner 3 tout ce qui peut lui plaire. En peu de temps il comprend les signes et meme la parole. II re9oit les ordrcs de son maitre avec attention et les execute avec prudence. Un Elephant domestique rend autant de service que six bons chevaux. Us ne cassent rien de ce qu'on leur confie. Us posent doucement los paquets qu'ils portent, et les rangent dans 1'endroit 4 qu'on leur montre. Us essaient avec leurs trompes flexibles, s'ils sont bion si- tues, et quand un tonneau 5 commence a rouler, ils vont d'eux-memes chercher des pierres pour Tetablir solidement. 1. To tome. 2. To take care. 3. To guess. 4. Place. 5. Cask. INTERROGATIVE PRONOUNS. 263 CONVERSATION. Quel age I'&ephant atteint-il ? Se laisse-t-il dompter? L'dlephant est>il intelligent ? Se rend-il utile aux homines ? Les elephants sont~ils maladroits (awkward) ? Quo font-ils quand un tonneau commence a, rouler ? Ilvit au dela de 150 ans. Oui; et quand il est dompte', il est le plus doux de tous les animaux. Tres-intelligent ; il comprend les signes et memo la parole. Tin seul elephant rend autant de service quo six bons che- vaux. Non, pas du tout ; ils ne cas- sent rien de ce qu'on lour confie. Us vont chercher des pierres pour Fetablir solidement. X. DIXIBME LEgON. INTERROGATIVE PKONOUNS. See Part I., Lesson xxv. In regard to the interrogative pronouns lequel ? qui ? que ? and quoi ? the bllowing observations are to be made : 1. Lequel ', which? always refers to some noun either preceding or immediately following, and agrees with it in gender and number. Ex.: Void deux routes, laquelle prendrez-vous ? Here are two routes ; which will you take ? Lesquds de vos souliers sont dechirts ? Which of your shoes are worn out 1 264 X. DIXIEME NOTE. The interrogative adjective what joined to a noun is always ex- pressed by quel, f. quelle. Ex. : What book do you read ? qud Hvre lisez-vous ? What are your reasons ? quelles sont vos raisons ? 2. The interrogative pronouns who ? whose ? to whom ? whom ? are expressed by qui ? de qui ? (not dont ? ) a qui ? and for the objective qui? (que as an interrogative means what, never whom). Ex.: Who comes ? qui vient ? Of whom do you speak ? de grt parlez-vous ? Whom do you seek ? gw" cherchez-vous ? 3. Instead of the simple qui? the form gm esl-ci qui, who? is often used for the Nom., and qui est-ce que, whom? for the Dir. Obj. Ex. : Qui est-ce qui vient la, who comes there ? Qui est-ce que vous clierchez, whom are you looking for ? 4. The same is the case with que ? for which qu* est-ce qui ? is often used in the Nona., and qu' est-ce que ? in the Dir. Obj. The latter has a still stronger form, qu 'est-ce que c'est que . . ? This compound form is generally used in the expression what is that ? and also when a simple noun follows, e. g. : Qu' est-ce que cela ? ") . Qu'est-ce que c'est que cela ? ) Qu' est-ce que la vie ? ) , . > what is life ? Qu est-ce que c est que la vie ? ) 5. The pupil must be careful, however, not to confound qui est- ce qui, who ? with qu' est-ce qui, what ? The latter is used for the wanting Nominative of the conjunctive pronoun que. We gay : 7 qui est-ce qui vous a offense'? Who has offended you ! > . ) qui vous a offense^? Whereas : What (Nom. ) makes you so sad ? Qu'est-ce qui vous rend si triste ? ^rr, A 7 qu' est-ce que vous faites la ? What are you doing there ! > * - .. ) que faites vous la ? What is the news 1 j ^ *^ *" ? 3 qu est-ce qu it y a de nouveau ? INTERROGATIVE PRONOUNS. \ \ 6. Qtw, what? as the conjunctive form, can only be used before the verb or in close connection with it; but the disjunctive form quoi, what? stands either alone or after a preposition, or is even used as an interjection. Ex. : Vous cherchez quelque chose ; quoi done ? You are looking for something ; what is it ? A quci pense-t-il, of what does he think ? De quoi parle-t-on, of what do people talk ? Quoi ! vous etes marie'! what ! you are married ! NOTE. Quoi is also used instead of qu'y a-t-il , as : Quoi de plus magnifique qu'une belle nuit d'ete! (instead of qu'y- a-t-il de plus magnifique !) What is there more splendid than a beautiful summer's night ? 7. In antithetical questions with or (as you or /?), the French usage departs very widely from the English, inasmuch as the con- trasted persons or objects, instead of standing in the Nominative as in English, usually follow de. Ex. : Qui de vous ou de moi remportera le prix ? Who will take the prize, you or I ? Qui a &le plus applique de toi ou d'Emile ? or Qui de toi ou d'Emile a &le plus applique*? Who has been the most diligent, you or Ernile ? 8. De may be omitted, however, when two or more ou's occur, and also when de or des with lequel precedes. Ex. : LaqueHedexdeux nations &ait la plus vertueuse, les Grecs ou les Romains ? Which of the two nations was the more virtuous, the Greeks or the Romans ? THEME 23. 1. Which of your brothers is married ? 2. Which of your sisters has (est) gone to England ? 3. Of all these pictures, which should you like best ? l 4. Which of your daughters learns Italian ? 2 5. Here are two pencils ; which will you take ? 6. What countries did Alexander the Great conquer ? 8 7. What are your terms ? 4 8. Who goes there ? 9. To whom do you speak ? 10. For whom does a miser 5 hoard riches? 7 11. Who will be bold 8 enough to attack him ? 12. Who are these women ? 13. Whose 9 gloves are these ? 266 X. DIXIEME LECON. 14. Here are two grammars ; to which do you give tlio preference K 15. Who sustains 10 this globe in the air? 16. What is more pleas- ant than to do good? 11 17. What is human life? 18. What should prevent 12 your father from buying (cl* acheter) this house? 19. A little more fame, 13 a little more wealth, what does all this signify? 14 20. What are you speaking of? 21. Of what do you accuse me? 22. On (sur) what will you interrogate 15 him ? 23. What ! Charles has been arrested ! 16 24. Which of you has been sick, Emily or Emma ? 25. Which was the greatest man, Alexan- der, Caesar, or Napoleon the First ? 1. Lemieux. 2. Put the article. 3. Tut has conquered, a conquis. 4. Condition, f. 5. L'avare, m. 6. Amasser. 7. JKichesse. 8. Hardi. 9. See p 2G4, $ 2, 2, & qui. 10. Soutenir. 11. Du Men. 12. Empeclier. 13. Gloire. 14. Signifier. 15. Inter- roger. 10. Arrtte, BEADING LESSON.* SERVILIUS SE DEFEND DEYANT LE PEUPLE. " Si Ton m'a fait venir ici pour me demander compte 1 de ce qui s'est passe dans la derniere bataillo ou je commandais, je suis pret & vous en instruire ; mais si ce n'est qu'un pretexte pour me faire perir, comme je le soupgonne, 2 epargnez-moi 3 des parole-s inutiles : voila mon corps et ma vie que je vous abandonne, vous pouvez en disposer. "Quel est done mon crime? Quelle faute ai-je commise jus- qu'ici? On m'accuse d'avoir perdu beaucoup de monde dans le der- nier combat. Mais *quel est le general qui puisse livrer des ba- tailles contre une nation aguerrie, 4 qui se defend courageusement, sans qu'il y ait de part et d'autre 5 du sang de repandu ? Quelle di- vinite s'est engagee envers le peuple remain, a lui faire remporter des victoires sans aucune pcrte ? 6 A qui fera-t-on croire que la gloire s'acquiert 7 autrement que par de grands perils ? J'en suis *The Conversation on tliis Heading Lesson will be found at the end of the fol- lowing lesson. RELATIVE PRONOUNS. 267 venu aux mains avec des troupes plus noinbreuses quo celles que vous m'aviez confiees ; j'ai mis en deroute leurs legions, qui, a la fin, ont pris la fuite. Que me restait-il a faire ? Qui d'entre voug cut pu se refuser a la victoire qui marcliait devant moi ? Etait-il meme 8 en mon pouvoir de retenir vos soldats, que leur courage ern- portait, et qui poursuivaient avec ardeur un ennemi efiraye ? Que dis-je? Si j'avais fait sonner 9 la retraite, si j'avais ramene nos soldats dans leur camp, de quoi ne m'accuserait-on pas aujourd'hui ? Lequel de vos tribuns aurait approuvre ma conduite ? Ne m'accu- Bcraient-ils pas d'inteUigence avec les ennemis ? " 1. Account. 2. Suspect. 3. Spare. 4. "Warlike. 5. On both sides. 6. LOBS. 7^ Can be gained, 8. Even. 9. To sound. XI. ONZIEME LEgON. RELATIVE PRONOUNS. ( See Part I., L. XXIV.) 1. The relative pronouns who, which and that are rendered by q ui, when they are in v the Nominative case, whether they refer to persons or things, as : The man who works, Vliomme qui travaille. The pen which is on the table. La plume qui est sur la table. 2. The same pronouns when in the Direct Objective, whom, which, that, are expressed by que, as : The man whom you know, I'homme que vous connaissez. The book which I have lost, le livre que j'ai perdu. NOTE. Sometimes, however, lequel must be employed instead of qui or que, when by the use of the latter an ambiguity might arise. In such a case as this for instance : Le frere de Madame Lebeau qui lidbite Paris, where two persons being mentioned, it would be doubtful whether we mean 268 XI. ONZ1EME LEgON. to say that the brother or the lady lives in Paris. In the first case, we must say : Le frere de Mad. Lebcau lequel halite Paris, or if the lady is meant : Le frere de Mad. Leleau laquelle or qui halite Paris. For the latter of the two persons qui can generally be used. 3. When the relative pronouns whom or which follow a preposi- tion, they are usually expressed by qui in speaking of persons,"* and by lequel or laquelle (pi. lesquels, lesquelles) in speaking of animals and things, as : The little boy to whom I give the book, is diligent. Le petit garcon a qui je donne le livre, est applique'. The Englishman with whom I travelled. L' Anglais avec qui fai voyage". The glory to which heroes sacrifice, etc. La gloire a laquelle les htfros sacrifient, etc. The cane with which he struck me, etc. La canne avec laquelle il m'afrappe', etc. 4. The relative pronouns whose, of whom or of which are com- monly expressed in French by dont, both for persons and for ob- jects, as : The Frenchman whose brother arrived yesterday. Le Francais dont le frere est arnve'hier (see L. III., 12). I have seen the garden of which you speak. Tai vu le jardin dont vous paiiez. 5. But lequel must be employed when the noun which follows whose is governed by a preposition. We can consequently say : The man whose merits are known. L'homjne dont les me'rites (Nom.) sont connus. The author whose works you have read. * After entre, between, andparmi, among, we must always write lesquels or les- qzcelles whether persons or things be spoken of. RELATIVE PRONOUNS. 2G9 L'auteurdont vous avez lu les ouvrages (Dir. Obj.).* Bat we must say: The man of whose modesty people talk so much. L'homme de la modestie duquel on parle tant. The friend to whose honesty I have trusted, has deceived me. L'ami a la probite* duquel je me suis fie, m'a tromp. 0. The relative pronouns whom, which, and that, are often left out in English, but in French qui and que are never omitted. Example : The boy I saw with you yesterday. Le gar son que fai vu hier avec vous. I shall send you the books you have chosen. Je vous enverrai les livres que vous avez choisis. THEME 24. 1. The man who has done this is generally 1 esteemed. 2. The flocks 2 which graze 3 in those meadows 4 are mine (a moi). 3. The watch which I had is broken. 4. The books which you read are good, but difficult 5 to be understood. 5. The sister of my friend who. ar- rived here last week, is very ill. 6. The physician's daughter of whom I spoke to you the other day, has married Mr. B. 7. A Lird whose wings have been clipped, 6 cannot fly any more. 8. Bees 7 among which we find such admirable order, 8 are very useful insects. 9. The professor 9 to whom I write, is very learned. 10. The man you respect is my friend. 11. Idleness is a vice to which young people are much inclined. 12. The country we inhabit 10 is beauti- ful arid fruitful. 13. The reasons upon which I rely, 11 are unan- swerable. 12 14. Mr. B. is a man to whose discretion I dare 13 not trust. 15. Ho who gets 14 riches, knows not for whom he gets them. 16. The daughter of Minos gave a thread 15 to Theseus, 16 by means (au may en) of which he went out 17 of the labyrinth (le labyrinthe). * Observe here the position of the noun. If the word depending upon dont is a Direct Objective, it must stand after the active verb. XI. ONZIEMB I. , CMnfrdtement. 2. Troupeau, m. 3. Paitre, (see p. 178, No. 25). 4. Pr , 5. Z>f0cfei a comprendre. 6. Jto^nAr. 7. ies abeiUes. 8. Ordre, m. 9 Pr fesseur. 10. Habiter. 11. Jemefonde. 12. Sans repllque. 13. Je n'ose me tier. U.Amasser. 15. Un fil. 1G. Thesee. 17. Sortir. 7. Quoi, what,, is also used as a relative, but only in connection with a preposition. It is generally used absolutely; and when the noun to which it refers has been expressed the use of lequel, laquelle, &e., is preferable. Savez-vous a qnoi il s'occupe a present f Do you know what he busies himself with now ? Apres quol, after which. Sans quoi, otherwise. C'est pourquoij on that account, therefore. 8. The adverbs of place ou, d'ou and par ou, are also often employed instead of the relative pronouns dans lequel, duquel, par lequel, etc., when things are spoken of, as : U 'embarras ou ffor dans lequel) se trouve mon pere. The embarrassment in which my father finds himself. Le village par ou ffor par lequel) nous venons de passer. The village through which we have just passed. 9. The correlative pronouns he ivho, fern, she who, pi. they who or those who, are rendered by celui qui, fern, celle qui, pi. masc. ceux qui, pi. fern, celles qui. Ex. : He who is contented, is happy. Celui qui est content est heureux. They (or those) who are discontented, are unhappy. Ceux qui sont me'contents, sont malheureux. NOTE 1. Both or either may vary according to the verb they depend on, (celui qui, celui que, etc. ) as : I shall give it to him whom I love most. Je le donnerai a celui que faime le mieux. NOTE 2. In French both pronouns must be joined, and no inversion can take place as in English. Ex.: He is a bad citizen who rebels against his country. Celui qui se rgvolte contre sa patrie est un mauvais citoyen. 10. The English what, when not an interrogative pronoun, but a RELATIVE PRONOUNS. 271 compound relative in the sense of that which, is translated by ce qui for the Nominative, ce que for the Direct Objective, and by ce dont, when the verb takes the preposition de, as : What is fine, is not always good. Ce qui est beau n'est pas toujours bon. I shall do what I have promised. Je ferai ce que fai promts. I have sent him what he needed. Je lui ai envoye" ce dont il avail besoin. 11. When ce qui, ce que or ce dont begins the sentence, c'est must be placed before the second clause, except (as in the first sen- tence above) when an adjective or a participle follows, as : Ce que vous pouvez faire de mieux, c'est de partir tout de suite. The best thing for you to do, is to leave immediately. Ce qui me chagrine, c'est la perte de mon domestique. What grieves me, is the loss of my servant. 12. Proverbial and general expressions usually commence with qui, whoever, instead of celui qui. Ex.: Qui court deux lievres, n'en prend aucun. He who chases two hares catches none. Qui casse les verves, les paie. Who (ever) breaks the glasses must pay for them. Sauve qui peut ! let him save himself who can ! THEME 25. 1. This is the object 1 at which he aims. 2 2. The study to which I am devoted, 3 gives me great pleasure. 3. Nature, whose beauty we daily 4 admire, is an inexhaustible 5 source of enjoyment 6 for us. 4. Your pupil's mother, with whom I was speaking yesterday, left 7 this morning. 5. What sort of a book is that in which you are reading? 6. It is a Roman History. 7. There is nothing upon (a) which I think more frequently 8 than the sad fate 9 of my poor friend. 8. What is true is also good. 9. Virtue and freedom are the conditions without which we cannot be happy. 10. Is the house in which you live on the highway? 10 11. No, it is tolerably 272 XI. ONZIEME LEgON. far u from it (en). 12. That is the thing about which I would speak with you. 13. The thing the miser thinks least about (a) is to aid 12 the poor. 14. That is the thing with which he struck me. 15. It is an illness to the progress 13 of which ( 5) one cannot ap- ply 14 too prompt remedies. 15 16. He who cannot keep a secret, is incapable of governing. 18 17. That which most deserves our respect is virtue. 18. What I most wish, is to see you happy. 19. What I like most, is to be alone. 1. Le but. 2. Tendre. 3. Dtvou4. 4. Journellement. 5. Intpuisdble. 6. Le plaisir. 7. Esl partie. 8. Souvent. 9. Le sort. 10. La route. 11. Assez tloignt. 12. Assister. 13. Progrcs, m. 14. Apporter. 15. De trap prompts remedes. 10. De gouverner. READING LESSON. SUITE DE * * SEKVILIUS . ' ' " Si vos emiemis so sont rallies, s'ils ont ete soutenus par un corps de troupes qui s'avan$ait h leur secours ; enfin, s'il a fallu recom- mencer tout de nouveau le combat, et si, dans cette derniere action, j'ai perdu quelques soldats, n'est-ce pas le sort 1 ordinaire de la guerre ? Trouverez-vous des generaux qui veuillent se charger du commandement de vos armees, h condition de ramener h Eome tons les soldats qui en seraient sortis sous leur conduite ? N'examinez done point si, h la fin d'une bataille, j'ai perdu quelques soldats, mais jugez" de ma conduite par ma victoire. "S'il est vrai que j'ai chasse 2 les ennemis de votre territoire, que je leur ai tu^ beaucoup de monde dans deux combats, que j'ai force les debris 3 de leurs arme'es de s'enfermer dans leurs places, 4 que j'ai enrichi Rome et vos soldats du butin 5 qu'ils ont fait dans le pays enncmi : que (Jet) vos tribuns s'elevent, et qu'ils me reprochent en quoi j'ai manque 6 centre les devoirs 7 d'un bon general. " Mais ce n'est pas ce que je crams: ces accusations ne servent que de pretexte pour pouvoir exercer impunement leur haine 8 et leur animosite centre le senat et contre 1'ordre des patriciens. Faut-il que vous ne demandiez jamais rien au senat qui ne soit pre*judiciable RELATIVE PRONOUNS. 273 au bien connnun do la patrie, ct que vous ne lo deiuandiez que par des seditions ? Si un secateur ose 9 vous reprdsenter Finjastice de vos preventions, si un consul no parle pas le language se*ditieux de vos tribuns ; s'il defend avec courage la souveraine puissance dont il est revetu, on crie au tyran. 10 A peine est-il sorti de charge, qu'il Be trouve aecable d'accusations. C'est ainsi que, par votre injuste plebiscite, vous avez ote la vie a Me*nenius, aussi grand capital :io que bon citoyen. Ne devriez-vous pas mourir de honte d'avoir per- secute si cruellement le fils de ce Menenius Agrippa, a qui vous devez vos tribuns et ce pouvoir qui vous rend a present si furieux? " On m'en voudra peut-etre de la liberte avec laquelle je vous parlc dans Fetat ou je me trouve a present ; mais je ne crains point la mort : condamnez-moi, si vous Fosez ; la vie ne pent etre qu'a charge a un general qui est reduit a se justifier de ses victoires. Apres tout, un sort pareil a celui de Menenius ne peut me disho- norer." 1. The fate. 2. Driven out. 3. Remains. 4. Fortresses. 5. Booty. 6. To fail. 7. Duties. 8. Hatred. 9. Dare. 10. Behold the tyrant. CONVERSATION. Qui etait Servilius ? Un fameux general romain. Pourquoi Fa-t-on fait venir a Pour se justifier devant le peu- Rome ? pie. De quoijjavait-on accuse* ? On Favait accuse d'avoir perdu trop de soldats dans un com- bat. Est-il possible de livrer (une) Non, ce n'est pas possible. II bataillc, sans qu'il y ait du doit y avoir de part et d'au- sang de repandu ? tre du sang de repandu. Teuton remporter une victoire H est impossible de defaire un sans aucune perto ? ennemi nombreux et aguerri sans perdre du monde. Comment se justifia Servilius du II rappela aux Bomains qu'il reproche qu'on lui faisait ? avait remporte une victoire decisive, et mis en dei-oute 18 les legions des ennemis. 214: XII. DOUZIEME LEgON. Etait-il en son pouvoir de retenir ses soldats ? Avait-il manque centre les devoirs d'un bon general ? Si Servilius avait fait senner la retraite, de quoi l'aurait-on ac- cuse? Quels services avait-il rendus k (to) Rome ? Quand un senateur etait sorti de charge, que faisaient les tribuns du peuple ? Quel exemple d'injustice leur reprocha-t-il ? Servilius s'attendait-il h un sort semblable k celui deMen&iius? Non, leur courage les euiportait, et ils poursuivaient avec ar- deur Tennemi efiraye'. Non, on ne lui put rien ro- procher. Les tribuns du peuple Fauraient accuse d'intelligence avec les ennemis. II avait chassd les ennemis du territoire remain et enrichi Rome du butin qu'il rappor- tait du pays ennemi. Es Taccablaient d'accusations. Celui dc Menenius. Oui, mais il dit qu'un sort pa- reil k celui de Menenius ne pourrait le deshonorer. XII. DOUZIEME LEON. INDEFINITE PRONOUNS. In regard to the indefinite pronouns treated of in Lesson XXIX., Part I., the following peculiarities are to be observed : 1. The word on derived from homme, man (Latin homo), serves to render all vague and general reports expressed in English by they say, people say, it is said, ive say, etc. The verb which follows is always in the third person singular, as : INDEFINITE PRONOUNS. 275 People say, it is said, on dit. One cannot have everything, on ne pent pas avoir tout. NOTE 1. When in English the passive voice is used in this sense, the verb must be changed in French into the active voice with on, as : It is said, on dit. It is believed, on croit. I was told, on m'a dit. I am deceived, on me trompe. Letters have been received, on a recu des lettres. NOTE 2. [For the cases where Von is used instead of on, see Lesson XXIX., 2. 2. Chacun, e, each, has for the English his, her, or its, which follows it, son, sa, ses, and leur, leurs, for their, as : Put these books each in its place. Remettez ces litres chacun a sa place. The judges have given sentence each according to his conscience. Les juges ont opines chacun selon sa conscience. The bees build each their cells. Lcs dbdlles bdtissent chacune leur cellule. When chacun means every one, everybody (including all), it is always mas- culine. Example : Chacun a son tour. But when used relatively, i. e., in reference to a part of mankind, it may be feminine. Example : Chacune de nous (femmes) se pre'tendait superieure aux autres. 3. Aucun, personne, and ricn do not require ne before the verb, in a sentence interrogative or of doubt : aucun then stands for any, personne for anybody, and rien for anything. Ex.*: Je ne crois pas qu'il y ait aucun ho?nme sans dtffaut. I do not think there is any man without a fault. Jc doiite qu'il y ait rien de plus beau. I doubt whether there is anything more beautiful. NOTE. Aucun and nul are not used in the plural, except before nouns which have no singular, or which are used in a different sense in the plural. 4. When, however, these three pronouns serve to answer a ques- tion without repeating the verb used by the inquirer, they retain their negative meaning, as : Qu'avez vous ? Rien. Rien da tout. What is the matter with you ? Nothing. Nothing at all. 5. None, not one, are rendered by aucun ne and pas un ne. Examples : 276 XII. DOUZIEME None of you were there, aucun de vous u'y fiait. I have four sisters ; none (not one) of them is married. J'ai quatre sceurs, aucune or pas une n'est marine. 6. Somebody, some one, anybody, and any one, are expressed by quclqu'un singular and masculine. Ex. : Somebody told me so, quelqu'un me Va dit. Do you know any one here ? Connaissez-vous quelqu'un id ? 7. Laplupart, most, is properly a collective noun, and like most other collective nouns takes the plural after it. This requires the verb and attribute which follow to be put in the plural. Ex. : La plupart de ces pommes ne sont pas encore mures. Most of these apples are not yet ripe. 8. Another is usually expressed by un autre, and others (Nom. and Direct Obj.) by d' autres or les autres. Ex. : Another would not have acted so. Un autre ?i'auraii pas agi ainsi. Charity is contented that others be preferred. La charite* est contente que les autres soient prcfers. Buy some others, achetez-en d'autres. 9. Autrui, others, only applies to persons ; it is, however, also taken as a singular in the sense of another. It is employed only after a preposition. Consequently, when in English the indefinite pronoun others occurs in the Nom. or Dir. Obj., it must not be translated by autrui, but by d'autres or les autres ( 8). Ex. : Charity rejoices in the happiness of others. La charite se rejouit du bonheur d' autrui. Attendez d' autrui ce que vous faites a autrui. Expect from others the same treatment which you give them. 10. When, however, the verb in the latter clause governs the Dir. Obj.", en is used instead of son or ses. Ex.: Souvent nous bldmons les defauts d' autrui sans en reconnaitre les bonnes qua- lite's (without acknowledging their good qualities). 11. Tel has two significations : such, and many a (man) . In the INDEFINITE PRONOUNS. 277 former, it is an adjective and agrees "with its noun, in the latter it is often a pronoun, i. e. is used without a substantive. Ex.: Telle &ait la difficult^ da terrain que, etc. Such was the difficulty of the ground, etc. Tel park de choses qu'il n'entend pas. Many a man speaks of things which he does not understand. 12. Such a must be rendered by un tel, une telle. Ex.: Un id homme, such a man. Une telle femme, such a woman. Un tel has also the meaning of so and so, as : Chez Monsieur un tel; Madame une telle. 13. Tel que has the meaning such as or just as, and agrees in gender and number with the noun to which it refers. Ex.: Telles que vous Ics voyez, such as you see them (fern.). 14. Notice also the expression : II rfy a run de tel que ... or il n'est rien tel que . . ., there is nothing like. Ex.: // n'y a rien de tel que d' avoir une bonne conscience. There is nothing like having a good conscience. THEME 26. 1. They speak of peace. 2. People are not always fortunate. 3. French is spoken here. 4. The invention of gunpowder is at- tributed 1 ' to to Berthold Schwarz of Friburg. 2 5. It is said that' the queen is in London. 6. Everybody has his faults. 7. "What is the price of each of these medals? 3 8. My children have each a good place. 9. Every one has his [own] manner of thinking 4 and acting. 10. I do not know any of his friends. 11. Would any- body dare 5 deny 6 it? 12. None of the judges were against you. 13. Of all the nations of the earth, there is none (not one) but has (qui rfait) an idea 7 of God. 14. I expect somebody. 15. Those apples are fine, I will take some. 16. When we are in (en) town, we have almost every day somebody to dine 8 with us. 17. I have lost my stick, I must buy another. 18. Most of ray books are 278 XIII. TREIZIEME LE^ON. new. 19. Do not speak ill (jnaT) of others. 20. Do not unto (a) others what thou wouldst not they should 9 do unto thee. 21. Many a man sows 10 who does not reap. 11 22. There is nothing like being (que d'etre) an honest man. 23. You must take them such as thoy are. 3. Attribuer. 2. Fribourg. 3. MddaiUc, f. 4. De penscr et cTagir. 5. Oscr. 6. Xier. 7. Idee,f. 8. A diner. 9. Qtfils le fissent d toimeme. 10. Scmer. 11. Ricolter. XIII. TREIZIEME INDEFINITE PRONOUNS, CONTINUED. 1. L\m et I'autre, fern, rune et Fautre (plur. les uns et Jes au- tres, fern, les uncs et les autres), loth. These pronouns agree in gender and number with the noun to which they refer ; if they aro preceded by a preposition in English, that preposition must be re- peated in French before each part. Ex.: Both are gone, run ct l'ai(tre sont partis. I will do it for them both. Je le feral pour I'un et pour I'autre. NOTE 1. "When in English the word both is followed by a noun, it is ren- dered in Ercnch by les deux. Ex.: I use both hands, je me sers des deux mains. NOTE 2. Doth followed by and is a conjunction and is commonly omit- ted in Erench, as : She is both handsome and rich, die est belle et riche. 2. ISun ou Fautre, fern. Fune ou Fautre, either, also requires the repetition of the preposition, as : I will do it for either. Jc le ferai pour I'un ou pour I'autre. INDEFINITE PKONOUNS. 279 3. Ni Tun ni Vautre, fern, ni Tune ni Vautre, neither, requires ne before the verb, as : Neither has obtained the prize. Ni I'un ni Vautre n'a gagn le prix. I will do it for neither of them (fern.). Je ne le ferai ni pour Vune ni pour Vautre. 4. ISun Vautre, fern. Vune Vautre (plur. les uns les centres, fern. les unes les autres) , one another, each other. The first of the two pronouns is always the subject and consequently stands in the Nom- inative in French. Active verbs then require se, nous or vous to be prefixed, although no reflective pronoun appears in English. When they are preceded by a preposition in English, that preposi- tion must come between them in French. Ex.: These two girls love each other tenderly. Ces deux jeunes filles s'aiment (I'une Vautre) tendrement. Charles and Henry speak ill of each other. Charles et Henri parlent mat I'un de I'autre (not de I'un I'autre.) 5. The word the same is expressed by le meme or la meme for the singular and by les memcs for the plural of both genders, wheth- er it be connected with a noun or not, as : Is that the same pencil which I have lent you. Est-ce le meme crayon que ceh(i que je vous ai prete"} Yes, it is the same, oui, c'est le meme. G. The same, meaning the same thing, is expressed by la meme chose. Ex. : lie did the same, il a fait la meme chose. 7. When meme signifies even, it is an adverb and invariable. It may bo placed before or after the nouns. Ex.: Vos freres, vos amis, vos ennemis meme. Your brothers, your friends, your enemies even. 8. Everything, all, are expressed by tout without any article, placed, in compound tenses, between the auxiliary and the partici- ple, as : 280 XIII. TEEIZIEME LEON. I have lost everything, fai tout perdu. Everything falls, tout tombe. All have perished there, tons y ont peri. I have seen them all, je les ai toutes vues. 9. Le tout stands for a substantive singular and masculine, and answers to the English the whole, as : Le tout est plus grand que la partie. The whole is greater than a part. Je prendrai le tout, I will take the whole. 10. The English words all that, everything that and whatever, are rendered in French by tout ce qui (Norn.), or tout ce que (Dir. Obj.), always singular and masculine. Ex.: I like all that is fine, faime tout ce qui est beau. All that he says is true, tout ce qu'il dit est vrai. 11. In the sense of quite, entirely, before an adjective or a par- ticiple masculine of both numbers, and before an adjective feminine beginning with a vowel or h mute, tout remains uninflected ; but it is declinable before an adjective or a participle feminine which be- gins with a consonant, and agrees with it in gender and number. Examples : Nous fumes tout surpris, we were quite surprised. Ma sceur tait tout fionne'e. My sister was quite astonished. Elle fut toute surprise, she was quite surprised. 12. When tout in connection with que stands for ... as, although, however, it is used as a conjunction with the Indicative mood; and in this use the above-mentioned rule (11) also holds good (see also 13). Ex.: Tout riches que vous etes, rich as you are. Toutes savantes que sont ces dames. Learned as these ladies are (however learned these ladies arc, etc.). THE3IE 27. 1. Both arc (ont) right. 2. Both serve the same purpose. 1 3. Do you speak of my brother or of my sister ? 4. I speak of both. INDEFINITE PRONOUNS. 281 5. Both his uncle and aunt are dead. 6. Either of you can dome a great favor. 7. Yesterday I expected my two best friends, but neither of them came. 8. Both suspect 2 him, but neither will say why. 9. Fire and water destroy 3 each other. 10. Love 4 one an- other, said our Lord. 5 11. They speak ill of one another. 12. It is rare to hear two authors 6 speak well of each other. 13. This poem is the same that 7 1 was mentioning 8 to you. 14. How much do you ask for the whole ? 15.1 will not sell the whole ; I must keep 9 a part for myself. 16. All is mutable 10 in this world. 17. Every- thing displeases 11 you. 18. He has taken everything for himself. 19. All is not gold that glitters 12 (transl: All that (L. XL, 10) glitters is not gold). 20. Whatever is good in itself (en soi), is not always approved. 13 21. His mother was (/^O quite cast down 14 at that news; however, sorry 15 though she was, she received me kindly, and desired 16 me to dine with her. 22. This fashion 17 is quite new. 23. My friend, however learned he may be, is some- times mistaken. 18 1. Usage, m. 2. Soup<;onner. 3. Se detruisent. 4. Aimez-vous. 5. Seigneur. 6. Auteur. 7. Que celui dont. 8. Parle. 9. Garder. 10. Variable. 11. De- plcdre. 12. Brille. 13. Approuver. 14. Abattue. 15. Affligee. 16. Frier. 17. Mode, f. 18. Se tromper. 13. Quelque ~r que, however, though ever so, is used in the same s^ise as tout que, with this difference, that tout que sup- poses something more true or real, whereas quelque que implies something as possibly assumed, and on this account always governs the Subjunctive. Quelque, when before an adjective or participle, remains unchanged. The construction of the sentence .is as fol- lows : quelque begins the clause, the second place is taken by the adjective or participle, then follows que, then the pronoun, then the verb in the Subjunctive mood. Ex. : 1 2345 Quelque habiles que vous soyez. However skilful you may be. But when the subject is not a pronoun, but a substantive, then the verb takes the fourth place and the noun the fifth. Ex.: 282 xni. TREIZIEME LEQON. 1 2 34 5 Qudque louable que soit votre co?iduite, elle sera condamrufe. However praiseworthy your conduct maybe or though your conduct be ever so praiseworthy, it will be condemned. 14. Quelque, followed by a substantive and any other verb than to be, is an adjective, and therefore takes an s before a noun plural. It corresponds with the English whatever. The construction is : 1, qwlque(s); 2, the substantive; 3, que; 4, the pronoun; 5, the verb in the Subjunctive mood ; the rest as in English. Ex.: 1 2 3 4 5 Qitclqucs rickcsses qu'ils aient amassc f es, Us ne sont pas heureux. Whatever riches they may have collected, they are not happy. Quelques fautes qu'il ait commises, je lui pardonnerai. Whatever faults he has committed, I will forgive him. 15. Qael que, fern, quelle que, must be divided when it is im- mediately followed by the verb to be; it agrees in gender and number with the noun to which it relates ; it likewise requires the verb to be put in the Subjunctive mood. Ex.: Quelle que soit votre faute, on vous pardonnera. Whatever your fault may be, they will forgive you. Qaels que soient les talents de votre frere, il ne re'ussira pas. Whatever your brother's talents may be, he will not succeed. 16. The English whoever and whosoever are usually rendered by quiconque when they mean every one who or all those who. Examples : Qniconque n'observera pas cette loi, sera puni. Whoever does not observe this law, will be punished. Je parle a quiconque veut m'emendre. I speak to whomsoever will hear me. 17. The same two pronouns ivhoever and whosoever are ex- pressed in French by qui que ce soit (or fut) qui, when they mean whatever may be the person ivho. The verb is in the Subj. mood. Examples : Whoever has done that, he is a man of talent. Qui que ce soit qui ait fait cela, c'est un homme de talent. INDEFINITE PRONOUNS. 283 Whomsoever you meet with, do not say what you have seen. Qui que ce soit que (Dir. Obj.) vous rencontricz, ne dites pas ce que vous avez vu. 18. A shorter expression for qui que ce soit que (not qui) is qui que, which is often used, except before il and Us : Qui que vous soi/ez, vous etes le bienvenu. Whoever you may he, you are welcome. Qui que vous rencontriez, ne dites pas, etc. Whomsoever you meet with, do not say, etc. 19. Nobody whatever, is expressed by qui que ce soit and ne before the verb. Ex. : Let nobody whatever enter my room. Ne laissez entrer qui que ce soit dans ma chamlre. I trust nobody whatever. Je ne me jie a qui que ce soit. NOTE. But when nobody whatever begins the sentence, personne is used, as : Nobody whatever has spoken ill of you. Personne n'a parltf mal de vous. 20. When the English indefinite pronoun ivhatever does not mean all that which or everything which, but whatever may be the thing which, it is rendered into French by quelque chose qm, quoi que, or quoi que ce soit (or fut) qui or que. Ex.: Whatever may be said to you, do not believe it. Quelque chose qu'on vous dise, ne le croyez pas. Or : Quoiqu'on vous dise, ne le croyez pas. Or : Quoi que ce soit qu'on vous dise, ne le'croyez pas. Whatever you may order, I will do it. Quelque chose que vous commandiez, je le feral. Or : Quoi que ce soit que vous commandiez, je le ferai. 21. Nothing ivhatever, not anything whatever, is translated by quoi que ce soit or fut, and ne before the verb. Ex. : Without application, it is impossible to succeed in anything whatever. Sans application on ne peut re'ussir en quoi que ce soit. 284 XIV. QUATORZIEME LEgON. THEME 28. 1. The wise man does not fear men, however powerful they may be. 2. Men, however great or small they may be, are never suffi- ciently 1 sensible how necessary they are to each other. 3. What- ever wealth 2 you may have, you will never be happy, unless you 3 restrain your passions. 4. Do not lose [your] courage, whatever may happen to you. 5. Distrust 4 every one who ( 16) speaks ill of his friends. 6. The laws condemn 5 all criminals, 6 whoever ( 15) they may be. 7.1 tell it to every one who will hear. 8. I hope that you will not tell my secret to anybody whatever. 9. Regulus did not allow himself to be moved, 7 whatever the promises were that the Carthaginians 8 made him. 10. Unfortunate [man] ! whoever ( 18) you are, I will not betray 9 you. 11. Whatever (20) may happen to you in this world, never murmur 10 against Divine Providence ; for whatever we may suffer, we deserve 11 it. 12. Of whomsoever you speak, always speak the truth. 13. I have found nothing whatever. 14. I complain 12 of nothing whatever. 15. Young men ! 13 whatever the destiny 14 may be that awaits 15 you, in whatever region of the earth your days may be 16 spent, nature will continually offer to you her products 17 and her wonders ; 18 you will continually be surrounded 19 with the objects of your study. 1. Assez. 2. Eichesse, f. 3. A moins que vous ne reprimiez. 4. Mefiez-vous de. 5. Condamner. 6. Oriminel. 7. Ne se laissa pas ebranler. 8. Cartliaginois. 9. Trahir. 10. Murmurer. 11. Aferiter. 12. Se plaindre de. 13. Gens. 14. Le sort 15. Attendre. 16. Doivent s'ecouler. 17. Produits, m. 18. Mcrvcilles. 19. Eniou- res de. XIV. QUATORZIEME LE90N, ADVERBS. See Part I., Lessons XXI and XXXII. 1. As already observed, the manner or mode of the action 13 expressed by the adverbs of quality or manner, as : ADVERBS. 285 H agit sagement (not sage), he acts wisely. // e'crit mal (not mauvais), he writes badly. 2. There are certain adjectives, however, which are used instead of the adverb. This is the case in the following expressions : Alter vite, to walk fast. rester court, ) to . ^^ couter cher, to be expensive. demeurer court, ) vendre cher, to sell dear. payer comptant, to pay cash. senlir bon, to smell sweet. marcher droit, to walk straight. sentir mauvais, to smell badly. chanter jus e, to sing correctly. trouver bon, to approve. chanter faux, to sing false. trouver mauvais, to take ill. parler haut, to speak loud. voir clair, to see clearly. parler bas, to speak low. tenir ferine, to hold fast. faire expres, to do on purpose. 3. The adjectives in tliis case remain, of course, unchanged. Examples : Cette montre coute trop cher (not chere). This watch is too dear. Les enfants parlent trop haut (not hauts). The children speak too loud. La ckanteuse a chante* faux (not fausse). The songstress has sung false. NOTE 1. In speaking of the state of the health, however, the adverb bien or mal is employed. Ex. : Je suis bien, I am well. Elle se trouve mal, she finds herself ill. NOTE 2. Observe also "the expressions, Elle cst bien, she is pretty; and elle n'est pas mal, she is not bad-looking. 4. Some adverbs take after them an object with de or , in case the adjective from which they are derived also takes one. Ex : ' Conforme'ment a vos ordres. In conformity with your orders. Indtfpendamment de mcs instructions. Independently of my instructions Cette riviere coule parallelement a la Vistule. That river flows parallel with the Vistula. THEME 29. 1. Do not go so fast. 2. The night is approaching ; I no longer (plus) see clearly. 3. The rose smells sweet, but the pink 1 smells 286 XIV. QUATORZIEME better. 4. Do not speak low (in a whisper) in the presence of others. 5. How does the singer 2 sing? G. She sings false (incor- rectly). 7. Do not speak so low ; speak louder, so that you can 3 be understood. 8. You do not read well, and you write no (pas) better. 9. To-day I am not very well. 10. Do not cat so fast. 11. This merchant sells his goods 4 very dear. 12. It is dark ; I do not see clearly. 13. *[ have distributed 5 the money according to (in conformity with) your orders. 1, L 1 (eillet. 2. La chanteuse. 3. Qu'on puisse vous comprendre. 4. Marchaiir discs. 5. Distribuer. ADVERBS OF TIME, ETC. 1. Observe the distinction between the following adverbs : 1. Plutot means rather (of inclination) ; plus lot, sooner (of time). 2. Tout a coup means at once, suddenly, unexpectedly ; tout d'un coup means at once, i. e., at one time ; a la fois means altogether. 3. Immediately is translated by tout de suite, tout a rheure, and also by sans delai. De suite means successively, one after the other. 4. L'autre jour means the other day, lately, synonymous with dernierement. On the nest day is le lendemain. 5. A little while ago is iantot ; just is expressed by the verb venir (see Part I. Lesson XL VII.) . Ex.: He has just gone out, il vient de sortir. 2. Tres, fort, and lien, all mean very, right ; and whether one or the other is to be used before the adjective depends upon euphony alone. Very much, with verbs is generally translated by beaucoup, and sometimes also by lien ; but never by ires or tres beaucoup. 13icn, with a noun in the sense of much or a great many, must bo followed by de with the definite article (see Lesson IV., 1). 3. Wlien, in interrogative phrases, is rendered by quand. In' other cases, quand refers to a possible, probable fact ; lorsque to a positive, real fact. Quand is vague ; lorsque is precise, as its ety- mology shows, alorsque, i. c., a rheure gue. ADVERBS. 287 4. Plus and davantage both moan more. The latter always stands at the end of a sentence, and consequently can bo followed neither by a noun nor by a comparison with than. Than after plus and moms is usually que, but before a numeral it is translated by de 5. Adverbs follow the simple verb. Do not say, Ma sceur rare- mmt sort le matin ; but, ma sceur sort rarement le matin, my sis- ter seldom goes out in the morning. Je pense souvent a vous, I often think of you. In connection with the compound tenses of the verb, the adverb is gcncnil]y placed between the auxiliary and the Participle Past. Ex. : ]\ fa sceur a beaucoup voyag. My sister has travelled a great deal. 6. But adverbs of time can also be placed at the beginning of the sentence, when an emphasis it laid upon them. Ex. : * Bientot je le vis reparaitre, I saw him soon reappear. THEME 30. 1. We often put off 1 till the next day what we ought to do at once. 2. Fortune is so fickle 2 that she often suddenly deserts 3 those that she has favored 4 the most. 3. A single 5 drop of vinegar con- tains more than a hundred animalcule. 6 4. This man has a great many faults. 5. Children must obey immediately. 6. This man has been very much regretted. 7 7. One does not arrive at once at the highest pinnacle 8 of fame. 8. Mr. M. (has) won a thousand dol- lars at one time. 9. He undertakes too many things at once. 10. Did you believe this man? 11. At first (d'abord) I was not will- ing to believe him. 12. Good taste 9 is rather a gift 10 of nature, than an acquirement 11 of art. 13. How much money have you lent him ? 14. I have lent him more than eighty florins. 1. Jlenvoyer or diflfoer. 2. Inconstant. 3 Abandonner. 4. Favoriste. 5. Una seule goutte. 6. Animalcule, m. 7. Itegretter. 8. Degrt, m. 9. Gout, m. 10, JDon, m. 11. Acquisition, f. 288 XIV. QUATOEZIEME LEgON. READING LESSON. LB CONNETABLE DE BOUHBON ET BAYARD. (Dialogue.) Le ConnetaUe. N'est-ce pas le pauvre Bayard que je vois an pied de cet arbre, etendu sur 1'herbe, 1 et perce d'un grand coup ? Oui, c'est lui-meme. Helas ! je le plains. En voila deux qui p- rissent aujourd'hui par nos armes : Yandenesse et lui. Ccs deux Fran9ais etaient deux ornements de leur nation par leur courage. Je sens que mon cceur est encore touche* pour sa patrie. Mais avan- 9ons pour lui parler. Ah ! mon pauvre Bayard, c'est avec douleur que je te vois en cet etat. Bayard. C'est avec douleur que je vous vois aussi. Le Con. Je comprends bien que tu cs fache de te voir dans mes mains par le sort 2 de la guerre ; mais je ne veux point te trailer en prisonnier, je te veux garder comme un bon ami, et prendre soin de ta guerison, 3 comme si tu e*tais mon propre frere. Ainsi tu ne dois point etre fache de me voir. Bay. He ! croyez-vous que je ne sois point faclie d' avoir obli- gation au plus grand ennemi de la France ? Ce n'est point de ma captivite, ni de ma blessure, 4 que je suis en peine : 6 je meurs dans un moment, la mort ya me delivrer de vos mains. Le Con. Non, mon cher Bayard, j'espere que nos soins reussi- ront a te gu^rir. Bay. Cc n'est point 1 ce quo je clierclie, et je suis content de mourir. (To be continued.) 1. Grass. 2, Fate. 3. Recovery. 4. Wound. 5. Sorry. SYNTAX OF NEGATIONS. 289 XV. QUINZIEME SYNTAX OF NEGATIONS. (SceP.I.,L.XXXII.) 1. It is necessary in the first place to distinguish whether the ne- gation belongs to a verb or not ; if not, the negative particle stands without ne. Not, without a verb, before nouns, is translated by non or non pas. Ex.: His cruelty and not his pride. Sa cruaute'et non for non pas) son orgueil. Not in connection with other words is simply pas: Not much, pas beaucoup. Not I, pas moi. Not so much, pas tant. Why not, pourquoi pas. Not at all, pas du tout or point da tout. N. B. Observe the following expressions : Not (nor) cither, non plus. Nor his brother either, ni son frcre non plus. Nor I cither, ni moi non plus. Not only but, non-seulement mais. (See 4.) 2. But if the negation belongs to the verb the negative particle, whateverot maybe, is invariably accompanied by ne. Ex.: Ne lid parlez pas, do not speak to him. Je n'ai rien vu, I have seen nothing. Je ne Vai plus, I have it no more. Aucun de vous n'y &ait, none of you were there. Le pauvre homme n'a point d 'argent. The poor man has no money. Je ne, connals personne ici, I know nobody here. Ni prieres ni * menaces ne purent I'attendrir. Neither prayers nor threatenings could move him. * If neither nor come before two verbs in the Indicative mood, the former is ex- pressed simply by ne before the first, and nor by ni ne before the second. Ex. : I neither praise nor blame him. Je ne le loue. ni ne le blame. 19 290 XV. QUINZIEME LEgON. H ne sait ni lire ni e'crire. He knows neither how to read nor write. Nous n'approuvons nullement votre dessein. We by no means approve of your design. NOTE. When the verb is in the simple Infinitive ne pas or ne point (also ne jamais) are not separated, as : Not to study, ne pas gtudier or ne point c'ludier. But when it is in the compound Infinitive it is optional to separate them or not, as : C ne pas (point} avoir (Huditf. Not to have studied, -j , . / . . N - ,.. ' ( n avoir pas (point) &udi. 3. The words no more or not any more (meaning not more) are expressed by ne before the verb and pas plus after, when more is followed by than : He is no more than fifteen years of age. // n'a pas plus de quinze ans. But they are rendered by ne plus without pas, when more is not fol- lowed by than. Ex.: I shall read no more (no longer), je ne lirai plus. 4. Non settlement, not only, takes no ne with the verb. Ex.: Je Vai fait non seulement pour lui, mats aussi pour ses enfahts. I have done it not only for his sake, but also for his children's. THEME 31. 1. I do not speak. 2. I have not spoken. 3. Have you bought this book ? 4. No, sir, I have not (P. I., L. XL VII.) . 5. It is your friendship which I seek, not my interest. 1 6. Not I. 7. Not we. 8. Are you tired ? 9. Not at all. 10. I was not there ; nor my sister either. 11, This peasant 2 can neither read nor write. 12. The boy has neither paper 3 nor pens. 13. I have never had such a (un si) good book. 14. We have no desire at all 4 to do it. 15. The speaker 5 has convinced not only his friends but also his adversaries. 16. Charles XII. persisted in 7 never speaking (never to speak) French. 17. I have no more hope. 1. Intertt, m. 2. Paysan, m. 3. gee p. 224, $ 3. 4. NuUement envie. 5. teur* 6. Convaincre. 7. S'obstina &, SYNTAX OF NEGATIONS. 291 NE USED ALONE WITHOUT PAS. 5. The negative not is expressed by ne without pas or point with the three verbs : cesser, to cease ; oser, to dare ; pouvoir, to be able ; when followed by an Infinitive, as : Elle ne cesse de pleurer, she does not cease crying. // n'ose revenir, he dares not come back. Je ne puis le croire, I cannot helieve it. NOTE 1. Cesser takes pas, however, when a time is specified, as : H ne cesse pas de travailler avant huit Jieures dit soir. NOTE 2. In regard to pouvoir, use in the first person of the Present tense either : Je ne puis ( without pas), or : Je ne peux pas. G. When the negative nse of savoir means to le uncertain, i. e. in doubt, it does not take pas. In the same way pas is always omitted in the expression je ne saurais, I cannot. Ex.: Je ne savais que dire, I did not know what to say Je ne saurais vous donner une garantie. I cannot give you a security. But if " not know " has the signification of not to have learned, not to know (a language, etc.), then savoir always takes ne and pas. Ex.: Je ne sais pas nager, I cannot swim. Ne savez-vous pas I'allemand, do you not know German ? 7. I&_ sentences depending upon prendre garde, to take care, there is no pas. Ex.: Prenez garde qu'il ne vous trompe. Pas is used however if an infinitive follows. Ex.: Prenez garde de ne pas tomber. 8. Of two negative sentences standing in immediate connection with each other, the latter loses its pas. Ex.: Je ne connais personne qui ne fasse quelquefois des fautes. NOTE 1. Also pen and sans are here regarded as a negation, as : Pen s'en faut qidl ne soil tombe", he was very near falling. /Sans rim faire, without doing anything. 292 XV. QUINZIEME LEgON. KOTE 2. The former sentence may also be interrogative if only the idea of negation be contained in it, as : Y a-t-il for cst-il) un liomme qui tie croie en Dieu f 9. Do. not put pas after que ne, when used instead ot pourquoi pas. Ex.: Si vous avez froid, que ne mettez-vous votre mante.au ? If you are cold, why not put on your cloak 1 10. Nor after voila, ily a and depuis que, when the verb which has the idea of negation is in the compound of the Present or in the compound of the Imperfect. Ex.: II y a deux mois que je ne lui ai parU. H a bien change' depuis que je ne I'ai vu. 11. Pas is not used when ne is connected with d'autre followed by que, as : Je n'ai d'autre ambition que de vous rendre lieureux. I have no other ambition than to make you happy. 12. Further in the following idioms : N 'avoir garde, to take care not to, to be on one's guard. N'importe, it does not matter. Ne voir goutte, to see nothing (at all). Ne dire mot, to say not a word. a. Dieu neplaise que, etc., God forbid, etc. 13. A mains que and conjunctions expressing fear, take ne before the following verb (in the subjunctive). Ex.: . A moins que vous ne le fassiez, Unless you do it. THEME 32. 1. Alcibiades could not suffer that his country should obey 1 a lival. 2 2. I dare not enter 3 his room. 3. It is no more than a week 4 since I saw (que fai vu) your uncle ; he has gone to Amer- ica, you will see him no more. 4. I cannot ( 6) tell you whether (si) my father is at home or not (72 on); I have not seen him this morning. 5. Take care lest (que, 7) he steal your money. 6. SYNTAX OF NEGATIONS. 293 Take care not to be (to come) too late. 7. We daro not tell him tins news. 8. There is no enemy who is (soit) not able 5 to injure. 6 9. God forbid that I should betray 7 your secret 1. Iraperf. Subj. 2. A une rivale, 3. Entrer dans. 4. Jluit jours. 5. En itat. 0. De nmre. 7. Trakir. NEGATION USED IN FRENCH, AND NOT IN ENGLISH.* 14. Ne is moreover often employed in French when in English no thought of negation is to be discovered. This is the case : With the affirmative verb of a comparative clause introduced by que, than, when the verb closely follows que. Also after verbs, nouns, and conjunctions expressing fear and apprehension. Ex.: II est plus ag que je ne croyais. He is older than I thought. Je crains qu'il ne vienne. I fear he may come. 77 parle autrement qu'il n'agit. He speaks otherwise than he acts. A moms que vous ne le fassiez. Unless you should do it. - NOTE. But if the first clause of the sentence be negative, que of the lat- ter clause is not followed by ne, if the compared action is not doubtful, as : II n'&rit pas mieux qii'il parle. 15. The verbs douter, to doubt ; nier and disconvenir, to deny contester, to contest, require ne before the verb (in the Subjunctive) of the dependent sentence, yet only when these verbs themselves are used simply negatively or simply interrogatively. Ex.: Je ne doute pas > Doutez-vous 1 cda ne soit *' W I do not doubt (do you doubt) that this is true. Niez-vous Je ne nie pas Do you deny (I do not deny) that he is guilty? * The pupil should learn, in connection with this lesson, $0, L. XIX. p. 330. 294 XV. QUINZIEME LEgON. 16. But when these verbs are affirmative, or negative-interroga- tive, ne is not inserted in the second clause. Also when ne pas douter has the force of etre sur. Ex.: Je doute que cela soil vrai (without ne). Ne niez-vous pas qu'il soit coupable ? 17. If the dependent sentence in English is negative, it takes, of course, ne pas. Ex.: I fear he will not come, je crams qu'il ne vienne pas. They fear the fortress will not have ammunition enough. On craint que la forteresse n'ait pas assez de munition. 18. Empecher, to prevent, to hinder, requires ne before the fol- lowing verb in the Subjunctive mood, as : J'empecherai qu'il ne sorte. I will hinder him from going out. EmpecJiera-t-il 1 II n'empeckera pas } * m VOUS ne le f assiez ' Will he prevent you (he will not prevent you) from doing it ? THEME 33. 1. He is more wicked than I thought. 2. Henry is stronger than he was last year. ^. Ireland is more powerful, at present, than were the three kingdoms at () the death of queen Elizabeth. 4. A traveller often relates 1 things otherwise than they are. 5. I fear lest (que) some misfortune has befallen 2 my son. 6. I fear our master will come ; do you not fear he will come? 7. He denies that his brother is mixed up 3 in that affair. 8. The city of Paris has become much more beautiful since 4 you saw (have seen) it. 9. Do you fear he will write to your father? 10. I do not fear it, 11. We do not fear that the battle is lost. 12. Do you deny that you have procured [for] him the means of flight? 5 13. I do not deny that I have given him some clothes and some money. 14.1 will hinder him from coming back. 15. I doubt whether the letter has been sent to him (see p. 275, 1, Note 1). 16. I cannot prevent him from loving (that he loves) pleasure 6 better than work. 6 1. Rapporter. 2. Etre arrive d. 3. Meier. 4. Depuis que. 5. Fuite. f. 6, Put the def. article. SYNTAX OP NEGATIONS. 295 HEADING LESSON. LB CONNETABLE DE BOUKBON ET BAYARD. (Suite.) Le Con. Qu'as-tu done ? Est-ce que tu ne saurais te consoler d 'avoir etc vaincu ct fait prisonnier dans la retraite de Bonnivet ? Ce n'est pas ta faute, c'est la sienne : les armes sont journalieres (changing) . Ta gloire est assez bien etablie par tant de belles ac- tions. Les Imperiaux 1 ne pourront jamais oublier cette vigoureuso defense de Mezieres contre eux. Bay. Pour moi, je ne puis jamais oublier que vous etes ce grand connetable, ce prince du plus noble sang qu'il y ait dans le monde, et qui travaille a dechirer 2 de ses propres mains sa patrie et le royaume de ses ancetres. Le Con. Quoi ! Bayard, je te loue, et tu me condamnes ! Je te plains, et tu m'insultes ! Bay. Si vous me plaignez, je vous plains aussi; et je vous trouve bien plus & plaindre que moi. Je sors de la vie sans taclie ; j'ai sacrine la mienne a mon devoir, je meurs pour mon pays, pour mon roi, estime des enncmis de la France, et regrette de tous les bons Fran9ais. Mon etat est digne d'envie. Le Con. Et moi, je suis victorieux d'un ennemi qui m'a ou- trage, je me venge de lui ; j-e le cliasse du Milanais ; 3 je fais sentir a toute,Ja_ France combien elle est malheureuse de m'avoir perdu, en me poussant a bout. 4 Appelles-tu cela etre h plaindre ? Bay. Oui, on est toujours a plaindre quand on agit contre son devoir. II vaut mieux perir en combattant pour la patrie, quo de la vaincre et de triompher d'elle. Ah ! quelle horrible gloire que celle de detruire 5 son propre pays ! ( To le continued.) 1. The Imperialists, Austrians. 2. To tear. 3. From the Milanese territory. 4. To the extreme. 5. Destroy. 296 XVI. SEIZ1EME LEON. XVI. SEIZIEME LEgON. REMARKS ON SOME PREPOSITIONS. The use of the prepositions is of too various a nature to allow of its being determined by definite rules. Their departure from the original significa- tion can only be- shown by examples. Prepositions must generally be repeated before every noun. A, de, and en must always be repeated. All prepositions except en govern the infinitive ; en is followed by the present participle. Ex. : Pour oiler, in order to go. En allant, in going. I. ON THE USE OF SOME FRENCH PREPOSITIONS. N . A denotes 1st place, and is used before names of places (not countries), and common names; (in English at or in) : a Paris, at Paris, a I'tglise, at church. a la campagne, in the country, a I'cmbre, in the shade. an theatre or au spectacle, at the theatre. a la poste, at the post-office. frapper a la porte, to knock at the door. a la main, in the hand, a droite, to the right. 2. Time: a quelle heure, at what o'clock ? a deux heures, at two o'clock, a midi, at twelve o'clock. au commencement de la lecon, at the beginning of the lesson. a temps, in time, a mon arrivffe, on my arrival, a la pointe du jour, at daybreak. 3. Manner and instrument : a la mode, in fashion, fashionably. a pied, on foot, a cheval, on horseback. a bras ouverts, with open arms. travailler a l'ai(/uille f to work with the needle. REMARKS ON SOME PREPOSITIONS. 297 peindre a Vlndle, to paint in oil. mesurer a I'aune, to measure by the ell (yard). deux a deux, two and two. goutte a goutte, drop by drop. a bon marche", cheap. a cinq pour cent, at five per cent. a I'anglaise, after the English style. 4. Destination : Une cuiller a the", a teaspoon. Une montre a repetition, a repeater (watch). 5. Direction, especially with the verb alter or se rcndre, to go (the English to) : Aller a Vlenne, to go to Vienna. Nous allons a la campagne, we are going into the country. Aller au theatre, to go to the theatre. Aller a la chasse, to go hunting, etc. Dans, en. Dans means both in and into a (closed) place ; it is used in a more determinate sense than en, and is always followed by the article or another determinate word (such as, this, my, which, etc.) . Ex. : Dans la (ma, votre) chambre, in the (my, your) room. Dans ma poche, in my pocket. Dans I'hiver de 1850, in the winter of 1850. Dans une colere ajfreuse, in a dreadful passion. // est dans la prison, he is in (the) prison (of that place). Etre dans la ville, to be within the town (not in the country). Observe also the difference in the following expressions : II est au jar din and il est dans son jardin. Je suis a la maison (at home) and je suis dans ma maison. En is used in a more vague sense, and is followed by no article. It is used for in or to before the name of a kingdom, republic, country, county, or province. Ex. : En liberty in liberty. En colere, in a passion. En France, in or to France. En Avril or au mois d' avril, in April. En &{, in summer. En hiver, in winter, 298 XVI. SEIZIEME En automne, in autumn (but an printemps, in spring.) Eire en voyage, to travel about. En ccs tennes, in these words. Vivre en paix, to live in peace. Eire en ville, to be out, to be from home. // est en prison, he is in prison (he is a prisoner). NOTE. There are a few expressions in which the article is retained after en; such are, en I' absence, in the absence; en I'honneur, in honor. Only/' and la are thus found after en, never le. Dans and en, relating to time, are differently used. Dans de- notes the point of time, en the duration. Ex. : Dans dix minutes, ten minutes hence. En dix minutes, within the space of ten minutes. Je partirai dans huit jours, I shall set out in a week. M. B. reviendra dans deux mois, Mr. B. will return in two months. J*ai appris le francais en dix mois, I learned French in ten months. Entre, parmi. Mitre answers in general to the English between, betwixt, and is said of two objects only. Ex. : Entre la porte et la fenetre, between the door and the window. Entre autres, among others. La mere tenait I' enfant cntre ses bras. The mother held her child in her arms. Parmi is said of several objects, as : Parmi les rochets, among the rocks. Votre grammaire se trouva parmi mes livres. Your grammar was found among my books. Devant, avant. Devant is a local preposition, and is also used for in presence of } as: Nous jouerons devant la maison, we will play before the house. // a para devant le juge, he appeared before the judge. Sur le devant, in the front ; la porte de devant, the front door. Avant denotes priority of time and order, as : Je suis arrive" avant vous, I arrived before you. U article se met avant le nom, the article is put before the noun. REMARKS ON SOME PREPOSITIONS. 209 Avant tout, above all. Avant is also used before an infinitive with de : Avant de partir, before leaving. vers. Envers, towards, to, is used for with regard to, in a moral sense, as: Soyez charitdbles envers les pauvres, be charitable towards the poor. Comportez-vous bien envers lui, behave well towards him (with regard to him). Vers expresses motion and is put before names of places and persons : Vers la colline, towards the hill. // s'avan$a vers mol, he advanced towards me. Chez. Chez might be rendered in English by at the house of, with, among, etc. Ex. : Chez votre pere, at your father's. Chez les Romains, among the Romans. Chacun est maitre chez soi, everybody is master in his own house. Je vi ens de chez vous, I come from your house. Ilors de, hors. 1. Ilors de denotes an exclusion from a place, out of, outside of, without'." Ex. : Uors de la maison, out of the house. Hors da royaume, out of the kingdom. NOTE. In this signification de may be left out, as : Hors la maison, hors la barriere, etc. 2. Hors de is also used in a figurative or temporal sense, as : H est hors de danger, he is out of danger. Hors d'&at, out of condition, unable. 3 . Hors (without de) signifies except, besides : Hors ccla nous sommes d'accord, with the exception of that we are agreed. NOTE. In this sense hormis is sometimes used for hors, more frequently except?. 300 XVI. SEIZIEME LEQON. D'avec, /.). 14. One must distinguish true friendship from (d'avec) (the) false. 15. The dog sprang out 4 from under the table. 1. Bienfaisant. 2. Les murs de Troie. 3. Le malade. 4. Sauter, II. HOW TO EXPRESS SOME ENGLISH PREPOSITIONS. Above. Above, when it expresses time or number, so as to signify more than or longer than, is rendered in French by plus de. Ex. : The fight lasted above four hours. Le combat dura plus de guatre heures. It is abo.Ye twenty miles from here. II y a plus de vingt lieues d'ici. About. 1. About, in the sense of around, is to be rendered by autour de. 2. In the signification of concerning, it is touchant, concer- nant, sur, or simply de. 3. In speaking of things which people carry about them, it is translated with sur. Ex. : 1 . All thronged about the prince. Tout le monde se pressa autour du prince. 2. I will speak to him about our affair (business). Je lui parlerai touchant (or sur or de) notre affaire. 3. I Lave no money about me, je n'ai pas d' argent sur moi. 302 XVI. SEIZIEME LEQON. At. 1. At is most commonly rendered by a with or without an arti* cle. 2. After nouns or verbs denoting derision, anger, surprise, sorrow, etc., at is rendered by de. 3. It is translated chez when, in English, it precedes the word Ituuse, either expressed or under- stood. Ex. : 1 . We were at dinner, nous tfions a diner. Do you play at cards, jouez-vous aux cartes ? 2. She laughed at him, die se moqua de lui. I am surprised at what you say. Je SKIS surpris de ce que vous dites. 3. We were at your aunt's, nous tfions chez votre tante. By. 1. By denoting the agent or cause is translated de or par (see p. 135, 2). Ex.:- Mr. Bell is respected by everybody. M. Bell cst respecte de tout le monde. Troy was destroyed by the Greeks. Troie fut de'truite par les Grccs. 2. In affirmations and swearing by is translated par: He swears by his honor, il en jure par son Jionneur. 3. By, after the verbs to sell, to buy, to work, etc., preceding a noun of weight or measure, day, week, month, or year, is rendered in French by a with the definite article. Ex. : I sell the tea by the pound, je vends le the' a la livre. We work by the hour or by the day. Nous travaillons a Vheure ou a la jourme. 4. When preceding a numeral immediately followed by an adjec- tive of dimension, l>y is rendered in French by sur. Ex. : This room is fifteen feet long by ten wide. Cette chambre a quinze picds de longueur sur dix de largeur. 5. By, immediately following the verbs to kill, to wound, etc., is translated in French by d\m coup de, when it expresses the blow, wound, firing, etc., of an instrument by which a man was wounded, killed, etc. Ex. : REMARKS ON SOME PREPOSITIONS. 303 The officer was wounded by a bullet. L'officier fat blesstfd'un coup de fusil. Achilles was killed at the siege of Troy by an arrow. Achille fut tu au siege de Troie d'un coup de fleche. NOTE. If the blows have been repeated, a coups de is used, in which case It is most commonly rendered in English by with. Ex. : They knocked him down with a stick. Us V assommerent a coups de baton. THEME 36. 1. My father was not above twenty-two years old when ho was married. 1 2. My uncle's country-house 2 is very handsome ; but it cost him above eighty thousand francs. 3. It is above a year since my friend set off for 3 America. 4. Rome was built by Romulus. 5. The poor man has been driven out 4 of his house by his creditors. 5 6. I will get up to-morrow at six o'clock. 7. Were you at Mrs. D.'s ball last night? 8. I will pay you at the end of this month. 9. I rejoice greatly at your good luck. 6 10. She always smiles 7 at everything that is said. 11. Where was your sister this morning? 12. She was at her aunt's. 13. My box 8 is a foot and a half deep by two wide and four long. 14. Harold was wounded by an arrow. 9 15. William the Second was killed by an arrow in the New-Forest. 16. He is so strong that with his fist 10 (5, Note) he could knock down 11 an ox. 17. They killed the dog with stones. 18. The sol- diers kill 'one another with bayonets. 12 1. To be married, se marier. 2. La maison de campagne. 3. Pour. 4. Chasse. 5- Creancier, m. 6. Bonlieur. 7. Sourire. 8. Le coffre. 0. Flechc, f. 10. LQ poing, 11. Abattre. 12. La baionette. From. 1. From, preceding the name of a person, or a possessive adjec- tive, or a personal or interrogative pronoun after the verbs to go, to come, to send, etc., is generally rendered by de la part de. Ex. : Many compliment? from Dr. O. Bien des compliments de la part de Monsieur le docteur 0. I come from him or her (from them), etc. Je vims de sa part (de leur part}. 304: XVI. SEIZIEME 2. From, meaning from some one's house, is in French de chez. Example : I come from my uncle's, aunt's, etc. Je viens de cJiez mon oncle, de chez ma tante, etc. 3. From to is rendered by de en. Ex. : He went from street to street, from town to town, etc. // alia de rue en rue, de ville en ville, etc. NOTE. When two names of towns or villages are mentioned, to is ren- dered by a. Ex. : From Paris to Rouen, de Paris a Rouen. 4. From is rendered by depuis, and to by jusqiCa, when speak- ing of extent or time. Ex. : From Easter to Christmas, depuis Pdques jusqu'a Noel. In. 1., In dans or en, see these words in the first part of this Les- son. 2. In, after worda denoting pain, hurting, etc., and preceding a possessive adjective with any part of the body, is to be rendered by a with the definite article. Ex. : I have constantly a pain in my head. J*ai toujours mal a la tete. 3. In adverbial expressions of time, in is not expressed in French. Ex. : In the morning, le matin. In the evening, le soir. On or upon. 1. On or upon is most generally sur. Ex. : He climbed upon the tree, il grimpa sur Varbre. 2, After the verbs to play, to live, to depend, and the like, on cr upon is rendered by de. Ex. : You play on the violin, and I play on the flute. Vous jouez du violon et moi, je joue de la flute. A good end often depends on a good beginning. Une bonne fin depend souvent d'un bon commencement. The prisoner lives on bread and water. Le prisonnier vit de pain et d'eau. REMARKS ON SOME PREPOSITIONS. 305 3. The preposition on, before the days of the week and with dates, is dropped in Trench. Ex. : Come on Sunday, venez dimanche. On the twelfth of May, le douze mai. 4. On, denoting time, in other cases is translated by en. Over. This preposition is commonly rendered in French by sur, but it must be expressed by the Part. Past of the verbs passer, finir, achever, when it denotes an action ended. Ex. : As soon as the rain will be over. Des que la pluie sera passe. Ts dinner over, le diner est-il fini ? With. 1. With is rendered by de after such verbs as, to die, to meddle, to do, to dispense, to load, to cover, to fill, and after some adjec- tives, as : pleased, contented, etc. (see p. 250, 1 and 2). Ex.: He died with cold, il mourut de froid. The wagon is loaded with goods, la voiture est charge's de marchandises. 2. With is expressed by a and the article before nouns denoting in what manner a thiag is done or made. Ex. : To drassr with a pencil, dessiner au crayon. To fight with pistols, se battre au pistolet. NOTE. Charger takes a, and se lattre, au, a la, a V (as the noun may require), before the names of materials or weapons generally used for loading fire-arms or for fighting ; otherwise, with is rendered by avec. Ex. : Charger un fusil a balles, avec des pierres. Se lattre a Vpe, au pistolet, avec des haches, avec des martaux. The ambiguous English sentence, He struck the man with a wooden leg, would be translated into French by Ilfrappa I'homme a lajambe de bois, if the man was crippled ; but if the wooden leg is the weapon of attack, avec is used. 3. With must not bo expressed after the following verbs : to meet with, rencontrer ; to trust with, confer qch. a qn. ; to supply 20 306 XYI. SEIZlfiME LEON. with, fournir qch. a qn. ; to reproach with, reprocher qch. a qn. Examples : "We will supply him with everything. Nous lui fournirons tout. \ reproached him with his ingratitude. Jc lui reprochai son ingratitude. HEM AUK. Prepositions are placed in French before the words they gov em, though in English they are sometimes placed after. Ex. : "Whom do you speak to, a qui parlez-vous? "What's that for, pour quoi cela ? The man whom you are interested in. LShotnme pour qui vous vous interessez. THEME 37. 1. Go from me to Mr. S., and tell him that I am expecting him. 2. From whom do you come ? 3. I come from Miss B. 4. Charles was wounded in his arm, and not (noil) in his leg. 5. I have very often a pain in my teeth. 6, I will call upon you in the afternoon, and in the evening (I will) go to the play. 7. Upon what instrument does your sister play? 8. She plays the piano. 9. That happened 1 on the 12th [of] March. 10. I am in the habit 2 of taking a cup of coffee as soon as dinner is over. 11. Do not meddle 3 with my affairs ; attend to your own. 12. Is that house covered with slate 4 or tiles? 5 13. It is covered with tiles. 14. This picture seems to be done with chalk. 6 15. When you meet a poor man, never reproach him [with] his poverty. 16. France extends 7 from the Rhine to the Atlantic 8 Ocean. 17. "What does he complain 9 of? 18. We have travelled from Switzerland 'to Italy. 19. You spend all the day in going (a after) from, house to house, from street to street, from place to place. 20. Those labor- ers 10 work from (depuis) morning 11 to night. 11 21. I walk every day from twelve' (nuidt) to three. 1. Se passa. 2. To be in the habit of, avoir Vlwbitude cle. 3. Se mcler. 4. AT. doise, iii singular. 5. Tuile, in plural. G. Crate, f. 7. S'etendre. 8. V Ocean At- lantique. 9. Se plaindre de qch. 10. Ouvrier, in. 11. Put the article. USES OP THE CONJUNCTION QUE. 307 XVII. DIX-SEPTIEME LEgON. DIFFERENT USES OF THE CONJUNCTION QUE. I. QUE WITH THE INDICATIVE. 1. The conjunction que is used 1. to join the two terms of a comparison ; 2. in a restrictive sense, for but or only, as : Elle n'a que deux freres, she has only two brothers. 2. The que of admiration or exclamation expresses wonder or surprise; it answers to the English words how, how much, how many. Ex. : Que vous etes heureux ! how happy you are ! Que la terre est petite en comparaison avec le soleil I How small is the earth compared with the sun ! Que de peine vous prenez pour moi ! How much trouble you take for me ! 3. In short exclamations que is inserted after the noun when the verb is omitted. Ex. : Quel beau pays que I'ltalie ! What a beautiful country Italy is ! Quel hovime que ce Pension ! What a man that Fenelon is (or was) ! 4. It stands for pourquoi in negative exclamations, as : Que ne puis-je vous aider ! why can I not assist you ! 5. The French periphrase of a sentence with Jest is followed by que, whereas in English this is not expressed. Ex.: C'est une belle chose que la discretion. Discretion is a good thing. C'est une chose detestable que la haine, Hatred is a detestable thing. If, however, an Infinitive follows, que need not be used : 308 XVII. DIX-SEPTIEME LEQON. C'est une horde (que) d'ignorer sa langue maternelle. It is a shame not to know one's mother tongue. G. Que must be inserted after c'est-adire, that is to say, when a verb follows. Que is also frequently used after voila and peut-etre. Example : Vous serez parfaitement libres, c* est-a-dlre que vous ne dfyendrez de personne. You will be perfectly free, that is to say, you will depend upon nobody. 7. In the expressions : que oui, yes; que si! yes ! que non, no; que is used pleonastically. Ex.: Je dis que oui, I say yes. 8. Que stands for since instead of depuis que : Comli-sn y a-t-il que votre sceur est morte ? How long is it since your sister died ? 9. Que is used for when after a peine, scarcely, and in the sig- nification of as or when, after the specification of a time, in which case the use of lorsque would be incorrect. Ex. : A peine e'tait-il sorti, que la maison s'&roula. Scarcely was he gone out, when the house fell. Un matin que je sortais de tres-bonne lieure. One morning as I went out early. Maintenant que vous etes en France, etc. Now that you are in France. . . . 10. Que corresponds to the English that after all verbs of think- ing, feeling, saying* as : dire, affirmer, repondre, declarer, croire, penser, sentir, etc. , and usually takes the Indicative when these words are used affirmatively. In English the that is often omitted, but in French it must always be employed. Ex. : Dltes-lui que je I'attends. Tell him that I am waiting for him. H m'a rfyondu qu'il n y en savait rien. He answered mo that he knew nothing of it. On croit qu'elle est tres-riche. She is supposed to be very rich. * Where in Latin the Ace. IB used with the Infinitive. USES OF THE CONJUNCTION QUE. 309 NOTE. Que is not only always expressed in French, but repeated before each member of the proposition. Ex.: Je crois que vous vous trompez et que vous ne re'ussirez pas. I think you are mistaken, and that you will not succeed. 11. In many cases where the conjunction is repeated in English, the French, instead of repeating it, put que in the place of it. This is the case with lorsque, quand y pendant que, tandis que, parce que, tant que and des que. Ex. : Lorsque I'empereur fut revenu ct qu'il (and when he) eut visits le camp, il rsolut de livrer bataille. Tandis que Charles XII donnait un roi a la Pologne soumise, que le Dane- mark n'osait le troubler, ct que le roi de Prusse recherchait son amititf, le czar de- venait de jour en jour plus redoutable. THEME 38. 1. I am much younger than you. 2. Caroline is only seventeen years old. 3. How pretty she is ! 4. How I hate flatterers I 1 5. How small is the part of the world which we inhabit ! 2 6. What (es hommes. THE COMPOUNDS OF TILE IMPERFECT AND OF THE PRETERITE. 16. These tenses are formed from the Imperfect and Preterite, and correspond to them fully ; only that they represent their action as having taken place previous to some other event referred to, and cannot be used entirely independently, but usually stand connected with a conjunction or an adverb of tune, If this conjunctive clause expresses a definite past time, the Compound of the Preterite is employed, especially after the conjunctions aussitot que, lorsque, quand, des que, a peine, lientot, en un moment, un jour que t etc. Example : Aussitdt que feus terming mes affaires, je repartis. A peine eut-il prononce' ce mot, qu'il s'en repentit. Des que le parlement se fat assemble*, Ve"meute cessa. As soon as the parliament was assembled, the riot ceased. It is here not to be overlooked that in the use of the Compound Preterite a more immediate relation, a closer connection must exist between the two past events. 17. With the Compound of the Imperfect, this close connection fails, and this is the distinguishing feature of this tense, which is also used like the Imperfect for descriptions, for continuous events, and frequently repeated or customary previous actions. Ex. : Platon avait re$u de la nature un corps robuste. J' avals deja terming mes affaires, quand je re$us votre lettre. A la_campagne, quand j'avais dine", je faisais une promenade de deux lieues. 18. The Compound of the Imperfect is also used after the con- junction si, if, the same in French as in English (see 9). Ex. : Si vous &iez venu plus tot t vous m'auriez trouve* a la maison. tS'il avait parle" plus haut (louder), je Vaurais compris. THEME 44. 1. The Tyrians had, by their pride, 1 offended the great Sesostris, who ruled in Egypt, and who had conquered so many kingdoms. 2. The wealth which they had acquired 2 by commerce, and the strength USB OF THE TENSES OP THE INDICATIVE. 321 of the impregnable 3 city of Tyre, lying 4 in the sea, had lifte.d up 5 the heart of these people. 8. They had refused to pay Sesostris the tribute 6 which ho had imposed upon them (leur) on his return from his conquests ; 7 and they had furnished troops to his brother, who had attempted 8 to kill him in the midst of the festivities 9 of a great banquet. 4. As soon as Sesostris learned 10 this, he deter- mined 11 to humiliate then: pride and to destroy their commerce upon !l seas. 5. Julius Caesar, having disembarked 12 in Africa, fell [down] as he was leaving the vessel ; this appeared to his soldiers a very inauspicious 13 omen: 13 he, however, turned the feelings of the arn/.). 2. The king has done me great injustice; he has robbed 2 me of my entire fortune, he has even 324 XVIII. DIX-HUITIEMB LE^ON. takon 8 from me my two servants. 3. I have been compelled to fiee, in order to preserve 4 my life, which was seriously threatened. 4. What was to be done ? 5 5. You should rather have endured 8 ( 20) all injuries than to offend 7 against France and the greatness of your house. 6. If you were persecuted, you could have retired ; 8 it would have been (valu) better to be poor and unknown than to take up 10 arms against your country. 7. Even in poverty and in the most wretched 11 exile, your fame 12 would not have been lost. 1. Ingrat. 2. Prive. 3. JUPa depouilU jusqu'ti. 4. Pour sauver. 5. Que vou- Liez-voits qua je fisse 1 6. Souffrir. 7. Que de manqucr a. 8. Vous retirer (refleo* live verb). 9. Obscur. 10. Prendre les armes. 11. Miserable. 12. Gloire, f. READOG LESSON. ALEXANDRE SELKIRK. Pendant la guerre pour la succession d'Espagne, quelques parti- euliers 1 equiperent en Angleterre deux vaisseaux armateurs, destines & faire des prises 2 dans la mer du sud. Le capitaine Rogers fut nomine pour les commander. Us leverent 3 1'ancre de Bristol le 2 Aout, 1708. Au inois de Janvier de Tannee suivante ils se trou- vaient du cote du pole antarctique. 4 Eogers doubla le Cap-Horn sans prendre terre en aucun lieu de ces parages 5 jusqu'a File de Juan Fernandes, situee dans la nier du sud, a la distance de cent- dix lieues du Chili. II y envoy a une pinasse, 6 qui revint au vais- seau avec quantite d'^crevisses, 7 et un homme vetu de peaux de chevres 8 qui paraissait plus sauvage que ces animaux memes. C'etait un Ecossais, nomme Alexandra Selkirk, qui avait e*te maitre a bord du vaisseau " Les Cinq-Ports," et que le capitaine Stradling avait abandonne sur cette ile depuis quatre ans et quatre mois. Voici le recit que ce malheureux fit de ses aventures au capitaine Eogers. " DCS mon enfance j'ai ete ^leve 9 dans la marine. Ayant suivi le capitaine Stradhng dans son expedition, j'eus un demele' 10 aveo THE SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 325 ITU, ce qui 1'engagea h me debarquer sur cette ile. Je resolus d'abord d'y rester, plutot que 11 de m'exposer h de nouveaux cha- grins, d'autant plus que le vaisscau etait en mauvais e*tat. Cepen- dant rcvenu a moi-meme, je souhaitai d'y retourner, mais le capitaiue n'y voulut pas consentir." ( To be continued.) 1. Private men. 2. Capture. 3. To weigh. 4. South. 5. Parts of the sea. 6. Pinnace. 7. Crab. . 8. Goat-skins. 9. Brought up. 10. Quarrel. 11. Rather than* QUESTIONNAIRE. Que firent quelques particnliers anglais pendant la guerre de la succession d'Espagne ? Qui commanda les deux vaisseaux ? Ou prit-il terre pour la premiere fois ? Ou est situee cette ile? Qui trouva-t-on la ? Qui 6tait cet homme ? Comment y etait-il venu ? Combien de temps y etait-il reste ? Pourquoi avait-il ete debarqu6 par le capitaine ? XIX. DIX-NEUVIEMB LE90N. THE SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 1. The Subjunctive is in most cases dependent, and is therefore used in subordinate clauses. Whenever in French a subordinate clause is depend- ent upon a leading clause which contains the idea of something not yet having an actual existence for the speaker, consequently of something pos- sible or uncertain, its verb will be in the Subjunctive. This unreality can apply as well to something external, i. e. to actions and events, as to some- thing internal, i. e. to conceptions and emotions. This is the general 326 XIX. DIX-NEUVIEME LEQCN. ground of distinction in the application of the French Subjunctive. Th6 two languages by no means agree in this point. Many verbs in English are put in the Future, the Conditional, or the Present Indicative, which, in French, must be in the subjunctive. Thus for instance : Je ne pense pas qu'il soit si ag. I do not think he is so old. Nous craignions qu'il ne s'en allat. "We feared he would go. 2. But before passing to the rules concerning the use of the Sub- junctive, it will be indispensably necessary to understand the relation of the tenses of the Subjunctive to those of the Indicative and Conditional, without which the clause, dependent upon them, cannot be properly trans- lated. The following rules are here applicable : 1. If the verb of the leading clause is in the Present or Future Indica- tive, that of the dependent clause will be in the Present or Compound of the Present of the Subjunctive. Ex.: Je veux qu'il vienne,* I wish him to come. Connaissez-vous quelqu'un qui sache falre cela ? Do you know anybody who knows how to do this ? Je ferai en sorte que tout soit pret. I will have everything ready. J'attendrai que mon pere soit parti. I will wait till my father has departed. 2. If the verb of the leading clause be in a past tense of the Indicative, or in the Conditional, the Imperfect of the Subjunctive must follow in the subordinate clause ; or if the subordinate clause contain an event which has already taken place, the Compound Imperfect of the Subjunctive must be employed, according to the following scheme : Je craignais Je craignis J'ai craint J^avais craint Je craindrais J'aurais craint qu'elle n'arrivat domain aujourd'hui, trop tard,* trop tot, etc. * Observe that the Present and Future circ the same in the Subjunctive Mood in French ; the context alone shows of which of the two we speak. Ex.: Je ne crois pas qu'elle vienne. I do not think she is coming. Je ne crois pas qu'elle vienne. I do not think she will come. Je craignais Je craignis J*ai craint * J'avais craint Je craindrais J'aurais craint THE SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 327 quails nefussent arrives hier avant-hier t la semaint derniere, etc. 3. There are a great many verbs which govern the verb of the subordinate clause in the Subjunctive mood ; they may bo divided into four classes, viz. : 1. Verbs of wishing, willing, desiring, commanding, or permitting. 2. Verbs of thinking, believing, and saying. 3. Verbs expressing fear, doubt, sorrow, astonishment, denial, duty, necessity, joy, or delight. 4. Impersonal verbs which do not express certainty or probability. 4. Verbs of wishing, willing, commanding, etc. Such are : Aimer, to like. permettre, to permit, allow. aimer mieux, to prefer. prier, to beg, to ask. defendre, to forbid. recommander, to recommend. demander, to ask. . souhaiter, to wish. desirer, to wish for, to desire. souffrir, to suffer. exiger, to demand. supplier, to beg, request. ordonner, to order. vouloir, to be willing, etc. Examples : J*ordonne quil sorte, I order him to go out. J'aimeipt'il soit courageux, I like him to be brave. H vent que je dise la ve'rite' (Pres. Subj., 2, 1). He wishes me to say the truth. // voulait qm je lui disse la ve"rit (Imperf., 2, 2). He desired me to tell him the truth. Le roi exigea qne je partisse tout de suite. The king demanded that I should leave directly * As the Compound of the Present belongs to Tresent as well as to Past time, it can be followed also by the Present of the iSubjuiictive, when the dependent clause refers to Present time. Ex.: Diwi nous a donne la raison pour que noux nous en Servians, God has given us reason that we may make use of it. 328 XIX. DIX-NEUVIEME 5. Verbs of thinking, believing, saying, etc. These verbs, and, in general, all those which express the inteL lectual faculties of the mind, govern the Indicative when they are affirmatively used, and most commonly the Subjunctive when they are used negatively, interrogatively, or are preceded by the conjunc tion si. If I say, for instance : Je crois que Charles est malade, I represent Charles's illness to myself as a reality, and consequently the Indicative is required. But in the sentences : Je ne crois pas que Charles soit malade, or, croyez-vous que Charles soil malade ? an uncertainty is expressed in regard to Charles's illness, and the Subjunctive must be used. Ex.: Je ne crois pas que le concert ait lieu ce soir. I do not think that the concert will take place to-night. Pensez-vous qu'il puisse apprendre tout cela. Do you think he can learn all that ? Je ne dis pas qu'il ait tort. I do not say that he is wrong. Partons, si vous pensez qu'il fasse beau temps. NOTE 1 . If however we ask a question, less to be informed of a thing than to inform others of it, the second verb (having the sense : Do you know ?) is put in the Indicative, and not in the Subjunctive. Ex.: Vous ai-je dit que mon frere est arrive'? NOTE 2. Observe that the verbs of knowing, being sure, resolving, etc., are not comprised among those which govern the Subjunctive. They gen- erally require the Indicative, even when used interrogatively or neg- atively : Je savais Je ne savais pas J Je ne sais s'il le fera y I do not know if he will do it. THEME 47. 1. I wish him to come (that he c.). 2. The law requires that thieves 1 [should] be punished. 3. I demanded that he should pay me. 4. Has he demanded that you should pay the bill? 2 5. I forbid that he should go there. 6. God wills that we love our enemies. 7. Caligula wished that the Romans should render him divine honors. 3 8. Your father expects that you should give 4 an ac- , > qu'il lait id. THE SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 329 count of what you have done. 9. My aunt wishes that I should set out to-morrow. 10. Tell him to wait. 11. Augustus com- manded in his will 5 that they should not seek to 6 extend the empire. 12. Allow me to tell you (allow that I tell y.) the truth. 13. I will be obeyed (that one ob. me). 14. Do you think your aunt will come by herself? 7 15. If I find that you frequent bad com- pany, you will lose my friendship. 16. Do you hope they (on) will make peace ? 8 1. Les voleurs. 2. Le compte. 3. Des honneurs divins. 4. To give an account, rendre compte. 5. Testament, m. C. A etendre. 7. Seule. 8. La paix. 6. The Subjunctive is used after verbs of fear, doubt, sorrow, joy, denial or hinderanco, astonishment, etc. Such are : Avoir peur, ") s'etonner, to wonder. craindre, \ empecher, to hinder, prevent. douter, to doubt. nier, to deny. And likewise after : &tre lien aise, to be glad. etre ajftige', to be afflicted. etre charm?, ") etre fdche', to be sorry. etre enchant^ ]* to bc vcry glad * etre etonne*, to be astonished. etre content, to be satisfied. etre surpris, to be surprised. se rejouir, to rejoice. regretter, to regret. trembler, to tremble. , se plaindre, to complain. Examples : Je crams que ma mere ne soit malade. I fear my mother is ill. Je ne doutais pas qu'il n'arrivat avant vous. I did not doubt that he would arrive before you, J'empcckerai qu'il ne * sorte. I will hinder him from going out. Je regrette qu'il soit venu trop tard. Man pere est fdche'que je ne lai aie pas crit plus t6t. Je suis charing que vous soyez venu me voir. Je m'&onne qu'il n'ait pas re$u ma lettre. * Concerning the particle ne, see L. XV. $ 15 - 18. 330 XIX. DIX-NEUYI&ME NOTE 1. The verbs avoir peur, appreliender, craindre and trembler require the particle ne before the verb in the Subjunctive mood, but only when these verbs themselves arc affirmative or negative-interrogative. Ex.: Je crains gu'il ne vlenne. Ne craignez-vous pas qu'il ne vienne ? But if the sentence be simply negative or simply interrogative, ne is not used, as : Je ne crains pas qu'il vienne. Craignez-vous qu'il vienne ? NOTE 2. If after those verbs mentioned in 6, WQ wish to express our- selves with dcfinitencss, de ce que is used instead of the simple que t and this is followed by the Indicative : // est fdclte' de ce que vous ne lui avez pas e'crit. Je me plains de ce qu'elle m'a oublie*. NOTE 3. If the second verb is negative in English, ne pas must be used in French, as : Je tremble qu'il n' arrive pas a temps. I tremble lest he may not arrive in time. 7. Subjunctive after Impersonal verbs. A verb preceded by que is always put in the Subjunctive after the following Impersonate : 77 est surprenant, it is surprising. il plait, it pleases, suits. il convicnt, it is proper. il est fdcheux, it is sad. il faut, it must. il est juste, it is just, right. il importe, it is important, it matters, il est difficile, it is difficult. it concerns. il est possible, it is possible. il suffit, it is sufficient. il est naturel, it is a matter of courso. il vaui mieux, it is better. il se peut t il pent se faire, it may be, And likewise after : H est temps, it is time. c'est dommage^ it is a pity. (rest un malheur, it is a misfortune, etc., etc. Examples : Ft f'lut que vous partiez tout de suite. You must leave directly. II est possible qu'il rcvienne. It is possible that he come back. THE SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 331 Cfest doomage que vous ne soijez pas venu plus tot. It is a pity that you have not come earlier. II suffit qu'il ait avoue' sa faute. It is enough that he has confessed his fault. Ilest juste que vous soijez puni. It is right that you be punished. Further, after il y a, and all impersonal verbs with an adjective denoting evidence, certainty, or probability, when they are used in a negative, interrogative, or conditional manner. Ex. : Ya-t-il un mortel qui puisse dire qu'il est toujours heureux ? Is there a mortal who can say that he is always happy ? Est-il sur qu'il ait tort ? Is it certain that he is in the wrong 7 H n'est pas sur qu'il ait tort. It is not certain that he is in the wrong. THEME 43. 1. I doubt whether that is true. 2. I doubt whether your uncle will arrive to-morrow. 3. The Egyptians did not doubt (see Les- son XV., 15) that certain plants and animals were divinities. 1 4. We question whether riches can afford 2 happiness. 5. I did not know that you were to come. G % Do you doubt that I arn your friend? 7. I do not doubt that you are my friend. 8. He denies that he had been told that. 9. -He does not deny that he has been told that---- 10. It is time for us to go (that we go) home, for it begins to () ram. 11. It is evident that Greece could no more defend herself, so much was she at that time sunken. 3 12. It is sufficient if you tell him this. 13. It is a pity that you did not go with us; you would have enjoyed 4 yourself much. 14. It is not probable that they will do it. 15. I must go to (en) town. 1. Des divinites. 2. Accorder. 3. Decline. 4. S'amuser, 8, The Subjunctive is used in relative dependent clauses begin- ning with qui, que, lequel or ou > which depend upon a leading clause in which a wish, doubt, or condition is implied, especially after an Imperative. Ex. : 332 XIX. DIX-NEUVIEME Lisez des ouvrages qui puissent former votre gout. Read sucli books as can form your taste. Choisissez un appartement oil vous soyez a votre aise. Choose an apartment where you may be comfortable. Us envoyerent des deputes qui consultassent Apottoii. They sent deputies who were to consult Apollo. If, however, no such requirement or expectation is contained in the lead- ing clause ; if, on the contrary, the matter is rather regarded as something which is actual, or which has already taken place, then, of course, the Indicative is used. Ex. : JFai lovtfun appartement cu je suis lien a mon aise. Us envoyercnt des deputes qui consulterent Apollon. 9. A verb preceded by the relative qui or que is put in the Sub- junctive after the Superlative, when the relative clause only express- es an opinion, as : C'est le plus beau jardin que je connaisse. This is the most beautiful garden I know. C'est une des derniercs lettres que St. Paul ait (forties. This is one of the last letters St. Paul has written. La meilleure garde qu'un roi puisse avoir, c'est le coeur de ses siijets. The best guard a king can have is the hearts of his subjects. If, however the thing is represented as certain or as a matter of fact, the Indicative follows. Ex. : Souviens-toi que je suis le seul qui t'a de'pln (displeased). Neron est le premier empercur qui a persecute' I'J&glise. 10. The Subjunctive is used further after the ordinal numbers (as, le premier, le second, le dernier, etc.), and after unique , seul, peu, rien, and personne. Ex. : Vous etes le premier ami que f ale rencontre a Paris. You are the first friend I have met with in Paris. C'est I'unique espoir qui me soit reste. This is the only hope that remains to me. 11 y a peu d'hommes qui sachent supporter Vadversite*. There are few men who know how to bear adversity. Je ne connais personne qui soit aussi heureux que lui. I know nobody who is so happy as he is. NOTE. Qui and que do not govern the Subjunctive, when they are pre- ceded by de and its object, to which they refer. Ex. : Ne dites rien de ce que je vous ai conjie' (Ind.). _ THE SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 333 THEME 49. 1. You are the most learned man I know in tins town. 2. Rob- ert is the only friend on whom I can depend. 1 3. Nero was tha first emperor that (has) persecuted the Christians. 4. I seek a servant who is faithful. 5. The diamond is the most valuable 2 stone we know. 6. You are the first German I have met with in China. 7. There is no one who does it more easily 3 than she. 8. Is this the first time you have been mistaken ? 4 9. I wish it were the first time. 10. Lucretius 5 and Pliny were the only natural philosophers 6 whom the Komans had. I. Compter. 2. Precieux. 3. Aisement. 4. Se tromper. 5. Lucrece et Pline. 6. Naturalistes. 11. Subjunctive after conjunctions. A verb is put in the Sub- junctive after the following conjunctions : Avant que, before. non que, > ^ ^ . , , , J- not that. a moms que (ne), unless. non pas que, ) afin que, in order that. pour que, in order that. bien que, although. pour pen que, ) . f f f V M lf eyer go hftfa de peur que (ne), lest. si peu que, ) de crainte que (ne), for fear that. pourvu que, provided. de maniere (sorte) que, so that. que ne, till, before. en attendant que, till. quel que, ") however. (Seep. en (au) cas que, in case. quelque que, ) 282.) encore que, although. quoique, although. jusqu'a ce que, until. sans que, without. loin que, far from, sinon que, but that. malgre" que, for all that, notwith- si tant est que, if so be that. standing that. soil que soit que, ) whether or. nonobstant que, notwithstanding. soit que ou que, > be it that or suppose" que, suppose that. EXAMPLES. Kentrons avant qu'il fasse nuit. Let us go home before it gets dark. Afin que (pour que) vous le sachiez. That you may know it. Je, ne sortirai d'ici que je ne sois paye". I shall not go away from here before I am paid. 334 XIX. DIX-NEUVIEME LEQON. Quoiqu'il me I'ait proinis. Although he has promised me. Pourvu qu'il y consente. Provided he consent to it. Quelque effort que /assent les hommes, leur ne'ant parait partout. Whatever effort men may make, their nothingness appears everywhere. A molns que vous ne me demandiez pardon. Unless you ask me for pardon. Au (en) cas qu'il mourut. In case he should die. NOTE. The Indicative can sometimes be used after avant que, jusqu'a que, sinon que, de sorte que, si ce n'est que, tellement que, and de manicre que, when all doubt and uncertainty are excluded, and the clause expresses a fact. Ex.: Je gardai mon sang froid, jusqu'a ce que je I'entendis calomnier mon frere. II s'est occupe'de cette affaire de maniere (de sorte) qu'on n'a pu le bldmer. 12. la the same manner the Subjunctive is employed after the simple que, when used instead of one of the conjunctions mentioned in 11. Ex.: Je ne puis vous pardonner avant que vous me fasslez I'aveu de vos fautes el que vous me promettiez de vous corriger. I cannot pardon you before you confess your faults and promise me to improve. Venez que (instead of afin que) je vous en dise la raison. Come, that I may tell you the reason of it. Son esprit est toujours actif, quot qu'il solt malade et qu'il ne puisse travailler, His mind is always active, although he is sick and cannot work. 13. The conjunction q ue, used to avoid the repetition of si, gov- erns the Subjunctive. Ex. : Si je ne suis pas rentre* a quatre heures et qu'on vienne me demander, etc. If I am not at home at four o'clock, and somebody comes for me, etc. 14. The Subjunctive is also used after attendre ; till is translated Ij que, and not by jusqu'a ce que, as : A ttendez qu'il revienne, wait till he comes back. 15. Aside from the instances above-mentioned, the Subjunctive also occurs in a few expressions which appear either the expression of a wish or as a kind of third person Imperative. Notice espe- THE SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 335 cially : Dusse-je ! should I ! Puissiez-vous ! would that you I Puissent-ils ! may they . . . . ! Further : Dieu veuille or plut a Dieu, would tc Heaven. Vive le roi, long live the king ! Puissicz-vous ctre heureux, may you be happy ! Qii'on amene I'accusg, let the culprit be brought here ! Qu'ils viennent, let them come ! Qite Dieu vous btnisse, God bless you ! Que la terre lui soil legere, may the earth lie lightly upon him ! A Dieu ne plaise que, may heaven not permit, etc. THEME 50. 1. Before war was declared, the Carthaginians sent once more ambassadors to Rome. 2. I cannot depend on your promise, unless you give me the necessary security. 1 3. Caesar went by forced 2 marches to Vienne, on the Rhone, before the enemy (plur.) became aware 3 of his approach. 4. Get up early to-morrow morning, that we may start 4 in good time (a temps'). 5. I shall not yet pass to the perusal 3 of this author, unless you advise 6 me to do it. 6. Keep a strict watch 7 over all your senses, lest intemperance get 8 the better of you. 7. Though he is lazy, yet he improves a little (fait quel- ques progres). 8. I shall wait until ( 14) you have done. 9. Wait till the rain be over (passee). 10. Although Homer, 9 ac- cording to 10 Horace, slumbers 11 at tunes, 12 he is nevertheless (il n'en cst pas mains) the first of all poets. 11. You will succeed, 13 pro- vided you act with vigor. 12. I shall soon speak French, though I am convinced that it is a difficult language 13. I shall not leave the house before (que ne) you sign 14 this paper. 14. May God protect 15 you. 15. May Heaven preserve us from war. 1. Garantie, f. 2. A marches forcees. 3. S'apercevoir de. 4. Partir. 5. Lec- ture, f. 6. Conseiller. 7. Veillez avec soin. 8. To get the better of, maitriser qn. 9. Homcre. 10. Selon. 11. Sommeiller. 12. Quelquefois. 13. Reussir. . 14. Signer. 15. Protcger. THEME 51. 1. A thoughtless 1 man knows nothing, though he have read a great many books ; in the same manner a great many persons 3 re- 33 G XIX. DIX-NEUVIEME LEQON. main ignorant, though they have travelled through the most civilized countries. 2. She will forgive you, provided you make her an apology. 3 3. If somebody comes, and I am not at home, send for me. 4. I shall be obliged 4 to do it. 5. We should be obliged to do it. 6. I feared you would have complained of me. 7. Our cousio sot out without our knowing (w. that we knew) [of] his intentions. 8. Edo not believe he has studied history. 9. Do you think they would refuse me, if I requested it of them (si je les en priais) 1 10. May all nations be convinced 5 of this truth ! 11. I do not ' think he is so old. 12. Get in 6 without his seeing you (w. that he s. y.). 13. Go gently, 7 lest he should hear you. 14. Make haste, 8 lest they should set off without you. 15. I do not deny that it may be so. 16. We do not fear that it will give you pain. 9 17. Do not let 10 that child ride this horse ; I am afraid he will throw" him off. 18. We ought to practise what the gospel 12 teaches us. 19. Shall 4 1 read the letter aloud? 20. Yes, if you please. 21. I doubt whether the young man would have succeeded, had it not been for 13 your assistance. 1. Insouciant. 2. Gens. 3. Vos excuses. 4. Falloir. 5. To be convinced, se convaincre. C. Entrez. 7. Doucement. 8. Depechez-vous. 9. Faire de la peine. 10. Permettrc. 11. Jeter & bos. 12. IJevangile, m. 13. Sans, seJ (To lie continued.) 1. Gun. 2. Kettle. 3. From pourvoir, to provide. 4. Need, want. 6. Hut. 6. Piinenta. 7. Rush. 8. To line. 9. To rub. 10. To cook. 11. Watch, watching. 12. Smell. 13. To revive. 14. Excption. 15. Broiled. 16. Broth. 17. Bushes, 18. To tumble. 10. Fall. 20. To drag. 21. A mile. 22 338 XX. VINGTIEME LEgON. QUESTIONNAIRE. Quels effets {things) lui avait-on laiss^s ? N'avait-il pas de nourriture spirituelle ? Quel fut le premier soinde Selkirk ? De quoi couvrit-il les cabanes? D'oii tira-t-il ces peaux? Est-ce qu'il priait aussi Dieu ? Avait-il de quoi faire du pain ? Que mangeaitril done ? N'avait-il pas de poisson ? N'y avait-il pas d'ecrevisses ? Comment les mangeait-il ? Eut-il toujours assez de poudre ? Comment prenait-il alors les chevres ? Etait-il done si agile ? N'eut-il pas d'accident faclieux ? N'avait-il pas remarque le precipice ? So blessa-t-il par suite de cette chute ? Quand il revint a lui, dans quel etat se trouvait-il ? XX. VINGTIEME THE INFINITIVE. 1. The Infinitive sometimes takes the place of a noun. It is used as the subject of a sentence, where in English the Part. Pres. is often found . Ex . : Secourir les pauvres est une action louable. To relieve the poor is a praiseworthy action. Mtfdire est une infamie. Calumniating is shameful. THE INFINITIVE. 339 NOTE 1. In some instances it becomes properly a noun and takes the article with it, as: le manger, le boire, les vivres (victuals). If such an In- finitive is amplified by means of other words, it is better to write cest or c'&ait instead of est or etait, and sometimes also voila. Ex. : N'aimer que soi, c'est aimer pen de chose. To love no one but one's self is to love very little. NOTE 2- When this amplification is somewhat long, the Infinitive can- not remain at the beginning of the sentence, but must be placed after the predicate, and takes de before it. In order, however, not to confuse the sense and the construction of the sentence, ce or il is employed as a merely introductory subject ; ce, if a substantive follows, il, if an adjective. Ex- amples : C'est un Jionneur d'etre utile a sa patrie. 11 est glorieux de mourir pour sa patrie. NOTE 3. If this antecedent predicate have several or long amplifications the subject-infinitive is commonly introduced by an expletive que. Ex. : C'e"tait une grande nouveaute" pour le roi que d'entendre parler si naturelle' ment. 2. Where two imperatives are connected in English by and, if the first is a verb of motion the second must be translated in French by the Infinitive, and the conjunction omitted. Ex.: Go and see my brother, allez voir mon frere. Go and do it, Allez le faire. 3. A verb immediately preceded by and depending on another verb (auxiliaries excepted), or following a preposition, other than en, must be put in the Infinitive : Je vous le ferai savoir, sans etre presse*. 4. Comment, how ; que, what ; oil, where ; pourquoi, why, and a few other words similarly used in interrogations, are often followed by the Infinitive instead of the Indicative, when the sense will not thereby be rendered obscure. Thus "Pourquoi alter t" may mean " Why do you go ? " " Que faire? " " What is to be done"? " " Que dire ? " " What shall I say V 5. The Infinitive without a preposition is used in French after 340 XX. VINGTIEMB LE?ON. verbs of motion, as : alter, envoy er, etc. ; after verbs that denote a perception of the senses, as: entendre, sentir, voir, etc., and after the following verbs : Affirmer, to affirm. jurer, to swear. insurer, to assure. laisser, to let, to permit. wouer, to confess. fiier, to deny. cvmpter, to reckon, intend. oser, to dare. croire, to beliere. paraitre, to appear. daigner, to deign. penser, to think. declarer, to declare. pretendre, to pretend. desirer* to wish. pouvoir, to be able. devoir, to be obliged. reconnaitre, to acknowledge, e&'re, to say. savoir, to know, espe'rer,* to hope. sembler, to appear, to seem. faillir, to miss. souhaiter,* to wish. faire, to do. soutenir, to maintain. falloir (il faut), it must. Mmoigner, to testify. s'imaginer* to imagine. vouloir, to be willing. Examples : I 7 enez nous vozr demain. Come and see us to-morrow. Je cowrs Zui apprendre cette nouvelle. I hasten to tell him this news. 77 faut envoyer cJiercher If- mtfdecin. We must send for the doctor. Vous osez y -daignez, d&irez, etc. lui parlerl You dare, deign, wish, etc. to speak to him ! Je croyais , je dgsirais, etc. lui rendre un service. I thought , I wished , etc. to render him a service. Je compte , fespere, etc. alter a Paris. I intend , I hope, etc. to go to Paris. Je ne sais pas nager. I cannot swim. Croyez-vous avoir raison ? Do you belie /e you are in the right ? Je Ventends venir. I hear him coming. THE INFINITIVE. 341 NOTE 1. After the above four verbs marked,*' de is sometimes used, especially when they themselves stand in the Infinitive. Ex. : Peut-on espe"rer de vous voir demain ? Pcrsonne ne doit s'itnagincr de tout savoir. NOTE 2. The verb faire is used for to do, to make and to get, to cause ; in all these cases it is immediately followed, in French, by the Infinitive active without a preposition: Je ferai bdtirune maison. I will cause a house to be built. Vbulez-vous faire laver vos gants ? Will you have your gloves washed ? Je lui ferai faire un theme. I will make him write an exercise. 6. The simple Infinitive is governed further by the verbs: aimer* when used in the Conditional, I should like ; preferer, to prefer ; aimer autant, to like as much ; il vaut mieux, it is better. Examples : J*aimerais le voir, I should like to see him. // vaut mieux ce'der, it is better to yield. Je prefere rester a la maison, I prefer staying at home. NOTE. When, however, in the second member of a comparison a second Infinitive follows que, this latter takes de before it. Ex.: J'aime mieux mourir qu&de trahir mon secret. I will'rlther die than betray my secret. 7. The Infinitive is used after every preposition except en. Examples : An lieu de jouer, instead of playing. Sans aller, without going. Pour voir, for the purpose of seeing. THEME 52. 1. To speak too much is dangerous. 2. To clothe 1 the poor is a good work. 2 8. To lie is to disregard 3 God and to fear men. 4. To purchase peace of an enemy is to give him tho means of carry- * In regard to aimer with a consult $ 15 of this lesson. 342 XX. VINGTIBME LEgON. ing on 4 war. 5. Can you inform me whether the courier has arrived? 6. He has not yet arrived. 7. One must know [how] to keep 6 a secret. 8. This man thinks he knows (-fo/*.) everything. 9. We hope to see the queen. 10. When do you intend to re- turn? 11. I do not know precisely ; 6 but I hope to see you again soon. 12. The king caused the brave soldiers to be rewarded. 13. It is much better to keep silent 7 than to say such things. 14. The most unfortunate of men is he who thinks himself to be such (T). 15. He assured us that he had been there. 16. To yield 8 to ne- cessity 13 not to be [a] coward. 9 17. Eating, drinking, and sleeping were his only occupations. 18. I hastened to communicate 10 to him this intelligence. 11 19. He came to tell me that he had won noth- ing in the lottery. 20. Who would not rather (like to) be poor than possess unjustly acquired wealth? 12 21. Bayard said to the Constable de Bourbon : " It is better to perish fighting (en combat- tanf) for one's (sa) country, 13 than to conquer and (to) triumph H over it (d'elle) . 1. Vetir. 2. (Euvre, f. 3. Mepriser. 4. Continuer. 5. Taire. 6. Au juste. 7. Se taire. 8. Cider a. 9. Ldche. 10. Communiquer. 11. Nouvelle, f. 12. Des richesses mal acquises. 13. Patrie. 14. Triompher. THE INFINITIVE PRECEDED BY DE. 8. After a substantive which the verb limits, the English prepo- sition of with a Pres. Participle (of going, of seeing, etc.) is gen- erally expressed by de with the Infinitive. Ex. : Le de'sir de vous voir, the desire of seeing you. Sa manierede penser et d'agir (of thinking and acting). // est temps de partir, it is time to set out. J'ai riionneur de vous saluer. 9. The preposition de is placed before a verb in the Infinitive, after the adjectives : avide, content, mecontent, las, digne, Capable, incapable, etc., and in general after an adjective, whenever, by inverting the sentence, the clause containing the Infinitive might THE INFINITIVE. 343 be made the leading term of an assertion expressed as subject to some tense of to be. Ex.: Je suis curieux de savoir. I am anxious to know. Etes-vous las de travailler ? Are you tired with working 1 Get homme est capable de vous tromper. That man is capable of deceiving you. Vous etes tres-adroit d'avoir si bien re'ussi. You are very clever to have succeeded so well. 10. De is used before the Infinitive after impersonal verbs, such as : il convient, it is proper ; il importe, it concerns ; il s'agit, it is the question ; il suffit, it is enough ; il me tarde, I long, and after il est, il etait or il senible followed by an adjective, as : il est facile, il etait necessaire, etc. Ex.: H m'importe beaucoup de lui dire cela. It concerns me much to tell him this. H est beau de pardonner a son ennemi. It is a good thing to pardon one's enemy. II suffira de lui parler. It will be enough to speak to him. 11. De is used after que, than, in a comparison of predicates. See jSToEe, 6, of this lesson. THEME 53. 1. You have no cause 1 to be angry with (contre) me. 2. Were you at the concert yesterday ? 3.1 did not have the pleasure of seeing you. 4. The way 2 to be happy is to be virtuous. 5. Have you the intention of selling your horse ? 6. Not at all ; I intend to keep it. 7. I fear losing (to lose) your confidence. 3 8. It is too late ; it is time to go to bed. 9. The art of dancing was known to the ancients. 10. It is disgraceful 4 to obey (a) one's passions. 11. The desire of appearing clever often prevents one becoming so. 5 12. We rejoice greatly to see you. 13. It is agreeable to hear the twitter 8 of the birds. 14. It is useless to warn 7 him. 15. It is a 344 XX. VINGTIEME LE^ON. beautiful thing to forgive one's enemies. 16. It is pleasant to live with one's friends. 17. It is the fate 8 of all human things to be of short duration. 9 18. The great secret of being happy is to work and to be virtuous. 19. I don't approve [of] your project of going to Europe. 20. Gentleness 10 is the surest means of escaping every offence. 21. It is sad to have no friends and to be forsaken. 11 1. Avoir sujet. 2. Le moyen. 3. Confiance, f. 4. LTonteux. 5. De le devenir. 6. Le gazouillement. 7. Avertir. 8. Le sort. 9. De rfavoir qu'une courte duree, 10. La douceur. 11. Abandonne. 12. De is further used before the Infinitive, when the latter is immediately preceded by any of the following verbs : Abstenir ($'), to abstain. dfendre (se), to decline. defier, to challenge. dfyecher (se), to hasten. d&accoutumer (se), ) A , ~ , \ ' > to leave off. accuser, to accuse. achever, to finish. qffecter, to affect. agir (s') (unip.), to be the question, deshabituer (se), ambitionner, to aspire to. appartenir, to pertain, to become. applaudir (s*), to rejoice, exult. apprehender, to apprehend. avertir, to warn. aviser (s j ), to determine. bldmer, to blame. bruler, to wish ardently. censurer, to censure. cesser, to cease. ch'agriner (se), to grieve. charger, to commission. choisir, to choose. commander, to command. conjurer, to entreat. conseiller, to advise. convenir, to become, to suit. convaincre, to convince. com'ger, to correct. craindre, to fear. d&ourager, to discourage. dedaigner, to disdain, scorn. dfendre t to forbid. de'sespe'rer, to despair. de'sirer, to desure. De is often omit- ted after this verb. de'soler (se), to be grieved. d&ester, to detest. De may be omit- ted. d&ourner, to dissuade. devoir (se), to owe it to one's self. diffe'rer, to put off. dire, to tell. disconvenir, to disown, deny. discontinuer, to discontinue. disculper, to exculpate. dispenser, to excuse from. dispenser (se), to forbear. dissuader, to dissuade. douter, to doubt. tcrire, to write. effbrcer (s'), to endeavor. effrayer (s'), to be frightened, empecher, to hinder. empresser (s'), to hasten. enrager, to be enraged. THE INFINITIVE. 345 entreprendre, to undertake. fyouvanter (s'), to be frightened. essayer, to try. Manner (s'), to wonder. fviter, to avoid. excuser (s'), to excuse one's self. feindre, to feign. ftliciter, to congratulate. finir, to finish. flatter (se), to flatter one's self. frmir, to shudder. garder (se), to take care. gemir, to moan, lament. glorifier (se), to pride one's self. hasarder, to hazard, to risk ; se hasar- der requires a. hater (se), to hasten. imputer, to impute. indigner (s'), to be indignant. ingfrer (s'), to intermeddle. inspirer, to inspire. furer, to swear. manquer, to fail. mditer, to contemplate. meler (se), to concern one's self. menacer, to threaten. mfriter, to" deserve. moquer (se), to laugh at. mourir (fig.), to long. TKfgliger, to neglect. nier, to deny. ojfrir, to offer. omettre, to omit. ordonner, to order. oublier, to forget. pardonner, to forgive. parler, to speak, joosser (se), to do without. permettre, to permit. persuader, to persuade, pzgwer (se), to take pride in, plaindre, to pity. plaindre (so), to complain. prescrlre, to prescribe. presser, to urge. presstr (se), to hasten. pr&umer, to presume. /?ner, to pray, entreat. promettre, to promise. proposer, to propose. proposer (se), to purpose. protester, to protest. pwwr, to punish. rassasier (se), to be sated. rebuter, to discourage. rebuter (se), to be weary. recommander, to recommend. refuser, to refuse. regretter, to regret. rejouir (se), to rejoice. remercier, to thank. repentir (se), to repent. reprendre, to censure. re'primander, to reprimand. reprocher, to reproach. reprocher (se), to reproach one's self. re'soudre, to resolve. When active, followed by Je ; passive, by a. rcssouvenir (se), to remember. n're, to laugh. risquer, to venture. seoz'r, to be becoming. rougir, to blush. scandaliser (se), to take offence. sommer, to summon. souffrir, to suffer. souhaiter, to wish. Z)e may be sup- pressed. soupfonner, to suspect. souvenir (se), to remember. sw^ire (unip.), to suffice. suggfrer, to suggest. supplier, to beseech, r, to endeavor. 346 XX. VINGTIEME tarder, (unip.), to long. se trouver bien, to derive benefit. tenter, to attempt. se trouver mal, to fare ill. trembler, to tremble. vanter (se), to boast. EXAMPLES. Tl cesse de pleuvoir, it ceases raining. Je vous conseille de partir, I advise you to set out. Je crains de vous deranger, I fear to disturb you. H est deyendu de fumer id, smoking is forbidden here. Dites-lui de venir, tell him to come. Vous me'ritez d'etre punt, you deserve to be punished. // risque de tout perdre, he risks losing everything. La forteresse fut soimne'e de se rendre, the fortress was summoned to sur- render. 13. After the following prepositions and conjunctions : pres, hors, avant; au lieu, loin, afin, a moins, de crainte, or de peur, d force (by) faute (for want of) , plutot que (rather than) . Ex. : Avant de partir, before departing. Au lieu de pleurer, instead of crying. Loin de se corriger, far from amending himself. A force de prior, by much entreaty. Dieu nous affl.ige afin de nous corriger, God sends us afflictions (in order) to amend us. Je sors, de crainte (or de peur) de vous deranger, I go for fear of disturbing you. THEME 54. 1. I advise you to stay here and (to) begin your studies. 2. I beg you to come at six o'clock. 3. The first step 1 towards good (vers le oien) is to avoid evil. 4. It is (c?est) the duty of a Chris- tian 2 to please God, to hurt nobody, and to do good, even to Iiis enemies. 5. He is not able to go so far. 6. You are very amiable in having come to pay 3 us a visit. 7. It is dangerous to trust 4 every- body. 8. The law of nature forbids us to do injustice (torC) to others. 9. A simple and temperate diet 5 lays the foundation 6 of firm health, [which is] capable of enduring 7 the greatest hardships. 8 10. I cannot help 9 recognizing in the laws of nature a wonderful THE INFINITIVE. 347 ait ; and I hesitate not to say, in the language of Scripture, 10 that every star hasteneth 11 to go whither the Lord scndeth it. 1. Le pas. 2. Chretien. 3. Faire. 4. Se fier a. 5. Nourriture. 6. Prepare. 7. Supporter. 8. Les fatigues. 9. APempechcr. 10. L'Ecriture Sainte. 11. Se dcpecher. THEME 55. 1. I was astonished, after such news, to see the man so quiet. 2. Before one writes (-&/.) one must know what one wishes to say. 3. Instead of working, he went to walk that day. 4. I longed 1 to see my native country 2 again ; accordingly 3 1 determined to embark 4 for Europe. 5. By much entreaty, I induced 5 my friend to accom- pany me. 6. For fear of offending him, I preferred to remain 6 silent. 7. The enemy retired, 7 in order 8 to make believe that he had given over 9 the siege. 8. When one advised Philip to expel 10 from his dominions 11 a man who had spoken ill of him ; " I will take care 12 not to do it," replied Philip; "he would go everywhere and speak ill of me." 1. II me tardait. 2. Pays natal. 3. CPest pourquoi. 4. S'enibarquer pour. 5. Engager a. C. Me taire. 7. Reflective verb. 8. Ajin de. 9. Eenoncer a. 10. Chasser. 11. Etat. 12. Se garder bien. THE INFINITIVE WITH . Workplace the preposition a before the Infinitive of a verb : 14. When the English Infinitive is passive, or can be changed to the passive without altering the sense. Ex. : La moisson a esptfrer, the harvest to be hoped for. Cette maison est a vendre, this house is to be sold. Je n'ai pas de temps a perdre, I have no time to lose. 15. After a substantive, when the following verb is or maybe expressed by in with the Pres. Part. Ex. : JTaurai beaucoup de plaisir a vous voir. I shall have great pleasure in seeing you. 16. After any adjectives which take a verb in the Infinitive to complete the sense, provided the verb preceding the adjective is not used impersonally. Especially after : 348 XX. VINGTIEME LEgON. Accessible, accessible. lent, slow. aistf, easy. pret, ready. attentif, attentive. prompt, quick. 607?, good. propre, fit, proper. dispose', disposed, inclined. sensible, sensible. difficile, difficult, hard. sourd, deaf. docile, obedient. utile, useful. habile, skilful. inutile, useless. facile, easy. (See also L. VIII., Gov. of Adj.) EXAMPLES. Cette lecon est facile a apprendre, this lesson is easy to learn. Ce fruit n'est pas bon a manger, this fruit is not good to eat. Ce theme est-il difficile a traduire ? is this exercise hard to translate 1 Nous sommes disposes a croire que, etc., we are disposed (inclined) to believe that, etc. Soyez prompts a faire le bien, be quick to do good. NOTE. Compare the following sentences, in which the verb preceding the adjective is used impersonally (see L. XX., 10). Ex. : II n'est pas facile de prononcer ce mot, it is not easy to pronounce that word. 77 est difficile de vaincreses passions, it is difficult to conquer one's passions. H semble difficile d' apprendre cette langue, it seems difficult to learn that language. The other way would be : Ce mot n'est pas facile a prononcer. Cette langue parait difficile a apprendre, etc. THEME 56. 1. This wood is to be sold. 2. These rooms are to let. 3. We have not a moment to lose. 4. There is much pleasure in taking a a walk. 5. Is this house to sell or to let ? 6. It is to let. 7. I perceived in him a kind 1 of repugnancy to learn Greek. 2 8. You know his courage in facing 3 dangers. 9. This girl spends all her time in playing. 10. There is more glory in dying like Nelson than in living in unmerited 4 honor. 11. Is German easy to learn? 12. It is not so cany as French. 13. That is easy to say, but not so easy to do. 14. That forest 5 is dangerous to pass. 15. I am ready to follow you, but I fear that you are not fit to guide 6 us, THE INFINITIVE. 349 16. Be attentive to seize the opportunity. 7 17. The just man is slow to punish but quick to reward. 18. Are you disposed to do what I tell you? 19. I shall be quick to perform what you command me. 1. Une sortc de repugnance. 2. Le Grec. 3. Affronter. 4. Au sein des hon- neurs qu'on tfa pas merites. 5. For 'it , f. 6. Guider, conduire. 7. ISoccasion. 17. The following verbs also govern the Infinitive with a : Abaisser(s'), to stoop. consentir, to consent. aboutir, to end in. consister, to consist. accorder(s'), to agree, to coincide. conspirer, to conspire. accoutumer, to accustom. consumer, to consume. acharner(s y ), to strive furiously. contribuer, to contribute. admettre, to admit, to permit. convier, to invite. Sometimes fol- aguerrir(s'), to become inured. lowed by de. aider, to help. couter, to cost. When used imper- aimer, to like (v. L. XX., 6). sonally it is followed by de. amuser(s 3 ), to amuse one's self with, decider, to decide. animer, to animate, to incite. determiner, to determine. appliquer(s'), to apply one's self. determiner (se), to resolve. apprendre, to learn, to teach. disposer, to dispose. appreter(s'), to prepare. disposer (se), to prepare one's self. aspirer, to aspire. divertir(se), to amuse one's self. assignerj^sQ assign, to summon. donner, to give. assujettir(s'), to subject one's self to. employer, to employ. attacher(s'), to strive. encourager, to encourage. attendre(s > ), to rely upon, expect. engager, to induce. attendre, to put off, delay. enhardir, to embolden. augmenter(s'), to increase. enseigner, to teach. autoriser, to authorize. entendre(s'), to be skilful, lo be a aviler(s'), to debase one's self. judge. avoir t to have. entreprendre, to undertake. balancer, to hesitate. essayer(s'), to attempt. borner(se), to confine one's self to. e'tonner(s'), to wonder. chercJier, to seek. etre, to be. complaire(se) , to delight in. &udier(s y ), to make it one's study. concourir, to concur. vertuer(se), to strive (may be fol- condamner, to condemn : also the ref. followed by pour), condescend, to condescend. exceller, to excel. 350 XX. VINGTIEMB LEgON. exciter, to excite. excrcer(s'), to practice. exliorter, to exhort. exposer(s') to expose one's self. hair, to hate. halituer(s'), to become used to. hasarder(se), to venture. hssiter, to hesitate. induire, to induce. instruire, to instruct. inttfresser, to interest. inviter, to invite. inettre, to set, to put. mettre(se), to begin. montrer, to show, to teach. obstiner(s'), to persist in. ojfrir(s'), to offer one's services. opinidtrer(s') to insist upon. parvenir, to succeed in. passer, to spend (time, etc.). pmclier, to incline. penser, to think, to intend. perseverer, to persevere. persister, to persist. plaire(se), to delight in. plier(se), to bend, bow, comply. porter, to induce. pousser, to urge, compel. prendre plaiser, to take pleasure. j?r^>arer(se), to prepare. pretendre, to lay claim, to sue. When signifying to wiran, to intend, it governs the infinitive without a preposition. provoquer, to provoke. rtfduire, to constrain. reduire(se), to be reduced. renoncer, to renounce. rfyugner, to be repugnant. resigner(se) , to be resigned. rtfsoudre(se), to resolve. resfer, to remain. Also used imp. russir, to succeed. risquer, to risk. servir, to serve. songer, to dream, think, purpose. suffire, to suffice. May be followed by pour. When used imperson- ally, is followed by c?e. larder y to defer, to delay. tew/re, to tend, to intend, to aim. femr, to be anxious, desirous. travailler, to labor. viser, to aim. vouer, to devote. Examples : J'aime a danser, I like to dance. Mon JUs apprend a chanter, my son learns to sing. Je vous autorise a vendre man jardin. I authorize you to sell my garden. Notre bonheur consiste a vivre suivant la nature. Our happiness consists in living according to nature. On m'a invite' a falre une promenade. I have been invited to take a walk. 18. The Infinitive preceded by a is idiomatically used after the verb etre to translate the English progressive forms, such as : 1 am THE INFINITIVE. 351 singing, I was writing, etc. The French Je suis a chanter, J'etais a ecrire, are, however, not so much used as the English participial inflections, which are generally rendered by the simpla verb Je chante, fecrivais, etc. 1 9. The Infinitive with a also occurs in abbreviated expressions which in reality are simply contracted subordinate sentences. Examples : A I' entendre, on d trait qu'il est innocent. To hear him, one would say he is innocent. A vous voir, on croirait . . . To see you, one would think . . . // &ait le premier a se jeter sur I'ennemi. He was the first to throw, i. e. who threw himself on the enemy. Je ne suis pas homme a me laisser qffenser. I am not the man to allow myself to be offended. Je me plagai de maniere a pouvoir tout observer. I placed myself in such a posture as to observe everything. 20. Yerbs with a or de. The following verbs require either a or de, according to the sense in which they are employed : 1. Commencer, to begin, is generally followed by a. Ex.: On a commence" a jouer, they have begun to play. But if ^..expresses simply a fact without any idea of continuation, de is used after it : Puisque j'ai commence' de rompre le silence. Since I have begun to break the silence. 2. Cont'muer a denotes an uninterrupted continuation of the action. Example .* Si vous continuez a travailler si fort, vous ruinerez votre saute". If you continue to work so much you will ruin your health. Continuer de denotes an action repeated, but after successive interrnp tions. Ex.: Mon ami continuait de m'&rire. My friend continued to write to me. 3. Dcyier requires a when it means to challenge, to provoke (to a competi- tion), and de when it means to set at defiance, or, defy to do something. 352 XX. VI^GTIEME LEgON. 4. S'effbrcer, synonymous with faire des efforts, to exert one's self, to take pains, takes a. Ex.: // s'effbrcait a faire son devoir. lie took pains (exerted himself) to do his duty. S'effbrcer de means to endeavor. Ex.: Je m'cfforcerai dobtenir cette place. I shall endeavor to get that place. 5. Eire, to be, when joined to ce y is followed by a if it denotes turn, and by de, if it denotes duty or right, as : C'est a vous a parler, it is your turn to speak. C'est au maitre d'ordonner, c'est a moi d'ob&ir. It is for the master to command, it is for me to obey. 6. Laisser, to leave, meaning to transmit, is followed by a ; meaning to cease or abstain, by de; and when used in the sense of to permit (to let), it governs the next verb without a preposition. 7. Manquer a denotes the omission or neglect of a duty : Pourquoi avez-vous manque' a faire votre exercice ? Why have you neglected to do your exercise ? Manquer de signifies to fail, to be on the point of: J'ai manque" de perdre la vie, I had nearly lost my life. 8. S'occiiper takes a in the sense of to employ one's time, to work at. Examples : H s'occupe a lire, he occupies himself with reading. L'auteur de " Paul ct Virginie" s'occupait a recueillir les mate'riaux decet cuvrage. The author of "Paul and Virginia" occupied himself in collecting the materials of this work. S'occuper de signifies mcttre ses soins, to pay attention to, to think much of. Ex.: H s'occvpe de delruire, les alms. He is thinking how to abolish abuses. 9. Venir governs the Infinitive with a, when it signifies to happen. Example: S'il venait a apprendre que vous etes id. If he happened to know that you are here. Venir is followed by de, when it is used to express a thing just happened (see P. I., L. XLVIL). Ex.: THE INFINITIVE. 353 Mes soeurs viennent de sortlr. My sisters have just gone out. 10. Tarder a signifies to delay. Ex.: Ne tardez pas a lui envoyer de I 'argent. Do not delay sending him some money. Tarder, as an impersonal verb : il me tarde, I long, governs the Infiu- itive with de. Ex.: n me tarde de le revoir, I long to see him again. 21. The following eleven verbs may take either a or de: Ccnsentir, to consent. s'enteter, to be obstinate in. contraindre, to compel. essayer, to try. demander, to demand. obliger, to oblige. forcer, to force. ouUier, to forget. s'empresser, to be eager. tdcher, to try. s' engager, to engage, agree. Examples : // ne demande qu'a manger et a boire. He demands nothing but to eat and drink. Elk demanda au del de lui pardonner sa faute. She prayed to heaven to forgive her fault. Le banquier s'engagea a (or de) payer la somme de mille francs. The banker agreed to pay the sum of a thousand francs. . THEME 57. 1. When the captain began to speak, all the soldiers listened* attentively. 2. In the spring the trees begin to cover themselves with leaves. 3. They continued to live in peace. 4. We have continued to write to him, but he has not yet answered us. 5. The unfortunate never fail to complain. 6. I have failed to do what I had promised you. 7. I will endeavor to satisfy him. 8. It is long before he comes (he delays to come). 9. I long to have finished my work. 10. At last I longed (il me tar da) to see again my native country. 11. That woman is occupied only with iron- ing. 2 12. Do not fail to be here at a quarter to six. 13. Come and see us this evening. 14. Is your brother at home ? 15. No, 23 354 XX. VINGTIEMB LEgON. he has just gone out. 16. We have just received your letter. 17. lie agreed to inform you of the result. 3 1. Ecouter. 2. Eepasser. 3. Resulted. INFINITIVE WITH THE PREPOSITIONS POUR, PAR, APRES, SANS. 22. Pour. Whenever the English to before an Infinitive expresses a design or purpose, and can be changed into, in order to, pour must be used. Ex. : // attend de V argent pour payer ses dettes. He is expecting money to pay his debts. J'ai fait mon possible pour les reconcilier. I have done all in my power to reconcile them. Je I'ai fait moi-mcine pour ne pas vous deranger. I did it myself not to disturb you. . 23. The preposition pour is also used after the adjective follow- ing assez, trop, suffisant, or after the verb suffire. Ex.: M. R. est assez riche pour acheter cette campagne. Mr. R. is rich enough to buy that estate. Caroline est trop jeune pour faire cet ouvrage. Coroline is too young to do this work. 24. The French usage differs from the English in employing the Infinitive instead of a separate clause, when the dependent clause has the same subject as the principal clause : Je crois etre blesse", I think I am wounded. J'espere me'riter votre confiance, I hope I deserve your confidence. Je voudrais etre riche, I wish I were rich. THE3IE 53. 1. I travel to see the world. 2. The army was too fatigued to renew 1 the attack. 8. I will do everything to oblige you, 4. God has not given us hearts to hate one another. 5. lie is going into the country to shoot. 2 6. Some people are hated without deserving 8 THE INFINITIVE. 355 it. 7. It is necessary to know the human heart to judge well of others. 4 8. After having terminated some affairs at home, I shall begin by paying 5 some visits. 9. Nobody can be happy without practising 6 virtue. 10. If the emperor Titus passed one day with- out doing good 7 to (a) anybody, he used 8 to say: "I have lost this day." 1. Renouveler Vattaque. 2. C7iasser. 3. Meriter. 4. Des autres. 6. Faire. 6. Pratiquer. 7. Du Men. 8. H avail coutume. HEADING LESSON. ALEXANDRE SELKIRK. (Suite.; " Une longue habitude me fit manger la viande sans sel et sans pain. Dans la saison j'avais quantite de bons navets 1 qui avaient &e semes par Pequipage 2 de quelque vaisseau et qui couvraient plusieurs arpents 3 de terre. Je ne manquais pas non plus d'exeel- lents choux 4 que je cueillais sur une espece de palmier et que j'as- saisonnais avec le fruit du piment, qui est le meme que le poivre do la Jamaique, et dont Fodeur est delicieuse. " Messouliers et mes habits furent bientot uses a force de courir k travers les bois et les broussailles. 5 Cependant mcs pieds s'endur- cirent 6 $i bien a la fatigue, que je courais partout sans peine. " Revenu 7 enfin de ma melancolie, je me divertissais quelquefois h graver mon nom sur 1'ecorce 8 des arbres avec la date de mon exil, ou bien h chanter et a dresser 9 k la danse des chats et des chevreaux. Lorsque je n'eus plus d'habits, je me fis un juste-au-corps 10 et un bonnet (cap) de peaux de chevres que je cousis ensemble avec de petites courroies ; u un clou 12 me servait d 'aiguille. Je me fis aussi des chemises d'un morceau de toile que j'avais. Quand mon cou- teau fut use' jusqu'au dos, j'en forgeai d'autres avec quelques cercles de fer que j'avais trouve*s sur le rivage, et je les aiguisai 13 sur des pierres. " C'est ainsi que la ndcessitd m'apprit h pourvoir h tous mes besoins." 356 XX. VINGTIEME LE 1. Turnips. 2. The crew. 3. Acre. 4. Cabbage. 5. Brushwood. 6. To harden. 7. Recovered. 8. Bark. 9. To train. 10. Jacket. 11. Strap. 12. A nail. 13. To sharpen. 14. Stay. 15. To anchor. 16. To fire or shoot at. 17. To run about, ramble. 18. Distress. QUESTIONNAIRE. Comment mangeait-il la viande ? N'avait-il pas autre chose a manger ? Manquait-il de choux ? Ou les cueillait-il ? Avec quoi assaisonnaitril scs choux? Avait-il toujours des souliers et des habits ? Comment se divertissait-il quelquefois ? Lorsque ses habits furent uses, que fit Selkirk ? De quoi se servit-il pour coudre les peaux de chevres ? De quoi se fit-il des chemises ? Quand son couteau fut use, que fit-il ? NVt-il jamais vu de vaisseaux qui passaient ? De quelle nation *etaient-ils ? Que firent-ils lorsqu'ils Feurent apergu ? Fut-il decouvert ? Qu'aperQut-il enfin? Pourquoi alluma-t-il un feu sur le rivage ? Ce signal fut-il remarqu^ ? THE PRESENT PARTICIPLE. 357 XXI. VINGT ET UNIEMB LEON. THE PRESENT PARTICIPLE. 1. The Present Participle is invariable in French. Ex. : Une femme mourant de soif. A woman dying of thirst. Une preuve convainquant tout le monde. A proof convincing everybody. Une mere consolant sa file. A mother consoling her daughter. Une pluie fecondant la terre. A rain fructifying the earth. 2. When the Present Participle loses its verbal nature and be conies a participial adjective, it follows the noun, and agrees with it as an adjective. Ex. : Une femme mouranle. A dying woman. Une preuve convainquqnte. A convincing proof. Des paroles consolantes. Consoling words. 3. The Present Participle is often used in English as a substan- tive, which is not the case in French. It can sometimes be rendered by a noun, in most cases by the Infinitive (see Leeson XX., 1), Examples : La lecture est un passe-temps agralle. Heading is an agreeable pastime. Sa passion dominante est la chasse. His ruling passion is hunting. I like dancing, faime a danser. 4. When an English Present Participle has reference to a sub- stantive which is not in the Nominative Case, it is rendered in French 358 XXI. VINGT ET UNIEME by the Present or Imperfect of the Indicative, with the relative pronoun qui before it. Ex. : H portait une louteille qui contenait du poison. He carried a bottle containing poison. 5. An English Present Participle preceded by any preposition but by and on ( 7), such as, a?, from, before, after, for, without, is rendered in French by the Infinitive with de, a, pour or saizs (as TO have seen before). Ex. : L'art d'&rire est tres-ancien. The art of writing is very old. Je connais sa maniere de penser et d'agir. I know his manner of thinking and acting. Ne Vempecltez pas de faire du lien. Do not prevent him from doing good. Je I'ai rencontre' avant de partlr. I met him before leaving. On ne peut pas trahir la verite sans se rendre coupable. One cannot speak against the truth without being guilty. 6. Sometimes the English Present Participle is used substantively with a possessive pronoun before it ; then it must be rendered in French by the conjunction que and the Indicative or Subjunctive, according as the case requires. Ex. : Je doute qu'il soil un honnete homme. I doubt his being an honest man. Nous avons appris qu'il s'est fait soldat. We heard of his becoming a soldier. THEME 59. 1. Miss Mary is an obliging young lady. 2. I listened 1 [to] her encouraging words. 3. He has given us consoling news. 4. These books are very interesting. 5. That mother, in her supplicating 2 attitude, would have appeared ton ;hing, even without the surprising eloquence of her discourse. 6. The young soldier, preceding all the others, seized 3 the standard. 4 7. That mountain, commanding an extensive 5 view, was very well calculated 6 for our observation!. 8. Caroline, weeping bitterly, 7 threw herself into her mother's arms. THE PEESENT PARTICIPLE. 359 9. I have seen your brother ( 4) playing in the garden. 10. Alexander asked the physicians standing 8 by (autour de) him if he should die of (de) his illness. 11. The soldiers of Alexander, for- getting their wives and children, looked upon 9 the Persian gold as 10 their plunder. 11 12. It ceased raining. 13. He risked losing his life. 14. I am afraid of losing her confidence. 15. The desire of appearing clever often prevents one from becoming so. 16. He left 12 without paying his debts. 17. I heard of his being ( 6) married. 18. We noticed 13 his looking at it (le). 19. Rewrote to me without 14 his father's knowing it. o 1. Ecouter qch, 2. To supplicate, supplier. 3. tfemparer de qch. 4. Le dra- peau. 5. Etendue, f. G. Propre a. 7. To weep bitterly, fondre en larmes. 8. Se tenir. 9. To look upon, regarder qch. 10. Comme. 11. Butin, m. 12. Par- 4r. 13. Remarquer. 14. Sans que with the Subj . THE GERUND, PRESENT PARTICIPLE WITH EN. 7 The Gerund is the Present Participle with the preposition en prefixed. It generally denotes 1, either a means by which the ob- ject of the leading clause is attained, or 2, a simultaneous action, that is, an action during the transaction of which another is acted by the same subject. It is always invariable, and corresponds to the English Present Participle preceded by the prepositions J#, in, and on or while ; or is sometimes rendered by the simple Participle with- out preposition. Ex. : 1. Denoting a means : On se forme I' esprit en lisant de Ions livres. We form our minds by reading good books. Nous avons obtenu la paix en faisant de grands sacrifices. We have obtained peace by making great sacrifices. // se sauva en sautant par la fenetre. He saved himself by jumping through the window. 2. Denoting a simultaneous action : La dtfesse sourit en voyant Teltfmaque. The goddess smiled on seeing Telemachus, // me dit cela en tremUant. He trembled as he told me this. 360 XXI. VINGT ET UN1EME LE(JON. Je Uai rencontre* en allant au chateau. I met him in going (as I was going) to the castle. Je Us le journal en dejeunant. I read the paper while breakfasting. NOTE. The English by with a Participle is rendered in two cases only by par and the Infinitive, viz., with commencer, to commence, begin, and Jin /.) it was our duty [to show him]. 10. My friend rendered me every service 9 he could. 11. Have you bought some cigars ? 10 12. Yes, I have bought [some]. 13. Are not these trees very high ? 14. I have seen higher ones. 15. The ship which we saw launched 11 has now the name of Arion. 16. The play 12 I saw performed 13 last night has been very much applauded. 17. Imitate the virtues which you have heard praised (Inf.). 18. We used 14 all the means we could. 1. Horloger. 2. Laisser. 3. Employer. 4. Fouvoir, m. 5. Le Men. 6. Que tfhommes. 7. Eviter. 8. Fait. 9. Tous les services qu\ 10. Cigare, m. 11. Lan- cer. 12. La piecz. 13. Jouer* 14. Employer. THE PARTICIPLE ABSOLUTE. 369 XXIII. VINGT-TEOISIEME THE PARTICIPLE ABSOLUTE. 1. The Participle Absolute is used, as in English, instead of accessory and subordinate clauses beginning with a conjunct ioa which have the same subject as the leading clause. Ex. : Regulus s'e'loigna de Rome, tenant les yeuxfixe's a la terre, et laissant safenunc ct scs enfants. L'ennemi, voyant (as he saw) noire petit nombre, recommencd le combat. Ne'optoleme, poursuivant son discours, me dit, etc. Le charpentier, laissant son ouvragea moiti fait t alia diner. L'empereur Conrade, ne voulant plus tenter la fortune, abandonna subitement la Teri'e-Sainte > etc. Ne sachant oue faire, il prit ce parti. 2. When the accessory sentence expresses an event which has taken place before another expressed in the principal sentence, the compound form of the Participle Absolute (ayant vu, ayant fait, etc.) is used. Ex. : Le comte de Toulouse r ay 'ant somm (having summoned) la ville de se rendre, la dedaTa sa possession. Le roi ayant tout sacri/ie" pour le bonheur de son peuple, fut enfin la victimc de ses bonnes intentions. Lysandre ayant fait un riche butin (booty) dans la prise d'Athenes, envoya a Laafd&none tout l'or et I'argent qu'il avait pris. THEME 64. 1. As the two combatants would not yield, 1 they were pierced with wounds. 2 2. As Mentor heard the voice of the goddess who was calling her nymphs into the wood, he waked 3 Telemachus. 3. Grantor, seeing that I was already very near him, redoubled his zeal, and attempted 1 to barricade my way. 4. That mountain, command- ing an extensive 5 view, was well calculated 6 for our observations. 5. I cannot accompany you into the country, having some business that 2-4 370 XXIII. VINGT-TEOISIEMB LEgON. requires my presence here. 6. How many people do we see, who, " knowing the value of time, waste 7 it improperly. 8 7. Wishing to make something of my son, I have put him into your hands. 8. Newton, having taken the average 9 of years during which the kings of the various 10 countries have reigned, reduced each reign to about twenty- two years. 9. Napoleon, seeing that the battle of Waterloo was lost, drew his sword and wished desperately 11 to fling himself into the tumult of the battle. 10. Franklin, [after] having looked everywhere for employment, 12 reentered at the printer 13 Keimer's. 1. Ceder. 2. De coups. 3. EveilUr. 4. Chercher a barrer. 5. Etendu. 6. Propre a. 7. Perdre. 8. Mai a propos. 9. Le terme moyen. 10. Different. 11. En desespere. 12. De I' 'occupation. 13. Chez Vimprimeur K. 3. The Participle Absolute can also be used in the place of sub- ordinate sentences beginning with a conjunction, if they have a dif- ferent subject. Ex. : Le roi.etant mort, son Jils lid succe'da. The king being dead his son succeeded. La ville aijant t prise, les soldats la pillereni. The town being taken, the soldiers pillaged it. Le repas tant jini, nous nous mimes en route. When diner was over, we set off. fctani is sometimes omitted. Ex. : Le repas fini (for e'tant fini), nous nous mimes en route. When dinner was over, we set off. L'ope'ration achevee, le roi remonta a cheval. The operation being performed, the king mounted again on horseback. Cette disposition faite, nous entrdmes dans la salle de reception. When this arrangement was made, we entered the parlor. THEME 65. 1. My mother being ill, I cannot go out to-day. 2. Franklin, geeing that all his efforts were useless, went back to his country, in order to brave the storm 1 with his countrymen. 3. Wishing to see him, I went to his house. 4. Mary and her brother Henry, per- ceiving a pretty butterfly, 2 endeavored to catch 3 it. 5. The gates being closed, we could not enter. 6. Philip sent deputies to the Scythians, 4 demanding (pour demander) a part of the expenses 5 of THE PARTICIPLE ABSOLUTE. 371 the seig? ; the Scythians, alleging 6 the barrenness 7 of their land, replied that, haying no riches sufficient to satisfy so great a king, they thought [it] more 8 unfit to pay but 9 a part, than to refuse the whole. 10 7. The wound still bleeding, 11 she fainted. 12 8 Every- body will respect the magistrates who, forgetting their own interest, observing the law, favoring 13 virtue and restraining 14 vice, seek the welfare 15 of their country. 1. L-orage, m. 2. Papitton, m. 3. Attraper. 4. Scythe, m. 5. Lcs frais. Q. AlUgucr. 7. La sterilite. 8. Mains convenaUe. 9. De ne payer qu'une partie. 10. Le tout. 11. Saigner. 12. S'evanouir. 13. Favoriser. 14. lieprimer. 15. IA lien. READING LESSON. GESLEIl CONDUIT TELL A KUSNACII. (Fin.) Enfia 1'orient 1 se colore, ct la tempete semble s'appaiser aux pre- miers rayons de 1'aurore. Lc jour naissant deeouvre h Tell lea roches voisines d'Altdorf, avant que le tyran ait eu le temps de les reconnaitre ; Guillaume y dirige sa barque ct la fait marcher plus rapidcment. Gesler, dont la ferocite revient a mesure que le dan- ger s'eloigne, observe avec des yeux sombres. II veut, mais il n'ose, pas encore le faire charger de liens. 2 Ses soldats et ses mate- lots 3 reconnaissent bientot ou ils sont, en instruisent le gouvcmeur, qui s'avan^ant vers Tell avcc colere, lui demande d'une voix terrible, pourquoi la barque, qu'il a guide e, a repris le chemin d'Altdorf. Guillaume sans lui repondre, pousse la barque droit 4 h un rocher peu eloigne* de la rive, 5 saisit d'une main prompte Fare et la fieche 6 qu'un archer tenait a la main, et, rapide comme 1' eclair, s'elance 7 de la teque sur le rocher. La, sans s'arreter, il saute sur un autre lue, gravit 8 aussitot la roche escarpee, 9 et se montre sur le sommet, sernblable a 1'aigle dcs Alpes quand il se repose aupres des nuages, et qu'il promene ses yeux pedants sur les troupeaux des valions. Le gouverneur etonne pousse un cri de fureur, de rage. II com- mande aussitot qu'on debarque, et que ses soldats, disperses, envi- ronnent de toutes parts le roc ou il yoit le heros. On obeit^ les 372 XXIII. VINGT-TROISIEME archers descendant ct preparent deja leurs arcs ; Gesler, qui marehe au milieu d'cux, yeut que leurs fleches reunies s'abreuvent toutes du sang de Guillaume. Guillaume aussi a ses desseins. II no s'ar- rete, il ne se montre que pour attirer 1'ennemi. II laisse approcher cettc troupe armee jusqu'a la juste distance ou son trait 6 peut don- ner la mort. II regarde, fixe Gesler, pose sa fleche sur sa corde, et. Fadrcssant au coeur du gouverneur, il la fait voler 10 dans les airs La fleche vole, siffle, 11 frappe au milieu du coeur de Gesler. Lo tyran tombe, be*gaie sa fureur, et son ame s'exhale au milieu des imprecations. Tell a deja disparu ; plus leger que le faon, 12 s'est precipite du sominet du roc, il court, il vole sur la glace ; il gagne, traverse des senders 13 deserts, et prend le chemin d'Altdorf. Florian. 1. The east. 2. Fetters, chains. 3. Sailor. 4. Straight. 5. Bank. 6. Arrow. 7. Jumps. 8. To climb up. 9. Steep. 10. To fly. 11. To hiss. 12. The fawn. 13. Path. QUESTIOXNAIEE. Que decouvre le jour naissant a. Tell? Que fait Gesler? Quelle etait I'lntention de Gesler ? De quoi les soldats et les matelots instruisent-ils le gouverneur ? Quand Gesler apergut les roches d'Altdorf, que demanda-t-il a Tell? Guillaume lui fit-il une reponse ? Ou pousse-t-il la barque? Que saisit-il d'une main prompte ? Ou s'elance-t-il de la barque? A qui ressemble-t-il quand il se montre stir le somnict ? Qu'est-ce que le gouverneur commando alors ? Fut-a obei ? Gesler que veut-il ? Juscp'ou Tell laissc-t-il approcher la troupe ? Qui veut-il frapper ? Sa fleche l'a-t-ellc atteint ? (tye fait Tell alors? Quel clicmin Tell prcnd-il? GOVERNMENT OF VERBS. 373 XXIV. VINGT-QUATRIEME LEON. GOVERNMENT OF VEKBS. 1. Many verbs which in English require a preposition, such as at, of, from, to, ivith, for, etc., take in French a direct object. Such are : approuver, to approve of. envoyer chercher, to send for. attendre, to wait for. espe'rer, to hope for. chercher, to look (seek) for. expier, to atone for. connaitre, to be acquainted with, to fournir, to supply with. know. prier Dieu, to pray to God. considerer, to look upon. regarder, to look at. desirer, to wish for. rencontrer, to meet with. devenir, to become. r&oudre, to resolve upon. fcouter, to listen to. Examples : Attendez-vous noire frere, are you waiting for your brother 1 Qu'etes-vous devenu, what has become of you ? // faut envoyer chercher le me'decin, we must send for the doctor. 2. TChe following verbs which in English usually require a direct object take in French the preposition a : Apprendre > qch. a qn., to teach one permettre a qn. f to allow one. enseigner ) something. plaire a qn., to please one. conseiller qch. a qn., to advise. reme'diera qch., to remedy. convenir a qn., to suite any one. renoncer a qch., to renounce, abdicate deplaire a qn., to displease one. something. de'sobe'ir a qn., to disobey one. re'signer a qch.> to resign something. dire a qn., to tell some one. roister a qn., to resist one. falre tort a qn., to wrong one. ressembler a qn., to resemble one. se Jier a qn., to trust one. subvenir a, to relieve. nuire a qn., to hurt, injure one succe*der a, to succeed. Mir a qn., to obey one. se soustraire a, to keep out of the ordonner a qn., to order. way. pardonner a, to pardon, forgive one. survivre a, to outlive, survive. parvcnir a e^A., to attain. toucher a qch., to toilth something. 374 XXIV. VINGT-QUATRIEME LECON. Examples : Pouvez-vous enseigner le latin a man Jils f Can you teach my son Latin ? H faut obcir a vos parents. You must obey your parents. On ne peut pas plaire a tout le monde. You cannot please everybody. Ne vous Jiez pas a lui. Do not trust him. THEME 66. 1. Who teaches your brother French? 2. Mr. R., who is a very good teacher. 3. This ribbon does not please my sister. 4. You have wronged your neighbor; you have hurt his credit; 1 at least he says so (le). 5. A good Christian forgives his enemies. 6. Miss Mary resembles her mother [very] much. 7. Will you allow your pupils to to take a walk this afternoon ? 8. Yes, I will allow them to go with you. 9. Children.; must obey their parents. 10. The oScer disobeyed the orders of the king. 11. The son succeeded his father. 12. The riches of the count would iiave relieved the wants 2 of the poor. 13. He who wishes to please everybody, runs the risk 3 of pleasing (de ne plaire) nobody. 14. Louis the Fourteenth survived his son, the dauphirc, and his grandson. 4 15. Do not touch anything. 1. Credit, m. 2. Besoin, m. 3. Courir risque. 4. Petit-fils. 3. Verbs which require in English the prepositions 0/*and from are generally followed in French by de. Besides these, the follow- ing also require de : Accabler de, to overwhelm. approcher de, ) s'acquitter de qch, to discharge. s'approcher de, ) s'ajfliger de, to be afflicted at. s'armer de, to arm one's self with. s'apercevoir de,* to remark, to per- avoir besom de, to want, to require, ceive. avoir pitie' de, to pity. * Apercevoir, when not a pronominal verb, governs the direct object and applies to visible things, as : J'apergus une fiamme. GOVERNMENT OF VERBS. 375 to distrust. avoir or prendre soin de, to take care of. bruler de, to burn with. charger de, > cooler de, \ to Ioad wlth ' se contentcr de, to be satisfied or con- tented with. couvrir de, to cover with. se defier de, se mejier de, depcndre de, to be dependent on. envelopper de, to wrap up in. faire de, to do with (to make use of). faire present de, to present with. fe'Hciterqn. deqch., to congratulate on, fourmiller de, to swarm with. honorer de, to honor with. jouir de qch., to enjoy. medire de qn., to traduce, to slander. se meler de qch., to meddle with. se moquer de qn., to laugh at. mourir de, to die of. munir de, to furnish, provide -with. se passer de qch., to do without. perir de, to perish or die of. profiler de qch., to profit by. pourvoir de, to provide with. punir de qch., to punish for. r&ompenser de qch,, to reward for. regarder de, to regard with. se rejouir de, to rejoice at. remercier de qch., to thank for some- thing. rernplir de, to fill with. se repentir de, to repent. rire de, to laugh at. se souvenir de, to remember, to recol- lect. sourirc de, to smile at. triompher de, to triumph over. se tromper de, to mistake. Examples : Approchez-vous du feu, come near the fire. Je me suis defi de ses promesses. I distrusted his promises. On m'accabla de reproches. They overwhelmed me with reproaches. Ette sourit de noire cmbarras. She smiled at our embarrassment. THEME 67. 1. He was overwhelmed with reproaches. 1 2. You must dis- charge that obligate. 3. Death pities nobody, neither rich nor poor. 4. Come near the window. 5. Nature wants few things. 6. She is contented with little. 7. Have you not perceived this mistake? 8. No, sir, I have not perceived it (en). 9. The ground 2 was covered with snow. 10. The general honored me with 376 XXIV. VINGT-QUATRIEME his friendship. 11. Your brother presented me with this silver pen- holder. 3 12. The impious 4 mock at virtue and religion. 13. Do not meddle with my affairs. 14. Distrust that man ; he will laugh at your benefits 5 when he no longer requires them. 15. Never tra- duce (slander) anybody. 16. Mr. A. is a very strong man; he enjoys good health. 17. If he repents his faults, I will pardon him, 18. I cannot do without his help. 6 19. I hope (that) you will profit by this experience. 20. Kemember your promise. 21. I remember that story very well. 22. Everybody rejoices at that victory. 7 1. Reproclic, m. 2. La terre. 3. Porte-plume, m. 4. Impie. 5. Bienfait, m. 6. Secours, m. 7. Victoire, f. 4. Yerbs with different governments. The following verbs have different governments according to their different significations : 1. Abuser qn. } to deceive. abuser de qch. y to abuse, to misuse. 2. Assister qn., to assist, to help. assister a qch., to be present at. 3. Changer qch., to change, to alter, to exchange. changer de qch., to change, to change one thing for another. changer en, to turn into. 4. Convenir de qch., to agree (construed with etre). convenir a qn., to suit. 5. Croire qn., to believe some one. croire qch., to believe something. croire a qch., to believe in something. croire en, to believe in. 6. Deinander qn., to ask or inquire for some one. demander qch., to ask for somothing. deinander a qn., to ask a person. demander qch. a qn., to ask something of some one or to ask some one for something. 7. Echapper and s'e'chapper de, to escape from, i. e. out of. tfcJiapper a, to escape from, i. e. to avoid, to be preserved from. 8. Se facher de qch., to be sorry for. " " contre qn., to be angry at. 9. Jnsulter qn. or qch. (dir. obj.), to offend by insults. insulter a qn. or a qch., to deride, to scorn, to insult. 10. Jouer a qch., to play at a game. GOVERNMENT OF VEEBS. 377 jouer de V argent, to play for money. jouer d'un instrument, to play (on) an instrument. se jouer de qn., to laugh at, to deceive. 11. Manquer (neuter verb without a government), to be wanting or miss- ing. manquer qn. or qch., to miss, to fail in. manquer de qch., to be wanting in, to be short of. manquer a qn. or a qch. (also contre qch.), to fail in, to omit. 12. Rgpondre a qch., to answer. re'pondre de qch., to answer for. 13. Satisfaire qn., to satisfy, to content. satisfaire a qch., to fulfil duties to . . . , to satisfy. 14. Servir qn., to serve one, to be at one's service. servir de qch., to serve as something, for some one. 15. Souscrire qch., to subscribe, to sign. souscrire a qch., to approve of, to subscribe to. \Q. User qch., to use up, to wear out. user de qch., to make use of, to use. Examples : On a change" les conditions, they have altered the conditions. J'ai change de logement, I have taken other lodgings. Que demandez-vous, what do you ask for ? Demandez a votre mere, ask your mother. J'ai demande' mon argent a mon oncle, I have asked my money of my '"ncle. '*tf Repondez a ma question, answer my question. Pouvez-vous re'pondre de sa probite", can you answer for his honesty ? 5. Special remarks on some verbs. 1. Acheter qch. a qn., to buy something of some one. 2. Aider qn., to succor, to support, to give means of doing. aider a qn., to help, to aid physically in doing something. 3. Applaudir, to applaud something, governs the dir. obj. applaudir, to applaud a person, governs the ind. obj. 4. Approcher qch. (active verb), to approach, to advance, to bring or push near. approcher qn., to approach to have free access. approcher de qn. or de qch., to approach some one or something; to go or draw nearer (sec 3). 5. Emprunter, to borrow, governs the indirect object of the person when 378 XXIV. YINGT-QUATRIEME represented by a personal pronoun (such as lui, leur, nous, etc.). But it requires a or de when the person is expressed by a noun (as : a or de mon frere, of my brother. 6. En croire qch., to trust, to depend upon. 7. Heriter qch. de qn., to inherit something from some one. If, however, no person is mentioned, the thing follows the preposition de. 8. Persuader qn. de qch., to convince a person of the truth of a thing. persuader qch. a qn., to persuade one to do something. 9. Redoubler qch. (dir. obj.), means to redouble, i. e. to reiterate. redouble- de qch., to redouble, i. e. to augment in force. 10. Penser a means to have one's mind upon. penscr de, to have an opinion of. Examples : Approchez la table, approach the table (bring it nearer). Tout le monde pent approcher notre prince. Everybody has free access to our prince. Ne vous approchez pas tant da bord. Do not go so near the edge. Pensez a moi, think of me. Que pensez-vous de cda, what do you think of that ? 6. On the verb faire. The verb faire when followed by an Infinitive with a dir. obj., requires the person in the ind. obj., the two verbs being considered as one verbal expression the sense of which is is always active. The reason of it is that an active verb cannot have two direct complements (see L. XXII, 10). Ex. : Je lid ai fait e"crire cinquante mots. I have made him write fifty words. Sa mere lui a fait raconter cette histoire. His mother caused him to relate that story. But if there be no direct object after the Infinitive that follows faire, the person stands in the direct object. Ex.: Je les ai fait partir, I have made them depart. Nous les avons fait renoncer a leur preventions. We have made them abandon their pretentious. 7. The verbs ecouter, entendre, laisser and voir, also, are some- times used in this manner, as : GOVERNMENT OF VERBS. 379 Je lui ai vu maltraiter son chien. I saw him ill-treat his dog. But this is not generally adopted, and it is better to say : Je I'ai vu maltraiter son chien. Jai vu le petit gargon (dir. obj.) maltraiter son chien. 8. When the Infinitive is followed by a subordinate sentence with qite, the indirect object is preferred, as : Je lui ai entendu dire qu'il partirait. I heard him say that he was going to leave. J J ai entendu dire a son pere qu'il lui pardonnerait. I heard his father say that he would forgive him. THEME 68. 1. The jailer 1 has deceived the prisoner with respect to (sur) the lot 2 which awaited him. 2. Have you not abused our patience ? 3. "We have abused it (en). 4. The hour from 10 to 11 does not suit my sister. 5. We have agreed on the price. 3 6. Let us always assist the poor. 7* I could not be present at the funeral. 4 8. I have changed my opinion. 9. Could you change me this napoleow? 10. Industry is the true philosopher's 5 stone that changes all metals into gold. 11. Whom have you asked for ? 12. I inquired for my eldest 6 brother. 13. Have you asked your friend for money? 14. I have not asked him for any. 15. Do not be- lieve that man, he is a liar. 7 16. I do not believe in his promises. 17. We believe in God. 18. The little bird has escaped from his cage. 19. Can 8 you play at chess? 9 20. No, Sir, but I will play at cards with you, if you like. 10 21. I play (on) the violin and my sister plays on the piano. 22. We often play together. 23. I was too late, I missed the train. 11 24. A soldier must (doit) not fail in courage. 25. The pupil redoubled his application, when he heard that a prize 3 would bo given. 26. The man is too poor, he cannot satisfy his creditors. 12 27. Do you make use of specta- cles? 13 28. Yes, I always wear spectacles; I am short-sighted. 14 29. Make him read a chapter 15 or two. 30. I made him relate 16 380 XXY. VINGT-CINQUIME the story a second time. 31. Charles the XII made all that muL titude cross 17 the river, without retaining 18 a single soldier prisoner. 1. Le geoher. 2. Le sort. 3. Prix,m. 4. Fnnerailles, f. pi. 5. Pliilosophale. 6. Aine. 7. Menieur. 8. Savoir. 9. ^fzu: echecs. 10. Vouloir. 11. ie convoi. 12. Creancier. 13. Lunettes, f. pi. 14. J'ai Za vwe fcasse. 15. CJiapitre, m. 16. Raconter. 17. Repasser. 18. >Sa5 en rctenir. XXV. VINGT-CINQUIEME IDIOMATICAL EXPRESSIONS. Idioms are modes of speaking peculiar to one language, which cannot be literally translated into another. Avoir, to have. Avoir vingt ans, to Le twenty years old. Avoir mal aux yeux, to have sore eyes. Avoir mal a la tete, to have a (or the) headache. J'ai froid aux mains, my hands arc cold. Vous avez beau parler, it is in vain for you to talk. J'ai de la peine a le croire, I can hardly believe it. Avoir froid, to he cold, cliaud, to be warm. Avoir honte, to be ashamed. Avoir raison, tort, to be right, in the wrong. Avoir bonne mine, to look well. N' avoir que faire de, to have no occasion for. Avoir grand soif, faim, to be very thirsty, hungry. Avoir quelque chose, to have something the matter with one. Avoir peur, to be afraid. Avoir sommeil, to be sleepy. Avoir soin, to take care. Avoir besoin, to have need, want. Avoir sujet, to have reason. Avoir regret, to regret. Avoir envie, to desire. IDIOMATIC AL EXPRESSIONS. 381 Avoir coutume, to be accustomed. Avoir lieu, to take place. Avoir beau, to be in vain. L* avoir belle, to have a favorable opportunity to do it. Eire, to be. Etre en &at de, to afford. Eire a son aise, to be in good circumstances. Etre mat avec quelqu'un, to be out of favor with some one. Etre de mottle*, to go halves. Etre a 'la portee, to be within reach. Etre sur le point de, to be very near to, to be going to. II en est de . . . , it is with, it is the case. Etre riche dc, to be worth, to possess. When a person is the subject^ valoir is never used in this sense. II est riche de douze mille piastres, he is worth twelve thousand dollars. Etre en retard, to be late. Eire a mcme de, to be able to. Etre en peine de, to be uneasy about. Etre en vie,to be alive. Etre en chemin pour, to be on the way to. Etre au fait, an courant de, to be familiar with, Etre a la veille de, on the eve of. Etre de trop, to be in the way. Etre lien avec, to be on good terms with. Etre brouille' avec, on bad terms with. Etre aux prises avec, to be in open rupture, quarrel or battle with, Etre d'avis, to be of opinion. Y etre, ro be at home. Etre d' accord, to be in tune. Ce piano n'est pas d 'accord, this piano is not in tune. Nous sommes d'accord, we agree. Vous n'y etes pas, that is not it. Faire, to do, to make. Faire savoir qn., tC let one know, to send word. Faire chaud, faire froid, to be warm, cold (of the weather). Se faire des amis, to get friends. Faire faire, to get made. Faire semblant de, to pretend. 382 XXV. VINGT-CINQUIEMB Faire attention, to pay attention. Faire cas de, to value, to esteem. Faire un tour de promenade, to take a walk. Faue voile or mettre a la voile, to set sail. Faire de son mieux, to do one's best. Ne faire que, to do nothing but. C'en est fait de moi, I am undone, it is over with me. Vous feriez mieux de rester, you had better stay. Faites-moi grace de tons ces details, spare me particulars. Faire raccommoder, to have mended. Faire la cuisine, to cook. Faire tort a, to injure. Faire bouillir, to boil. THEME 69. 1. How old was your father when he died ? 2. He was seventy, 3. And your mother? 4. She was almost 1 eighty. 5. I do not remember to have ever been so 2 thirsty as I was yesterday. 6. Warm yourself, if you are cold ; my feet are not cold, because I have walked much, but my hands are so cold, that I cannot write. 7. There are some walks 3 in our park which are three hundred feet long. 8. You are in the wrong, and he is in the right. 9. It is in vain for you to ask money from a miser, he will never give you any. 10. Is it cold this morning? 11. Yes sir, it is very cold; however, I do not think it is quite so cold as it was yesterday. 12. The weather is very inconstant; it was hot yesterday, it is cold to-day ; it rained this morning ; it is fine weather now, btt perhaps it will rain again before (it be 4 ) night. 1. Pres de.. 2. SI. 3. Allee, f. 4. Faire (Subj.). Donner, to give. Donncr dans le pifye, to be caught in the snare. Donner sur le jardin, to look out on the garden. Donner carte blanche, to give full powers. Donner sur I'ennemi, to fall upon the enemy. Ne savoir ou donner de la tcte, to know not what way to turn. Ce vin donne a la tele, that wine flies up to the head. IDIOMATICAL EXPRESSIONS. 383 Donner un coup de main, to help. .Donner a pleines mains t to give largely. Se donner des airs, to take a, great deal on one's self. Se donner la peine, to take tlie trouble. Jouer, to play, etc. Jouer d'un instrument, to play (upon) an instrument, Joueraquelquejeu, to play at some game. Jouer une piece de theatre, to act a play. Jouer un tour a qn., to serve (play) one a trick. Se porter, to be (in reference to health). 77 se porte bien, he is well. Aimer mieux, to have rather, to choose rather. Aller a bride abattue, to go at full speed. Dormir la grasse matine'e, to sleep very late. Prendre en mauvaise part, to take amiss. S'y bien prendre, to go the right way to work. S'y prendre mal, to go the wrong way to work. Se passer de, to do without. Trouver mauvais que, to take ill if. Trouver son maitre, to meet with one's match. Trouver a redire, to find fault with. Savoir bon gr t to be thankful for. Tenir parole, to keep our word. Ne tenir qu'a, to be in a person's power. H ne tient pas a moi que,'it is not my fault. S'en tenir a, to stand to. Faire tenir, to forward. Venir a bout de, to bring about, to accomplish. En vouloir a, to have a spite against, to be vexed with. Je voudrais pouvoir, I wish I could. // y va de votre vie, your life is at stake. Venir de, to have just done something. En venir aux mains, to come to blows. THEME 70. 1. How do you do this morning? 2. I am very well, I thank you. 3. And how does your sister do? 4. She is not well ; she has been ill for these two months, and I fear she will never be well again, 5. And your brothers, how are they ? 6. The youngest is 384 XXV. VINGT-CINQUIEME LE^ON. very well, but I do not know how tlie eldest does, because we have not heard 1 of him for 2 these two months ; he was very well when he wrote to us last. 8 7. It is with the diseases of the heart as with those of the body, some are real, 4 and some imaginary. 8. It is with men of learning as with ears 5 of corn; they raise their 6 heads while they are empty, and when they are full, they begin to droop. 7 9. It is with your son as with other children. 10. I do not think it will be with my son as it was with yours. 1. Avoir de ses nouvelles. 2. For these depuis. 3. La demiire foi9. 4. J?&L 5. Epis de lit. 6. Def. Art. 7. Pencher. THEME 71. 1. I have great pain 1 in my side. 2. He has sore eyes. 3. He has a sore foot. 4. My lips are sore. 5. She had the toothache yesterday, now she has a headache ; to-morrow, perhaps, she will have the ear 2 -ache. 6. When I was young, I often had the head- ache. 7. Why do you not eat, if you are hungry? 8. I am not very hungry, I can wait [till] dinner time, 3 but I am very thirsty, and I will thank 4 you for 5 a glass of wine. 9. It is very cold to-day. 10. It was cold yesterday. 11. It will be hot soon. 12. I am thirsty. 13. He is hungry. 14. My sister is not well, she has not been 6 well for three weeks, she has a headache to-day. 15. At what o'clock did you rise this morning? 16. I rose at four o'clock. 17. It is in vain for you to say so, I do not believe you. 1. Eien mat. 2. Oreille. 3 Le diner. 4. Prter. 5. De me donner. 6. Se pyr- ter, use the Present tense, ENGLISH VOCABULARY OE THE WOKDS THAT OCCUR IN THE THEMES. A. Able (to be), pouvoir, irr. see p. 190. About, environ, see also p. 301. Absolve, v. a., absoudre, irr. see p. 175. Abstain, s'abstenir, irr. see p. 187. Abundance, abondance, f. Abuse, dire des injures, maltraiter. Accept, agreer, accepter. Accompany, accompagner. Account, compte, m. Acquaintance, connaissance, f. Acquire, acquerir, irr. see p. 187. Act, agir. Action, action, f. .Admirable, admirable* Admiral, amiral, m. Admit, admettre, irr. see p. 180. Advantage, wantage, m. Affair, ajfiiire, f. Afraid (to be), avoir peur. After, apres. Aftcrnoon,~apres-midi t m. f. Again, encore. Against, contre. Age, age, in, [old age, vieillesse, f.J Agree, ccnvenir, irr. see p. 187. Agreeable, agreable. Agriculture, 'agriculture, f. Alike, par ell. All, tout ; all that, tout ce qui, see p. 127. Alley, allee. Allow, per?nettre,\rT. see p. 180. Almost, presque. Already, deja Also, aussi. Always, toujours. Ambitious, ambitieux, Amiable, aimable. Among, parmi. Amuse, amuser, entretenir. Ancestors, ancetres. aieux. And, et. Anger, colere. Angry, f ache. Angry (to be), se fdcher. Animal, animal. 25 Anoint, oindre, irr. see p. 175. Answer, v., repondre. Answer, n., reponse, f. Any (with neg.), aucun,pas de. Anybody (after neg.), personne, Any more (after neg.), plus. Appear, paraitre, irr. see p. 178. Appetite, appetit, m. Apple, pomme, f. Apply to/y'orfresaer. Approach, approcher,. April, avril, m. Arm, bras, m. Army, armee, f. Art, art, m. Artist, artiste. As, comme; (so) as as, aussi que. Ashamed, Uontciix. Ashes, cendre, f. Ask, demander. Assiduity, assiduite*. Assist, assister, secourir, irr. see p. 184. Assistance, secours, m. Astonishing, etonnant. At, a, en ; see p. 302 : at home, a la mai- son ; at your house, chez vous ; at first, d'abord; at once, tout (Pun coup; at all, dutout. Attack, attaquer. Attain, atteindre, irr. see p< 175; parve- nir, irr. see p. 187. Attention, attention, f. Attentive, attentif. Attract, attirer. August, aout, m. Aunt, tante, f. Author, auteur? Avarice, avarice, f. Avaricious, avaricieux. Avoid, eviter. Avow, avoucr. B. Bad, mauvais. BaU, balle, f., bal, m. 885 386 VOCABULARY Bark, dboyer. Barley, orge, f. Battle, bataille. f. Beard, barbe, f. Beat, battre, see p. 107, f rapper. Beautiful, beau. Because, parce que. Become, devenir, irr. see p. 187. r>< d (to ;. r o to), se coucher. Bee, abeille, f. ,Beer, biere, f. Before, avant, (levant, see p. 298. Beg, prier, mendier, for a thing, de- mender, solliciter. "Beg-in, commencer, se mettre a, see p. 180. Behind, derriere. Believe, croire, irr, see p. 177. Belong, appartenir, irr. seep. 187. Better, meitteur, superieur. Better, adv., mieux, to be better, valoir mieux. Between, ent re. Beyond, au-dessus, au dela; dela, outre. Big, grand, gros. Bite, mordre. Bird, oiseau, m. Bitter, amer. Black, noir. Blame, bldmer. Blood, sang, m. Blush, rougir. Boarding-house, pension, f. Body, corps, m. Everybody, chacun, tout le monde. Nobody, personne. Boil, bouilltr, irr. see p. 180. Bonnet, chapeau, m. Book, livre, m. Boot, botte, f. Born (to be), naitre, irr. see p. 181. Boy, qarqon, m. Box, boite, cassette, f. Bottle, bouteitte t f. Brave, brave, courageux. Bray, braire, def., see p. 197. Bread, pain. Break, rompre, see p. 107, casser, writer. Breakfast, dejeuner. Bring, apporter. Brother, frere, in law, beau-frere. Build, bdtir, consiruire, irr. see p. 172. Burn, bruler. Business, affaires^ occupation, f. But, mais. Butter, beurre, m. Buy, acheter. Uy, par, see p. 302. c. Cabbage, chou t m. Calf, veau, m. Call, appeter, to mind, Caine*!, chameau, ni. Can, see p. 190-1. Candle, chandeUe } f. Cans, canne, f. Cap, casquette, f. Carnival, carnaval,Ta, Care, soin, ra. Carriage, voiture, f. Carry, porter. Cast, jeter. Castle, chateau. Cat, chat. m. Cattle, betail, m., pi. bcs Cease, cesser. Celebrated, celebre. Chair, cliaise, f. Chamber, chambre, f. Chase, chasse, f. Chastise, cMtier. Cheese, froniage, m. Cherry, cerise, f. Child, enfant, m. f. Choose, choisir. Church, eglise. f. , Class, classe, f. Clean, net. Clean, v.,nettoi/er. Cloak, manteau, m. Cloth, drop, m. Clothe, vetir, irr. see p. 183. Cloud, nuage, m. Coach, carrosse, m, Coast, cote, f, Coat, habit, m. Coffee, cafe, m. Cold,frdid. Color, couleur, f. Come, venir, irr. see p. 187, arriver, down, descendre, in, entrer, in again, rentrer. Comfort, v., consoler. Comfort, n., agrement, m. Command, ordre, m. Command, v., commander, ordonner. Commence, commencer. Commerce, commerce, m. Complain, se plaindre, irr. see p. 175. Compel^ contraindre, irr. see p. 175. Comrade, camarade. m. Conceal, cacher, taire, irr. see p. 178. Conceive, conctvoir, irr. see p. 189. Conduct, n., conduite. Conduct, v., conduire, irr. see p. 172. Confess, avouer. Confidence, conjlance, f. Conflagration, incendie, m. Conquer, vaincre, irr. see p. 174; COTZ- querir, irr. see p. 188. Conqueror, vainqueur, m. Consent, cojisenttr, irr. see p. 181. Consequence, suite, f. Consider, considerer. Constrain, contraindre, irr. see p. 175. Construct, construire, irr. see p. 172. Contain, renfermer, contenir, irr. see D. 187. Contented, content. Continue, continuer. Convince^ convaincre, Irr. see p. 174. Cook, cuire, irr. see p. 172. VOCABULARY. S87 Cool, frais, fern, fraiche. Copy-book, cahier, m. Corn, ble, m., market, halle aux bUs. Correct, corriger. Co?fc, corner. CouulRy, pays, m., campagne, f. Courage, courage, m. ^Course, cours, m. Ccuin, cousin, m., cousine, f. ('over, courrir, irr. see p. J85. Cow, vacfte, f. Creator, createur, m. Creditor, creancier, in. Crime, crime, m. Cry, crier, pleurer. Cup, coupe, tasse, f. Currant, groseiUe, f. Custom, coutume, f. Cut, couper, tailler. D, Damp, humide. Danger, danger, m. Dark, sombre. Daughter, >Kfe, f. Dawn, v., poindre, irr. see p. 175. Di\y,jour, m. journcc, f. day-light, Jour. Deaf", sourd. Dear, c/*er. Doath, mortj f. Debt, dette,f. Deceive, tromper, decevoir, irr. see p. December, ddcembre, m. Decision, decision, f. Deer, chevreuil, cerf, m. Defect, defaut, m. Defend, defendre. Delight, seplaire a, irr. seep. 178. Demolish, -demolir. Deny, ?iier, disconvenir, irr. see p. 187* Depart, partir, irr. p. 183. Departure, depart, m. Depend, dependre. upon or on, ccww- fer swr. Depict, depeindre, irr. see p. 175. Describe, dccrire, irr. see p. 170. Deserve, meriter. Desire, desir, m. Despise, mepriser. Destroy, detruire, irr. see p. 172. Die, mourtr, irr. see p. 180. Difficult, difficile. Difficulty, difficult^ f. Diligent, applique:. Dine, v., diner. Dinner,' n., diner, m. Direct (a letter), adresser. Directly, ow tfe suite, a V instant. Direction, adresse. f. Disappear, dispuraltre, irr. see p. 178. Discontented, mccontent. Discover, decouvrir, irr. see p. 185. inventor. Disease, maladlc, f. Displease, deptaire, irr. see p. 178. Dissatisfy, mtcontcnter. Dissolve, dissoudre, irr. sec p. 175u Distinguish, distinguer. Distress, amiger. Divide, dlviser, partager. Do,faire, irr. see p. 160. Dog, cliien, m. Door, porte, f. door-way, portail. Doubt, douter. Doubtful, douteux. Draw, tirer, attirer, after, entrainef (pictures), dessiner upon one's self yattirer. Dream, songer, rever. Dress, habillcr, purer, vetir. Drink, boire, irr. see p. 177. Drop,'goutte, f. Drunk and drunken, ivre. Dry, sec. Duck, canard, m. Dumb, muet. During, pendant. Dust, poussiere, f. Duty, devoir, m. Dwell, demeurer, liabiter. Dye, teindre, irr. see p. 175. E- Ear, oreille, f. Early, de bonne heure. Earth, terre, f/ Easily, facilement. Easy, aise, facile. Eat, manger. Edftion, edition, impression, f . Educate, elever. Education, education, f. Effort, effort, m. Egg, ceiif, m. Elect, etire. irr. see p. 177. Elephant, elephant, m. Ell (measure), aune, f. Elm (tree), orme, m. Eloquently, eloquemment. Embarrass, embarrasser, d^r anger. Embellish, embellir. Employ, employer. End, ii., bout, m. (object) fin, f. bul, m. End, \.,finir, cesser. Enemy, ennemi, m. Engine (steam), machine a vapeur. Enough, assez. Enrich, enrichir. Enter, entrer. Entertain, entretcnir, amuscr, Entertaining,- amusant. Envy, enme, f. Equal, egal, pareil. Equality, egalite, f. Error, faute, erreur, f. Escape, echapper, se sauver. see p. 105. fair, irr. gee p. 183. Esteem, estimer. Evening, soir, m. soiree, f. SS3 VOCABULARY. tenement, m. er, jamais. Everybody', chacun, tout le monde, thing, tout, wiiere ,partout. E\ il, nial, m. Example, exempte, m. Execute, execitter, s'aqutitcr de. Exercise, exercice, theme, m. Exhaust, epuiser. Exi^t, exixter. Exy>ect, attendre, s'attendre a. Extinct, eteint. To beconm s j etcindre. Extinguish, eteindre,irr. see p. 175. Extract, extraire, irr. see p. 174. Extreme, extreme. Eye, csil ; pi. yeux, m. F. Fable, fable, m. face, ./hce, f. visage, m. figure* f. I ail,/ai//ir, def. see p. 197, manquer. Faint, dCfaWir, def. see p. 197. Faithful, ./fr&te. Fall, tomber, choir, dechoir, def. see p. 189. Fall, cfcwte, f. False, faux. Falsehood, mensonge, m. Family, fa mi lie, f. Fan, evant/iil, m. Far, ?om, from far, , tfenfuir, irr. see p. 183, rofer. Fog, brouillard, m. Follow, suivre, irr. seep. 174. Folly, sottise, folie, f. Fool, so, imbecile, fou. Foolishness, sottine, betise. Foot, ;w"ed, m. For, prep. pour. For, conj. car, as , quant a. Forbid, dJfendre, God 1 a Dicu m plaise! Forehead, front, m. Foreign, etrcmger. Foresee, prcvoir, irr. ^e p. 192, pressen- tir, irr. see p. 184. % Forest, foret, f. Forget, oublier. Forgive, pardonner. Fork, fourchette. Formerly, autrefois. Forsake, abandonner. Fortnight, quinze jours. Fortune, fortune, f. Forward, and forwards, en avant, sur U dei-ant. Found, fonder. Freeze, geler. Frequently, souvent. Fresh, frais, fern, fraiche. Friday, vendredi. Friend, ami, m. amie, f. Friendly, amical. Friendsliip, amitie' Fruit, fruit, m. Full, piein. Fulfil, remplir, satififaire. Furniture, meubles, pi. m. G- Gain, gagner, (a victory) rempoj*- ter+ (affection, hatred) attirer. Game, jeu, (chase) gibier. Gape, Miller. Garden, jardin, m. Gardener, jardinier t m. Gate, porte, f. Gather, cueiUir, rccueilUr, irr. see p. 184. General, general, m. Generous, genereux. Genius, genie, m. Gentleman, gentilhomme. Gentleness, douceur, f. Get up, se lever. Gift, don, m. Girlie, f. Give, donner. Glad, aise, content. Gladly, volontiers, avecplaisir. Glass, verre, m. Glitter, rehiire, irr. see p. 171. Glory, gloire, f. Glove, gant. m. Go, alter, irr. see p. 194, away (set out), s>en alter, partir, irr. see p. 183, VOCABULARY. far from, s'eloigner de, for, aller chercher, on, continuer, out, sor- tir, irr. see p. 184, out, eteindre, irr, see p. 175. God, Dieu, m. Gold, or, m. Good, n., le bien. Good, ad., bon, sage. To be for nothings ne valoir rien. Good will, bicnveillance, f. Goodness, bonie, f. Govern, gouverner. Gown, robe, f. Grammar, grammaire, f. Grandfather, grand-pere, aleul. Grandmother, grand'mere. G rant, accorder. Grass, her be, verdure, f. Graze, paltre, irr. see p. 178. Great, grand. Green, vert. Grief, douleur, f, peine, f. Grind, rnoudre, irr. see p. 174. G round, terre. On the a, par tcrre. Grow, croitre, irr. see p. 178, lean, maigrir, old, vieillir. pale, pdlir, red, rougir, tall, grandir, thin, maigrir, worse, empirer. Guilty, coupable. H- Hail, n., greU, f. Hail, v., greler. Half, n., moitie. f. Half, ad., demi. Hand, main* f. Handkerchief, mouchoir, m. Handsome, beau. Happen, arriver, survenir, irr. see p. 187. Happily, heureusement. Happiness, bonheur, m. Happy, heureux. Hard, <7wr, difficile. Hardly at all, ne guere, e\er,presque jarnais. Hare, lievre, m. Harvest, moisson, r dealt e. Haste, and Hasten, hater, se depeclier, s'emprcsscr. Hat, chapeaU) m. To put on one's , mettre son chapeau, se couvrir. To take off one's hat, oter son chapeau, se tlecouvrir. Hate, hair, Bee p. 102. Hatred haine^ f. Hay,/oi, m. Head, tete, f. Heal guerir. Health, santd.f. Hear, entendre, ouir, def. see p. 198. Heart, cmur, m. Heat, 'chtileur, f. Heaven. cieZ, pi. deux, m. Eeavy , towr/i, pesant. Helm, gouvernail, m. Henceforward, desormais, dorenavanf. Here, id, y* Heretofore, autrefois. Hide, caclier. High, haut, elevt. Hill, coiline, f. coteau, m., montagne, f. Hinder, empecher. History, histoire, f. Hit, frapper, atteindre t irr. see p. 175. Hive, ruche, f. Hoist, hisser. Hold, tenir, irr. see p. 187. Hole, /row, m. Holiday, conge, m. Home, cm /o^is, a to maison, chcz soi, see p. 37. Honest, honnete. Honor, honncur, m. Hope, n., ejsp&anct) f., espoir, m. Hope, v r ., espcrcr. Horse, chcval, m. Hot, chaud. Hour, heiire, f. House, maison, f. How, comment, combien, que t long (since when)? depute quandl many (much) combien. However, quelque. Human, humain. Hunger, faim, f. To be hungry, avoir faim. Hunter, chasseur, m. Hunting 1 , chasse, f. Hurt, nuire, irr. see p. 172, Ue8t&r,gtiter. Husband, mari, epoux. I. Ice, glace, f. Idea, idee, f. Idle, paresseux. If, si. Ill, adj., malade. Ill, adv.,mJ. Illness, maladie, f. Image, image, f. Imagine, imaginer. Immortal, immortel. Importune, importuner. Impossible, impossible. In, en, dans, see p. 297, and p. 304. Inch, pouce, m. Increase, accroitre t croitre, Irr. see p. 178, augmenter. Incredible, incroi/abte. Inconstant, inconstant. Incur, s'attirer, encourir, irr. see p. 184k Indeed, vraiment. Infamous, in fame. Infringe, enfreindre, irr. see p. 175. Inhabit, habiter^ demeurer Inhabitant, habitant, m. [i\jure, nuire, irr. see p. 172. Ink, encre, f. Inkstand, cncrier, m. 390 VOCABULARY. Inquire, s'enqulrir, irr. see p. 188. Inquisitive, curieux. Inscribe, inscrire, irr. see p. 17fi. Instruct, instruire, irr. see p. 172. Interrupt, interrompre. Into, dans, see p. 297. Introduce, presenter, introduire, irr. see p. 172. Invent, inventer. Invite, inviter. Iion,/er, m. 3 laud, He, f. Ivory, ivoire, m. January, Janvier, m. Jealous, jaloux. Jealousy, jalousie, f. Jewel, bijou, m. Join, joindre, irr. see p. 175. Joy, joie, f. July, juillet, m. June, juin, in. Just, juste. Justice, justice, f. K- Keep, tenir, irr. see p. 187, (observe) ob- server. Kill, Zwer. Kindness, bontd. King, rot, m. Kingdom, royaume, m. Kitchen, cuisine, f. Knee, genou, m. Knife, couteau, m. Know, connaitre, irr. see p. 178, savoir, irr. see p. 191. Knowledge, science, f., savoir, m., ccw- naissance, f. L. Laboi, n., travail, m., pi. aw#. Labor, v., travaiUer. Laborious, labor icux. Laconic, laconique. Lady, dame, f. Lambjtt^nerm, m. I^anguago, langue, f., langage, m. Land, terre, f. Large, #ro?, grand. Last, v ,durer, contimter. Last, adj., dernier, passe. Lasting, durable. Late, adj., /CM, see p. 247. Late, adv., tarrf, e/i retard. Laugh, ?*ire, irr. see pp. 194 and 107. Law, Joz", f. Lawyer, aoocat, m. Lead, n.,p?o??j5, m. Lead, v., mcner, into, induire en, irr. seo p. 172. Leaf, f cut fie, f. Lt-ague, lieue, f. Learn, apprendre, irr. see p. 181. Learned, savant. Least, le moindre. At the, da mains. (at all events), au moins,-ii\ the ,' du tout. Leave (of absence), conge, m. Leave, v., quitter, laisser, ccsser. Take offprendre conge de. Left, gauche, f. Leg, jam.be, f. Lend, prttcr. Less, 7noins. Let, laisser, 113 go, allons, him know, faites-lui savoir, (to hire) loner. Letter, lettre, f. Liar, menteur, m. Liberty, libcrtf, f. Lie, ffiisir, def. see p. 108. Lie, inentir. irr. see p. 164. Life, vie, f. Lift up, lever, eUver. Like, pareil, adv., comme. Likely, probable, vraisemblable. Lily, "ifo, m. Limit, limiter, borner, restrcindre, see p. 175. Line, ligne, f. Linen, toile, f. Unbleached, ^oi7e ccrue. Lion, lion, m. Listen, ecouter. Little, adj., petit, adv., pcu, ne guere. Live, vivre, irr. see p 161, (dwell), do menrer, habiier. Loadstone, aimant, m. Lock, serrure, f. Locksmith, scrrurier, m. Long, adj., lonfl, fern, longue, adv., temps, depute lonytemps. Look at, refjarder, for, chcrcher. Looking-glass, miroir, Lose, pcrdre. Loss, perte, f. Love, n., amour, m. Love, v., aimer, dearly, c/idrzr. Low, has. Luxury, luxe, m. M. d,/o?, insenst. Bladam, Madame, Magnificent, mtigniflque. Maintain, tnaiiitenir, irr. see p. 187, nourrir. Make, /f re, irr. see p. ISO, up a quar- rel, muster une querclle, haste, si dtpecnerl Man, homme, m. I Manners, mceurs, f. VOCABULARY. 391 Many, pluslcurs, teaucoiip, lien des. So , taut, tant de, aiitunt. As as, aa- tant (/lie. Too , trop. Mflp, Carte, f. March, //i./rx, m. - M:;IT;. <;:*', tn./.ritf/e, m. Marry, m /. />>-, <-pW purer de. Mutter, w ///(.' ye, ('., ajj'aire, L, chose, f. 5I.iv, //j.v/, in. Meadow, /m>, m., prairie, f. M <;'!, repns, m.,farlne, f. MLV.H, ta Me;m>, 'ittoi/en, m. Bleat, t-irtfw/e, f. Meddle, ,se niilr.r (dc), Mcdioiuo, mSdecine. Meet, reucontrer. %lelt,foudre. Hklcraber. incmbrc, ra. Memory, mtmuire. Mead, raccomHiodeTi a pen, tattler, Mere ,'int, nSyociftnt. Messenger, messager. Metal, Wf'. Ho\v , comhten. As , ^an/, autant. As as, aidant que. Mud, //enfaut guere. Nearly, presque, a peu pres, Neat, propre. Neatly, proprement, joliment. Necessary, nccessaire, to be, fattc ;r, irr. see p. 190. Neglect, n., ncgUgence t f. Neglect, v., ncyUger. Neighbor, voisin, m., voisinc, f. Neither nor, ?i w, Never, ?ie jamais. New, 7?e?(/, now;eau,frais. News, nourelle, f. Next, prochain, suivant. Nice,jo/i. gentil. Niece, niece, f. Night, 7im'. No, now, point. No, ???*/, aucun. Nobility, noblesse, f. Noise, bruit. Noon, razV//, m. Nose, ??e-r, m. Not, non, non pas, nepas, at all, point da tout. Not In irr, ne rien. Notwithstanding, nonobstant, Nourish, nuttrrir. November, novembre, m. Now, maiiitenant, a present. Number, nombre, numdro^ m. Nut, noix, f. O. Oak, chene, m. Oats, avoine, f. Obedient, obdissant. Obey, obcir. Oblige, obliycr, fairc un plaisir, rendre. tin hon ojjicc. Obliging, obUgeant. Observe, obxeruer. Obtiiin, oWewir, irr. see p. 187, rempor- ter, acqui'rir. Occupy, occuper. October, o^tobre, m. Odious, odicux. Of, de. Ollend, ojfcnscr. Olfer, u., offre, f. Oiler, v., oJWr, irr. see p. 184, proposer. Often, souvent. Oil, huile. f 392 VOCABULARY. Old, vieux, (vieil}, age, age, vieiUtssc, f. How are you, qucl dge avez- vous 1 Omit, omettre, irr. see p. 180. On, sur. Once, une fois, on a time, autrefois. At , de suite. All at , tout a coup, tout iVun coup. Only, adj., seul, unique. Only, adv., ne que. Open, ouvrir, irr. see p. 185. Open, adj., ouvert } sincere, franc. Openness, sincente, f. Opportunity, occasion, f. Oppose, s'opposer. Opposite, vis-a-vis , oppose. Or, ou. Orange, orange, f. Order, n., ordre, m. Order, v., prescrire, irr. see p. 176. Other, autre. Otherwise, autrement. Ought. See Owe. Over, sur, au-dessus. To be all mud, etre tout convert de lone. 1 t's all over, c'est fait, or e'en est fait de. . . Overtake, atteindre, irr. see p. 175. Owe, devoir, irr. see p. 189. Owl, Jiibou, m. Own, propre. Owner, proprietaire. Ox, bueuf, m. P. Pagan, palen, m. Pain, peine, f. On of death, sows pei-ne de mort. Painful, penible. Paint, peindre, irr. see p. 175. Painter, peintre t m. Painting, tableau, m. Palace, palais, m. Pale, pale. Paper, papier, m. Pardon, pardonner. Parent, pere, mere. Parents, pere et mere. Part, partie, f. To take in, se meler de. Party, partie, m. Pass, passer. Passage, passage, m. Patient, maladc, m. Pay, payer. Peace, paix, f. Peach, peche, f. Pear, poire, f. Peasant, paysan, m. Pebble, caillou, m. Peculiar, particulier. Fen, plume, f., holder, porte-plume. Pencil, crayon, m., case, porte- crayon. Penknife, canif, m. People. peuple.gena* Perceive, apercevoir, irr. see p. ISO. Perform, faire, s'acquitter de. Perish, j>c'rt>. Permit, permcttre, irr. see p. 180. Persecute, persecuter. Persecutor, persecnteur, m. l*erson, personne, f. Persuade, persuader. Picture, tableau, m. Piece, morceau, m., piece, f. Pierce, percer. Tig, cockon, m. Pin, epingle. Pitiless, impitoyalle. J'ity, u., pitie, f. It is a , c'cst dom- mage. Pity, v., plaindre, irr. see p. 175. Place, n., lieu, m., place, f. Place, v., placer, mettre, irr. see p. ISO. IMain, plaine, campagne, f. Plan, plan, projet, m. IMank, planche, f. Plant, plante, f. Plate, assiette, f. riay, n., jeu, m., comter, tfappuyer. Remain, r ester, demeurcr. Remedy, remede, m. Remember, se souvenir, irr. &ee p, 187, &<* rappeler, me to him, rappetez-moi & son souvenir. Rend, dechircr. Render, rcndre. Renounce, renoncer &. Repair, reparer. Repeat, rtpeter, redire, irr, see p. 172. Repent, se repentir, irr. see p. 134. Report, n., bruit, m. Report, v., rapporter, raconter, Repose, v., se reposer. Represent, rej)rcsenter. Reproach, v., reprocher, bldmer. Reproduce, reproduire, irr. see p. 172. Require, demamler. Resemble, ressembler. Reside, demeurer. Resolution,/erme^, f. Resolve, rc'soudre, irr. see p. 175. Rest, n., repos. Rest, v., reposer, s'appuyer. Restless, inquict. Restrain, restrcindre, irr. see p. 175. Return, retourner, revenir. Reveal, reveler. Revenge, vengeance, f. Reward, n., recompense, f. Reward, v., rccon^enser. Ribbon, ruban, m. Rice, riz, m. Rich, riche. Riches, richesse, f., biens, m., pi. Ridiculous, ridicule. Riprht, litre, m., raison, f. You arc in tiie , vous avez raison, Ring, sonner. Ripen, murir. Kis j , se lever. Usk, hazardcr. liver, Jleuve, m., riviere, f. {oad, chemin, in., route, f. lob, roter. lobber, roleur, m. loot', toil, rn. Room, cliambre, f. Rose, rose, f. Kotten, pourri. Hound, adv., autour. Ruler, regie, f. Run, courir, irr. see p. 184, away, s'enfuir, irr. see p. 183, to, acconrir } over, parcourir, aground, edhouer. 394 VOCABULARY. S. Sacred, sacre. Sad, fnche.ux, triste. Sadness, tristesse, f. Snge, n , saye, in. Salt, sel, m. Same, im'me. Satin, satin, m. Satisfy, sati*f(tire, irr. see p. ISO. Saturday, samcdi, m. Savage, sauvaye. Sr.ucer, soucoiipe, f. Save, Sfiwer. Say, dire, irr. seep. 172. Scarce, scarcely, ujjcine. Scholar, ccottcr, m., eVere, in. School, doofe, f. Scold, grander. Scratch out, rayer. Seal, cachet er. Season, saison, f Seduce, sddmre, irr. see p. 172. See, roiV, irr. see p. lltt. Seek, chercher. Seem, paraitre, irr. see p. 178, scmbler. Seize, saisir. Seldom, rarement. Sell', me me. Sell, vend re. Send, envoy er, irr. see p. 194, away, renroycr, congedier, for, envoger, chercher. Sense, sens, m. Sentiment, sentiment. September, septembre. Se r v ant, .. Thunder, n , tonnerre, m. storm', o- Thunder, v., tonner. Thursday, jeudi, m. Thus, ainsi. Tiger, tigre, m. Till, jusqu'a, Time, temps, m., fois, f., see p. 160. Timid, tiinide. Tired, las, fatigue. To, a. To-day, aujourd'hui. To-mor row, demain. The day after to-mor- row, apres-demain. Too, trop, much, many, trop. Tooth, dent, f. Toward and Towards, vers, sur, cnvers. Towel, essuie-mains, m. Tower, tour, f. Town, ville, f. Tradesman, marchand. Tragedy, tragedie, f. Transgress, enfreindre, irr. see p. 175. Translate, tradmre, irr. see p. 170, trans- feror. Translation, traduction, version, f. Travel, voyager. Traveller, voyageur, m. Treasure, tresor, m. Treat, trailer, ill, maltraiter. Treatment, traitement. * Treaty, traite, m. Tree, arbre. m. Tremble, trembler, tressaillir, irr. see p, 185. Trouble, n., peine, f. Trouble, v., troubler, inquieter. True, vrai, veritable. Trust, avoir confiance, se fler, croirc, ajouter foi, s'en rapporter a. Truth, verlte, f. Try, essatjtr. Tuesday, mardi, m. Tutor, precepteur, tuteur, m, Tyrant, tyran, m. u. Ugly, laid, vilain. Umbrella, parapluie, m. Unbleached, ecru. Uncle, oncle, m. Understand, comprendre, irr. see p. Ifil, entendre. Undertake, entrcprendre, irr. see p. 181. Undo, defaire, irr. see p. 180, penlrc- 'miner. Unfortunate, maihcurcux. Ungrateful, ingrat. Unhappy, malheureux. Unheard of, inoui. Unknown, inconnu. Unless, a moins que, de. Unsettled, irresolu, incertafo, incon- stant. Unstitch, decoudre* 396 VOCABULARY. Upon, sur. Uprightness, probitd, f. Use, n., usage, m. To make of any- thing, se servir de. Use, employer, Useful, at He. Usually, ordinairement. V. Vainly (in vain), en vain. Valley, vatlee, f. Valor, valeur, f., bravoure, f., courage, m. Variety, rarietd. Velvet, velours, m. Verb, verbe, m. Verse, vers, m. Very, ires, fort, Hen. Vessel, vaisseau, m. Vice, vice, m. Victory, victoire, f. Village, village, m. Vinegar, vinaiyre, m. Violate, eitfreindre, irr. see p. 176. Violet, violette, f. Virtue, vertn, f. Virtuous, vertueux. Visit, viftfe, f. Voice, voix, f. Volume, volume, tome, in. Vow, n., t/ecw, m. Vow, v., vouer. Voyage, n., voyage, m. Voyage, v., voyager. w. Wait, attendre. Walk, marcher, se promener. Wall, mur, m. Walnut, uoix, f. Want, 11., nifinquc, f., faute, f, Want, v., vouloir, avoir em-is, i War, guerre, f. Warm", chaud. Watch, montre, f. Water, e<:/?^, f. Wegk./aWe. Weariness, ennui, m. Wearisome, emmyeu-x. Weary, adj., /a^s, fatigue. Weary, v., enniiyer. Weatlier, temps, m. % Wednesday, mercredi, ixx. Week, semaiiw, f. Weep, pleurcr. Well, 5tcn. To be well (in health), s< porter bien. What, que, quoi, quel. Wheat, froment, bit, m. When, quand t lorsque. Where, oil. Whip, fouet, m. White, blanc. Who, qui, lequel etc. Whole, tout. Whose, de qui, dont, see p. 120. Why, pourquoi. Wicked, mtchant. Wife, femme. Willing, pret. To be , vouloir, iir. see p. 191. Willingly, volontiers. Win, gagner. Wind, vent, m Wind up a watch, remonter une montre. Window, f entire, croisce, f. Wine, vin, m. AVinter, hiver, m. AVipe, essuyer. Wisdom, sagesse. ^Visc, sage, savant. Wish, souhaiter,ddsirer, vouloir > irr. see p. 191. I should , je voudrais. With, avec. Without, sans. Witness, tembin, m. Wonderful, admirable, merveilleux. Wood, bois, m. Wool, laine, f. Word, mot, m., parole, f. To keep one's , tenir sa parole. Work, n., travail, ouvrage, m. Work, v.-travailler. World, monde, m. Worse, adj., pire. Worse, adv., pis. Worth, digne. To be , valoir, irr. see p. 11)1. Wound, n.,plaie, blessure. Wound, v., blesser. Wretched, malkeureux, miserable. Write, i-crire, irr. see p. 175. Writing, n., ecriture, f. Wrong, tort, in. To be in the , avoir tort. Y. Year, an, m., annee, f. Yes, oui. Yesterday, hier. Yet. entire \ lela, txaer. Young, jeunc. Youth, jeunessSj f. TESTIMONIALS. NEW YORK, February, l?e I have usel tj Otto's French Grammar" since its publication, and consider jt the best book on the subject. It is based on the most modern grammars published in Paris ; it is thorough, and full 6i idiomatical expressions that can be found in no other work. LUCIEN OUDIX, A.M. Instructor of the French Language, N. Y. Free Academy. I have used " Otto's German Grammar." I consider it a very good book ; its abundant vocabularies, and its fulness in idioms, are especially useful. The appendix, also, is very valuable, con- taining, as it does, some of the most popular and characteristic German poems, which may be tunied to many uses. F,J. 1, 1865 ADOLPII WERXER, Professor of German, New-\'nrk Free Academy. WASHINGTON UNIVERSITY ST. Louis, JAN. 2, 1805. It gives me great pleasure to inform you that I have introduced your edition of "Otto's German Grammar" in my classes in this University, and that I regard it as the very best German grammar, for school purposes, that has thus far come to my notice. Your German editions of the "Irnmensee," " Vergiss- memnicLt," and " Irrlichter," are great favorites among my pupils ; vid your " College Series of Modern French Plays," edited bf Mr. Ferdinand Bocher of Harvard College, I regard as very usefu tr the recitation-room, and for private reading. Yours very truly, B. L. TAFEL, Ph. D, ?rof&*ar of Modern i^n-fKOges and Comparativt Philology in WcuMmgta* Eian SCHOOL, BOSTON, March 31, 18 66 After a six months' trial, we conclude that Otto'i Grammar, revised by Bocher, i$ superior in all respect* to any other of which we have knowledge. E.* HUNT, WILLIAM NICHOLS, Jr., ROBERT EDWARD BABSON, THOMAS SHERWIN, Jr., * Teachers in English UlgJi School. I fully and emphatically indorse the above opinion respecting tto's Frenc4r Grammar. JOHN D. PHILBRICK, Superintendent of Public Schools. STATE NORMAL SCHOOL, SALEM, Mass, April 3, 1866. Wo are using in our school several of your jublieations with much satisfaction. This is especially the case with Otto's French Grammar. As a class text-book, this grammar is, in my opinion, the best in the market. For the excellence of your school-books, both as to matter and typographical beauty, you richly merit the gratitude of teachers and pupils. D. B. IIAGAR. CAMBRIDGE, April 6, 18C6. DEAR SIR, Otto's French Grammar, revised by Bocher, which we have been trying with a class in our "shorter course of study," has been adopted for all our French classes, in place of Fasquelle'a book. We can heartily indorse the testimonial from the teachen la the Boston High School. W' J.. ROLFE, Mister cf Cambridge JJigh Sckod Standard EducMLauaC Works. L. PYLODETS FRENCH SERIES. Beginning French. ifono. Boards I g| Beginner's French Reader. A Companion to "Beginning French." With Illustrations. 16mo. Bds 60 Beginner's Second French Reader 1.25 Couttes de Rosee. Petit Tresor poStique des Jeuncs Per- ionnes. 18mo 75 . a Litterature Francaise Classique. I2mo 1.73 la Litterature Fransaise Contemporaine. I2mo 1.50 Mere L'Oie. Poesies, Chansons et Rondos Eufautines. Avcc .Illustrations. 8vo. Fancy Boards 60 Riodu. Lucie. French and English Conversations. 12mo.... 75 Sadler. Translating English into French. With Notes and Vocabulary. 12mo 1.25 Smith & Nugent's French-English Dictionary. 18mo.. 1.50 St. Pierre. Paul et Virginie, et La Chaumiere Indienne. 18mo. Boards : 50 UrbinO Series ( f or Translating English into French). IGmo 60 Witcomb and Bellenger's Guide to French Conversa- tion. 18mo 75 GERMAN. Tke prices are'for paper ewers, unless otherwise expressed. Andersen. Bilderbuch ohne Bilder. With Nets*, lima. 60 Die Eisjungfrau. With Notee. I2mo. 60 Carove. Das Maerchen ohne Ende *5 Evans. Abriss der Deutshen Literaturgeschichte. I2mo. ' Cloth 1.50 Eichendorff. Aus dem Leben eines Taugenichts. I2mo. 75 Elz. Er ist nicht eiferstichtig ; Benedix, Der Weiber- feind ; Miiller, Im Wartesalon Erster classe. (Three comedies, each in one act.) 60 Pollen's German Reader. I2mo. Cloth 1.50 Fouque. Undine. With Vocab. 12mo 50 Freiligrath's Neuere*Gedichte 75 German Ballad Book. By Prof. L. Simonson. With Notes. 16mb. Cloth 1.50 Soethe. Egmont. With Notes 50 .Faust. With Notes. 12mo 75 Iphigenie auf Tauris. \\;ith Notes. I2mo 40 Herrman and Dorothea. With Notes. I2mo 40 Grjirm. Venus von Milo. linphacl and Michael Angdo. 12iuo. 71 Standard Educational Works. Heyse. Anfang und Ende. I2mo $ 4C Die Einsamen. I2mo id James. German-English Dictionary. 8vo. Half roan 2.0C Jensen. Die Braune Erika. With Notes. I2mo 40 Keetels* Oral Method with German. 12mo. Half roan, l 75 Kosrner. Zriny- withNotea 60 Krauss 1 Introductory German Grammar. I2mo. Cloth.,. 100 Lessing. Minna von Barnhelm. With Notes. I2mo. 50 The Same, in English, with German Notes. 12mo fifl * Emilia CalottLx 12mo * Lodeman's German Conversation Tables. Boards... 40 Mugge. Riukan Voss. I2mo % 40 Signa die Seterin. I2mo 40 Nathusius. Tagebuch eines Armen Fraeuleins. I2mo.... 75 Otto's German Conversation Grammar. 12"K>. Roan... 1.75 Evans' German Reader. With Notes and Voeab. By Prof. E. P. Evans*. 12mo. Koaii 1.50 Key to Otto's German Grammar. Paper 75 Beginning German. With additional Heading Matter. ByL. Pylodet. 16nio. Clo 1.00 Prinzessin Use. With Notes. 12mo 50 PutlitZ. Was SichDer Wald Erzahelt. 12mo BO Badekuren. With Notes. I2mo 50 Das Herz Vergessen. With Notes. I2mo 50 Vergissmeinnicht. With Notes. 12mo 40 Schiiler. Jungfrau von Orleans. With Notes. I2mo 50 Wilhelm Tell. With Notes. I2mo CO Wallenstein's Lager. " I2ino... *.... 50 Die Piccolomini. " I2mo 50 Wallenstein's Tod. " I2mo 50 Wallenstein. I2mo. Cloth 1.50 Maria Stuart. With Notes. I2mo 60 Sprechen Sie Deutsch ? or, Do You Speak German? ]8mo. Boards 60 Storme. Easy German Reading. iGmo. Cloth 100 Storme. Immensee. With Notes. I2mo 40 Tieck. Die Elfen. Das RothkaJppchen. With Notes, ismo. 60 Wessely, English-German Dictionary. I6mo. Cloth.... 1.0C Whitney, Prof. W. D. German Grammar. With Exer- cises. 12mo. Roan 1.71 German Reader. With Notes and Vocab. I2mo. Roan. 2.00 Wilhelmi Einer mussheirathen, and Benedix, Eigensinn. I2mo 43 Witcomb and Otto's Guide to German Conversation- Edited by L. Pylodet. ISmo Cloth 73 I, Standard Educational Works. ITALIAN- Cuore's Italian Grammar. I2mo. Roan $1.75 Key to above. Paper '. 75 DalP, Ongaro. La Rosa Del!' Alpi. With Noies. I2jao. tt.per. 75 James and Grassi, Italian-English Dictionary. 8vo. Hf. roan 2.00 Nota, Alberto. La Fiera. With Notes. I2mo. Paper 75 Parlate Italmo ? or, Do You Speak Italian ? 16mo. IMa. Cfi Pellico. Francesca da Rimini. I2mo. Paper.. 13 SPANISH AND PORTUGUESE. Caballero La Familia de Alvareda. I2mo. Paper.... A_ 984592 THE UNIVERSITY OF CALIFORNIA LIBRARY (English Spelling Book. ) 12mo. Boards 60 Yonge 5 Miss. Landmarks of History. 3 vols. 12mo. Cloth. I. Ancient History 1.00 I!, Medieval History 1.25 III. Modern History 1.5C end for a Descriptive Catalogue. HOLT & WILLIAMS, Publishers, 2<; BOIS'D STREET, NEW YORK. H H :;;- ; r:'